MATHEMATICAL
DISCOURSES
AND
DEMONSTRATIONS,
TOVCHING
Two
THE
MECHANICKS
AND
LOCAL MOTION:
BY
Chiefe
Serene
WITH
Centre of Gravity
Of &longs;ome
Engli&longs;hed from the Originall
By THOMAS SALUSBURY, E&longs;q
Printed by WILLIAM LEYBOURN,
MDCLXV.
GALILEUS,
HIS
DIALOGUES
OF
MOTION.
The Fir&longs;t Dialogue.
SALVIATUS, SAGREDUS, and SIMPLICIUS.
SALVIATUS.
The frequent re&longs;ort (Gentlemen) to
your Famous Ar&longs;enal of
teth, in my thinking, to your Speculative
Wits, a large field to Philo&longs;ophate in:
and more particularly, as to that part
which is called the
gard that there all kinds of Engines, and
Machines are continually put in u&longs;e, by a
huge number of Artificers of all &longs;orts;
among&longs;t whom, as well through the ob&longs;ervations of their Prede
ce&longs;&longs;ors, as tho&longs;e, which through their own care they continually
are making, it's probable, that there are &longs;ome very learned, and
bravely di&longs;cours'd Men.
the Ar&longs;enal of
Venice.
for Wits to Philo
&longs;ophate in.
SAGR. Sir, you are not therein mi&longs;taken: and I my &longs;elf, out of
place, and confer with the&longs;e per&longs;ons; which for a certain prehe
minence that they have above the re&longs;t we call ^{*}
di&longs;cour&longs;e hath oft helped me in the inve&longs;tigation of not only won
derful, but ab&longs;truce, and incredible Effects: and indeed I have been
at a lo&longs;&longs;e &longs;ometimes, and de&longs;paired to penetrate how that could
po&longs;&longs;ibly come to pa&longs;&longs;e, which far from all expectation my &longs;en&longs;es
demon&longs;trated to be true; and yet that which not long &longs;ince that
good Old man told us, is a &longs;aying and propo&longs;ition, though com
mon enough, yet in my opinion wholly vain, as are many others,
often in the mouths of unskilful per&longs;ons; introduced by them, as
I &longs;uppo&longs;e, to &longs;hew that they under&longs;tand how to &longs;peak &longs;omething
about that, of which neverthele&longs;&longs;e they are incapable.
Common Artificers
are often fal&longs;e.
SALV.
It may be Sir, you &longs;peak of that la&longs;t propo&longs;ition which
he affirmed, when we de&longs;ired to under&longs;tand, why they made
&longs;o much greater provi&longs;ion of &longs;upporters, and other provi&longs;ions,
and reinforcements about that Galea&longs;&longs;e, which was to be launcht
than is made about le&longs;&longs;er Ve&longs;&longs;els, and he an&longs;wered us, that they did
&longs;o to avoid the peril of breaking its Keel, through the mighty
weight of its va&longs;t bulk, an inconvenience to which le&longs;&longs;er &longs;hips are
not subject.
than others to break
their Keels in
Launching, accor
ding to &longs;ome.
SAGR.
I do intend the &longs;ame, and chiefly that la&longs;t conclu&longs;ion,
which he added to his others, and which I alwaies e&longs;teemed a vain
conceit of the Vulgar, namely, That in the&longs;e and other Machines
we mu&longs;t not argue from the le&longs;&longs;e to the greater, becau&longs;e many
Mechanical Inventions take in little, which hold not in great. But
being that all the Rea&longs;ons of the Mechanicks, have their founda
tions from Geometry; in which I &longs;ee not that greatne&longs;&longs;e and
&longs;malne&longs;&longs;e make Circles, Triangles, Cilinders, Cones, or any other
&longs;olid Figures &longs;ubject to different pa&longs;&longs;ions: when the great Ma
chine is conformed in all its members to the proportions of the
le&longs;&longs;e that is u&longs;eful, and fit for exerci&longs;e to which it is de&longs;igned; I
cannot &longs;ee why it al&longs;o &longs;hould not be exempt from the unlucky,
&longs;ini&longs;ter, and de&longs;tructive accidents that may befall it.
SALV The &longs;aying of the Vulgar is ab&longs;olutely vain, and &longs;o
fal&longs;e, that its contrary may be affirmed with equal truth, &longs;aying,
That many Machines may be made more perfect in great than lit
tle: As for in&longs;tance, a Clock that &longs;hews and &longs;trikes the Houres,
may be made more exact in one certain &longs;ize, than in another le&longs;&longs;e. With better ground is that &longs;ame conclu&longs;ion u&longs;urped by other more
intelligent per&longs;ons, who refer the cau&longs;e of &longs;uch effects in the&longs;e
great Machines different from what is collected from the pure, and
ab&longs;tracted Demon&longs;trations of Geometry, to the imperfection of
the matter, which is &longs;ubject to many alterations, and defects. But here, I know not whether I may without contracting &longs;ome
the defects of the matter (able to blemi&longs;h the perfecte&longs;t Mathe
matical Demon&longs;trations) &longs;uffice to excu&longs;e the di&longs;obedience of
Machines in concrete, to the &longs;ame ab&longs;tracted and Ideal: yet not
with&longs;tanding I will &longs;peak it, affirming, That ab&longs;tracting all imper
fections from the Matter, and &longs;uppo&longs;ing it mo&longs;t perfect, and unal
terable, and from all accidental mutation exempt, yet neverthe
le&longs;&longs;e its only being Material, cau&longs;eth, that the greater Machine,
made of the &longs;ame matter, and with the &longs;ame proportions, as the
le&longs;&longs;er; &longs;hall an&longs;wer in all other conditions to the le&longs;&longs;er in exact
Symetry, except in &longs;trength, and re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t violent inva&longs;i
ons: but the greater it is, &longs;o much in proportion &longs;hall it be wea
ker. And becau&longs;e I &longs;uppo&longs;e the Matter to be unalterable, that is
alwaies the &longs;ame, it is manife&longs;t, that one may produce Demon&longs;tra
tions of it, no le&longs;&longs;e &longs;imply and purely Mathematical, then of eter
nal, and nece&longs;&longs;ary Affections: Therefore,
opinion which you, and, it may be, all the re&longs;t hold, that have &longs;tu
died the Mechanicks; that Machines, and Frames compo&longs;ed of the
&longs;ame Matter, with punctual ob&longs;ervation of the &longs;elf &longs;ame proporti
on between their parts, ought to be equally, or to &longs;ay better, pro
portionally di&longs;po&longs;ed to Re&longs;i&longs;t; and to yield to External injuries
and a&longs;&longs;aults: For if it may be Geometrically demon&longs;trated, that
the greater are alwaies in proportion le&longs;s able to re&longs;i&longs;t, than the
le&longs;&longs;e; &longs;o that in fine there is not only in all Machines & Fabricks
Arti&longs;icial, but Natural al&longs;o, a term nece&longs;&longs;arily a&longs;cribed, beyond
which neither Art, nor Nature may pa&longs;&longs;e; may pa&longs;&longs;e, I &longs;ay, al
waies ob&longs;erving the &longs;ame proportions with the Identity of the
Matter.
may be made more
exact in great than
in little.
Machines, al
though framed In
the &longs;ame proportion
as others of the
&longs;ame Matter that
are le&longs;&longs;er, are le&longs;&longs;e
&longs;trong and able to
re&longs;i&longs;t external Im
petu&longs;s's than the
le&longs;&longs;er.
SAGR.
I already feel my Brains to turn round, and my Mind,
(like a Cloud unwillingly opened by the Lightning,) I perceive
to be &longs;urprized with a tran&longs;cient, and unu&longs;ual Light, which from
affar off twinkleth, and &longs;uddenly a&longs;toni&longs;heth me; and with ab
&longs;truce, &longs;trange, and indige&longs;ted imaginations. And from what hath
been &longs;poken, it &longs;eems to follow, that, it is a thing impo&longs;&longs;ible to
frame two Fabricks of the &longs;ame Matter, alike, and unequal, and
between them&longs;elves in proportion equally able to Re&longs;i&longs;t; and
were it to be done, yet it would be impo&longs;&longs;ible to find two only
Launces of the &longs;ame wood, alike between them&longs;elves in &longs;trength,
and toughne&longs;&longs;e, but unequal in bigne&longs;&longs;e.
fixed in a Wall at
Right-Angles, and
reduced to &longs;uch a
length and thick
ne&longs;&longs;e as that it may
endure, but made a
hairs breadth big
ger, breaketh with
its own weight, is
&longs;ingly one and no
more.
SALV.
So it is Sir; and the better to a&longs;&longs;ure you that we con
cur in opinion, I &longs;ay, that if we take a Launce of wood of &longs;uch a
length and thickne&longs;&longs;e, that being fixed fa&longs;t g.)
Right Angles, that is parallel to the Horizon, it is reduced to the
utmo&longs;t length, that it will hold at, &longs;o that lengthened never
&longs;o-little more, it would break, being over-burthened with its own
that if its length (for example) were Centuple to its thickne&longs;&longs;e,
there cannot be found another Launce of the &longs;ame Matter, that
being in length Centuple to its thickne&longs;&longs;e, &longs;hall be able to &longs;u&longs;tain
it &longs;elf preci&longs;ely, as that did, and no more: for all that are bigger
&longs;hall break, and the le&longs;&longs;er &longs;hall be able, be&longs;ides their own, to &longs;u&longs;tain
&longs;ome additional weight. And this that I &longs;ay of the
ing it &longs;elf,
Con&longs;titution, and thus if one Tran&longs;ome bear or &longs;u&longs;tain the force
often Tran&longs;omes equal to it, &longs;uch another Beam cannot bear the
weight of ten that are equal to it. Now be plea&longs;ed, Sir, and you
&longs;ight they &longs;eem improbable, yet never &longs;o little glanced at, do depo&longs;e
the Vailes which ob&longs;cure them, and make a voluntary &longs;hew of their
&longs;ecrets nakedly, and &longs;imply. Who &longs;ees not, that a Hor&longs;e falling
from a height of three or four yards, will break his bones, but a
Dog falling &longs;o many yards, or a Cat eight or ten, will receive no
hurt; nor likewi&longs;e a Gra&longs;hopper from a Tower, nor an Ant thrown
from the Orbe of the Moon? Little Children e&longs;cape all harm in
their falls, whereas per&longs;ons grown up break either their &longs;hins or
faces. And as le&longs;&longs;er Animals are in proportion more robu&longs;tious,
and &longs;trong than greater, &longs;o the le&longs;&longs;er Plants better &longs;upport them
&longs;elves: and I already believe, that both of you think, that an Oake
two hundred foot high could not &longs;upport its branches &longs;pread like
one of an indifferent &longs;ize; and that Nature could not have made
an Hor&longs;e as big as twenty Hor&longs;es, nor a Giant ten times as tall as a
Man, unle&longs;&longs;e &longs;he did it either miraculou&longs;ly, or el&longs;e by much alte
ring the proportion of the Members, and particularly of the Bones,
enlarging them very much above the Symetry of common Bones. To &longs;uppo&longs;e likewi&longs;e, that in Artificial Machines, the greater and
le&longs;&longs;er are with equal facility made, and pre&longs;erved, is a manife&longs;t Er
rour: and thus for in&longs;tance, &longs;mall Spires, Pillars, and other &longs;olid
figures may be &longs;afely moved, laid along, and reared upright, with
out danger of breaking them; but the very great upon every &longs;ini
&longs;ter accident fall in pieces, and for no other rea&longs;on but their own
weight. And here it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that I relate an accident, worthy
of notice, as are all tho&longs;e events that occur unexpectedly, e&longs;pecial
ly when the means u&longs;ed to prevent an inconvenience, proveth in
fine the mo&longs;t potent cau&longs;e of the di&longs;order. There was a very great
Pillar of Marble laid along, and two Rowlers were put under the
&longs;ame neer to the ends of it; it came into the mind of a certain In
gineer &longs;ome time after, that it would be expedient, the better to
&longs;ecure it from breaking in the mid&longs;t through its own weight, to
put under it in that part yet another Rowler: the coun&longs;el &longs;eemed
generally very &longs;ea&longs;onable, but the &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;e demon&longs;trated it to be
lar crackt, and broke in the middle ju&longs;t upon the new Rowler.
Courting, throweth
off her Vail, and
&longs;hews her Secrets
maked.
receive more harm
by a fall than le&longs;
&longs;er.
have made of mea
ner Hor&longs;es bigger,
and have retained
the &longs;ame &longs;trength,
but by altering
their Symetry.
Pillar broken by
its own weight,
and why.
SIMP.
This was an accident truly &longs;trange, and indeed
&longs;pem,
port in the middle.
SALV.
From that doubtle&longs;s it did proceed; and the known cau&longs;e
of the Effect removeth the wonder: for the two pieces of the Pillar
being taken from off the Rowlers, one of tho&longs;e bearers on which
one end of the Column had re&longs;ted, was by length of time rotten, and
&longs;unk away; and that in the mid&longs;t continuing &longs;ound, and &longs;trong,
occa&longs;ioned that half the Column lay hollow in the air without any
&longs;upport at the end; &longs;o that its own unweildy weight, made it do
that, which it would not have done, if it had re&longs;ted only upon the
two fir&longs;t Bearers, for as they had &longs;hrunk away it would have fol
lowed. And here none can think that this would have faln out in
a little Column, though of the &longs;ame &longs;tone, and of a length an&longs;we
rable to its thickne&longs;&longs;e, in the very &longs;ame proportion as the thick
ne&longs;s, and length of the great Pillar.
SAGR.
I am now a&longs;&longs;ured of the effect, but do not yet compre
hend the cau&longs;e, how in the augmentation of Matter, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance
and Strength ought not al&longs;o to multiply at the &longs;ame rate. And I
admire at it &longs;o much the more, in regard I &longs;ee, on the contrary, in
other ca&longs;es the &longs;trength of Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction to encrea&longs;e
much more than the enlargement of the matter encrea&longs;eth. For if
(for example) there be two Nailes fa&longs;tned in a Wall, the one twice
asthick as the other, that &longs;hall bear a weight not only double to this,
but triple, and quadruple.
SALV.
You may &longs;ay octuple, and not be wide of the truth:
nor is this effect contrary to the former, though in appearance it
&longs;eemeth &longs;o different.
in thickne&longs;&longs;e to
another being fa&longs;t
ned in a Wall, &longs;u
&longs;tains a Weight
octuple to that of
the le&longs;&longs;er.
SAGR.
Therefore
level us the&longs;e Rocks, if you can do it: for indeed I gue&longs;&longs;e this mat
ter of Re&longs;i&longs;tance to be a field repleni&longs;hed with rare, and u&longs;eful Con
templations, and if you be content that this be the &longs;ubject of our
this-daies di&longs;cour&longs;e, it will be to me, and I believe to
very acceptable.
SALV.
I cannot refu&longs;e to &longs;erve you, &longs;ince my Memory &longs;erveth
me, in minding me of that which I formerly learnt of our
mick,
conformable (as his manner is) to Geometrical Demon&longs;tration:
in&longs;omuch that, not without rea&longs;on, this of his may be called a
Science
by others, and in the fir&longs;t place by
they not any of the mo&longs;t curious, or (which more importeth)
proved by nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;trations deduced from their primary, And becau&longs;e, as I &longs;ay, I de&longs;ire de
mon&longs;tratively to a&longs;&longs;ure you, and not with only probable di&longs;cour
&longs;es to per&longs;wade you; pre&longs;uppo&longs;ing, that you have &longs;o much know
ledge of the Mechanical Conclu&longs;ions, by others heretofore funda
mentally handled, as &longs;ufficeth for our purpo&longs;e; it is requi&longs;ite, that
before we proceed any further, we con&longs;ider what effect that is which
opperates in the Fraction of a Beam of Wood, or other Solid, who&longs;e
parts are firmly connected; becau&longs;e this is the fir&longs;t
on the fir&longs;t and &longs;imple principle dependeth, which as familiarly
known, we may take for granted. For the clearer explanation
whereof; let us take the Cilinder, or Pri&longs;me,
other &longs;olid and coherent matter, fa&longs;tned above in
perpendicular; to which, at the other end
Weight
coherence of the parts of the &longs;aid Solid to one another be, &longs;o it be
not infinite, it may be overcome by the
Force of the drawing Weight C: who&longs;e
Gravity I &longs;uppo&longs;e may be encrea&longs;ed as much
as we plea&longs;e; by the encrea&longs;e whereof the
&longs;aid Solid in fine &longs;hall break, like as if it had
been a Cord. And, as in a Cord, we under
&longs;tand its re&longs;i&longs;tance to proceed from the mul
titude of the &longs;trings or threads in the Hemp
that compo&longs;e it, &longs;o in Wood we &longs;ee its veins,
and grain di&longs;tended lengthwaies, that render
it far more re&longs;i&longs;ting again&longs;t Fraction, then any
Rope would be, of the &longs;ame thickne&longs;&longs;e: but
in a Cylinder of &longs;tone or Metal the Tenacity
of its parts, (which yet &longs;eemeth greater) de
pendeth on another kind of Cement,
than of &longs;trings, or grains, and yet they al&longs;o
being drawn with equivalent force, break.
here, as in his
Dialogues of the
Sy&longs;teme,
us
&longs;elf.
Ob&longs;erver of Me
chanical Conclu&longs;i
ons, but they nei
ther not the mo&longs;t
curious nor &longs;olidly
demon&longs;trated.
SIMP.
If the thing &longs;ucceed as you &longs;ay, I under&longs;tand well
enough, that the thread or grain of the Wood which is as long as
the &longs;aid Wood may make it &longs;trong and able to Re&longs;i&longs;t a great vio
lence done to it to break it: But a Cord compo&longs;ed of &longs;trings of
Hemp, no longer than two, or three foot a piece, how can it be &longs;o
&longs;trong when it is &longs;pun out, it may be, to a hundred times that
length? Now I would farther under&longs;tand your opinion concern
ing the Connection of the parts of Metals, Stones, and other mat
ters deprived of &longs;uch Ligatures, which neverthele&longs;&longs;e, if I be not
deceived, are yet more tenacious.
SALV.
We mu&longs;t be nece&longs;&longs;itated to digre&longs;&longs;e into new Specu
lations, and not much to our purpo&longs;e, if we &longs;hould re&longs;olve tho&longs;e
difficulties you &longs;tart.
SAGR.
But if Digre&longs;&longs;ions may lead us to the knowledge of
new Truths, what prejudice is it to us, that are not obliged to a
&longs;trict and conci&longs;e method, but that make our Congre&longs;&longs;ions only
for our diverti&longs;ement to digre&longs;&longs;e &longs;ometimes, le&longs;t we let &longs;lip tho&longs;e
Notions, which perhaps the offered occa&longs;ion being pa&longs;t, may never
meet with another opportunity of remembrance? Nay, who knows
not, that many times curio&longs;ity may thereby di&longs;cover hints of more
worth, than the primarily intended Conclu&longs;ions? Therefore I
entreat you to give &longs;atisfaction to
no le&longs;&longs;e curious than he, and de&longs;irous to under&longs;tand what that
Cement is, that holdeth the parts of tho&longs;e Solids &longs;o tenaciou&longs;ly
conjoyned, which yet neverthele&longs;&longs;e in conclu&longs;ion are di&longs;&longs;oluble:
a knowledge which furthermore is nece&longs;&longs;ary for the under&longs;tanding
of the coherence of the parts of tho&longs;e very ligaments, whereof
&longs;ome Solids are compo&longs;ed.
SALV. Well, &longs;ince it is your plea&longs;ure, I will herein &longs;erve you.
And the fir&longs;t difficulty is, how the threads of a Cord or Rope
an hundred foot long &longs;hould &longs;o clo&longs;ely connect together (none
of them exceeding two or three foot) that it requireth a great
violence to break them. But tell me,
one &longs;ingle &longs;tring of Hemp &longs;o fa&longs;t between your fingers by one
end, that I pulling by the other end &longs;hould break it &longs;ooner than
get it from you? Que&longs;tionle&longs;&longs;e you might: when then, tho&longs;e
threads are not only at the end, but al&longs;o in every part of their
length, held fa&longs;t with much &longs;trength by him that gra&longs;peth them, is
it not apparent, that it is a much harder matter to pluck them
from him that holds them, then to break them? Now in the Cord,
the &longs;ame act of twi&longs;ting, binds the threads mutually within one
another, in &longs;uch &longs;ort, that pulling the Cord with great force, the
threads of it break in&longs;under, but &longs;eparate and part not from one
another; as is plainly &longs;een by viewing the &longs;hort ends of the &longs;aid
threads in the broken place, that are not a &longs;pan long; as they
would be, if the divi&longs;ion of the Cord had been made by the &longs;ole
&longs;eperating of them in drawing the Cord, and not by breaking
them.
is that Connecteth
the parts of Solids.
Cord re&longs;i&longs;teth Fra
ction.
the parts are not
&longs;eparated, but bro
kon.
SAGR.
For confirmation of this, let me add, that the Cord is
&longs;ometimes &longs;een to break, not by pulling it length-waies, but by
over-twi&longs;ting it: an argument, in my judgment, concluding that
the threads are &longs;o enterchangeably compre&longs;t by one another, that
tho&longs;e compre&longs;&longs;ings permit not the compre&longs;&longs;ed to &longs;lip &longs;o very little,
as is requi&longs;ite to lengthen it out that it wind about the Cord,
which in the twining breaketh, and con&longs;equently in &longs;ome &longs;inall
mea&longs;ure &longs;wels in thickne&longs;&longs;e.
SALV.
You &longs;ay very well; but con&longs;ider by the way, how one
truth draweth on another. That thread, which griped between the
drawn it from between them, re&longs;i&longs;ted, becau&longs;e it was &longs;tayed by a
double compre&longs;&longs;ion, &longs;ince the upper finger pre&longs;t no le&longs;&longs;e again&longs;t
the nether, than it pre&longs;&longs;ed again&longs;t that. And there is no que&longs;tion,
that if of the&longs;e two pre&longs;&longs;ures, one alone might be retained, there
would remain half of that Re&longs;i&longs;tance, which depended conjunctive
ly on them both: but becau&longs;e you cannot with removing,
upper finger take away its pre&longs;&longs;ion, without taking away the other
part al&longs;o; it will be nece&longs;&longs;ary by &longs;ome new Artifice to retain one
of them, and to find a way that the &longs;ame thread may compre&longs;&longs;e it
&longs;elf again&longs;t the finger or other &longs;olid body upon which it is put; and
this is done by winding the &longs;ame thread about the Solid. For the
better under&longs;tanding whereof, I will briefly give it you in Figure;
and let
be di&longs;tended the thread
repre&longs;ent to be a &longs;mall Cord: there is no doubt but that the two
Cylinders being pre&longs;&longs;ed hard one again&longs;t the other, the Cord
it will &longs;lip from between the two Solids compre&longs;&longs;ing it: but if
we remove one of them, though the Cord
continue touching the other, yet &longs;hall it not
by &longs;uch contact be hindered from &longs;lipping
away. But if holding it fa&longs;t, though but
gently in the point A, towards the top of the
Cylinder, we wind, or belay it about the
&longs;ame &longs;pirally in A F L O T R, and pull it by
the end R: it is manife&longs;t, that it will begin
to pre&longs;&longs;e the Cylinder, and if the windings
and wreathes be many, it &longs;hall in its effectual
drawing alwaies pre&longs;&longs;e it &longs;o much the &longs;trai
ter about the Cylinder: and by multiplying
the wreathes if you make the contact longer,
and con&longs;equently more invincible, the more
difficult &longs;till &longs;hall it be to withdraw the
Cord, and make it yield to the force that
pulls it. Now who &longs;eeth not, that the &longs;ame
Re&longs;i&longs;tance is in the threads, which with many thou&longs;and &longs;uch
twinings &longs;pin the thick Cord? Yea, the &longs;tre&longs;&longs;e of &longs;uch twi&longs;ting
bindeth with &longs;uch Tenacity, that a few Ru&longs;hes, and of no great
length, (&longs;o that the wreaths and windings are but few where
with they entertwine) make very &longs;trong bands, called, as I take it,
^{*} Thum-ropes.
SAGR.
Your Di&longs;cour&longs;e hath removed the wonder out of my
mind at two effects, whereof I did not well under&longs;tand the rea
&longs;on; One was to &longs;ee, how two, or at the mo&longs;t three twines of the
ing drawn by the immen&longs;e force of the weight, which it held, it
&longs;lipt nor &longs;hrunk not; but that moreover turning the Crane about,
the &longs;aid Axis with the &longs;ole touch of the Rope which begirteth it,
did in the after-turnings, draw and rai&longs;e up va&longs;t &longs;tones, whil&longs;t the
&longs;trength of a little Boy &longs;ufficed to hold and &longs;tay the other end of
the &longs;ame Cord. The other is at a plain, but cunning, In&longs;trument found
out by a young Kin&longs;man of mine, by which with a Cord he could
let him&longs;elf down from a window without much gauling the palmes
of his hands, as to his great &longs;mart not long before he had done. For
the better under&longs;tanding whereof, rake this Scheame: About &longs;uch
a Cylinder of Wood as A B, two Inches
thick, and &longs;ix or eight Inches long, he cut a
hollow notch &longs;pirally, for one turn and a
half and no more, and of widene&longs;&longs;e fit for
the Cord he would u&longs;e; which he made to
enter through the notch at the end A, and
to come out at the other B, incircling after
wards the Cylinder in a barrel or &longs;ocket of
Wood, or rather Tin, but divided length
waies, and made with Cla&longs;pes or Hinges to
open and &longs;hut at plea&longs;ure: and then gra&longs;p
ing and holding the &longs;aid Barrel or Ca&longs;e with
both his hands, the rope being made fa&longs;t
above, he hung by his arms; and &longs;uch was
the compre&longs;&longs;ion of the Cord between the
moving Socket and the Cylinder, that at
plea&longs;ure griping his hands clo&longs;er he could
&longs;tay him&longs;elf without de&longs;cending, and &longs;lacking his hold a little, he
could let him&longs;elf down as he plea&longs;ed.
or In&longs;trument in
vented by an ama
rous per&longs;on to let
him&longs;elf down from
any great height
with a Cord with
out gauling his
hands.
SALV.
Aningenious invention verily, and for a full explanati
on of its nature, me-thinks I di&longs;cover, as it were by a &longs;hadow, the
light of &longs;ome other additional di&longs;coveries: but I will not at this
time deviate any more from my purpo&longs;e upon this particular: and
the rather in regard you are de&longs;irous to hear my opinion of the
Re&longs;i&longs;tance of other Bodies again&longs;t Fraction, who&longs;e texture is not
with threads, and fibrous &longs;trings, as is that of Ropes, and mo&longs;t
kinds of Wood: but the connection of their parts &longs;eem to de
pend on other Cau&longs;es; which in my judgment may be reduced to
two heads; one is the much talked-of Repugnance that Nature
hath again&longs;t the admi&longs;&longs;ion of Vacuity: for another (this of Va
cuity not &longs;ufficing) there mu&longs;t be introduced &longs;ome glue, vi&longs;cous
matter, or Cement, that tenaciou&longs;ly connecteth the Corpu&longs;cles of
which the &longs;aid Body is compacted.
re&longs;i&longs;t Fraction that
are not connected
with Fibrous fila
ments.
I will fir&longs;t &longs;peak of
what and how great its virtue is. And fir&longs;t of all the &longs;eeing at
plea&longs;ure two flat pieces of either Marble, Metal, or Gla&longs;&longs;e, exqui
&longs;itely planed, &longs;lickt, and poli&longs;hed, that being laid upon one the
other, without any difficulty &longs;lide along upon each other, if drawn
&longs;idewaies, (a certain argument that no glue connects them,) but
that going about to &longs;eperate them, keeping them equidi&longs;tant,
there is found &longs;uch repugnance, that the uppermo&longs;t will be lif
ted up, and will draw the other after it, and keep it perperually
rai&longs;ed, though it be pretty thick, and heavy, evidently proveth to
us, how much Nature abhorreth to admit, though for a &longs;hort mo
ment of time, the void &longs;pace, that would be between them, till
the concour&longs;e of the parts of the Circum-Ambient Air &longs;hould have
po&longs;&longs;e&longs;t, and repleated it. We &longs;ee likewi&longs;e, that if tho&longs;e two Plates
be not exactly poli&longs;hed, and con&longs;equently their contact not every
where exqui&longs;ite; in going about to &longs;eparate them gently, there will
be found no Renitence more than that of their meer weight, but in
the &longs;udden rai&longs;ing, the nether Stone will ri&longs;e, and in&longs;tantly fall
down again, following the upper only for that very &longs;mall time
which &longs;erveth for the expan&longs;ion of that little Air which interpo
&longs;eth betwixt the Plates, that did not every where touch, and for
the ingre&longs;&longs;ion of the other circumfu&longs;ed. The like Re&longs;i&longs;tance, which
&longs;o &longs;en&longs;ibly di&longs;covers it &longs;elf betwixt the two Plates, cannot be
doubted to re&longs;ide al&longs;o between the parts of a Solid, and that it en
tereth into their connection, at lea&longs;t in part, and as their Concomi
tant Cau&longs;e.
the Cohorence of
Bodies is their Re
pugnance to Vacu
ity.
the Coherence of
two poli&longs;hed Mar
bles.
SAGR. Hold, I pray you, and permit me to impart unto you a
particular Con&longs;ideration, ju&longs;t now come into my Mind, and this it
is; That &longs;eeing how the lower Plate followeth the upper, and is
by a &longs;peedy motion rai&longs;ed, we are thereby a&longs;certained that (con
trary to the &longs;aying of many Philo&longs;ophers, and perchance of
&longs;totle
for &longs;hould in be &longs;uch, the propo&longs;ed Plates without the lea&longs;t repug
nance would Seperate; &longs;ince the &longs;elf &longs;ame in&longs;tant of time would
&longs;uffice for their &longs;eparation, and for the concour&longs;e of the Ambient
Air to repleat that By the Inferiour Plates following the Superiour therefore may be
gathered, that in the
neous. And al&longs;o it may be inferred, that even betwixt tho&longs;e Plates
there re&longs;teth &longs;ome
is, for &longs;o long as the Ambient Air is moving whil&longs;t it concurreth to
replete the
would be no need either of the Concour&longs;e, or Motion of the Am
bient We mu&longs;t therefore &longs;ay that
ted, though by Violence or again&longs;t Nature, (albeit it is my opi
nion, that nothing is contrary to Nature, but that which is im
culty, and it is, That though Experience a&longs;&longs;ures me of the truth of
the Conclu&longs;ion, yet my Judgment is not thorowly &longs;atisfied of the
Cau&longs;e, to which &longs;uch an effect may be a&longs;cribed. For as much as
the effect of the Seperation of the two Plates, is in time before the
Vacuity which &longs;hould &longs;ucceed by con&longs;equence upon the Separa
tion. And becau&longs;e, in my opinion, the Cau&longs;e ought, if not in
Time, at lea&longs;t in Nature, to precede the Effect: and that of a Po
&longs;itive Effect, the Cau&longs;e ought al&longs;o to be Po&longs;itive; I cannot con
ceive, how the Cau&longs;e of the Adhe&longs;ion of the two Plates, and of
their Repugnance to Separation, (Effects that are already in
Act) &longs;hould be a&longs;&longs;igned to Vacuity, which yet is not, but &longs;hould
follow. And of things that are not in being, there can be no Ope
ration; according to the infallible Maxime of Philo&longs;ophy.
cau&longs;e of the Cohe
rence between the
parts of Solids.
fect the Cau&longs;e is
Po&longs;itive.
tended with Non
operation.
SIMP.
But &longs;ince you grant
think you will deny another that is mo&longs;t excellent, and true; to
wit, That Nature doth not attempt Impo&longs;&longs;ibilities: Upon which
Axiom I think the Solution of our doubt depends: becau&longs;e there
fore a void &longs;pace is of it &longs;elf impo&longs;&longs;ible, Nature forbids the doing
that, in con&longs;equence of which Vacuity would nece&longs;&longs;arily &longs;ucceed;
and &longs;uch an act is the &longs;eparation of the two Plates.
attempt Impo&longs;&longs;ibi
lities.
SAGR. Now, (admitting this which
&longs;ufficient Solution of my Doubt) in per&longs;uance of the di&longs;cour&longs;e
with which I began, it &longs;eemeth to me, that this &longs;ame Repugnance
to Vacuity &longs;hould be a &longs;ufficient Cement in the parts of a Solid of
Stone, Metal, or what other &longs;ub&longs;tance is more firmly conjoyned,
and aver&longs;e to Divi&longs;ion. For if a &longs;ingle Effect, hath but one &longs;ole
Cau&longs;e, as I under&longs;tand, and think; or if many be a&longs;&longs;igned, they
are reducible to one alone: why &longs;hould not this of Vacuity, which
certainly is one, be &longs;ufficient to an&longs;wer all Re&longs;i&longs;tances?
SALV.
I will not at this time enter upon this conte&longs;t, whether
Vacuity, without other Cement, be in it &longs;elf alone &longs;ufficient to
keep together the &longs;eparable parts of firm Bodies; but yet this I
&longs;ay, that the Rea&longs;on of the Vacuity, which is of force, and con
oluding in the two Plates, &longs;ufficeth not of it &longs;elf alone for the
firm connection of the parts of a &longs;olid Cylinder of Marble, or
Metal, the which forced with great violence, pulling them &longs;treight
out, in fine, divide and &longs;eparate. And in ca&longs;e I have found a way
to di&longs;tingui&longs;h this already-known Re&longs;i&longs;tance dependent on Va
ouity, from all others what&longs;oever that may concur with it in
&longs;trengthening the Connection, and make you &longs;ee how that it alone
is not neer &longs;ufficient for &longs;uch an Effect, would not you grant that
it would be nece&longs;&longs;ary to introduce &longs;ome other? Help him out,
plicius,
SIMP.
The Su&longs;pen&longs;ion of
nece&longs;&longs;ary a Con&longs;equence.
SAGR.
You Divine
Gold
the Army, whether it was nece&longs;&longs;ary to make any other provi&longs;ion
than of Money to pay the Souldiers. But proceed,
&longs;uppo&longs;ing that I admit of your Con&longs;equence, &longs;hew us how to &longs;e
parate the opperation of Vacuity from the other, that mea&longs;uring
it we may &longs;ee how it's in&longs;ufficient for the Effect of which we &longs;peak.
SALV.
Your Genius hath prompted you.
Well, I will tell you
the way to part the Virtue of Vacuity from the re&longs;t, and then how
to mea&longs;ure it. And to &longs;ever it, we will take a continuate matter,
who&longs;e parts are de&longs;titute of all other Re&longs;i&longs;tance to Separation, &longs;ave
only that of Vacuity, &longs;uch as Water at large hath been demon
&longs;trated to be in a certain Tractate of our
when ever a Cylinder of Water is &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed, that being drawn
we find a Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t the &longs;eparation of its parts, this mu&longs;t
be acknowledged to proceed from no other cau&longs;e, but from re
pugnance to Vacuity. But to make &longs;uch an experiment, I have
imagined a device, which with the help of a &longs;mall Diagram, may
be better expre&longs;t than by my bare words. Let this Figure C A B D
be the Profile of a Cylinder of Metal, or of Gla&longs;s, which mu&longs;t
be made hollow within, but turned exactly round; into who&longs;e
Concave mu&longs;t enter a Cylinder of Wood, exqui&longs;itely fitted to
touch every where, who&longs;e Profile is noted by
E G H F, which Cylinder may be thru&longs;t up
wards, and downwards: and this I would
have bored in the middle, &longs;o that there may
a rod of Iron pa&longs;s thorow, hooked in the end
K, and the other end I, &longs;hall grow thicker in
fa&longs;hion of a Cone, or Top; and let the
hole made for the &longs;ame thorow the Cylinder
of Wood be al&longs;o cut hollow in the upper
part, like a Conical Superficies, and exactly
fitted to receive the Conick end I, of the
Iron I K, as oft as it is drawn down by the
part K. Then I put the Cylinder of Wood
E H into the Concave Cylinder A D, and
would not have it come to touch the upper
mo&longs;t Superficies of the &longs;aid hollow Cylinder,
but that it &longs;tay two or three fingers breadth
from it: and I would have that &longs;pace filled with Water; which
&longs;hould be put therein, holding the Ve&longs;&longs;el with the mouth C D up
wards; and thereupon pre&longs;s down the Stopper E H, holding the
Conical part I &longs;omewhat di&longs;tant from the hollow that was made
thru&longs;ting down the Stopper will i&longs;&longs;ue out by the hole of the
Wood, which therefore &longs;hould be made a little wider than the
thickne&longs;s of the Hook of Iron I K. The Air being let out, and the
Iron pull'd back, which clo&longs;e &longs;toppeth the wood with its Conick
part I, then turn the ve&longs;&longs;el with its mouth downwards, and fa&longs;ten to
the hook K a Bucket that may receive into it &longs;and, or other weigh
ty matter, and you may hang &longs;o much weight thereat, that at length
the Superiour &longs;urface of the Stopper E F will &longs;eparate and for&longs;ake
the inferiour part of the Water; to which nothing el&longs;e held it con
nected but the Repugnance again&longs;t Vacuity: afterwards weighing
the Stopper with the Iron, the Bucket, and all that was in it, you
will have the quantity of the Force of the Vacuity. And if affixing
to a Cylinder of Marble, or Chri&longs;tal, as thick as the Cylinder of
Water, &longs;uch a weight, that together with the proper weight of the
Marble or Chri&longs;tal it &longs;elf, equalleth the gravity of all tho&longs;e fore
named things, a Rupture follow thereupon; we may without
doubt affirm, that the only rea&longs;on of Vacuity holdeth the parts of
Marble and Chri&longs;tal conjoyned: but not &longs;ufficing; and &longs;eeing
that to break it there mu&longs;t be added four times as much weight,
it mu&longs;t be confe&longs;&longs;ed, that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of Vacuity is one part of
&longs;ive, and that the other Re&longs;i&longs;tance is quadruple to that of Vacuity.
the Virtue of Va
cuity in Solids di
&longs;tinct from other
convenient Cau&longs;es
of their Coherence. Water a Continu
ate Matter, and
void of all other a
ver&longs;ion to &longs;eparati
on, &longs;ave that of Va
cuity.
SIMP.
It cannot be denied, but that the Invention is Ingen
ous: but I hold it to be &longs;ubject to many difficulties, which makes
me que&longs;tion it; for who &longs;hall a&longs;&longs;ure us, that the Air cannot pene
trate between the Gla&longs;s, and the Stopper, though it be clo&longs;e &longs;topt
with Flax, or other pliant matter? And al&longs;o it's a Que&longs;tion, whe
ther Wax or Turpentine will &longs;erve to make the Cone I, &longs;top the
hole clo&longs;e: Again, Why may not the parts of the Water with
draw and rarefie them&longs;elves? Why may not the Air, or Exhalati
ons, or other more &longs;ubtil Sub&longs;tances penetrate through the Poro&longs;i
ties of the Wood, or Gla&longs;s it &longs;elf?
SALV.
helping us to re&longs;olve them, as to the Penetration of the Air through
the Wood, or between the Wood and Gla&longs;s. But I moreover
ob&longs;erve, that we may at the &longs;ame time &longs;ecure our &longs;elves, and with
all acquire new Notions, if the fore-named doubts take place; for
if the Water be by Nature, howbeit with violence, capable of ex
tention, as it falleth out in Air, you &longs;hall &longs;ee the Stopper to de
&longs;cend: and if in the upper part of the Gla&longs;s we make a &longs;mall pro
minent Bo&longs;s, as this V; in ca&longs;e any Air, or other more Tenuous or
Spirituous Matter &longs;hould penetrate thorow the Sub&longs;tance, or Poro&longs;i
ty of the Gla&longs;s, or Wood, it would be &longs;een to reunite (the water
giving place) in the eminence V: which things not being percei
ved, we re&longs;t a&longs;&longs;ured that the Experiment was made with due
the Gla&longs;s permeable by any matter, though never &longs;o &longs;ubtil.
SAGR.
And I, by means of the&longs;e Di&longs;cour&longs;es have found the
Cau&longs;e of an Effect, that hath for a long time puzled my mind
with wonder, and kept it in Ignorance. I have heretofore ob
&longs;erved a Ci&longs;tern, wherein, for the drawing thence of Water, there
was made a Pump, by &longs;ome one that thought, perhaps, (but in
vain) to be thereby able to draw, with le&longs;s labour, the &longs;ame, or
greater quantity of Water, than with the ordinary Buckets; and
this Pump had its Sucker and Value on high, &longs;o that the Water
was made to a&longs;cend by Attraction, and not by Impul&longs;e, as do the
Pumps that work below. This, whil&longs;t there is any Water in the
Ci&longs;tern to &longs;uch a determinate height, will draw it plentifully; but
when the Water ebbeth below a certain Mark, the Pump will
work no more. I conceited, the fir&longs;t time that I ob&longs;erved this ac
cident, that the Engine ____ had been &longs;poyled, and looking for
the Workman, that he might amend it; he told me, that there was
no defect at all, other than what was in the Water, which being
fallen too low, permitted not it &longs;elf to be rai&longs;ed to &longs;uch a height;
and farther &longs;aid, that neither Pump, or other Machine, that rai&longs;eth
the water by Attraction, was po&longs;&longs;ibly able to make it ri&longs;e a hair
more than eighteen Braces, and be the Pumps wide or narrow, this
is the utmo&longs;t limited mea&longs;ure of their height. And I have hitherto
been &longs;o dull of apprehen&longs;ion, that though I knew that a Rope, a
Stick, and a Rod of Iron might be &longs;o and &longs;o lengthened, that at
la&longs;t, holding it up on high in the Air, its own weight would break
it, yet I never remembred, that the &longs;ame would much more ea&longs;ily
happen in a Rope, or Thread of Water. And what other is that
which is attracted in the Pump than a Cylinder of Water, which
having its contraction above, prolonged more and more, in the end
arriveth to that term, beyond which being drawn, it breaketh by
its foregoing over-weight, ju&longs;t as if it was a Rope.
attraction of Wa
ter by Pumps.
tracted by a Pump
ri&longs;eth not above
eleven yards.
SALV.
It is even &longs;o as you &longs;ay; and becau&longs;e the &longs;aid height of
eighteen Braces is the prefixed term of the Elevation, to which any
quantity of Water, be it (that is to &longs;ay, be the Pump) broad,
narrow, or even, &longs;o narrow as to the thickne&longs;s of a &longs;traw, can &longs;u
&longs;tain it &longs;elf; when ever we weigh the water contained in eighteen
Braces of Pipe, be it broad or narrow, we have the value of Re&longs;i
&longs;tance of Vacuity in Cylinders of what&longs;oever &longs;olid matter, of the
thickne&longs;s of the propo&longs;ed Pipes. And &longs;ince I have &longs;aid &longs;o much,
we will &longs;hew, that a man may ea&longs;ily find in all Metals, Stones, Tim
bers, Gla&longs;&longs;es,
&longs;trings, or rods of any thickne&longs;s, beyond which, being oppre&longs;t with
their own weight, they can no longer hold, but break in pieces. Take for example a Bra&longs;s wyer of any certain thickne&longs;s, and length,
weight to the other, till at la&longs;t it break, and let the greate&longs;t weight
that it can bear be gr.
It is manife&longs;t that fifty
pound of Bra&longs;s more than its own weight, which let us &longs;uppo&longs;e,
for example, to be one eighth of an Ounce, drawn out into a
Wyer of the like thickne&longs;s, would be the greate&longs;t length of the
Wyer that could bear it &longs;elf. Then mea&longs;ure how long the Wyer
was which brake, and let it be for in&longs;tance a y ard; and becau&longs;e it
weighed one eighth of an Ounce; and poi&longs;ed, or bore it &longs;elf, and
fifty pounds more; which are Four Thou&longs;and Eight Hundred
eighths of Ounces; we &longs;ay, that all Wyers of Bra&longs;s, whatever
thickne&longs;s they be of, can hold, at the length of Four Thou&longs;and
Eight Hundred and one yards, and no more: and &longs;o, a Bra&longs;s Wyer
being able to hold to the length of 4801 yards; the Re&longs;i&longs;tance it
findeth dependent on Vacuity, in re&longs;pect of the remainder, is as
much as is equivalent to the weight of a Rope of Water eighteen
Braces long, and of the &longs;ame thickne&longs;s with the &longs;aid Bra&longs;s Wyer:
and finding Bra&longs;s to be gr.
any Wyer of Bra&longs;s, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction dependent on
the rea&longs;on of Vacuity, importeth as much as two Braces of the
&longs;ame Wyer weigheth. And thus arguing, and operating, we may
find the length of the Wyers, or Threads of all Solid Matters re
duced to the utmo&longs;t length that they can &longs;ub&longs;i&longs;t of, and al&longs;o what
part Vacuity hath in their Re&longs;i&longs;tance.
linders or Ropes of
any Matter may
be prolonged, be
yond which being
charged they break
by their own weight
SAGR.
It re&longs;teth now, that you declare to us wherein con&longs;i&longs;ts
the remainder of that Tenacity, that is, what that Glue or Reni
tence is, which connecteth together the parts of a Solid, be&longs;ides
that which is derived from Vacuity; becau&longs;e I cannot imagine
what that Cement is, that cannot be burnt, or con&longs;umed in a ve
ry hot Furnace in two, three, or four Moneths, nor ten, nor an hun
dred; and yet Gold, Silver, and Gla&longs;s, &longs;tanding &longs;o long Liqui&longs;i
ed, when it is taken out, its parts return, upon cooling, to reunite,
and conjoyn, as before. And again, becau&longs;e the &longs;ame difficulty
which I meet within the Connection of the parts of the Gla&longs;s, I
find al&longs;o in the parts of the Cement, that is, what thing that
&longs;hould be which maketh them cleave &longs;o clo&longs;s together.
SALV.
I told you but even now, that your Genius prompted
you: I am al&longs;o in the &longs;ame &longs;trait: and al&longs;o whereas I have in gene
ral told you, how that Repugnance again&longs;t Vacuity is unque&longs;ti
onably that which permits not, nnle&longs;s with great violence, the &longs;e
paration of the two Plates, and moreover of the two great pieces of
the Pillar of Marble, or Bra&longs;s, I cannot &longs;ee why it &longs;hould not al&longs;o
take place, and be likewi&longs;e the Cau&longs;e of the Coherence of the le&longs;
&longs;er parts, and even of the very lea&longs;t and la&longs;t, of the &longs;ame Matters:
and being that of one &longs;ole Effect, there is but one only true, and
try whether this of Vacuity, which I have already found, may be
&longs;ufficient?
&longs;ole Cau&longs;e of one
&longs;ole Effect.
SIMP.
But when you have already demon&longs;trated the Re&longs;i
&longs;tance of the great Vacuity in the &longs;eparation of the two great
parts of a Solid to be very &longs;mall in compari&longs;on of that which con
necteth, and con&longs;olidates the little Particles, or Atomes, why will
you not &longs;till hold, for certain, that this is extreamly differing from
that?
SALV.
To this
Souldier is &longs;till paid with money collected by the general Impo&longs;i
tions of Shillings and Pence, although a Million of Gold &longs;ufficeth
not to pay the whole Army. And who knows, but that other ex
ceeding &longs;mall Vacuities may operate among&longs;t tho&longs;e &longs;mall Atomes,
(even like as that was of the &longs;elf-&longs;ame money) wherewith all
the parts are connected? I will tell you what I have &longs;ometimes
fancied: and I give it you, not as an unque&longs;tionable Truth, but as a
kind of Conjecture very undige&longs;ted, &longs;ubmitting it to exacter con
&longs;iderations: Pick out of it what plea&longs;eth you, and judge of the re&longs;t
as you think fit. Con&longs;idering &longs;ometimes how the Fire, penetra
ting and in&longs;inuating between the &longs;mall Atomes of this or that Me
tal, which were before &longs;o clo&longs;ely con&longs;olidated, in the end &longs;epa
rates, and di&longs;unites them; and how, the Fire being gone, they re
turn with the &longs;ame Tenacity as before to Con&longs;olidation, without
dimini&longs;hing in quantity, (at all in Gold, and very little in other
Metals,) though they continue a long time melted; I have thought
that that might happen, by rea&longs;on the extream &longs;mall parts of the
Fire, penetrating through the narrow pores of the Metal (through
which the lea&longs;t parts of Air, or of many other Fluids, could not
for their clo&longs;ene&longs;s perforate) by repleating the &longs;mall interpo&longs;ing
Vacuities might free the minute parts of the &longs;ame from the vio
lence, wherewith the &longs;aid Vacuities attract them one to another,
prohibiting their &longs;eparation: and thus becoming able to move
freely, their Ma&longs;s might become fluid, and continue &longs;uch, as long
as the &longs;mall parts of the Fire &longs;hould abide betwixt them: and that
tho&longs;e departing, and leaving the former Vacuities, their wonted
attractions might return, and con&longs;equently the Cohe&longs;ion of the
parts. And, as to the Allegation made by
my opinion, be thus re&longs;olved; That although &longs;uch Vacuities &longs;hould
be very &longs;mall, and con&longs;equently each of them ea&longs;ie to be over
come, yet neverthele&longs;s their innumerable multitude innumerably
(if it be proper &longs;o to &longs;peak) multiplieth the Re&longs;i&longs;tances: and we
have an evident proof what, and how great is the Force that re&longs;ul
teth from the conjunction of an immen&longs;e number of very weak
Moments, in &longs;eeing a Weight of many thou&longs;ands of pounds, held
come by the a&longs;&longs;ault of the innumerable Atomes of Water; which,
either carryed by the South-wind, or el&longs;e by being di&longs;tended into
very thin Mi&longs;ts that move to and fro in the Air, in&longs;inuate them
&longs;elves between &longs;tring and &longs;tring of the Hemp of the harde&longs;t twi
&longs;ted Cables; nor can the immen&longs;e force of the pendent Weight
prohibit their enterance; &longs;o that perforating the &longs;trict pa&longs;&longs;ages be
tween the Pores, they &longs;well the Ropes, and by con&longs;equence &longs;hor
ten them, whereupon that huge Ma&longs;s is forcibly rai&longs;ed.
cuities di&longs;&longs;emina
ted and interpo&longs;ed
between the &longs;mall
Corpu&longs;cles of So
lids the probable
cau&longs;e of the con&longs;i
&longs;tence or connecti
on of tho&longs;e Corpu&longs;
cles to one another,
tomes of Water in
&longs;inuating into Ca
bles draw and rai&longs;e
an immen&longs;e weight
SAGR. There's no doubt but that &longs;o long as a Re&longs;i&longs;tance is not
infinite, it may by a multitude of mo&longs;t minute Forces be over
come; in&longs;omuch that a competent number even of Ants would
be able to carry to &longs;hore a whole &longs;hips lading of Corn: for Sen&longs;e
giveth us quotidian examples, that an Ant carrieth a &longs;ingle grain
with ea&longs;e; and its cleer, that in the Ship there are not infinite
grains, but that they are compri&longs;ed in a certain number; and if you
take another number four or &longs;ix times bigger than that, and take
al&longs;o another of Ants equal to it, and &longs;et them to work, they &longs;hall
carry the Corn, and the Ship al&longs;o. It is true indeed, that it will be
needful that the number be great, as al&longs;o in my judgment that of
the
Mettal.
&longs;tance is &longs;uperable
by any the lea&longs;t
Force, multiplied.
SALV.
But though they were required to be infinite, do you
think it impo&longs;&longs;ible?
SAGR.
Not if the Mettal were of an infinite ma&longs;&longs;e; other
wi&longs;e ----
SALV.
Otherwi&longs;e what?
Go to, feeing we are faln upon
Paradoxes, let us &longs;ee if we can any way demon&longs;trate, how that
in a continuate finite exten&longs;ion, it is not impo&longs;&longs;ible to finde infi
nite
&longs;hall finde a &longs;olution of that mo&longs;t admirable Problem propound
ed by
I mean among&longs;t his
haply be no le&longs;&longs;e plain and concluding, than that which he him&longs;elf
brings thereupon, and different al&longs;o from that which Learned di Guevara
But it is fir&longs;t requi&longs;ite
to declare a Propo&longs;ition not toucht by others, on which the &longs;olution
of the que&longs;tion dependeth, which afterwards, if I deceive not my
&longs;elf, will draw along with it other new and admirable Notions; for
under&longs;tanding whereof the more exactly, we will give it you in
a Scheme: We &longs;uppo&longs;e, therefore an equilateral, and equian
gled Poligon of any number of Sides at plea&longs;ure, de&longs;cribed
about this Center G; and in this example let it be a Hexagon
A B C D E F; like to which, and concentrick with the &longs;ame
mu&longs;t be di&longs;tributed another le&longs;&longs;er, which we mark H I K L M N;
towards S, and of the le&longs;&longs;e the corre&longs;pondent Side H I is to be
produced in like manner towards the &longs;ame part, repre&longs;enting the
Line H T, parallel to A S; and let another pa&longs;&longs;e by the Center
equidi&longs;tant from the former, namely G V. This done, we &longs;uppo&longs;e
the greater Poligon to turn about upon the Line A S, carrying
with it the other le&longs;&longs;er Poligon. It is manife&longs;t, that the point B,
the term of the Side A B, &longs;tanding &longs;till, whil&longs;t the Revolution
begins, the angle A ri&longs;eth, and the point C de&longs;cendeth, de&longs;cribing
the arch C
equal to it &longs;elf: but in &longs;uch conver&longs;ion the angle I of the le&longs;&longs;er
Poligon ri&longs;eth above the Line I T. for that I B is oblique upon
A S: nor will the point I fall upon the parallel I T, before the
point C come to Q: and by that time I &longs;hall be de&longs;cended unto
O after it had de&longs;cribed the Arch I O, without the Line H T: and
at the &longs;ame time the Side I K &longs;hall have pa&longs;s'd to O P. But the Cen
ter G &longs;hall have gone all this time out of the Line G V, on which it
&longs;hal not fall, until it &longs;hall fir&longs;t have de&longs;cribed the Arch G C. Having
made this fir&longs;t &longs;tep, the greater Poligon &longs;hall be tran&longs;po&longs;ed to re&longs;t
with the Side B C upon the Line B
upon the Line O P, having skipt all the Line I O without touching
it; and the Center G &longs;hall be removed to C, making its whole
cour&longs;e without the Parallel G V: And in fine all the Figure &longs;hall
be remitted into a Po&longs;ition like the fir&longs;t; &longs;o that the Revolution
being continued, and coming to the &longs;econd &longs;tep, the Side of the
greater Poligon D C &longs;hall remove to Q X; K L of the le&longs;&longs;er (ha
ving fir&longs;t skipt the Arch P Y) &longs;hall fall upon Y Z, and the Center
proceeding evermore without G V &longs;hall fall on it in R, after the
great skip C R. And in the la&longs;t place, having fini&longs;hed an entire
Conver&longs;ion, the greater Poligon will have impre&longs;&longs;ed upon A S, &longs;ix
the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon likewi&longs;e &longs;hall have traced &longs;ix Lines equal to its
Perimeter, but di&longs;continued by the interpo&longs;ition of five Arches,
under which are the Chords, parts of the parallel H T not toucht
by the Poligon: And la&longs;tly, the Center G never hath toucht the
Parallel G V except in &longs;ix points. From hence you may compre
hend, how that the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon, is almo&longs;t
equal to that pa&longs;&longs;ed by the greater, that is the Line H T is almo&longs;t
equal to A S, then which it is le&longs;&longs;er only the quantity of one of
the&longs;e Arches, taking the Line H T, together with all its Arches. Now, this which I have declared and explained to you in the exam
ple of the&longs;e Hexagons, I would have you under&longs;tand to hold true
in all other Poligons, of what number of Sides &longs;oever they be, &longs;o
that they be like Concentrick, and Conjoyned; and that at the
Conver&longs;ion of the greater, the other, how much &longs;oever le&longs;&longs;er, be
&longs;uppo&longs;ed to revolve therewith: that is, you mu&longs;t under&longs;tand, I &longs;ay,
that the Lines by them pa&longs;&longs;ed are very near equal, computing in
to the Space pa&longs;t by the le&longs;&longs;er, the Intervals under the little Ar
ches not toucht by any part of the Perimeter of the &longs;aid le&longs;&longs;er Po
ligon. Let therefore the greater Poligon, of a thou&longs;and Sides, pa&longs;s
round, and mea&longs;ure out a continued Line equal to its Perimeter;
and in the &longs;ame time the le&longs;s pa&longs;&longs;eth a Line almo&longs;t as long, but
compounded of a thou&longs;and Particles equal to its thou&longs;and Sides,
but di&longs;continued with the interpo&longs;ition of a thou&longs;and void Spaces:
for &longs;uch may we call them, in relation to the thou&longs;and little Lines
toucht by the Sides of the Poligon. And what hath been &longs;poken
hitherto admits of no doubt or &longs;cruple. But tell me, in ca&longs;e that
about a Center, as &longs;uppo&longs;e the point A, (in the former Scheme)
we &longs;hould de&longs;cribe two Circles concentrick, and united together;
and that from the points C and B of their Semi-Diameters, there
be drawn the Tangents C E, and B F, and by the Center A the Pa
rallel A D; &longs;uppo&longs;ing the greater Circle to be turned upon the
Line B F, (drawn equal to its Circumference, as likewi&longs;e the other
two C E, and A D;) when it hath compleated one Revolution,
what &longs;hall the le&longs;&longs;er Circle, and Center have done? The Center
&longs;hall doubtle&longs;s have run over, and touched the whole Line A D,
and the le&longs;s Circumference &longs;hall with its touches have mea&longs;ured
all C E, doing the &longs;ame as did the Poligons above; and different
only in this, that the Line H T was not touched in all its Parts by
the Perimeter of the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon, but there were as many parts
left untoucht with the interpo&longs;ition of &longs;alts, or skipped &longs;paces; as
were the&longs;e parts touched by the Sides: but here in the Circles,
the Circumference of the le&longs;&longs;er Circle, never &longs;eparates from the
Line C E, &longs;o as to leave any of its parts untou cht; nor is the parts
touching of the Circumference, le&longs;s than the part toucht of the Now how is it po&longs;&longs;ible that the le&longs;&longs;er Circle &longs;hould
without skips run a Line &longs;o much bigger than its Circumfe
rence?
rable Problem of
two Concentrick
Circles that turn
round, and its true
re&longs;olution.
Gueva
ra
tioned.
SAGR.
I was con&longs;idering whether one might not &longs;ay, that like
as the Center of the Circle trailed alone upon A D toucht, it all
being yet but one &longs;ole Point; &longs;o likewi&longs;e might the Points of the
le&longs;&longs;er Circumference, drawn by the revolution of the greater, go
gliding along &longs;ome &longs;mall part of the Line C E.
This cannot be, for two rea&longs;ons; fir&longs;t, becau&longs;e there is
no rea&longs;on why &longs;ome of the touches like to C &longs;hould go gliding
along &longs;ome part of the Line C E, more than others: and though
there &longs;hould; &longs;uch touches being (becau&longs;e they are points) in&longs;i
nite, the glidings along upon C E would be infinite; and &longs;o being,
they would make an infinite Line, but the Line C E is finite. The
other rea&longs;on is, that the greater Circle, in its Revolution continu
ally changing contact, the le&longs;&longs;er Circle mu&longs;t of nece&longs;&longs;ity do the
like; there being no other Point but B, by which a Right Line can
be drawn to the Center A, and pa&longs;&longs;ing through C; &longs;o that the
greater Circumference changing Contact, the le&longs;s doth change it
al&longs;o; nor doth any Point of the le&longs;s touch more than one Point of
its Right-Line C E: be&longs;ides, that al&longs;o in the conver&longs;ion of the Po
ligons, no Point of the Perimeter of the le&longs;s falls on more than one
Point of the Line, which was by the &longs;aid Perimeter traced, as may
be ea&longs;ily under&longs;tood, con&longs;idering the Line I K is parallel to B C,
whereupon, till ju&longs;t that B C fall on B R, I K continueth elevated
above I P, and toucheth it not before B C is on the very Point of
uniting with B Q, and then all in the &longs;ame in&longs;tant I K uniteth
with O P, and afterwards immediately ri&longs;eth above it again.
SAGR.
The bu&longs;ine&longs;s is really very intricate, nor can I think on
any Solution of it, therefore do you explain it to us as far as you
judge needful.
SALV.
I &longs;hould, for the evincing hereof, have recour&longs;e to the
con&longs;ideration of the fore-de&longs;cribed Poligons, the effect of which is
intelligible and already comprehended, and would &longs;ay, that like as
in the Poligons of an hundred thou&longs;and Sides, the Line pa&longs;&longs;ed and
mea&longs;ured by the Perimeter of the greater, that is by its hundred
thou&longs;and Sides continually di&longs;tended, is not con&longs;iderably bigger
than that mea&longs;ured by the hundred thou&longs;and Sides of the le&longs;s, but
with the interpo&longs;ition of an hundred thou&longs;and void &longs;paces interve
ning; fo I would &longs;ay in the Circles (which are Poligons of innu
merable Sides) that the Line mea&longs;ured by the infinite Sides of the
great Circle, lying continued one with another, to be equalled in
length by the Line traced by the infinite Sides of the le&longs;s, but by
the&longs;e including the interpo&longs;ition of the like number of intervening
Spaces: and like as the Sides are not quantitative, but yet infinite
infinite in number; that is, tho&longs;e are infinite Points all filled, and
the&longs;e are infinite points, part filled, and part empty. And here I
would have you note, that re&longs;olving, and dividing a Line into quan
titative parts, and con&longs;equently of a finite number, it is not po&longs;&longs;ible
to di&longs;po&longs;e them into a greater extention than that which they po&longs;
&longs;e&longs;t whil&longs;t they were continued, and connected, without the inter
po&longs;ition of a like number of void Spaces; but imagining it to be
re&longs;olved into parts not quantitative, namely, into its infinite indivi
&longs;ibles, we may conceive it produced to immen&longs;ity without the in
terpo&longs;ition of quantitative void &longs;paces, but yet of infinite indivi&longs;i
ble Vacuities. And this which is &longs;poken of &longs;imple lines, &longs;hould al&longs;o
be under&longs;tood of Superficies, and Solid Bodies, con&longs;idering that they
are compo&longs;ed of infinite Atomes not non-quantitative; if we would
divide them into certain quantitative parts, there's no que&longs;tion, but
that we cannot di&longs;po&longs;e them into Spaces more ample than the Solid
before occupied, unle&longs;s with the interpo&longs;ition of a certain number
of quantitative void Spaces; void, I &longs;ay, at lea&longs;t of the matter of the
Solid: but if we &longs;hould propo&longs;e the highe&longs;t, and ultimate re&longs;olution
made into the fir&longs;t, non-quantitative, but infinite fir&longs;t compoun
ding parts, we may be able to conceive &longs;uch compounding parts
extended unto an immen&longs;e Space without the interpo&longs;ition of
quantitative void Spaces; but only of infinite non-quantitative Va
cuities: and in this manner a man may draw out, gr.
of Gold into a very va&longs;t expan&longs;ion without admitting any quan
titative void Spaces; yet neverthele&longs;s we may admit the Gold to
be compounded of infinite induci&longs;&longs;ible ones.
SIMP.
Me thinks that in this point you go the way of tho&longs;e di&longs;
&longs;eminated Vacuities of a certain
SALV.
But you add not: [
as on &longs;uch another occa&longs;ion, &longs;ufficiently be&longs;ides his purpo&longs;e, a cer
tain Antagoni&longs;t of our
SIMP.
I &longs;ee very well, and not without indignation, the malice
of &longs;uch contradictors; but I &longs;hall forbear the&longs;e Cen&longs;ures, not only
upon the &longs;core of Good-Manners, but becau&longs;e I know how di&longs;a
greeing &longs;uch Tenets are to the well-tempered, and well-di&longs;po&longs;ed
mind of a per&longs;on, &longs;o Religious and Pious, yea, Orthodox and Ho
ly, as you, Sir. But returning to my purpo&longs;e; I find many &longs;cruples
to ari&longs;e in my mind about your la&longs;t Di&longs;cour&longs;e, which I know not
how to re&longs;olve. And this pre&longs;ents its &longs;elf for one, that if the Cir
cumferences of two Circles are equall to the two Right Lines
C E, and B F, this taken continually, and that, with the interpo&longs;i
tion of infinite void Points; how can A D, de&longs;cribed by the Center,
which is but one &longs;ole Point, be &longs;aid to be equal to the &longs;ame, it con
taining infinite of them? Again, that &longs;ame compo&longs;ing the Line of
titative, is a rock very hard, in my judgment, to pa&longs;s over: And
the very admitting of Vacuity, &longs;o thorowly confuted by
no le&longs;s puzleth me than tho&longs;e difficulties them&longs;elves.
SALV.
There be, indeed, the&longs;e and other difficulties; but re
member, that we are among&longs;t Infinites, and Indivi&longs;ibles: tho&longs;e in
comprehen&longs;ible by our finite under&longs;tanding for their Grandure;
and the&longs;e for their minutene&longs;s: neverthele&longs;s we &longs;ee that Humane
Di&longs;cour&longs;e will not be beat off from ruminating upon them, in
which regard, I al&longs;o a&longs;&longs;uming &longs;ome liberty, will produce &longs;ome of
my conceits, if not nece&longs;&longs;arily concluding, yet for novelty &longs;ake,
which is ever the me&longs;&longs;enger of &longs;ome wonder: but perhaps the car
rying you &longs;o far out of your way begun, may &longs;eem to you imper
tinent, and con&longs;equently little plea&longs;ing.
SAGR.
Pray you let us enjoy the benefit, and priviledge, of free
&longs;peaking which is allowed to the living, and among&longs;t friends; e&longs;pe
cially, in things arbitrary, and not nece&longs;&longs;ary; different from Di&longs;cour&longs;e
with dead Books, which &longs;tart us a thou&longs;and doubts, and re&longs;olve not
one of them. Make us therefore partakers of tho&longs;e Con&longs;iderations,
which the cour&longs;e of our Conferences &longs;ugge&longs;t unto you; for we
want no time, &longs;eeing we are di&longs;engaged from urgent bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;es, to
continue and di&longs;cu&longs;&longs;e the other things mentioned; and particular
ly, the doubts, hinted by
SAIV.
It &longs;hall be &longs;o, &longs;ince it plea&longs;eth you: and beginning at
the fir&longs;t, which was, how it's po&longs;&longs;ible to imagine that a &longs;ingle Point
is equal to a Line; in regard I can do no more for the pre&longs;ent, I
will attempt to &longs;atisfie, or, at lea&longs;t, qualifie one improbability with
another like it, or greater; as &longs;ome times a Wonder is &longs;wallowed
up in a Miracle. And this &longs;hall be by &longs;hewing you two equal Su
perficies, and at the &longs;ame time two Bodies, likewi&longs;e equal, and
placed upon tho&longs;e Superficies as their Ba&longs;es; and that go (both
the&longs;e and tho&longs;e) continually and equally dimini&longs;hing in the &longs;elf
&longs;ame time, and that in their remainders re&longs;t alwaies equal between
them&longs;elves, and (la&longs;tly) that, as well Super&longs;icies, as Solids, deter
mine their perpetual precedent equalities, one of the Solids with
one of the Superficies in a very long Line; and the other Solid
with the other Superficies in a &longs;ingle Point: that is, the latter in
one Point alone, the other in infinite.
ficies of two Solids
continually &longs;ub
&longs;tracting from
them both equal
parts, are reduced,
the one into the
Circumference of a
Circle, and the o
ther into a Point.
An admirable propo&longs;al, really, yet let us hear you ex
plain and demon&longs;trate it.
SALV.
It is nece&longs;&longs;ary to give you it in Figure, becau&longs;e the proof
is purely Geometrical. Therefore &longs;uppo&longs;e the Semicircle A F B,
and its Center to be C, and about it de&longs;cribe the Rectangle
A D E B, and from the Center unto the Points D and E let there
be drawn the Lines C D, and C E; Then drawing the Semi-Dia
and immoveable; we &longs;uppo&longs;e all this Figure to turn round about
that Perpendicular: It is manife&longs;t, that there will be de&longs;cribed by
the Parallelogram A D E B, a Cylinder; by the Semi-circle A F B,
an Hemi-Sphære; and by the Triangle C D E a Cone. This pre
&longs;uppo&longs;ed, I would have you imagine the Hemi&longs;phære to be taken
away, leaving behind the Cone, and that which &longs;hall remain of
the Cylinder; which for the Figure, which it &longs;hall retain like to a
Di&longs;h, we will hereafter call a Di&longs;h: touching which, and the
Cone, we will &longs;ir&longs;t demon&longs;trate that they are equal; and next
a Plain being drawn parallel to the Circle, which is the foot or
Ba&longs;e of the Di&longs;h, who&longs;e Diameter is the Line D E, and its Center
F; we will demon&longs;trate, that &longs;hould the &longs;aid Plain pa&longs;s, gr.
the Line G H, cutting the Di&longs;h in the points G I, and O N; and
the Cone in the points H and L; it would cut the part of the
Cone C H L, equal alwaies to the part of the Di&longs;h, who&longs;e Profile
is repre&longs;ented to us by the Triangles G A I, and B O N: and more
over we will prove the Ba&longs;e al&longs;o of the &longs;ame Cone, (that is the
Circle, who&longs;e Diameter is H L) to be equal to that circular Su
perficies, which is Ba&longs;e of the part of the Di&longs;h; which is, as we
may &longs;ay, a Rimme as broad as G I; (note here by the way what
Mathematical Definitions are: they be an impo&longs;ition of names, or,
we may &longs;ay, abreviations of &longs;peech, ordain'd and introduced to
prevent the trouble and pains, which you and I meet with, at pre
&longs;ent, in that we have not agreed together to call gr.
ficies a circular Rimme, and that very &longs;harp Solid of the Di&longs;h a
round Razor:) now how&longs;oever you plea&longs;e to call them, it &longs;ufficeth
you to know, that the Plain produced to any di&longs;tance at plea&longs;ure,
&longs;o that it be parallel to the Ba&longs;e,
ter D E cuts alwaies the two Solids, namely, the part of the Cone
C H L, and the upper part of the Di&longs;h equal to one another: and
likewi&longs;e the two Superficies, Ba&longs;is of the &longs;aid Solids,
Rimme, and the Circle H L, equal al&longs;o to one another. Whence
followeth the forementioned Wonder; namely, that if we &longs;hould
&longs;uppo&longs;e the cutting-plain to be
&longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively rai&longs;ed towards the
Line A B, the parts of the Solid
cut are alwaies equall, as al&longs;o the
Superficies, that are their Ba&longs;es,
are evermore equal; and, in
fine, rai&longs;ing the &longs;aid Plain higher
and higher, the two Solids (ever
equal) as al&longs;o their Ba&longs;es, (Su
perficies ever equal) &longs;hall one couple of them terminate in a Cir
cumference of a Circle, and the other couple in one &longs;ole point;
of the Cone. Now whil&longs;t that in the diminution of the two So
lids, they till the very la&longs;t maintain their equality to one another, it
is, in my thoughts, proper to &longs;ay, that the highe&longs;t and ultimate terms
of &longs;uch Diminutions are equal, and not one infinitely bigger than
the other. It &longs;eemeth therefore, that the Circumference of an im
men&longs;e Circle may be &longs;aid to be equal to one &longs;ingle point; and
this that befalls in Solids, holdeth likewi&longs;e in the Superficies their
Ba&longs;es; that they al&longs;o in the common Diminution con&longs;erving al
waies equality, in fine, determine at the in&longs;tant of their ultimate
Diminution the one, (that is, that of the Di&longs;h) in their Circum
ference of a Circle, the other (to wit, that of the Cone) in one
&longs;ole point. And why may not the&longs;e be called equal, if they be the
la&longs;t remainders, and foot&longs;teps left by equal Magnitudes? And note
again, that were &longs;uch Ve&longs;&longs;els capable of the immen&longs;e Cœle&longs;tial
Hemi&longs;pheres: both their upper Rims, and the points of the contai
ned Cones (keeping evermore equally to one another) would fi
nally determine, tho&longs;e, in Circumferences equal to tho&longs;e of the
greate&longs;t Circles of the Cœle&longs;tial Orbes, and the&longs;e in &longs;implo points. Whence, according to that which &longs;uch Speculations per&longs;wade us
to, all Circumferences of Circles, how unequal &longs;oever, may be
&longs;aid to be equal to one another, and each of them equal to one &longs;ole
point.
SAGR.
The Speculation is, in my e&longs;teem, &longs;o quaint and curi
ous, that, for my part, though I could, yet would I not oppo&longs;e it,
for I take it for a piece of Sacriledge to deface &longs;o fine a Structure,
by &longs;purning at it with any pedantick contradiction; yet for our en
tire &longs;atisfaction, give us the proof (which you &longs;ay is Geometrical)
of the equality alwaies retained between tho&longs;e Solids, and tho&longs;e
their Ba&longs;es, which I think mu&longs;t needs be very &longs;ubtil, the philo&longs;o
phical Contemplation being &longs;o nice, which depends on the &longs;aid
Conclu&longs;ion.
SALV.
The Demon&longs;tration is but &longs;hort, and ea&longs;ie.
Let us keep
to the former Figure, in which the Angle I P C being a Right An
gle, the Square of the Semi-Diameter I C is equal to the two
Squares of the Sides I P, and P C. But the Semi-Diameter I C, is
equal to A C, and this to G P; and C P is equal to P H; therefore
the Square of the Line G P is equal to the two Squares of I P, and
P H, and the Quadruple to the Quadruples; that is, the Quadrate
of the Diameter G N is equal to the two Quadrates I O, and H L:
and becau&longs;e Circles are to each other, as the Squares of their Dia
meters; the Circle who&longs;e Diameter is G N, &longs;hall be equall to the
two Circles who&longs;e Diameters are I O, and H L; and taking away
the Common Circle, who&longs;e Diameter is I O; the re&longs;idue of the
Circle G N &longs;hall be equal to the Circle, who&longs;e Diameter is H L.
for the pre&longs;ent, omit its Demon&longs;tration, as well becau&longs;e that if you
would &longs;ee it, you &longs;hall find it in the twelfth Propo&longs;ition of the Se
cond Book
Lucas Valerius,
ther occa&longs;ion hath made u&longs;e of it; as becau&longs;e in our ca&longs;e it &longs;uffi
ceth to have &longs;een, how the Superficies, already explained, are ever
more equal; and that alwaies dimini&longs;hing equally, they in the end
determine, one in a &longs;ingle point, and the other in the Circumfe
rence of a Circle, be it never-&longs;omuch bigger, for in this lyeth our
Wonder.
chimedes
Age, hath written
admirably,
Centro Gravita
tis Solidorum.
SAGR.
The Demon&longs;tration is as ingenious, as the reflection
grounded upon it is admirable. Now let us hear &longs;omewhat about
the other Doubt &longs;ugge&longs;ted by
lars worth note to hint thereupon, but I &longs;hould incline to think it
impo&longs;&longs;ible to be, in regard it is a Controver&longs;ie that hath been &longs;o
canva&longs;&longs;ed.
SALV.
You &longs;hall have &longs;ome of my particular thoughts thereon;
fir&longs;t repeating what but even now I told you, namely, that Infini
ty alone, as al&longs;o Indivi&longs;ibility, are things incompre hen&longs;ible to us:
now think how they will be conjoyned together: and yet if you
would compound the Line of indivi&longs;ible points, you mu&longs;t make
them infinite; and thus it will be requi&longs;ite to apprehend in the
&longs;ame in&longs;tant both Infinite, and Indivi&longs;ible. The things that ar &longs;e
veral times have come into my mind, on this occa&longs;ion, are many;
part whereof, and the more con&longs;iderable, it may be, I cannot upon
&longs;uch a &longs;udden remember; but it may happen, that in the &longs;equal
of the Di&longs;cour&longs;e, coming to put que&longs;tions and doubts to you, and
particularly to
me of that, which without &longs;uch excitement would have lain dor
mant in my Fancy: and therefore, with my wonted freedom, per
mit me that I produce any wild conjectures, for &longs;uch may we fitly
call them in compari&longs;on of &longs;upernatural Doctrines, the only true
and certain determiners of our Controver&longs;ies, and unerring guides
in our ob&longs;cure, and dubious paths, or rather Laberinths.
Among&longs;t the fir&longs;t In&longs;tances that are wont to be produced
again&longs;t tho&longs;e that compound
ally one; That an Indivi&longs;ible, added to another Indivi&longs;ible, produ
ceth not a thing divi&longs;ible; for if that were &longs;o, it would follow, that
even the Indivi&longs;ibles were divi&longs;ible: for if two Indivi&longs;ibles, as for
example, two Points conjoyned, &longs;hould make a Quantity that
&longs;hould be a divi&longs;ible Line, much more &longs;uch &longs;hould one be that is
compounded of three, five, &longs;even, or others, that are odd num
bers; the which Lines, being to be cut in two equal parts, render
divi&longs;ible that Indivi&longs;ible which was placed in the middle. In this
them, telling him, that neither two Indivi&longs;ibles, nor ten, nor an
hundred, no, nor a thou&longs;and can compound a Magnitude divi&longs;ible,
and quantitative, but being infinite they may.
pounded of Indivi
&longs;ibles.
SIMP.
Here already ri&longs;eth a doubt, which I think unre&longs;olvable;
and it is, that we being certain to find Lines one bigger than ano
ther, although both contain infinite Points, we mu&longs;t of nece&longs;&longs;ity
confe&longs;s, that we have found in the &longs;ame Species a thing bigger than
infinite; becau&longs;e the Infinity of the Points of the greater Line, &longs;hall
exceed the Infinity of the Points of the le&longs;&longs;er. Now this a&longs;&longs;igning
of an Infinite bigger than an Infinite is, in my opinion, a conceit
that can never by any means be apprehended.
SALV.
The&longs;e are &longs;ome of tho&longs;e difficulties, which re&longs;ult from
the Di&longs;cour&longs;es that our finite Judgments make about Infinites, gi
ving them tho&longs;e attributes which we give to things finite and ter
minate; which I think is inconvenient; for I judge that the&longs;e
terms of Majority, Minority, and Equality &longs;ute not with Infinites,
of which we cannot &longs;ay that one is greater, or le&longs;s, or equal to ano
ther: for proof of which there cometh to my mind a Di&longs;cour&longs;e,
which, the better to explain, I will propound by way of Interroga
tories to
I &longs;uppo&longs;e that you very well under&longs;tand which are Square Num
bers, and which not Square.
SIMP.
I know very well, that the Square Number is that which
proceeds from the multiplication of another Number into it &longs;elf;
and &longs;o four, and nine, are Square Numbers, that ari&longs;ing from two,
and this from three multiplied into them&longs;elves.
SALV.
Very well; And you know al&longs;o, that as the Products are
called Squares: the Produ&longs;ors, that is, tho&longs;e that are multiplied, are
called Sides, or Roots; and the others, which proceed not from
Numbers multiplied into them&longs;elves, are not Squares. So that if I
&longs;hould &longs;ay, all Numbers comprehending the Square, and the not
Square Numbers, are more than the Square alone, I &longs;hould &longs;peak a
mo&longs;t unque&longs;tionable truth: Is it not &longs;o?
SIMP.
It cannot be denied.
SALV.
Farther que&longs;tioning, if I ask you how many are the
Numbers Square, you can an&longs;wer me truly, that they be as many,
as are their propper Roots; &longs;ince every Square hath its Root, and
every Root its Square, nor hath any Square more than one &longs;ole
Root, or any Root more than one &longs;ole Square.
SIMP. True.
ber, as it contains
infinite Square
and Cupe Roots, &longs;o
it conta neth infi
nite Square and
Cube Numbers.
SALV.
But if I &longs;hall demand how many Roots there be, you
cannot deny but that they be as many as all Numbers, &longs;ince there
is no Number that is not the Root of &longs;ome Square: And this be
ing granted, it is requi&longs;ite to affirm, that Square Numbers are as
beginning we &longs;aid, that all Numbers are far more than all Squares,
the greater part not being Squares: and yet neverthele&longs;s the num
ber of the Squares goeth dimini&longs;hing alwaies with greater propor
tion, by how much the greater number it ri&longs;eth to; for in an hun
dred there are ten Squares, which is as much as to &longs;ay, the tenth
part are Squares: in ten thou&longs;and only the hundredth part are
Squares: in a Million only the thou&longs;andth, and yet in an Infinite
Number, if we are able to comprehend it, we may &longs;ay the Squares
are as many, as all Numbers put together.
SAGR.
What is to be re&longs;olved then on this occa&longs;ion?
SALV.
I &longs;ee no other deci&longs;ion that it may admit, but to &longs;ay,
that all Numbers are infinite, Squares are infinite, their Roots are
infinite; and that neither is the multitude of Squares le&longs;s than all
Numbers, nor this greater than that: and in conclu&longs;ion, that the
Attributes of Equality, Majority, and Minority, have no place
in Infinites, but only in terminate quantities. And therefore when
eth of me, how it can be, that in the greater there are no more
Points than in the le&longs;s: I an&longs;wer him, That there are neither more,
nor le&longs;s, nor ju&longs;t &longs;o many; but in each of them infinite. Or if I
had an&longs;wered him, that the Points in one, are as many as there are
Square Numbers; in another bigger, as many as all Numbers; in
a le&longs;s, as many as the Cubick Numbers, might not I have given &longs;a
tisfaction, by a&longs;&longs;igning more to one, than to another, and yet to
every one infinite? And thus much as to the fir&longs;t difficulty.
SAGR. Hold, I pray you, and give me leave to add unto what hath
been &longs;poken hitherto, a thought which I ju&longs;t now light on, and it
is this, that granting what hath been &longs;aid, me-thinks, that not on
ly it's improper to &longs;ay, one Infinite is greater than another Infinite,
but al&longs;o, that it's greater than a Finite; for if an Infinite Number
were greater, gr.
that pa&longs;&longs;ing from the Million to others, and &longs;o to others continual
ly greater, one &longs;hould pa&longs;s on towards Infinity; which is not &longs;o: but
on the contrary, to how much the greater Numbers we go, &longs;o
much the more we depart from Infinite Number; becau&longs;e in Num
bers, the greater you take, &longs;o much the rarer and rarer alwaies are
Square Numbers contained in them; but in Infinite Number the
Squares can be no le&longs;s than all Numbers, as but ju&longs;t now was con
cluded: therefore the going towards Numbers alwaies greater, and
greater, is a departing farther from Infinite Number.
SALV.
And &longs;o by your ingenious Di&longs;cour&longs;e we may conclude,
that the Attributes of Greater, Le&longs;&longs;er, or Equal, have no place,
not only among&longs;t Infinites; but al&longs;o betwixt Infinites, and Fi
nites.
I pa&longs;s now to another Con&longs;ideration; and it is, that in regard
that the Line, and every continued quantity are divideable conti
nually into divi&longs;ibles, I &longs;ee not how we can avoid granting that the
compo&longs;ition is of infinite Indivi&longs;ibles: becau&longs;e a divi&longs;ion and &longs;ub
divi&longs;ion that may be pro&longs;ecuted perpetually &longs;uppo&longs;eth that the
parts are infinite; for otherwi&longs;e the &longs;ubdivi&longs;ion would be termina
ble: and the parts being Infinite, it followeth of con&longs;equence
that they be non-quantitative; for infinite quantitative parts make
an infinite exten&longs;ion: and thus we have a
ded of infinite Indivi&longs;ibles.
SIMP.
But if we may continually pro&longs;ecute the divi&longs;ion in
quantitative parts, what need have we, for &longs;uch re&longs;pect, to intro
duce the non-quantitative?
SALV.
The very po&longs;&longs;ibility of perpetually pro&longs;ecuting the di
vi&longs;ion in quantitative parts induceth the nece&longs;&longs;ity of the compo&longs;iti
on of infinite non-quantitative. Therefore, coming clo&longs;er to you,
I demand you to tell me re&longs;olutely, whether the quantitative parts
in
SIMP.
I reply, that they are both Infinite, and Finite; Infinite
in Power, and Finite in Act. Infinite in Power, that is, before the
Divi&longs;ion; but Finite in Act, that is, after they are divided: for the
parts are not actually under&longs;tood to be in the whole, till it is di
vided, or at lea&longs;t marked; otherwi&longs;e we &longs;ay that they are in
Power.
SALV.
So that a Line
gr.
contain twenty Lines of one foot a piece, actually, but only after
it is divided into twenty equal parts: but is till then &longs;aid to contain
them only in power. Now be it as you plea&longs;e; and tell me whe
ther, when the actual Divi&longs;ion of &longs;uch parts is made, that fir&longs;t
whole encrea&longs;eth or dimini&longs;heth, or el&longs;e continueth of the &longs;ame
bigne&longs;s?
SIMP.
It neither encrea&longs;eth, nor dimini&longs;heth.
SALV.
So I think al&longs;o.
Therefore the quantitative parts in
tinuum
quantity bigger or le&longs;&longs;er: but it is very plain that the&longs;e quantita
tive parts, actually contained in their whole, if they be infinite,
make it an infinite Magnitude; therefore quantitative parts,
though infinite only in power, cannot be contained, but only in an
infinite Magnitude: therefore in a finite Magnitude infinite quan
titative parts can be contained neither in Act, nor Power.
SAGR.
How then can it be true, that the
ince&longs;&longs;antly divided into parts &longs;till capable of new divi&longs;ions?
SALV.
It &longs;eems that that di&longs;tinction of Power, and Act, makes
that fea&longs;ible one way, which another way would be impo&longs;&longs;ible. But I will &longs;ee to adju&longs;t the&longs;e matters by making another account:
parts in a terminated
directly contrary to that which
they be neither finite, nor infinite.
SIMP.
I &longs;hould never have found &longs;uch an an&longs;wer, not imagi
ning that there was any mean term between finite and infinite;
&longs;o that the divi&longs;ion or di&longs;tinction which makes a thing to be either
Finite, or Infinite, is imperfect and deficient.
SALV.
In my opinion it is; and &longs;peaking of ^{*} Di&longs;crete Quan
tities, me thinks that there is a third mean term between Finite and
Infinite, which is that which an&longs;wereth to every a&longs;&longs;igned Number:
So that being demanded in our pre&longs;ent ca&longs;e, Whether the quanti
tative parts in
ous reply is to &longs;ay, that they are neither Finite, nor Infinite, but &longs;o
many, as that they
do, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that they be not comprehended in a limited
Number, for then they would not an&longs;wer to a greater: nor, again,
is it nece&longs;&longs;ary, that they be infinite, for no a&longs;&longs;igned Number is infi
nite. And thus at the plea&longs;ure of the Demander, a Line being
propounded, we may be able to a&longs;&longs;ign in it an hundred quantita
tive parts, or a thou&longs;and, or an hundred thou&longs;and, according to
the number which he be&longs;t likes; &longs;o that it be not divided into in
finite. I grant therefore to the Philo&longs;ophers, that
taineth as many quantitative parts as they plea&longs;e, and grant them
that it containeth the &longs;ame either in Act, or in Power, which they
be&longs;t like: but this I add again, that in like manner, as in a Line of
ten yards, there are contained ten Lines of one yard a piece, and
thirty Lines of a foot a piece, and three hundred and &longs;ixty Lines
of an inch a piece, &longs;o it contains infinite Points; denominate them
in Act, or in Power, as you will: and I remit my &longs;elf in this matter
to your opinion and judgment,
in Di&longs;crete Quan
tity are neither fi
nite nor infinite,
but an&longs;werable to
every given Num
ber.
SIMP.
I cannot but commend your Di&longs;cour&longs;e: but am great
ly afraid, that this parity of the Points, being contained in the like
manner as the quantitative parts, will not agree with ab&longs;olute ex
actne&longs;s; nor &longs;hall it be &longs;o ea&longs;ie a matter for you to divide the gi
ven Line into infinite Points, as for tho&longs;e Philo&longs;ophers to divide it
into ten yards, or thirty feet, nay, I hold it wholly impo&longs;&longs;ible to
effect &longs;uch a divi&longs;ion: &longs;o that this will be one of tho&longs;e Powers that
are never reduced to Act.
SALV.
The trouble, pains, and long time without which a
thing is not fea&longs;ible, render it not impo&longs;&longs;ible; for I think al&longs;o, that
you cannot &longs;o ea&longs;ily effect a divi&longs;ion to be made of a Line into a
thou&longs;and parts; and much le&longs;s being to divide it into 937, or &longs;ome
other great Prime Number. But if I di&longs;patch this, which you, it may
be, judge an impo&longs;&longs;ible divi&longs;ion, in as &longs;hort a time, as another
willingly to admit of it in our future Di&longs;cour&longs;e?
SIMP.
I am plea&longs;ed with your way of arguing, as you now do
mix it with &longs;ome plea&longs;antne&longs;s: and to your que&longs;tion I reply, that
the facility would &longs;eem more than &longs;ufficient, if the re&longs;olving it into
Points were but as ea&longs;ie, as to divide it into a thou&longs;and parts.
SALV.
Here I will tell you a thing, which haply will make you
wonder in this matter of going about, or being able to re&longs;olve the
Line into its Infinites, keeping that order which others ob&longs;erve in
dividing it into forty, &longs;ixty, or an hundred parts; namely, by di
viding it fir&longs;t into two, then into four: in which order he that
&longs;hould think to find its infinite Points would gro&longs;ly delude him&longs;elf;
for by that progre&longs;&longs;ion, though continued to eternity, he &longs;hould
never arrive to the divi&longs;ion of all its quantitative parts: yea, he is
in that way &longs;o far from being able to arrive at the intended term
of Indivi&longs;ibility, that he rather goeth farther from it; and whil&longs;t
he thinks by continuing the divi&longs;ion, and multiplying the multi
tudes of the parts, to approach to Infinite, I am of opinion, that he
more and more removes from it: and my rea&longs;on is this; In the
Di&longs;cour&longs;e, we had even now, we concluded, that, in an infinite
Number, there was, of nece&longs;&longs;ity, as many Square, or Cube Num
bers, as there were Numbers; &longs;ince that tho&longs;e and the&longs;e were as ma
ny as their Roots, and Roots comprehend all Numbers: Next we
did &longs;ee, that the greater the Numbers were that were taken, the
&longs;eldomer are their Squares to be found in them, and &longs;eldomer yet
their Cubes: Therefore it is manife&longs;t, that the greater the Number
is to which you pa&longs;s, the farther you remove from Infinite Num
ber: from whence it followeth, that turning backwards, (&longs;eeing
that &longs;uch a progre&longs;&longs;ion more removes us from the de&longs;ired term) if
any number may be &longs;aid to be infinite it is the Unite: and, indeed,
there are in it tho&longs;e conditions, and nece&longs;&longs;ary qualities of the Infi
nite Number, I mean, of containing in it as many Squares as Cubes,
and as Numbers.
Numbers may
mo&longs;t properly be
&longs;aid to be Infinite.
SIMP.
I do not apprehend very well, how this bu&longs;ine&longs;s &longs;hould
be under&longs;tood.
SALV.
The thing hath no difficulty at all in it, for the Unite
is a Square, a Cube, a Squared Square, and all other Powers; nor
is there any particular what&longs;oever e&longs;&longs;ential to the Square, or to the
Cube, which doth not agree with the Unite; as gr.
ty of two Square-numbers is to have between them a Number
mean-proportional; take any Square number for one of the terms,
and the Unite for the other, and you &longs;hall likewi&longs;e ever find be
tween them a Number Mean-proportional. Let the two Square
Numbers be 9 and 4, you &longs;ee that between 9 and 1 the Mean
proportional is 3, and between 4 and 1 the Mean-proportional The
property of Cubes is to have nece&longs;&longs;arily between them two Num
bers Mean-proportional. Suppo&longs;e 8, and 27, the Means between
them are 12 and 18; and between the Unite and 8 the Means
are 2 and 4; betwixt the Unite and 27 there are 3, and 9. We
therefore conclude,
Vnite.
comprehen&longs;ion of our Imagination, and that advertize us how ex
ceedingly they err, who di&longs;cour&longs;e about Infinites with tho&longs;e very
Attributes, that are u&longs;ed about Finites; the Natures of which have
no congruity with each other. In which affair I will not conceal
from you an admirable accident, that I met with &longs;ome time &longs;ince,
explaining the va&longs;t difference, yea, repugnance and contrariety of
Nature, that a terminate quantity would incur by changing or pa&longs;
&longs;ing into Infinite. We a&longs;&longs;ign this Right Line A B, of any length at
plea&longs;ure, and any point in the &longs;ame, as C being taken, dividing it
into two unequal parts: I &longs;ay, that many couples Lines, (hold
ing the &longs;ame proportion between them&longs;elves as have the parts
A C, and B C,) departing from the terms A and B to meet with
one another; the points of their Inter&longs;ection &longs;hall all fall in the
Circumference of one and the &longs;ame Circle: as for example, A L
and B L departing [or
having between them&longs;elves the &longs;ame proportion, as have the parts
A C and B C, and concurring in the point L: and the &longs;ame pro
portion being between two others A K, and B K, concurring in K,
al&longs;o others as A I, and B I; A H, and B H; A G, and B G; A F,
and B F; A E, and B E: I &longs;ay, that the points of their Inter&longs;ecti
on L, K, I, H, G, F, E, do all fall in the Circumference of one
and the &longs;ame Semi-circle: &longs;o that we &longs;hould imagine the point
C to mve conti
nuallyafter &longs;uch
a &longs;ort, that the
Lines produced
from it to the fix
ed terms A and
B retain alwaies
the &longs;ame propor
tion that is be
tween the fir&longs;t
parts A C and C B, that point C &longs;hall decribe the Circumference
of a Circle, as we &longs;hall &longs;hew you pre&longs;ently. And the Circle in &longs;uch
&longs;ort de&longs;cribed &longs;hall be alwaies greater and greater &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively,
according as the point C is taken nearer to the middle point
which is O; and the Circle &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;er which &longs;hall be de&longs;cribed
from a point nearer to the extremity B, in&longs;omuch, that from the
de&longs;cribed Circles (moving them in &longs;uch &longs;ort as above is pre&longs;cri
bed) of any Magnitude; le&longs;&longs;er than the Pupil of the eye of a
Flea, and bigger than the Equinoctial of the
Now, if rai&longs;ing any of the Points comprehended betwixt the terms
O and B, from every one we may de&longs;cribe Circles, and va&longs;t ones
from the Points nearer to O; then if we rai&longs;e the Point O it &longs;elf,
and continue to move it in &longs;uch &longs;ort as afore&longs;aid, that is, that the
Lines drawn from it to the terms A and B keep the &longs;ame proporti
on as have the fir&longs;t Lines A O, and O B, what Line &longs;hall be de&longs;cri
bed? There would be de&longs;cribed the Circumference of a Circle,
but of a Circle bigger than the bigge&longs;t of all Circles, therefore of
a Circle that is infinite: but it doth al&longs;o de&longs;cribe a Right Line, and
perpendicular upon A B, erected from the Point O, and produced
fir&longs;t, as the others did; for the limited motion of the Point C, after
it had de&longs;igned the upper Semi-circle C H E, continued to de
&longs;cribe the Lower E M C, reuniting its extream terms in the point
C: But the Point O being moved to de&longs;ign (as all the other Points
of the Line A B, for the Points taken in the other part O A
&longs;hall de&longs;ign their Circles, and tho&longs;e Points neare&longs;t to O the
greate&longs;t) its Circle; to make it the bigge&longs;t of all, and con&longs;e
quently infinite, it can never return any more to its fir&longs;t term, and
in a word de&longs;igneth an Infinite Right-Line for the Circumference
of its Infinite Circle. Con&longs;ider now, what difference there is be
tween a finite Circle, and an infinite; &longs;eeing that this in &longs;uch man
ner changeth its being that it wholly lo&longs;eth both its being, and
power of being; for we have already well comprehended, that
there cannot be a&longs;&longs;igned an infinite Circle; by which we may
con&longs;equently know that there can be no infinite Sphære, or other
Body, or figured Superficies. Now what &longs;hall we &longs;ay to this Meta
morpho&longs;is in pa&longs;&longs;ing from Finite to Infinite? And why &longs;hould we
find greater repugnance, whil&longs;t &longs;eeking Infinity in Numbers, we
come to conclude it to be in the Unite? And whil&longs;t that breaking
a Solid into many pieces, and pur&longs;uing to reduce it into very &longs;mall
powder, it were re&longs;olved into its infinite Atomes, admitting no far
ther divi&longs;ion, why may we not &longs;ay that it is returned into one &longs;ole
other Metall melted? And do we not &longs;ee Stones liquified into
Gla&longs;s, and Gla&longs;s it &longs;elf with much Fire to become more fluid than
Water?
twixt a finite and
infinite Circle.
of Infinity.
SAGR.
Should we therefore think Fluids to be &longs;o called, be
cau&longs;e they are re&longs;olved into their fir&longs;t, infinite, indivi&longs;ible com
pounding parts?
SALV.
I know not how to find a better an&longs;wer to re&longs;olve cer
a hard Body, be it either Stone, or Metal, and with a Hammer, or
very fine File, endeavour to divide it, as much as is po&longs;&longs;ible, into
its mo&longs;t minute and impalpable powder; it is very clear, that its
lea&longs;t Atomes, albeit for their &longs;malne&longs;s they are imperceptible, one by
one, to our &longs;ight and touch; yet are they quantitative, figured, and
numerable: and it happens in them, that being accumulated to
gether, they continue in heap; and being laid hollow, or with a
pit in the mid&longs;t, the hollowne&longs;s or pit remains, the parts heaped
about it not returning to fill it up; and being &longs;tirr'd, or &longs;haken,
they &longs;uddenly &longs;ettle &longs;o &longs;oon as their external mover leaves them,
And the like effects are &longs;een in all the Aggregates of &longs;mall Bodies,
bigger, and bigger, and of any kind of Figure, although Sphærical;
as we &longs;ee in heaps of Pea&longs;e, Wheat, Bird &longs;hot, and other matters. But
if we try to find the like accidents in Water, you will meet with
none of them; but, being rai&longs;ed, it in&longs;tantly returns to a level, if
it be not by a ve&longs;&longs;el, or &longs;ome other external &longs;tay upheld; being
made hollow, it pre&longs;ently diffu&longs;eth to fill up the Cavity; and be
ing long moved, it continually undulates, and &longs;preads its waves very
far. From this, I think, we may very rationally infer, that the minute
parts of Water, into which it &longs;eemeth to be re&longs;olved, (&longs;ince it hath
le&longs;s con&longs;i&longs;tence than any the fine&longs;t powder, yea, hath no con&longs;i
&longs;tence at all) are va&longs;tly differing from Atomes quantitative and
divi&longs;ible; nor know I how to find any other difference therein
than that of being indivi&longs;ible. Methinks, al&longs;o, that its mo&longs;t exqui
&longs;ite tran&longs;parency, affords us &longs;ufficient grounds to conjecture there
of; for if we take the mo&longs;t diaphanous Chri&longs;tal that is, and begin
to break, and pound it to powder, when it is in powder it lo&longs;eth
its tran&longs;parency, and &longs;o much the more, the &longs;maller it is pounded;
but yet Water which is ground to the highe&longs;t degree, hath al&longs;o the
highe&longs;t degree of Diaphaneity Gold and Silver, reduced by
fortis
tinue powder, and become not fluid; nor do they liquifie till the
Indivi&longs;ibles of the Fire, or of the Sun-beams di&longs;&longs;olve them, as, I be
lieve, into their fir&longs;t and highe&longs;t infinite and indivi&longs;ible compoun
ding parts.
&longs;uch, for that they
are re&longs;olved into
their fir&longs;t Indivi&longs;i
ble Atomes.
SAGR.
This which you have hinted of the Light I have many
times ob&longs;erved with admiration: I have &longs;een, I &longs;ay, a burning
Gla&longs;s, of a foot Diameter, liquifie or melt lead in an in&longs;tant;
whence I came to be of opinion, that if the Gla&longs;&longs;es were very big,
and very polite, and of Parabolical Figure, they would no le&longs;s melt
every other Metal in a very &longs;hort time; &longs;eeing that that, not very
big, nor very clear, and of a Sphærical Concave, with &longs;uch force
melted Lead, and burnt every combu&longs;tible matter: effects, that
make the wonders, reported of the Burning-gla&longs;&longs;es of
credible to me.
Burning — Gla&longs;&longs;es
admirable.
SALV.
Touching the Effects of the Gla&longs;&longs;es, invented by
chimedes,
are to me rendred credible by the reading of
Books, which I have with infinite amazement peru&longs;ed and &longs;tudied:
and if any doubts had been left me; that which la&longs;t of all Father
V&longs;torio,
miration, is &longs;ufficient to re&longs;olve them all.
Cavalieri,
&longs;uate, a famous
Mathematician,
and his Book en
titled,
chio U&longs;torio.
SAGR.
I have al&longs;o &longs;een that Tract, and peru&longs;ed it with much
delight and wonder; and becau&longs;e I formerly had knowledge of
the Author, I was confirmed in the opinion which I had conceived
of him, that he was like to prove one of the principal Mathemati
cians of our Age. But returning to the admirable effects of the
Sun-Beams in melting of Metals, are we to believe that &longs;uch, and
&longs;o violent an operation is without Motion, or el&longs;e that it is with
Motion, but extream &longs;wift?
formed with a mo&longs;t
&longs;wift Motion.
SALV.
We &longs;ee other burnings, and meltings to be performed
with Motion, and with a mo&longs;t &longs;wift Motion. Ob&longs;erve the ope
rations of Lightnings, of Powder in Mines, and in Petards,
and, in &longs;um, how by quickning the flame of Coles, mixt with
gro&longs;s and impure vapours, by Bellows, encrea&longs;eth its force in
the melting of Metals: &longs;o that I cannot &longs;ee how the Action of
Light, albeit mo&longs;t pure, can be without Motion, and that al&longs;o ve
ry &longs;wift.
But what and how great ought we to judge this Velo
city of the Light? Is it haply
or, as the re&longs;t of Motions, performed in Time? May we not by
Experiment be a&longs;&longs;ured what it is?
SIMP.
Quotidian experience &longs;hews the expan&longs;ion of Light to
be
di&longs;tance, the fla&longs;h of the fire, without interpo&longs;ition of time, is tran&longs;
mitted to our eye, but &longs;o is not the Report to our ear untill a con
&longs;iderable time after.
SAGR. True, but, I pray you, what doth this obvious experi
ment evince; but only this, that the Report is longer in arriving at
our Ear, than the Fla&longs;h at our Eye; but it a&longs;&longs;ures me not, that the
tran&longs;mi&longs;&longs;ion of the Light is therefore
Time, but only mo&longs;t &longs;wift. Nor doth &longs;uch an ob&longs;ervation con
clude more than that other, of &longs;uch who &longs;ay, that as &longs;oon as the
Sun cometh to the Horizon, its Light arriveth at our eye: for who
&longs;hall a&longs;&longs;ure me, that its beams arrive not at the &longs;aid term, afore they
reach our &longs;ight?
SALV.
The inconcludency of the&longs;e, and other ob&longs;ervations of
the like Nature, made me once think of &longs;ome other way, whereby
we may without errour be a&longs;certained whether the illumination,
ous
that of Light cannot but be extream &longs;wift. And the experiment I
hit upon, was this; I would have two per&longs;ons take each of them a
Light, which, by holding it in a Lanthorn, or other coverture, they
may cover, and di&longs;cover at plea&longs;ure by interpo&longs;ing their hand to the
fight of each other; and, that placing them&longs;elvs again&longs;t one another,
&longs;ome few paces di&longs;tance, they may practice the &longs;peedy di&longs;covery,
and occultation of their Lights from the &longs;ight of each other: So
that when one &longs;eeth the others Light, he immediatly di&longs;clo&longs;e his:
which corre&longs;pondence, after &longs;ome Re&longs;pon&longs;es mutually made, will
become &longs;o exactly In&longs;tantaneous, that, without &longs;en&longs;ible variation,
at the di&longs;covery of the one, the other &longs;hall at the &longs;ame time ap
pear to the &longs;ight of him that di&longs;clos'd the fir&longs;t. Having adju&longs;ted
this practice at this &longs;mall di&longs;tance, let us place the two per&longs;ons with
two &longs;uch Lights at two or three miles di&longs;tance; and by night re
newing the &longs;ame experiment; Let them inten&longs;ely ob&longs;erve if the
Re&longs;pon&longs;es of the di&longs;clo&longs;ures, and occultations do follow the &longs;ame
tenour which they did near hand: for if they keep the &longs;ame pro
portion, it may be with certainty enough concluded, that the ex
pan&longs;ion of Light is In&longs;tantaneous; but if it &longs;hould require time in
a di&longs;tance of three miles, which importeth &longs;ix for the going of
one, and return of the other, the &longs;tay would be &longs;ufficiently ob&longs;er
vable. And if this Experiment be made at greater di&longs;tances,
namely, at eight or ten miles, we may make u&longs;e of the
the Ob&longs;ervators accommodating each of them one at the places,
where by night the Lights are to be ob&longs;erved; which though not
very big, and &longs;o not vi&longs;ible, at that great di&longs;tance, to the eye at
large; (though ea&longs;ie to be di&longs;clo&longs;ed, and hid) by help of the
di&longs;cerned.
Light, how to find
by Experiment
whether it be In
&longs;tantaneosu or not.
SAGR.
The Invention &longs;eems to me no le&longs;s certain than ingenu
ous; but tell us what upon experimenting it you concluded.
namely, le&longs;s than a Mile: whereby I could come to no certainty
whether the apparence of the oppo&longs;ite Light was truly In&longs;tantane
ous; But if not In&longs;tantaneous, yet it was of exceeding great Velo
city, and I may &longs;ay Momentary: and for the pre&longs;ent, I would re
&longs;emble it to that Motion which we &longs;ee a fla&longs;h of Lightning make
in the Clouds ten or more Miles off: of which Light we di&longs;tin
gui&longs;h the beginning, and, I may fay, the &longs;ource and ri&longs;e of it, in a
particular place in tho&longs;e Clouds; but yet its wide expan&longs;ion imme
diatly &longs;ucceeds among&longs;t tho&longs;e adjacent: which to me &longs;eems an ar
gument that it is &longs;ome &longs;mall time in doing; becau&longs;e had the illu
mination been made all at once, and not by degrees, it feems to
Center of its flake, and extream Dilatations. But into what Oceans
do we by degrees engage our &longs;elves? Among&longs;t
Indivi&longs;ibles,
able by a thou&longs;and Di&longs;cour&longs;es to recover the Shore?
SAGR.
They are things, indeed, very di&longs;proportionate to our
under&longs;tanding. Behold Infinite, &longs;ought among&longs;t Numbers, &longs;eemeth
to determine in the Unite: From Indivi&longs;ibles ari&longs;eth things that
are continually divi&longs;ible: Vacuity &longs;eems only to re&longs;ide indivi&longs;ibly
mixt with Repletion: and, in brief, the&longs;e things &longs;o change the
nature of tho&longs;e under&longs;tood by us, that even the Circumference of
a Circle becometh an Infinite Right-Line; which, if I well re
member, is that Propo&longs;ition which you,
fe&longs;t by Geometrical Demon&longs;tration. Therefore, if you think fit,
it would be well, without any more digre&longs;&longs;ions, to make it out
to us.
SALV.
I am ready to &longs;erve you in demon&longs;trating the en&longs;uing
Problem for your fuller information.
PROPOSITION.
proportion, into unequal parts, to de&longs;cribe a Circle, to
the Circumference of which, at any point of the &longs;ame,
two Right-Lines being produced from the terms of
the given Right Line, they may retain the &longs;ame pro
portion that the parts of the &longs;aid Line given have to
one another, &longs;o that tho&longs;e be Homologous which de
part &longs;rom the &longs;ame terms.
Let the given Right-Line be AB, unequally divided ac
cording to any proportion in the point C; it is required to
de&longs;cribe a Circle at any point of who&longs;e Circumference two
Right Lines, produced from the terms A and B, concurring, have
the &longs;ame proportion to each other, that A C, hath to B C, &longs;o that
tho&longs;e be Homologous which depart from the &longs;ame term. Upon
the Center C, at the di&longs;tance of the le&longs;&longs;er part C B, let a Circle be
&longs;uppo&longs;ed to be de&longs;cribed, to the Circumference of which from the
point A the Right-line A D is made a Tangent, and indetermi
nately prolonged towards E: and let the Contact be in D, and
draw a Line from C to D, which &longs;hall be perpendicular to A E;
and let B E be perpendicular to B A, which produced, &longs;hall inter
from whence let fall a Perpendicular to A E, which produced, will
meet with A B infinitely prolonged in F. I &longs;ay, fir&longs;t, that the
Right-lines F E, and F C are equal: &longs;o that drawing the Line
E C, we &longs;hall, in the
two Triangles D E C,
B E C, have the two
Sides of the one, D E,
and C E, equal to the
two Sides of the other
B E, and E C; the
two Sides, D E, and
E B, being Tangents
to the Circle D B,
and the Ba&longs;es D C,
and C B, are likewi&longs;e
equal: wherefore the
two Angles D E C,
and B E C, &longs;hall be
equal. And becau&longs;e the Angle B C E wanteth of being a Right
Angle, as much as the Angle B E C; and the Angle C E F, to
make it a Right-Angle, wants the Angle C E D, tho&longs;e Supple
ments being equal, the Angles F C E, and F E C &longs;hall be equal,
and &longs;o con&longs;equently the Sides F E, and F C; wherefore making
the point F a Center, and at the di&longs;tance F E, de&longs;cribing a Circle,
it &longs;hall pa&longs;s by the point C. De&longs;cribe it, and let it be C E G.
I &longs;ay,
that this is the Circle required, by any point of the Circumfe
rence of which, any two Lines that &longs;hall inter&longs;ect, departing from
the terms A and B, &longs;hall be in proportion to each other, as are the
two parts A C, and B C, which be&longs;ore did concur in the point C. This is manife&longs;t in the two that concur or inter&longs;ect in the point E,
that is A E, and B E; the Angle E of the Triangle A E B being
divided in the mid&longs;t by C E; &longs;o that as A C is to C B, &longs;o is A E
to B E. The &longs;ame we prove in the two A G, and B G, determined
in the point G. Therefore being (by the Similitude of the Tri
angles A F E, and E F B) that as A F is to E F, &longs;o is E F to F B;
that is, as A F is to F C, &longs;o is C F to F B: So by Divi&longs;ion; as A C
is to C F, (that is, to F G) &longs;o is C B to B F; and the whole A B
is to the whole B G, as the part C B to the part B F: and by Com
po&longs;ition; as A G is to G B, &longs;o is C F to F B; that is, as E F to
F B, that is, as A E to E B, and A C to C B: Which was to be de
mon&longs;trated. Again, let any other Point be taken in the Circum
ference, as H; in which the two Lines A H and B H concur. I &longs;ay, in
like manner as before, that as A C is to C B, &longs;o is A H to B H. Continue H B untill it inter&longs;ect the Circumference in I, and draw
And becau&longs;e it hath been proved already
that as A B is to B G, &longs;o is C B to B F, the Rectangle A B F &longs;hall be
equall to the Rectangle C B G, that is I B H: and therefore, as
A B is to B H, &longs;o is I B to B F, and the Angles at B are equal:
Therefore A H is to H B, as I F, that is E F, to F B, and as A E
to E B.
I &longs;ay moreover, that it is impo&longs;&longs;ible, that the Lines, which have
this &longs;ame proportion, departing from the terms A and B, &longs;hould
meet in any point, either within or without the &longs;aid Circle: For
a&longs;much as if it be po&longs;&longs;ible that two Lines &longs;hould concur in the
point L, placed without; let them be A L, and B L; and continue
L B to the Circumference in M, and conjoyn M to F. If therefore
A L is to B L, as A C to B C, that is, as M F to F B, we &longs;hall have
two Triangles A L B, and M F B, which about the two Angles
A L B and M F B have their Sides proportional, their upper Angles
in the point B equal, and the two remaining Angles F M B and
L A B le&longs;s than Right Angles (for that the Right-angle at the
point M hath for its Ba&longs;e the whole Diameter C G, and not the
&longs;ole part B F, and the other at the point A is acute by rea&longs;on the
Line A L Homologous to A C, is greater than B L Homologous to
B C) Therefore the Triangles A B L, and M B F are like: and
therefore as A B is to B L, &longs;o is M B to B F; Wherefore the
Rectangle A B F &longs;hall be equall to the Rectangle M B L. But the
Rectangle A B F hath been demon&longs;trated to be equal to that of
C B G: Therefore the Rectangle M B L is equal to the Rectangle
C B G, which is impo&longs;&longs;ible: Therefore the Concour&longs;e of the Lines
cannot fall without the Circle. And in like manner it may be de
mon&longs;trated that it cannot fall within; Therefore all the Concour
&longs;es fall in the Circumference it &longs;elf.
But it is time that we return to give &longs;atisfaction to the Intreaty
of
finite Points is not only not impo&longs;&longs;ible, but that it hath in it no
more difficulty than to di&longs;tingui&longs;h its quantitative parts; pre&longs;up
po&longs;ing one thing (notwith&longs;tanding) which I think,
you will not deny me, and that is this; that you will not require me
to &longs;ever the Points one from another, and &longs;hew you them one by
one di&longs;tinctly upon this paper: for I my &longs;elfe &longs;hould be content,
if without enjoyning to pull the four or &longs;ix parts of a Line from
one another, you &longs;hould but &longs;hew me its divi&longs;ions marked, or at
mo&longs;t inclined to Angles, framing them into a Square, or a Hexa
gon; therefore I per&longs;wade my &longs;elf, that for the pre&longs;ent you will
grant them then &longs;ufficiently, and actually di&longs;tingui&longs;hed.
SIMP.
I &longs;hall indeed.
SALV.
Now if the inclining of a Line to Angles, framing
therewith &longs;ometimes a Square &longs;ometimes an Octagon, &longs;ometimes
mutation &longs;ufficient to reduce into Act tho&longs;e four, eight, forty,
hundred, or thou&longs;and parts, which were, as you &longs;ay, Potentially
in the &longs;aid Line at fir&longs;t: if I make thereof a Poligon of infinite
Sides, namely, when I bend it into the Circumference of a Circle,
may not I, with the like leave, &longs;ay, that I have reduced tho&longs;e infi
nite parts into Act, which you before, whil&longs;t it was &longs;traight, &longs;aid
were Potentially contained in it? Nor may &longs;uch a Re&longs;olution be
denied to be made into its Infinite Points, as well as that of its four
parts in forming thereof a Square, or into its thou&longs;and parts in
forming thereof a Mill-angular Figure; by rea&longs;on that there wants
not in it any of the Conditions found in the Poligon of a thou
&longs;and, or of an hundred thou&longs;and Sides. This applied or layed to a
Right-Line covereth it, touching it with one of its Sides, that is,
with one of its hundred thou&longs;andth parts; the Circle, which is a
Poligon of infinite Sides, toucheth the &longs;aid Right-line with one of
its Sides, that is one &longs;ingle Point divers from all its Colaterals, and
therefore divided, and di&longs;tinct from them, no le&longs;s than a Side of
the Poligon from its Conterminals. And as the Poligon turned
round upon a Plane de&longs;cribes, with the con&longs;equent tacts of its Sides,
a Right-line equal to its Perimeter: &longs;o the Circle, rowled upon
&longs;uch a Plane, de&longs;cribes or &longs;tamps upon it, by its infinite &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ive
Contacts, a Right-line, equall to its own Circumference. I know
not at pre&longs;ent,
whom I grant, as a thing mo&longs;t certain, that
vided into parts alwaies divi&longs;ible, &longs;o that continuing the divi&longs;ion
and &longs;ubdivi&longs;ion there can be no end thereof) will be content to
yield to me, that none of tho&longs;e divi&longs;ions are the ultimate, as in
deed they be not, &longs;ince that there alwaies remains another; but
that only to be the la&longs;t, which re&longs;olves it into infinite Indivi&longs;ibles;
to which I yield we can never attain, dividing and &longs;ubdividing it
&longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively into a greater, and greater multitude of parts: but
making u&longs;e of the way which I propound to di&longs;tingui&longs;h and re
&longs;olve all the infinite parts at one only draught, (an Artifice which
ought not to be denied me) I could per&longs;wade my &longs;elf they
would &longs;atisfie them&longs;elves, and admit this compo&longs;ition of
this one path being more current than any other to extricate us
out of very intricate Laberinths; &longs;uch as are, (be&longs;ides that alrea
dy touched of the Coherence of the parts of Solids) the concei
ving the bu&longs;ine&longs;s of Rarefaction and Conden&longs;ation, without
running into the inconvenience of being forced to admit forth of
void Spaces or Vacuities; and for this a Penetration of Bodies: in
conveniences, which both, in my opinion, may ea&longs;ily be avoided,
by granting the fore&longs;aid Compo&longs;ition of Indivi&longs;ibles.
are a&longs;&longs;igned in a
finite Line.
pounded of Indivi
&longs;ibles.
SIMP.
I know not what the Peripateticks would &longs;ay, in regard
that the Con&longs;iderations you have propo&longs;ed would be, for the mo&longs;t
part, new unto them, and as &longs;uch, it is requi&longs;ite that they be exa
mined: and it may be, that they would find you an&longs;wers, and
powerful Solutions, to unty the&longs;e knots, which I, by rea&longs;on of the
want of time and ingenuity proportionate, cannot for the pre&longs;ent
re&longs;olve. Therefore, &longs;u&longs;pending this particular for this time, I
would gladly under&longs;tand how the introduction of the&longs;e Indivi&longs;i
bles facilitateth the knowledge of Conden&longs;ation, and Rarefa
ction, avoiding at the &longs;ame time a
Bodies.
SAGR.
I al&longs;o much long to under&longs;tand the &longs;ame, it being to
my Capacity &longs;o ob&longs;cure: with this
ed of hearing (as
tions which you bring, as ought to be done, whil&longs;t that you ad
mit what he denieth.
SALV.
I will do both the one and the other.
And as to the fir&longs;t
it's nece&longs;&longs;ary, that like as in favour of Rarefaction, we make u&longs;e of
the Line de&longs;cribed by the le&longs;&longs;er Circle bigger than its own Cir
cumference, whil&longs;t it was moved at the Revolution of the greater;
&longs;o, for the under&longs;tanding of Conden&longs;ation, we &longs;hall &longs;hew, how that,
at the conver&longs;ion made by the le&longs;&longs;er Circle, the greater de&longs;cribeth
a Right-line le&longs;s than its Circumference; for the clearer explicati
on of which, let us &longs;et before us the con&longs;ideration of that which
befalls in the Poligons. In a de&longs;cription like to that other; &longs;up
po&longs;e two Hexagons about the common Center L, which let be
A B C, and H I K, with the Parallel-lines H O M, and A B C, up
on which they are to make their Revolutions; and the Angle I, of
the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon, re&longs;ting at a &longs;tay, turn the &longs;aid Poligon till &longs;uch
time as I K fall upon the Parallel, in which motion the point K
&longs;hall de&longs;cribe the Arch K M, and the Side K I, &longs;hall unite with the
part I M; while this is in doing, you mu&longs;t ob&longs;erve what the Side
C B of the greater Poligon will do. And becau&longs;e the Revolution
is made upon the Point I, the Line I B with its term B &longs;hall de
&longs;cribe, turning backward the Arch B b, below the Parallel c A, &longs;o
that when the Side K I &longs;hall fall upon the Line M I, the Line B C
&longs;hall fall upon the Line b c, advancing forwards only &longs;o much as
is the Line B c, and retiring back the part &longs;ubtended by the Arch
B b, which falls upon the Line B A, and intending to continue af
ter the &longs;ame manner the Revolution of the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon, this will
de&longs;cribe, and pa&longs;s upon its Parallel, a Line equal to its Perimeter;
but the greater &longs;hall pa&longs;s a Line le&longs;s than its Perimeter, the quan
tity of &longs;o many of the lines
and that &longs;ame line &longs;hall be very near equal to that de&longs;cribed by Here
then, without the lea&longs;t repugnance the cau&longs;e is &longs;een, why the grea
ter Poligon pa&longs;&longs;eth or moveth not (being carried by the le&longs;s)
with its Sides a greater Line than that pa&longs;&longs;ed by the le&longs;s; that is,
becau&longs;e that one part of each of them falleth upon its next coter
minal and precedent.
But if we &longs;hould con&longs;ider the two Circles about the Center A,
re&longs;ting upon their Parallels, the le&longs;&longs;er touching his in the point B,
and the greater his in the
point C; here, in begin
ning to make the Revolu
tion of the le&longs;s, it &longs;hall not
occur as before, that the
point B re&longs;t for &longs;ome time
immoveable, &longs;o that the
Line B C giving back,
carry with it the point C,
as it befell in the Poligons,
which re&longs;ting fixed in the
point I till that the Side
K I falling upon the Line
I M, the Line I B carried
back B, the term of the
Side C B, as far as b, by
which means the Side B C
fell on b c, &longs;uper-po&longs;ing or
re&longs;ting the part B b upon
the Line B A, and advancing forwards only the part
I M, that is to one Side of the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon: by which &longs;uperpo&longs;i
tions, which are the exce&longs;&longs;es of the greater Sides above the le&longs;s, the
advancements which remain equal to the Sides of the le&longs;&longs;er Poli
gon come to compo&longs;e in the whole Revolution the Right-line
equal to that traced, and mea&longs;ured by the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon. But
now, I &longs;ay, that if we would apply this &longs;ame di&longs;cour&longs;e to the ef
fect of the Circles, it will be requi&longs;ite to confe&longs;s, that whereas the
Sides of what&longs;oever Poligon are comprehended by &longs;ome Number,
the Sides of the Circle are infinite; tho&longs;e are quantitative and di
vi&longs;ible, the&longs;e non-quantitative and Indivi&longs;ible: the terms of the
Sides of a Poligon in the Revolution &longs;tand &longs;till for &longs;ome time, that
is, each &longs;uch part of the time of an entire Conver&longs;ion, as it is of
the whole Perimeter: in the Circles likewi&longs;e the &longs;tay o&longs; the terms
of its infinite Sides are momentary, for a Moment is &longs;uch part of a
limited Time, as a Point is of a Line, which containeth infinite of
them; the regre&longs;&longs;ions made by the Sides of the greater Poligon, are
not of the whole Side, but only of its exce&longs;s above the Side of the
Circles, the Point, or Side C in the in&longs;tantaneous re&longs;t of B recedeth
as much as is its exce&longs;s above the Side B, advancing forward as
much as the quantity of the &longs;ame B: And in &longs;hort, the infinite
indivi&longs;ible Sides of the greater Circle with their infinite indivi&longs;ible
Regre&longs;&longs;ions, made in the infinite in&longs;tantaneous &longs;taies of the infi
nite terms of the infinite Sides of the le&longs;&longs;er Circle, and with their
infinite Progre&longs;&longs;es, equal to the infinite Sides of the &longs;aid le&longs;&longs;er
Circle, they compo&longs;e and mea&longs;ure a Line equall to that de&longs;cribed
by the le&longs;&longs;er Circle, containing in it &longs;elf infinite &longs;uperpo&longs;itious
non-quantitative, which make a Con&longs;tipation and Conden&longs;ation
without any penctration of quantitative parts: which cannot be
contrived to be done in the Line divided into quantitative parts,
as is the Perimeter of any Poligon, which being di&longs;tended in a
Right-line at length, cannot be reduced to a le&longs;&longs;er length, unle&longs;s
the Sides fall upon and Penetrate one the other. This Con&longs;tipati
on of parts non-quantitative, but infinite without Penetration of
quantitative parts, and the former Di&longs;traction above declared of
infinite Indivi&longs;ibles by the interpo&longs;ition of indivi&longs;ible Vacui
ties, I believe, is the mo&longs;t that can be &longs;aid for the Conden&longs;ation
and Rarefaction of Bodies, without being driven to introduce Pe
netration of Bodies, or quantitative Void Spaces. If there be any
thing therein that plea&longs;eth you, make u&longs;e of it, if not, account it
vain, and my di&longs;cour&longs;e al&longs;o; and &longs;eek out &longs;ome other explanation
that may better &longs;atisfie your Judgment. Only the&longs;e two words
by the way, let us remember that we are among&longs;t Infinites, and In
divi&longs;ibles.
gon of infinite in
divi&longs;ible quantita
tive Sides.
ment of quantita
tive Time, is the
&longs;ame as a Point of
a quantitative
Line.
di&longs;traction of infi
nite Indivi&longs;ibles
by the interpo&longs;ition
of infinite indivi&longs;i
ble Vaeuities.
cording to the ope
ration of the Au
thor, proceeds from
the Con&longs;tipation of
quantitative and
indivi&longs;ible parts.
SAGR.
That the Conceit is ingenious, and to my eares wholly
new, and &longs;trange, I freely confe&longs;s, but whether or no Nature pro
ceed in this order, I know not how to re&longs;olve; Truth is, that till
&longs;uch time as I hear &longs;omething that may better &longs;atisfie me, that I
may not &longs;tand &longs;ilent, I will adhere to this. But haply
may have &longs;omwhat, which I have not yet met with, to explicate
the explication, which is produced by Philo&longs;ophers in &longs;o ab&longs;truce
a matter; for, indeed, what I have hitherto read about Conden&longs;a
tion, is to me &longs;o den&longs;e, and that of Rarefaction &longs;o &longs;ubtill, that
my weak &longs;ight neither penetrates the one, nor comprehends the
other.
SIMP.
I am full of confu&longs;ion, and find great Rubbs in the one
path, and in the other, and more particularly in this new one: for
according to this Rule, an Ounce of Gold might be rarefied and
drawn forth into a Ma&longs;s bigger than the whole Earth, and the
whole Earth conden&longs;ed and reduced into a le&longs;s Ma&longs;s than a Nut;
which I neither believe, nor think that you your &longs;elf do believe:
and the Con&longs;iderations and Demon&longs;trations by you hitherto de
from Sen&longs;ible Matter, I believe, that when they come to be apply
ed to Matters Phy&longs;ical and Natural, they will not exactly comply
with the&longs;e Rules.
SALV.
It is not in my power, nor, as I believe, do you de&longs;ire,
that I &longs;hould make that vi&longs;ible which is invi&longs;ible; but as to &longs;uch
things as may be comprehended by our Sen&longs;es, in regard that you
have in&longs;tanced in Gold, do we not &longs;ee an immen&longs;e exten&longs;ion to
be made of its parts? I know not whether you may have &longs;een the
Method that Wyer-drawers ob&longs;erve in di&longs;gro&longs;&longs;ing Gold Wyer:
which in reality is not Gold, &longs;ave only in the Superficies, for the
internal &longs;ub&longs;tance is Silver; and the way of di&longs;gro&longs;&longs;ing it is this. They take a Cylinder, or, if you will, Ingot of Silver, about half
a yard long, and about three or four Inches thick, and this they
gild or over-lay with Leaves of beaten Gold, which, you know,
is &longs;o thin that the Wind will blow it to and again, and of the&longs;e
Leaves they lay on eight or ten, and no more. So &longs;oon as it is
gilded, they begin to draw it forth with extraordinary force, ma
king it to pa&longs;s thorow the hole of the Drawing Iron, and then
reiterate this forceable di&longs;gro&longs;sment again and again thorow holes
&longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively narrower, &longs;o that, after &longs;everal of the&longs;e di&longs;gro&longs;ments,
they bring it to the &longs;malne&longs;s of the hair of a womans head, if not
&longs;maller, and yet it &longs;till continueth gilded in its Superficies or out
&longs;ide: Now I leave you to con&longs;ider to what a finene&longs;s and di&longs;ten&longs;i
on the &longs;ub&longs;tance of the Gold is brought.
of Silver is drawn
forth and di&longs;gro&longs;
&longs;ed immen&longs;ly.
breadths.
SIMP.
I do not &longs;ee how it can be inferred from this Experi
ment, that there may be a di&longs;gro&longs;ment of the matter of the Gold
&longs;ufficient to effect tho&longs;e wonders which you &longs;peak of: Fir&longs;t, For
that the fir&longs;t gilding was with ten Leaves of Gold, which make a
con&longs;iderable thickne&longs;s: Secondly, howbeit in the exten&longs;ion and
di&longs;gro&longs;ment that Silver encrea&longs;eth in length, it yet withall dimi
ni&longs;heth &longs;o much in thickne&longs;s, that compen&longs;ating the one dimen&longs;i
on with the other, the Superficies doth not &longs;o enlarge, as that for
overlaying the Silver with Gold, the &longs;aid Gold need to be reduced
to a greater thinne&longs;s than that of its fir&longs;t Leaves.
SALV.
You much deceive your &longs;elf,
crea&longs;e of the Superficies is Subduple to the exten&longs;ion in length, as
I could Geometrically demon&longs;trate to you.
SAGR.
I be&longs;eech you, both in the behalf of my &longs;elf, and of
think that we can comprehend it.
SALV.
I will &longs;ee whether I can, thus upon the &longs;udden, recall
it to mind. It is already manife&longs;t, that that &longs;ame fir&longs;t gro&longs;s Cylin
der of Silver, and the Wyer di&longs;tended to &longs;o great a length are two
equal Cylinders, in regard that they are the &longs;ame Silver; &longs;o that
linders have to one another, we &longs;hall obtain our de&longs;ire. I &longs;ay there
fore, that
PROPOSITION.
&longs;ub&longs;tracted, are to one another in &longs;ubduple proportion
of their lengths.
Take two equall Cylinders, the heights of which let be A B,
and C D: and let the Line E be a Mean-proportional
between them. I &longs;ay, the Superficies of the Cylinder A B,
the Ba&longs;es &longs;ub&longs;tracted, hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Superficies
of the Cylinder C D, the Ba&longs;es in like manner &longs;ub&longs;tracted, as the
Line A B hath to the Line E, which is &longs;ubduple of the proportion
of A B to C D. Cut the part of the Cylinder A B in F, and let the
height A F be equal to C D: And becau&longs;e the Ba&longs;es of equal Cy
linders an&longs;wer Reciprocally to their heights, the Circle, Ba&longs;e of
the Cylinder C D, to the Circle, Ba&longs;e of the
Cylinder A B, &longs;hall be as the height B A to
D C: And becau&longs;e Circles are to one ano
ther as the Squares of their Diameters, the
&longs;aid Squares &longs;hall have the &longs;ame proportion,
that B A hath to C D: But as B A, is to
C D, &longs;o is the Square B A to the Square of
E: Therefore tho&longs;e four Squares are Pro
portionals: And therefore their Sides &longs;hall
be Proportionals. And as the Line A B is to
E, &longs;o is the Diameter of the Circle C to the
Diameter of the Circle A: But as are the
Diameters, &longs;o are the Circumferences; and
as are the Circumferences, &longs;o likewi&longs;e are the Superficies of Cylin
ders equal in Height. Therefore as the Line A B is to E, &longs;o is the
Superficies of the Cylinder C D to the Superficies of the Cylinder
A F. Becau&longs;e therefore the height A F to the height A B, is as the
Superficies A F to the Superficies A B: And as is the height A B
to the Line E, &longs;o is the Superficies C D to the Superficies A F:
Therefore by Perturbation of Proportion as the height A F is to
E, &longs;o is the Superficies C D to the Superficies A B: And, by Con
ver&longs;ion, as the Superficies of the Cylinder A B is to the Superficies
of the Cylinder C D, &longs;o is the Line E to the Line A F; that is, to
the Line C D: or as A B to E: Which is in &longs;ubduple proportion
of A B to C D: Which is that which was to be proved.
Now if we apply this, that hath been demon&longs;trated, to our
purpo&longs;e; pre&longs;uppo&longs;ing that that &longs;ame Cylinder of Silver, that was
gilded whil&longs;t it was no more than half a yard long, and four or five
Inches thick, being di&longs;gro&longs;&longs;ed to the &longs;inene&longs;s of an hair, is prolon
ged unto the exten&longs;ion of twenty thou&longs;and yards (for its length
would be much greater) we &longs;hall find its Superficies augmented
to two hundred times its former greatne&longs;s: and con&longs;equently, tho&longs;e
Leaves of Gold, which were laid on ten in number, being di&longs;ten
ded on a Superficies two hundred times bigger, a&longs;&longs;ure us that the
Gold which covereth the Superficies of the &longs;o many yards of Wyer
is left of no greater thickne&longs;s than the twentieth part of a Leaf of
ordinary Beaten-Gold. Con&longs;ider, now, how great its thinne&longs;s is, and
whether it is po&longs;&longs;ible to imagine it done without an immen&longs;e di
&longs;tention of its parts: and whether this &longs;eem to you an Experi
ment, that tendeth likewi&longs;e towards a compo&longs;ition of infinite In
divi&longs;ibles in Phy&longs;ical Matters: Howbeit there want not other more
&longs;trong and nece&longs;&longs;ary proofs of the &longs;ame.
SAGR.
The Demon&longs;tration &longs;eemeth to me &longs;o ingenuous, that
although it &longs;hould not be of force enough to prove that fir&longs;t intent
for which it was produced, (and yet, in my opinion, it plainly
makes it out) yet neverthele&longs;s that &longs;hort &longs;pace of time was well
&longs;pent which hath been employed in hearing of it.
SALV.
In regard I &longs;ee, that you are &longs;o well plea&longs;ed with the&longs;e
Geometrical Demon&longs;trations, which bring with them certain pro. fit, I will give you the fellow to this, which &longs;atisfieth to a very cu
rious Que&longs;tion. In the former we have that which hapneth in
Cylinders that are equall, but of different heights or lengths: it
will be convenient, that you al&longs;o hear that which occurreth in Cy
linders equal in Superficies, but unequal in heights; my meaning
alwaies is, in tho&longs;e Superficies only that encompa&longs;s them about,
that is, not comprehending the two Ba&longs;es &longs;uperiour and inferiour. I &longs;ay, therefore, that
PROPOSITION.
ing &longs;ub&longs;tracted are equal, have the &longs;ame proportion
to one another as their heights Reciprocally taken.
Let the Superficies of the two Cylinders A E and C F be
equall; but the height of this C D greater than the height
of the other A B. I &longs;ay, that the Cylinder A E hath the
&longs;ame proportion to the Cylinder C F, that the height C D hath
to A B. Becau&longs;e therefore the Superficies C F is equall to the
if they were equal, its Superficies, by the la&longs;t Propo&longs;ition would
be greater than the Superficies A E, and
much the more, if the &longs;aid Cylinder C F
were greater than A E. Let the Cylinder
I D be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to A E: There
fore, by the precedent Propo&longs;ition, the
Superficies of the Cylinder I D &longs;hall be
to the Superficies A E, as the height I F
to the Mean-proportional betwixt I F &
A B. But the Superficies A E being by
Suppo&longs;ition equal to C F and I D, ha
ving the &longs;ame proportion to C F that the
height I F hath to C D: Therefore
C D is the Mean-Proportional between
I F and A B. Moreover, the Cylinder
I D being equal to the Cylinder A E,
they &longs;hall both have the &longs;ame proporti
on to the Cylinder C F: But I D is to
C F, as the height I F is to C D: Therefore the Cylinder A E
&longs;hall have the &longs;ame proportion to the Cylinder C F, that the line
I F hath to C D; that is, that C D hath to A B: Which was to be
demon&longs;trated.
with a Board at
the Bottom, made
of the &longs;ame Stuffe,
but different in
height, which are
the more capa
cious.
From hence is collected the Cau&longs;e of an Accident, which the
Vulgar do not hearken to without admiration; and it is, how it
is po&longs;&longs;ible that the &longs;ame piece of ^{*}Cloth, being longer one way than
another, if a Sack be made thereof to hold Corn, as the u&longs;ual
manner is, with a Board at the bottom, will hold more, making
u&longs;e of the le&longs;&longs;er breadth of the Cloth, for the height of the Sack,
and with the other encompa&longs;&longs;ing the Board at the bottom, than if
it be made up the other way: As if for Example, the Cloth were
one way &longs;ix foot, and the other way twelve, it will hold more,
when with the length of twelve one encompa&longs;&longs;eth the Board at the
bottom, the Sack being &longs;ix foot high, than if it encompa&longs;&longs;ed a
bottom of &longs;ix foot, having twelve for its height. Now, by what
hath been demon&longs;trated, there is added to the Knowledge in ge
neral that it holds more that way than this, the Specifick, and
particular Knowledge of how much it holdeth more: which is,
That it will hold more in proportion as it is lower, and le&longs;&longs;er, as
it is higher. And thus in the mea&longs;ures afore taken, the Cloth be
ing twice as long as broad, when it is &longs;ewed the length-ways it will
hold but half &longs;o much, as it will do the other way. And likewi&longs;e
having a Mat to make a ^{*} Frale or Basket twenty five foot long,
and &longs;uppo&longs;e &longs;even broad; made up the long-way it will hold but
onely &longs;even of tho&longs;e mea&longs;ures, whereof the other way it will hold
five and twenty.
Ve&longs;&longs;el made of
Rushes or Wick
er.
And thus to our particular content we continually di&longs;
cover new Notions of great Curio&longs;ity, and not unaccompanyed
with Utility. But in the particular glanced at but even now, I
really believe, that among&longs;t &longs;uch as are altogether void of the
knowledge of Geometry, there would not be found one in twen
ty, but at the fir&longs;t da&longs;h would not be mi&longs;taken, and wonder
that tho&longs;e Bodies that are contained within equal Superficies,
&longs;hould not likewi&longs;e be in every re&longs;pect equal; like as they run in
to the &longs;ame errour, &longs;peaking of the Superficies, when for deter
mining, as it frequently falls out, of the amplene&longs;&longs;e of &longs;everal
Cities, they think they have obtained their de&longs;ire &longs;o &longs;oon as they
know the &longs;pace of their Circuits, not knowing that one Circuit
may be equal to another, and yet the place conteined by this
much larger than the place of that: which befalleth not onely in
irregular Superficies, but in the regular; among&longs;t which tho&longs;e
of more Sides are alwayes more capacious than tho&longs;e of fewer;
&longs;o that in fine, the Circle, as being a Poligon of infinite Sides, is
more capacious than all other Poligons of equal Perimeter; of
which I remember, that I with particular delight &longs;aw the Demon
&longs;tration on a time when I &longs;tudied the Sphere of
a very learned Commentary upon the &longs;ame.
SALV.
It is mo&longs;t certain; and I having likewi&longs;e light upon
that very place, it gave me occa&longs;ion to inve&longs;tigate, how it may
with one &longs;ole Demon&longs;tration be concluded, that the Circle is
greater than all the re&longs;t of regular I&longs;operemitral Figures, and of
others, tho&longs;e of more Sides bigger than tho&longs;e of fewer.
SAGR.
And I that take great plea&longs;ure in certain &longs;elect and no
wi&longs;e-trivial Demon&longs;trations, entreat you with all importunity to
make me a partaker therein.
SALV.
I &longs;hall di&longs;patch the &longs;ame in few words, demon&longs;trating
the following Theorem, namely;
PROPOSITION.
Regular Homogeneal Poligons, one of which is cir
cum&longs;cribed about it, and the other I&longs;operimetral to
it: Moreover, it being le&longs;&longs;e than all the circum&longs;cri
bed, it is, on the contrary, bigger than all the I&longs;operi
metral. And, again of the circum&longs;cribed, tho&longs;e that
have more angles are le&longs;&longs;er than tho&longs;e that have
fewer; and on the other &longs;ide of the I&longs;operimetral,
tho&longs;e of more angles are bigger.
Of the two like Poligons A and B, let A be circum&longs;cribed
about the Circle A, and let the other B, be I&longs;operime
tral to the &longs;aid Circle: I &longs;ay, that the Circle is the Mean
proportional betwixt them. For that (having drawn the Semidi
ameter A C) the Circle being equal to that Right-angled Trian
gle, of who&longs;e Sides including the Right angle, the one is equal
to the Semidiameter A C, and the other to the Circumference:
And likewi&longs;e the Poligon A being equal to the right angled Tri
angle, that about the right angle hath one of its Sides equal to
the &longs;aid right line A C, and the other to the Perimeter of the &longs;aid
Poligon: It is manife&longs;t, that the circum&longs;cribed Poligon hath the
&longs;ame proportion to the Circle, that its Perimeter hath to the Cir
cumference of the &longs;aid Circle; that is, to the Perimeter of the
Poligon B, which is &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the &longs;aid Circumference:
But the Poligon A hath a proportion to the Poligon B, double to
that of its Perimeter, to the Perimeter of B (they being like Fi
gures:) Therefore the Circle A is the Mean-proportional be
tween the two Poligons A and B. And the Poligon A being
bigger than the Circle A, it is manife&longs;t that the &longs;aid Circle
A is bigger than the Poligon B, its I&longs;operimetral, and con&longs;e
quently the greate&longs;t of all Regular Poligons that are I&longs;operimetral As to the other particular, that is to prove, that of the
Poligons circum&longs;cribed about the &longs;ame Circle, that of fewer
Sides is bigger than that of more Sides; but that, on the contrary, of
the I&longs;operimetral Poligons, that of more Sides is bigger than that
of fewer Sides, we will thus demon&longs;trate. In the Circle who&longs;e
Center is O, and Semidiameter O A, let there be a Tangent
A D, and in it let it be &longs;uppo&longs;ed, for example, that A D is the
half of the Side of the Pentagon circum&longs;cribed, and A C the half
of the Side of the Heptagon, and draw the right lines O G C,
and O F D; and on the Center O, at the di&longs;tance O C, draw the
Arch E C I: And becau&longs;e the Triangle D O C is greater than the
Sector E O C, and the Sector C O I greater than the Triangle
C O A; the Triangle D O C &longs;hall have greater proportion to
the Triangle C O A, than the Sector E O C, to the Secant C O I,
that is, than the Secant F O G to the Secant G O A. And, by
Compo&longs;ition, Permutation of Proportion, the Triangle D O A
&longs;hall have greater proportion to the Secant F O A, than the Tri
angle C O A to the Secant G O A: And ten Triangles D O A
&longs;hall have greater proportion to ten Secants F O A, than four
teen Triangles C O A to fourteen Sectors G O A: That is the
circum&longs;cribed Pentagon &longs;hall have greater proportion to the Cir
cle, than hath the Heptagon: And therefore the Pentagon &longs;hall
be greater than the Heptagon. Let us now &longs;uppo&longs;e an Hep
tagon and a Pentagon I&longs;operimetral to the &longs;ame Circle. I &longs;ay, that
the Heptagon is bigger than the Pentagon. For that the &longs;aid Cir
cle being the Mean proportional between the Pentagon circum
&longs;cribed and the Pentagon its I&longs;operimetral, and likewi&longs;e the Mean
between the Circum&longs;cribed and I&longs;operimetral Heptagon: It ha
ving been proved that the Circum&longs;cribed Pentagon is greater then
the Circum&longs;cribed Heptagon, the &longs;aid Pentagon &longs;hall have greater
proportion to the Circle, than the Heptagon: that is, the Circle
&longs;hall have greater proportion to its I&longs;operimetral Pentagon, than
to its I&longs;operimetral Heptagon: Therefore the Pentagon is le&longs;&longs;er
than the I&longs;operimetral Heptagon. Which was to be demon
&longs;trated
SAGR.
A mo&longs;t ingenious Demon&longs;tration, and very acute.
But
whither are we run to ingulph our &longs;elves in Geometry, when as
we were about to con&longs;ider the Difficulties propo&longs;ed by
cius,
of Conden&longs;ation, is in my opinion, very ab&longs;truce.
SALV.
If Conden&longs;ation and Rarefaction are oppo&longs;ite Motions,
where there is &longs;een an immen&longs;e Rarefaction, one cannot deny an
extraordinary Conden&longs;ation: but immen&longs;e Rarefactions, and,
which encrea&longs;eth the wonder, almo&longs;t Momentary, we &longs;ee every
day: for what a boundle&longs;&longs;e Rarefaction is that of a little quan
tity of Gunpowder re&longs;olved into a va&longs;t ma&longs;&longs;e of Fire? And what,
beyond this, the (I could almo&longs;t &longs;ay) indeterminate Expan&longs;ion
of its Light? And if that Fire and this Light &longs;hould reunite toge
ther, which yet is no impo&longs;&longs;ibility, in regard, that at the fir&longs;t
they lay in that little room, what a Conden&longs;ation would this be? If you &longs;tudy for them, you will find hundreds of &longs;uch Rarefacti
ons, which are much more readily ob&longs;erved, than Conden&longs;ati
ons: for Den&longs;e matters are more tractable, and &longs;ubject to our
Sen&longs;es. For we can ea&longs;ily order Wood at plea&longs;ure, and we &longs;ee
it re&longs;olved into Fire, and into Light, but we do not in the &longs;ame
manner &longs;ee the Fire and the Light Conden&longs;e to the making of
Wood: We &longs;ee Fruits, Flowers, and many other &longs;olid matters
re&longs;olved in a great mea&longs;ure into Odors, but we do not after the
&longs;ame manner &longs;ee the odoriferous Atomes concurre to the con&longs;titu
tion of the Oderate Solids; but where Sen&longs;ible Ob&longs;ervation is
wanting, we are to &longs;upply it with Rea&longs;on, which will &longs;uffice to
make us apprehen&longs;ive, no le&longs;&longs;e of the Motion to the Rarefaction
and re&longs;olution of Solids, than, to the Conden&longs;ation of rare and
mo&longs;t tenuous Sub&longs;tances. Moreover, we que&longs;tion how to effect
the Conden&longs;ation and Rarefaction of the Bodies which may be
rarefied and conden&longs;ed, &longs;tudying in what manner it may be done
without introducing of a
which doth not hinder, but that in Nature there may be matters
which admit no &longs;uch accidents, and con&longs;equently do not allow
roome for tho&longs;e things which you phra&longs;e inconvenient and im
po&longs;&longs;ible. And la&longs;tly,
fying you, and tho&longs;e Philo&longs;ophers that hold with you, taken
&longs;ome pains in con&longs;idering how Conden&longs;ation and Rarefaction
may be under&longs;tood to be performed without admitting Penetra
tion of Bodies, and introducing the Void Spaces called Vacuities,
Effects which you deny and abhorre: for if you would but grant
them, I would no longer &longs;o re&longs;olutely contradict you. There
fore either admit the&longs;e Inconveniences, or accept of my Spe
culations, or el&longs;e finde out others more conducing to the
purpo&longs;e.
min&longs;e is that of
a little Gunpow
der into a va&longs;t
ma&longs;s of Fire.
SAGR.
As to the denying of Penetration, I am wholly of opi
nion with the Peripatetick Philo&longs;ophers; as to that of a
I would &longs;ee the Demon&longs;tration of
wherewith he oppo&longs;eth the &longs;ame, and what you,
an&longs;wer to it.
recite the proof of the Philo&longs;opher; and you,
&longs;wer it.
SIMP.
certain of the Ancients, who introduced Vacuity, as nece&longs;&longs;ary
to Motion, &longs;aying, that this without that could not be effected;
contrary, the effecting of Motion (as we &longs;ee) de&longs;troyeth the Po&longs;iti
on of He maketh two
Suppo&longs;itions, one is touching Moveables different in Gravity
moved in the &longs;ame
Moveable moved in &longs;everal
&longs;eth that Moveables different in Gravity, move in the &longs;ame
&longs;ame proportion as their Gravities: &longs;o that, for example, a Move
able ten times heavier than another, moveth ten times more &longs;wift
ly. In the other Po&longs;ition he a&longs;&longs;umes, that the Velocity of the
&longs;ame Moveable in different
the thickne&longs;&longs;e or Den&longs;ity of the &longs;aid
&longs;ing gr.
as that of the Air, he will have the Velocity in the Air to be
ten times more than the Velocity in the Water. And from this &longs;e
cond A&longs;&longs;umption he draweth his Demon&longs;tration in this manner. Becau&longs;e the tenuity of
lence, though never &longs;o &longs;ubtil, of any whatever Replete
um,
tain &longs;pace in a certain time, in a
in an in&longs;tant: But to make a Motion in an in&longs;tant is impo&longs;&longs;ible:
Therefore to introduce Vacuity in the accompt of Motion is im
po&longs;&longs;ible.
SALV.
The Argument one may &longs;ee to be
again&longs;t tho&longs;e who would make a
but if I &longs;hall admit of the Argument as concludent, granting
withal, that in Vacuity there would be no Motion; yet the Po&longs;i
tion of Vacuity taken ab&longs;olutely, and not in relation to Motion,
is not thereby overthrown. But to tell you what tho&longs;e Ancients,
peradventure, might an&longs;wer, that &longs;o we may the better di&longs;cover
how far the Demon&longs;tration of
one might oppo&longs;e his A&longs;&longs;umptions, denying them both. And as
to the fir&longs;t: I greatly doubt that
how true it is, that two &longs;tones, one ten times heavier than the o
ther, let fall in the &longs;ame in&longs;tant from an height, gr.
dred yards, were &longs;o different in their Velocity, that upon the
arrival of the greater to the ground, the other was found not to
have de&longs;cended &longs;o much as ten yards.
ment again&longs;t a
Vacuum
hominem.
SIMP. Why, it may be &longs;een by his own words, that he confe&longs;
&longs;eth he had made the Experiment, for he &longs;aith, [
grave
ment.
SAGR.
But I,
&longs;ure you, that a Cannon bullet that weigheth one hundred, rwo
rival of a Musket-bullet to the ground, that weigheth but half
a pound, falling likewi&longs;e from an height of two hundred yards.
But without any other Experiments, we may by &longs;hort
and nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;trations cleerly prove, that it is not true that
a Moveable more grave moveth more &longs;wiftly than another le&longs;&longs;e
grave, confining our meaning &longs;till to Moveables of the &longs;ame Mat
ter; and, in &longs;hort, to tho&longs;e of which For tell
me,
Body there belongeth by nature one determinate Velocity; &longs;o
as that it cannot be encrea&longs;ed or dimini&longs;hed in it without u&longs;ing vi
olence to it, or impo&longs;ing &longs;ome impediment upon it?
SIMP.
It cannot be doubted, but that the &longs;ame Moveable in
the &longs;ame
Velocity, which cannot be increa&longs;ed, unle&longs;&longs;e with new
conferred on it, or dimini&longs;hed, &longs;ave onely by &longs;ome impediment
that retards it.
SALV.
If therefore we had two Moveables, the natural Velo
cities of which were unequal, it is manife&longs;t, that if we joyned the
&longs;lower with the &longs;wifter, this would be in part retarded by the
&longs;lower, and that in part accelerated by the other more &longs;wift. Do
not you concur with me in this opinion?
SIMP.
I think that it ought undoubtedly &longs;o to &longs;ucceed.
SALV.
But if this be &longs;o, and, it be likewi&longs;e true that a great
Stone moveth with (&longs;uppo&longs;e) eight degrees of Velocity, and a le&longs;
&longs;er with fewer, then joyning them both together, the compound
of them will move with a Velocity le&longs;&longs;e than eight Degrees: But
the two Stones joyned together make one Stone greater than
that before, which moved with eight degrees of Velocity: There
fore this greater Stone moveth le&longs;&longs;e &longs;wiftly than the le&longs;&longs;er, which
is contrary to your Suppo&longs;ition. You &longs;ee therefore, that from the
&longs;uppo&longs;ing that the more grave Moveable moveth more &longs;wiftly
than the le&longs;&longs;e grave, I prove unto you that the more grave mo
veth le&longs;&longs;e &longs;wiftly.
SIMP.
I find my &longs;elf at a lo&longs;&longs;e, for the truth is, that the le&longs;
&longs;er Stone being joyned to the greater, weight is added unto it, and
weight being added to it, I cannot &longs;ee why there &longs;hould not Ve
locity be added to it, or at lea&longs;t why it &longs;hould be dimini&longs;hed
in it.
SALV.
Here you run into another errour,
is not true, that that &longs;ame le&longs;&longs;er Stone encrea&longs;eth the weight of
the greater.
SIMP.
Oh wonderful! this quite &longs;urpa&longs;&longs;eth my apprehen&longs;ion.
SALV.
Not at all, if you will but &longs;tay till I have di&longs;covered
to you the Equivokes, of which you are in doubt: Therefore
Bodies &longs;et on Moving, and the &longs;ame con&longs;tituted in Re&longs;t; a Stone
put into the Ballance not onely acquireth greater weight, by lay
ing another Stone upon it, but al&longs;o the addition of, a Flake of
Hemp will make it weigh more by tho&longs;e &longs;ix or ten ounces that
the Hemp &longs;hall weigh; but if you &longs;hould freely let fall the Stone
tied to the Hemp from an high place, do you think that in the
Motion the Hemp weigheth down the Stone, &longs;o as to accelerate
its Motion; or el&longs;e do you believe that it will retard it, &longs;u&longs;tain
ing it in part? We indeed feel our &longs;houlders laden, &longs;o long as we
will oppo&longs;e the Motion that the weight would make which lyeth
upon our backs; but if we &longs;hould de&longs;cend with the &longs;ame Velocity
wherewith that &longs;ame grave Body would naturally de&longs;cend, in what
manner will you that it pre&longs;&longs;e or bear upon us? Do not you &longs;ee
that this would be a wounding one with a Lance that runneth
before you, with as much or more &longs;peed than you pur&longs;ue him. You may conclude therefore that in the free and natural fall, the
le&longs;&longs;er Stone doth not bear upon the greater, and con&longs;equently doth
not encrea&longs;e their weight, as it doth in Re&longs;t.
SIMP.
But what if the greater was put upon the le&longs;&longs;er?
SALV.
It would encrea&longs;e their weight, in ca&longs;e its Motion were
more &longs;wift; but it hath been already concluded, that in ca&longs;e the
le&longs;&longs;er &longs;hould be more &longs;low it would in part retard the Velocity of
the greater, &longs;o that there Compound would move le&longs;&longs;e &longs;wiftly;
being greater than the other, which is contrary to your A&longs;&longs;umpti
on: Let us conclude therefore, that great Moveables, and like
wi&longs;e little, being of the &longs;ame Specifical Gravity, move with like
Velocity.
SIMP.
Your di&longs;cour&longs;e really is full of ingenuity, yet methinks
it is hard to conceive that a drop of Bird-&longs;hot, &longs;hould move as
&longs;wiftly as a Canon-bullet.
SALV.
You may &longs;ay a grain of Sand as fa&longs;t as a Mill-&longs;tone.
I would not have you,
to do, and diverting the di&longs;cour&longs;e from the principal de&longs;ign, fa
&longs;ten upon &longs;ome one &longs;aying of mine that may want an hairs-breadth
of the truth, and under this hair hide a defect of another man as
big as the Cable of a Ship.
hundred pounds weight falling, from an height of an hundred yards,
commeth to the ground before that one of one pound is de&longs;cended
one &longs;ole yard: I &longs;ay, that they arrive at the earth both in the &longs;ame
time: You find, that the bigger anticipates the le&longs;&longs;er two Inches,
that is to &longs;ay, that when the great one falls to the ground, the o
ther is di&longs;tant from it two inches: you go about to hide under
the&longs;e two inches the ninety nine yards of
onely to my &longs;mall errour, pa&longs;&longs;e over in &longs;ilence the other great one.
&longs;ame
ties proportionate to their Weights; and exemplifieth it by
Moveables, wherein one may di&longs;cover the pure and ab&longs;olute effect
of Weight, omitting the other Con&longs;iderations, as well of Figures,
as of the minute Motions; which things receive great alteration
from the
Gravity; wherefore we &longs;ee Gold, that is heavier than any other
matter, being reduced into a very thin Leaf, to go flying to and
again through the Air, the like do Stones beaten to very &longs;mall
Powder. But if you would maintain the Univer&longs;al Propo&longs;ition, it
is requi&longs;ite that you &longs;hew the proportion of the Velocities to be
ob&longs;erved in all grave Bodies, and that a Stone of twenty pounds
moveth ten times &longs;wifter than one of two: which, I tell you, is
fal&longs;e, and that falling from an height of fifty or an hundred yards,
they come to the ground in the &longs;ame in&longs;tant.
SIMP.
Perhaps in very great heights of Thou&longs;ands of yards
that would happen, which is not &longs;een to occur in the&longs;e le&longs;&longs;er
heights.
SALV.
If this was the Meaning of
volved him in another Errour, which will be found a Lie; for
there being no &longs;uch perpendicular altitudes found on the Earth,
its a clear ca&longs;e, that
ment thereof; and yet would per&longs;wade us that he had, whil&longs;t he
&longs;aith, that the &longs;aid effect is
SIMP.
that other, which I believe is not obnoxious to the&longs;e doubts.
SALV.
Why that al&longs;o is no le&longs;&longs;e fal&longs;e than this; and I admire
that you do not of your &longs;elf perceive the fallacy, and di&longs;cern, that
&longs;hould it be true, that the &longs;ame Moveable in
ferent Subtilty and Rarity, and, in a word, of different Ce&longs;&longs;ion,
&longs;uch, for example, as are Water and Air, move with a greater
Velocity in the Air than in the Water, according to the propor
tion of the Airs Rarity to the Rarity of the Water, it would
follow that every Moveable that de&longs;cendeth in the Air would
de&longs;cend al&longs;o in the Water: Which is &longs;o fal&longs;e, that very many
Bodies de&longs;cend in the Air, that in the Water do not onely not
de&longs;cend, but al&longs;o ri&longs;e upwards.
SIMP I do not under&longs;tand the nece&longs;&longs;ity of your Con&longs;equence:
and I will &longs;ay farther, that
bodies that de&longs;cend in the one
of tho&longs;e that de&longs;cend in the Air and a&longs;cend in the Water.
SALV.
You produce for the Phil&longs;opher &longs;uch Pleas as he, with
out all doubt, would never alledge, for that they aggravate the
fir&longs;t mi&longs;take. Therefore tell me, if the Cra&longs;situde of the Water,
on to the Cra&longs;&longs;itude of the Air that le&longs;&longs;e retards it; and if it have;
do you a&longs;&longs;ign it us, at plea&longs;ure.
SIMP.
It hath &longs;uch a proportion, and we will &longs;uppo&longs;e it to be
decuple; and that therefore the Velocity of a Grave Body, that
de&longs;cends in both the Elements, &longs;hall be ten times &longs;lower in the Wa
ter than in the Air.
SALV.
I will take one of tho&longs;e Grave-Bodies that de&longs;cend in
the Air, but not in the Water; as for in&longs;tance, a Ball of Wood,
and de&longs;ire that you will a&longs;&longs;ign it what Velocity you plea&longs;e, whil&longs;t it
de&longs;cends through the Air.
SIMP.
Suppo&longs;e we, that it move with twenty degrees of Velo
city.
SALV.
Very well: And it is manife&longs;t, that that Velocity to
&longs;ome other le&longs;&longs;er, may have the &longs;ame proportion, that the Cra&longs;&longs;i
tude of the Water hath to that of the Air; and that this &longs;hall be
the Velocity of the two only degrees: &longs;o that exactly to an hair,
and in direct conformity to the A&longs;&longs;umption of
be concluded, That the Ball of Wood, which in the Air, ten times
more yielding, moveth de&longs;cending with twenty degrees of Veloci
ty, in the Water &longs;hould de&longs;cend with two, and not return from the
bottom to flote a-top, as it doth: unle&longs;s you will &longs;ay, that the
a&longs;cending of the Wood to the top is the &longs;ame in the Water, as its
&longs;inking to the bottom with two degrees of Velocity; which I do
not believe. But &longs;eeing that the Ball of Wood de&longs;cends not to the
bottom, I rather think that you will grant me, that &longs;ome other Ball,
of other matter different from Wood, might be found that de&longs;cends
in the Water with two degrees of Velocity.
SIMP.
Que&longs;tionle&longs;&longs;e there might; but it mu&longs;t be of a matter
con&longs;iderably more grave than Wood.
SALV.
This is that which I de&longs;ired to know.
But this &longs;econd
Ball, which in the Water de&longs;cendeth with two degrees of Velocity,
with what Velocity will it de&longs;cend in the Air? It is requi&longs;ite (if
you will maintain
move with twenty degrees: But you your &longs;elf have a&longs;&longs;igned twen
ty degrees of Velocity to the Ball of Wood; Therefore this, and
the other that is much more grave, will move thorow the Air with
equall Velocity. Now how doth the Philo&longs;opher reconcile this
Conclu&longs;ion with that other of his, that the Moveables of different
Gravity, move in the &longs;ame
&longs;o different as are their Gravities? But, without any deep &longs;tudies,
how comes it to pa&longs;s that you have not ob&longs;erved very frequent,
and very palpable Accidents, and not con&longs;idered two Bodies, that in
the Water will move one an hundred times more &longs;wiftly than the
other, but that again in the Air that &longs;wifter one will not out-go the As for example, an Egge of Marble will
de&longs;cend in the Water an hundred times fa&longs;ter than one of an Hen,
when as in the Air, at the height of twenty Yards it will not anti
cipate it four Inches: and, in a word, &longs;uch a certain Grave Body
will &longs;ink to the bottom in three hours in ten fathom Water, that
in the Air will pa&longs;s the &longs;ame &longs;pace in one or two pul&longs;es, and &longs;uch
another (as for in&longs;tance a Ball of Lead) will pa&longs;s that number of
fathoms with ea&longs;e in le&longs;s than double the time. And here I &longs;ee
plainly,
for any di&longs;tinction, or reply. Conclude we therefore, that that
&longs;ame Argument concludeth nothing again&longs;t
&longs;hould, it would only overthrow Spaces con&longs;iderably great, which
neither I, nor, as I take it, tho&longs;e
rally allowed, though, perhaps, with violence they may be effe
cted, as, me thinks, one may collect from &longs;everal Experiments, which
it would be two tedious to go about at pre&longs;ent to produce.
SAGR.
Seeing that
&longs;omething. In regard you have with &longs;ufficient plainne&longs;&longs;e demon
&longs;trated, that it is not true, That Moveables unequally grave move in
the &longs;ame
but with equal: de&longs;iring to be under&longs;tood to &longs;peak of Bodies of the
&longs;ame Matter, or of the &longs;ame Specifick Gravity, but not (as I con
ceive) of Gravities different
you intend to prove unto us, that a Ball of Cork moveth with like
Velocity to one of Lead;) and having moreover very manife&longs;tly
demon&longs;trated, that it is not true, That the &longs;ame Moveable in
diums
ties the &longs;ame proportion as have their Re&longs;i&longs;tances: to me it would
be a very plea&longs;ing thing to hear, what tho&longs;e be which are ob&longs;erved
as well in the one ca&longs;e as in the other.
SALV.
The Que&longs;tions are ingenuous, and I have many times
thought of them: I will relate unto you the Contemplations made
upon them, and what at length I did from thence infer. After I
had a&longs;&longs;ured my &longs;elf that it was not true, That the &longs;ame Moveable
in
proportion of the Ce&longs;&longs;ion of tho&longs;e
the &longs;ame
Velocities the proportion of tho&longs;e Gravities (&longs;peaking alwaies of
Gravitles different
together, ob&longs;erving that which befell the Moveables different in
Gravity put into
that the inequality of the Velocities were found to be alwaies
greater in the more re&longs;i&longs;ting
and that with &longs;uch a diver&longs;ity, that of two Moveables that, de
&longs;cending thorow the Air, differ very little in Velocity of Motion,
yea: that &longs;uch, as in the Air do &longs;wiftly de&longs;cend, in the Water not
only will not de&longs;cend, but will be wholly deprived of Motion,
and, which is yet more, will move upwards: for one &longs;hall &longs;ome
times find &longs;ome kind of Wood, or &longs;ome knot, or root of the &longs;ame,
that in the Water will lye &longs;till, when as in the Air it will &longs;wiftly
de&longs;cend.
SAGR.
I have many times &longs;et my &longs;elf with an extream patience
to &longs;ee if I could reduce a Ball of Wax, (which of it &longs;elf doth not
go to the bottom) by adding to it grains of &longs;and, to &longs;uch a degree
of Gravity like to the Water, as to make it &longs;tand &longs;till in the
mid&longs;t of that Element; but I could never, by all the care I
u&longs;ed, &longs;ucceed in my attempt; &longs;o that I cannot tell, whether any
Solid matter may be found &longs;o naturally alike in Gravity to Wa
ter, as that being put into any place of the &longs;ame, it can re&longs;t or lye
&longs;till.
SALV.
In this, as well as in a thou&longs;and other actions, many
Animals are more ingenuous than we. And, in this ca&longs;e, Fi&longs;hes
would have been able to have given you &longs;ome light, being in this
affair &longs;o skilful, that at their plea&longs;ure they ^{*} equilibrate them&longs;elves,
not only with one kind of Water, but with &longs;uch, as, either of their
own nature, or by means of &longs;ome &longs;upervenient muddine&longs;s, or for
their &longs;altne&longs;s (which maketh a great alteration) are very diffe
rent; equilibrate them&longs;elves, I &longs;ay, &longs;o exactly, that without &longs;tir
ring in the lea&longs;t they lye &longs;till in every place: and this, in my opi
nion, they do, by making u&longs;e of the In&longs;trument given them by Na
ture to that end,
Bodies, which by a very narrow neck an&longs;wereth to their mouth;
and by that they either, when they would &longs;tand &longs;till, &longs;end forth
part of the Air that is contained in the &longs;aid Bladders, or, &longs;wimming
to the top they draw in more, making them&longs;elves by that art one
while more, another while le&longs;s heavy than the Water, and at their
plea&longs;ures equilibrating them&longs;elves to the &longs;ame.
them&longs;elves admi
rably in the Water.
SAGR I deceived &longs;ome of my Friends with another device;
for I had made my boa&longs;t unto them, that I would reduce that Ball
of Wax to an exact
&longs;ome &longs;alt Water in the bottom of the Ve&longs;&longs;el, and a-top of that &longs;ome
fre&longs;h, I &longs;hewed them the Ball, which in the mid&longs;t of the Water
&longs;tood &longs;till, and being thru&longs;t to the bottom, or to the top, &longs;taid nei
ther in this nor that &longs;cituation, but returned to the mid&longs;t.
SALV.
This &longs;ame Experiment is not void of utility; for Phy&longs;i
cians, in particular, treating of &longs;undry qualities of Waters, and
among&longs;t other things, principally of the more or le&longs;s Gravity or
Levity of this or that: by &longs;uch a Ball, in &longs;uch manner poi&longs;ed and
adju&longs;ted that it may re&longs;t ambiguous, if I may &longs;o &longs;ay, between
of weight between two Waters, if that Ball &longs;hall de&longs;cend in the
one; in the other, that is more grave, it &longs;hall a&longs;cend. And the
Experiment is &longs;o exact, that the addition of but only two grains
of Salt, put into &longs;ix pounds of Water, &longs;hall make that Ball to
a&longs;cend from the bottom to the &longs;urface, which was but a little be
fore de&longs;cended thither. And moreover, I will tell you this in con
firmation of the exactne&longs;s of this Experiment, and withall for a
clear proof of the Non-re&longs;i&longs;tance of Water to divi&longs;ion, that not
only the ingravitating it with the mixture of &longs;ome matter heavier
than it, maketh that &longs;o notable difference, but the warming or
cooling of it a little produceth the &longs;ame effect, and with &longs;o &longs;ubtil
an operation, that the infu&longs;ing four diops of other Water, a lit
tle warmer, or a little colder, than the &longs;ix pounds, &longs;hall cau&longs;e the
Ball to ri&longs;e or &longs;ink in the &longs;ame; to &longs;ink in it upon the infu&longs;ion of
the warm, and to ri&longs;e at the infu&longs;ion of the cold. Now &longs;ee how
much tho&longs;e Philo&longs;ophers are deceived, who would introduce in
Water vi&longs;co&longs;ity, or other conjunction of parts which make it to
re&longs;i&longs;t Divi&longs;ion or Penetration.
prepared to make
the Experiment of
the different Gra
vities of Waters.
Re&longs;i&longs;tance to Di
vi&longs;ion.
SAGR.
I have &longs;een many Convincing Di&longs;cour&longs;es touching
this Argument in a ^{*} Treati&longs;e of our
there is re&longs;ting in me a &longs;trong &longs;cruple, which I know not how to
remove: For if nothing of Tenacity, or Coherence re&longs;ides among&longs;t
the parts of Water, how can it bear it &longs;elf up in rea&longs;onable big
and high Tumours; in particular, upon the leaves of Cole-worts
without di&longs;per&longs;ing or levelling?
in this place is
that which we
di&longs;po&longs;e fir&longs;t in
Order, in the
fir&longs;t part of this
Tome,
SALV.
Although it be true, that he who is Ma&longs;ter of a true
Conclu&longs;ion, may re&longs;olve all Objections that can be brought again&longs;t
it, yet will not I arrogate to my &longs;elf the power &longs;o to do; nor
ought my in&longs;ufficiency becloud the &longs;plendour of Truth. Fir&longs;t,
therefore, I confe&longs;s that I know not how it cometh to pa&longs;s, that
tho&longs;e Globes of Water &longs;u&longs;tain them&longs;elves at &longs;uch an height and
bigne&longs;s, albeit I certainly know that it doth not proceed from any
internal Tenacity that is between its parts; &longs;o that it remaineth
neœ&longs;&longs;ary, that the Cau&longs;e of that Effect do re&longs;ide without. That it
is not Internal, be&longs;ides tho&longs;e Experiments already &longs;hewn you, I can
prove by another mo&longs;t convincing one. If the parts of that Wa
ter, which con&longs;erveth it &longs;elf in a Globe or Tumour whil&longs;t it is en
compa&longs;&longs;ed by the Air, had an internal Cau&longs;e for &longs;o doing, they
would much better &longs;u&longs;tain them&longs;elves being environed by a
um,
in the Ambient Air: But every Fluid Body more grave than the
Air would be &longs;uch a
fore, infu&longs;ing Wine about that Globe of Water, it might rai&longs;e it
&longs;elf on every &longs;ide, and yet the parts of the Water, conglutinated
&longs;o; nay, no &longs;ooner doth the circumfu&longs;ed liquor approach thereto,
but, without &longs;taying till it ri&longs;e much about it, the little globes of
Water will di&longs;&longs;olve and become flat, re&longs;ting under the Wine, if it
was red. The Cau&longs;e therefore of this Effect is External, and per
haps in the Ambient Air: and, indeed, one may ob&longs;erve a great
di&longs;&longs;ention between the Air and Water; which I have ob&longs;erved
in another Experiment; and this it is: If I fill a ^{*} Ball of Chri&longs;tal,
that hath a mouth as narrow as the hollow of a &longs;traw, with water,
and when it is thus full, turn it with its mouth downwards, yet will
not the Water, although very heavy, and prone to de&longs;cend tho
row the Air, nor the Air, as much di&longs;po&longs;ed on the other hand, as
being very light, to a&longs;cend thorow the Waters, yet will they not
(I &longs;ay) agree that that &longs;hould de&longs;cend, i&longs;&longs;uing out at the mouth,
and this a&longs;cend, entering in at the &longs;ame: but they both continue
aver&longs;e and contumacious. Again, on the contrary, if I pre&longs;ent to
that mouth a ve&longs;&longs;el of red Wine, which is almo&longs;t in&longs;en&longs;ibly le&longs;s
grave than Water, we &longs;hall &longs;ee it in an in&longs;tant gently to a&longs;cend by
red &longs;treams thorow the Water, and the Water with like Tardity to
de&longs;cend through the Wine, without ever mixing with each other,
till that in the end, the Ball will be full of Wine, and the Water
Will all &longs;ink unto the bottom of the Ve&longs;&longs;el underneath. Now
what are we to &longs;ay, or what are we to infer, but a di&longs;agreement
between the Water and Air, occult to me, but perhaps -----
great drops upon
the Leaves of Col
worts, how they
con&longs;i&longs;t.
SIMP.
I can &longs;carce refrain my laughter to &longs;ee the great Anti
pathy that
as name it, and yet it is &longs;o accommodate to re&longs;olve the doubt.
SALV.
Now let this, for the &longs;ake of
on of our &longs;cruple; and leaving the Digre&longs;&longs;ion, let us return to our
purpo&longs;e. Seeing that the difference of Velocity in Moveables of
divers Gravities is found to be more and more, as the
more and more Re&longs;i&longs;ting: And withall, that in a
Quick&longs;ilver, Gold doth not only go to the bottom more &longs;wiftly
than Lead, but it alone de&longs;cends in it, and all other Metals and
Stones move upwards therein, and flote thereon; whereas between
Balls of Gold, Lead, Bra&longs;s, Porphiry, or other grave matters, the in
equality of motion in the Air &longs;hall be almo&longs;t wholly in&longs;en&longs;ible, for
it is certain, that a Ball of Gold in the end of the de&longs;cent of an
hundred yards &longs;hall not out-&longs;trip one of Bra&longs;s four Inches: &longs;eeing
this, I &longs;ay, I have thought, that if we wholly took away the
Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the
Velocity.
Medium
ved, all Matters,
though of different
Gravities would
move with like
Velocity.
SIMP.
This is a bold &longs;peech,
that in
of Wooll would move as &longs;wiftly as a piece of Lead.
SALV.
Fair and &longs;oftly,
&longs;truce, nor I &longs;o incautelous, that you &longs;hould need to think that I
was not advi&longs;ed of it, and that con&longs;equently I have not found a re
ply to it. Therefore, for my explanation, and your information,
hearken to what I &longs;hall &longs;ay. We are upon the examination of
what would befall Moveables exceeding different in weight in a
rence of Velocity that is found between the &longs;aid Moveables ought
to be referred to the &longs;ole inequality of Weight. And becau&longs;e on
ly a Space altogether void of Air, and of every other, though te
nuous and yielding Body, would be apt &longs;en&longs;ibly to &longs;hew us what
we &longs;eek, &longs;ince we want &longs;uch a Space, let us &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively ob&longs;erve that
which happeneth in the more &longs;ubtill and le&longs;&longs;e re&longs;i&longs;ting
in compari&longs;on of that which we &longs;ee to happen in others le&longs;&longs;e &longs;ubtill
and more re&longs;i&longs;ting: for if we &longs;hould really find the Moveables
different in Gravity to differ le&longs;&longs;e and le&longs;&longs;e in Velocity, according
as the
finally, although extreamly unequal in weight, in a
tenuous than any other, though not void, the difference of Velo
city di&longs;covers it &longs;elf to be very &longs;mall, and almo&longs;t unob&longs;ervable, I
conceive that we may, and that upon very probable conjecture,
believe, that in a Therefore let us con&longs;ider that which hapneth in the Air; wherein
to have a Figure of an uniform Superficies, and very light Matter,
I will that we take a blown Bladder, in which the included Air
will weigh little or nothing in a
it can make but very &longs;mall Compre&longs;&longs;ion therein, &longs;o that the Gravi
ty is only that little of the &longs;aid film, which would not be the thou
&longs;andth part of the weight of a lump of Lead of the bigne&longs;s of
the &longs;aid Bladder when blown. The&longs;e,
from the height of four or &longs;ix yards, how great a &longs;pace, do you
judge, that the Lead would anticipate the Bladder in its de&longs;cent? A&longs;&longs;ure your &longs;elf that would not move thrice, no nor twice as fa&longs;t,
although even now you would have had it to have been a thou
&longs;and times more &longs;wift.
SIMP.
It is po&longs;&longs;ible that at the beginning of the Motion, that
is, in the fir&longs;t five or &longs;ix yards this might happen that you &longs;ay; but
in the progre&longs;&longs;e, and in a long continuation I believe, that the Lead
would leave it behind, not only &longs;ix, but al&longs;o eight and ten parts of
twelve.
SALV.
And I al&longs;o believe the &longs;ame: and make no que&longs;tion,
but that in very great di&longs;tances the Lead will have pa&longs;&longs;ed an hun
dred miles of But this,
my A&longs;&longs;ertion, is that which mo&longs;t e&longs;pecially confirmeth it. It is (I
Gravity is in no wi&longs;e the cau&longs;e of the divers velocities of Movea
bles of different Gravity, but that the &longs;ame dependeth on exteri
our accidents, & in particular, on the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the
that, this being removed, all Moveables move with the &longs;ame de
grees of Velocity. And this I chiefly deduce from that which but
now you your &longs;elf did admit, and which is very true, namely, that
of two Moveables, very different in weight, the Velocities more and
more differ, according as the ^{*} Spaces are greater and greater that
they pa&longs;&longs;e: an Effect which would not follow, if it did depend on
the different Gravities: for they being alwaies the &longs;ame, the pro
portion betwixt the Spaces would likewi&longs;e alwaies continue the
&longs;ame, which proportion we &longs;ee &longs;till &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively to encrea&longs;e in the
continuance of the Motion; for that the heavie&longs;t Moveable in the
de&longs;cent of one yard will not anticipate the lighte&longs;t the tenth part
of that Space or Way, but in the fall of twelve yards will out-go
it a third part, in that of an hundred will out&longs;trip it 90/100.
SIMP.
Very well: But following you &longs;tep by &longs;tep, if the dif
ference of weight in Moveables of different Gravities cannot
cau&longs;e the difference of proportion in their Velocities, for that the
Gravities do not alter; neither then can the
&longs;uppo&longs;ed alwaies to continue the &longs;ame, cau&longs;e any alteration in the
proportion of the Velocities.
SALV.
You wittily bring an in&longs;tance again&longs;t my Po&longs;ition, that
it is very nece&longs;&longs;ary to remove. I &longs;ay therefore, that a Grave Body
hath, by Nature, an intrin&longs;ick Principle of moving towards the
Common Center of heavy things, that is to that of our Terre&longs;trial
Globe, with a Motion continually accelerated, and accelerated
alwaies equally,
^{*} additions of new Moments, and degrees of Velocities: and this
ought to be under&longs;tood to hold true at all times when all acciden
tal and external impediments are removed; among&longs;t which there
is one that we cannot obviate, that is the Impediment of the
dium,
moved by the falling Moveable, to which tran&longs;ver&longs;e Motion the
with a Re&longs;i&longs;tance one while le&longs;&longs;er, and another while greater and
greater, according as it is more &longs;lowly or ha&longs;tily to open to give
pa&longs;&longs;age to the Moveable, which, becau&longs;e, as I have &longs;aid, it goeth
of its own nature continually accelerating, it cometh of con&longs;e
quence to encounter continually greater Re&longs;i&longs;tance in the
um,
new degrees of Velocity; &longs;o that in the end, the Velocity arriveth
to that &longs;wiftne&longs;&longs;e, and the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the
&longs;trength, that ballancing each other, they take away all further
form Motion, in which it afterwards continually abides. There is
therefore in the
it changeth its E&longs;&longs;ence, but becau&longs;e the Velocity altereth where
with it ought to open, and laterally move, to give pa&longs;&longs;age to the
falling Body, which goeth continually accelerating. Now the
ob&longs;erving, that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Air to the &longs;mall Moment or
the Lead is very &longs;mall, makes me hold for certain, that if one &longs;hould
wholly remove it, by adding to the Bladder great a&longs;&longs;i&longs;tance, and
but very little to the Lead, their Velocities would equalize each
other. Taking this Principle therefore for granted, That in the
were no Re&longs;i&longs;tance that might abate the Velocity of the Motion,
&longs;o that of all Moveables the Velocities were alike, we might con
gruou&longs;ly enough a&longs;&longs;ign the proportions of the Velocities of like
and unlike Moveables, in the &longs;ame and in different, Replear, and
therefore Re&longs;i&longs;ting
ing how much the Gravity of the
vity of the Moveable, which Gravity is the In&longs;trument wherewith
the Moveable makes its Way, repelling the parts of the
on each Side: an operation that doth not occur in void
and therefore there is no difference to be expected from the di
ver&longs;e Gravity: and becau&longs;e it is manife&longs;t, that the
from the Gravity of the Body by it contained, as much as is the
weight of &longs;uch another ma&longs;s of its own Matter, if the Velocities of
the Moveables that in a non-re&longs;i&longs;ting
been &longs;uppo&longs;ed) equal, &longs;hould dimini&longs;h in that proportion, we
&longs;hould have what we de&longs;ired. As for example; &longs;uppo&longs;ing that
Lead be ten thou&longs;and times more grave than Air, but Ebony a
thou&longs;and times only; of the Velocities of the&longs;e two Matters, which
ab&longs;olutely taken, that is, all Re&longs;i&longs;tance being removed, would be
equal, the Air &longs;ub&longs;tracts from the ten thou&longs;and degrees of the
Lead one, and from the thou&longs;and degrees of the Ebony likewi&longs;e
abateth one, or, if you will, of its ten thou&longs;and, ten. If there
fore the Lead and the Ebony &longs;hall de&longs;cend thorow the Air from
any height, which, the retardment of the Air removed, they would
have pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame time, the Air will abate from the ten
thou&longs;and degrees of the Leads Velocity one, but from the ten
thou&longs;and degrees of Ebony's Velocity it will abate ten: which is
as much as to &longs;ay, that dividing that Altitude, from which tho&longs;e
Moveables departed into ten thou&longs;and parts, the Lead will arrive
at the Earth, the Ebony being left behind, ten, nay, nine of tho&longs;e
&longs;ame ten thou&longs;and parts. And what el&longs;e is this, but that a Ball of
Lead, falling from a Tower two hundred yards high, to find how The Ebony weigheth a thou&longs;and times more than the Air, but that
Bladder &longs;o blown, weigheth only four times &longs;o much; the Air
therefore from the intrin&longs;ick and natural Velocity of the Ebony
&longs;ubducteth one degree of a thou&longs;and, but from that, which al&longs;o in
the Bladder would ab&longs;olutely have been the &longs;ame, the Air &longs;ub
ducts one part of four: &longs;o that by that time the Ball of Ebony
falling from the Tower, &longs;hall come to the ground, the Bladder
&longs;hall have pa&longs;&longs;ed but three quarters of that height. Lead is twelve
times heavier than Water, but Ivory only twice as heavy; the
Water therefore, from their ab&longs;olute Velocities which would be
equal, &longs;hall abate in the Lead the twelfth part, but in the Ivory
the half: when therefore, in the Water, the Lead &longs;hall have de
&longs;cended eleven fathom, the Ivory &longs;hall have de&longs;cended &longs;ix. And,
arguing by this Rule, I believe, that we &longs;hall find the Experiment
much more exactly agree with this &longs;ame Computation, than with
that of
ties of the &longs;ame Moveable in different fluid
ring the different Re&longs;i&longs;tances of the
exce&longs;&longs;es of the Gravity of the Moveable over and above the Gra
vities of the gr.
Air, and ten times heavier than Water; therefore dividing the ab
&longs;olute Velocity of the Tin into a thou&longs;and degrees, it &longs;hall move
in the Air, (which deducteth from it the thou&longs;andth part,) with nine
hundred ninety nine, but in the Water with nine hundred only;
being that the Water abateth the tenth part of its Gravity, and
the Air the thou&longs;andth part. Take a Solid &longs;omewhat heavier than
Water, as for in&longs;tance, the Wood called Oake, a Ball of which
weighing, as we will &longs;uppo&longs;e, a thou&longs;and drams, a like quantity
of Water will weigh nine hundred and fifty, but &longs;o much Air will
weigh but two drams,: it is manife&longs;t, that &longs;uppo&longs;ing that its ab&longs;o
lute Velocity were of a thou&longs;and degrees, in Air there would re
main nine hundred ninety eight, but in the Water only fifty; be
cau&longs;e that the Water of the thou&longs;and degrees of Gravity taketh
away nine hundred and fifty, and leaves fifty only; that Solid there
fore would move well-near twenty times as fa&longs;t in the Air as Wa
ter; like as the exce&longs;&longs;e of its Gravity above that of the Water is
the twentieth part of its own. And here I de&longs;ire that we may con
&longs;ider, that no matters, having a power to move downwards in the
Water, but &longs;uch as are more grave in Species than it; and con&longs;e
quently many hundreds of times, more grave than the Air, in
&longs;eeking what the proportions of their Velocities are in the Air and
Water, we may, without any con&longs;iderable errour, make account
that the Air doth not deduct any thing of moment from the ab&longs;o
lute Gravity, and con&longs;equently, from the ab&longs;olute Velocity of &longs;uch
ty above the Gravity of the Water, we may &longs;ay that their Velo
city in the Air, to their Velocity in the Water hath the &longs;ame propor
tion, that their total Gravity hath to the exce&longs;&longs;e of this above
the Gravity of the Water. For example, a Ball of Ivory weigh
eth twenty ounces, a like quantity of Water weigheth &longs;eventeen
ounces: therefore the Velocity of the Ivory in Air, to its Velocity
in Water is very neer as twenty to three.
Grave Bodies de
&longs;cending Natural
ly to the Center do
go continually en
crea&longs;ing till that
by the encrea&longs;e of
the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of
the
becometh uniform.
portions of the Ve
locities of different
Moveables in the
&longs;ame, and in diffe
rent
SAGR.
I have made a great acqui&longs;t in a bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e of it &longs;elf cu
rious, and in which, but without any benefit, I have many times
wearied my-thoughts: nor would there any thing be wanting for
the putting the&longs;e Speculations in practice, &longs;ave onely the way
how one &longs;hould come to know of what Gravity the Air, is in com
pari&longs;on to the Water, and con&longs;equently to other heavy matters.
SIMP.
But in ca&longs;e one &longs;hould finde, that the Air in&longs;tead of
Gravity had Levity, what ought one to &longs;ay of the foregoing di&longs;
cour&longs;es, otherwi&longs;e very ingenuous?
SALV.
It would be nece&longs;&longs;ary to confe&longs;&longs;e that they were truly
Aerial, Light, and Vain. But will you que&longs;tion whether the Air
be heavy, having the expre&longs;&longs;e
&longs;aying, That all the Elements have Gravity, even the Air it &longs;elf;
a &longs;igne of which (&longs;ubjoyns he) we have in that a ^{*} Bladder blown,
weigheth heavier than un&longs;well'd.
bottle made of a
Goat skin, u&longs;ed
to hold wine and
other Liquids.
SIMP.
That a
might proceed, as I could &longs;uppo&longs;e, not from the Gravity that is
in the Air, but in the many gro&longs;&longs;e Vapours intermixed with it in
the&longs;e our lower Regions; by means whereof I might &longs;ay, that the
Gravity of the Bladder, or
SALV.
I would not have you &longs;ay it, and much le&longs;&longs;e that you
&longs;hould make
and de&longs;iring to per&longs;wade me that the Element of Air is grave,
making me to &longs;ee it by an Experement: if in comming to the proof
he &longs;hould &longs;ay: Take a Bladder, and fill it with gro&longs;&longs;e Vapours;
and ob&longs;erve that its weight will encrea&longs;e; I would tell him that
it would weigh yet more if one &longs;hould fill it with bran; but would
afterwards adde; that tho&longs;e Experiments prove, that bran, and
gro&longs;&longs;e Vapours are grave: but as to the Element of Air, I &longs;hould
be left in the &longs;ame doubt as before. The Experiment of
therefore is good, and the Propo&longs;ition true. But I will not &longs;ay &longs;o
much, for a certain other rea&longs;on taken expre&longs;ly out of a Philo&longs;o
pher who&longs;e name I do not remember, but am &longs;ure that I have read
it, who argueth the Air to be more grave than light, becau&longs;e it
more ea&longs;ily carrieth grave Bodies downwards, than the light up
wards.
SAGR.
Good i-faith.
By this rea&longs;on then, the Air &longs;hall be
more ea&longs;ily downwards thorow the Air than thorow the Water,
and all light Bodies more ea&longs;ily upwards in this than in that: nay,
infinite matters a&longs;cend in the Water, that in the Air de&longs;cend. But be the Gravity of the Bladder,
the gro&longs;&longs;e Vapours, or pure Air, this nothing concerns our pur
po&longs;e, for we &longs;eek that which happeneth to Moveables that move
in this our Vaporous Region. Therefore, returning to that which
more concerneth me, I would for a full and ab&longs;olute informati
on in the pre&longs;ent bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e, not onely be a&longs;&longs;ured that the Air is
grave, as I hold for certain, but I would, if it be po&longs;&longs;ible, know
what its Gravity is. Therefore,
to &longs;atisfie me in this al&longs;o, I entreat you to favour me with the
&longs;ame.
SALV.
That there re&longs;ideth in the Air po&longs;itive Gravity, and
not, as &longs;ome have thought, Levity, which haply is in no Mat
ter to be found, the Experiment of the Blown-Bladder, alledged
by
if the quality of ab&longs;olute and po&longs;itive Levity were in the Air,
then the Air being multiplied and compre&longs;&longs;ed, the Levity would
encrea&longs;e, and con&longs;equently the propen&longs;ion of going upwards:
but Experience &longs;hews the contrary. As to the other demand, that
is, of the Method how to inve&longs;tigate its Gravity, I have tried to
do it in this manner: I have taken a pretty bigge Gla&longs;&longs;e ^{*} Bottle,
with its neck bended, and a Finger-&longs;tall of Leather fa&longs;t about
it, having in the top of the &longs;aid Finger-&longs;tall in&longs;erted and fa
&longs;tened a Valve of Leather, by which with a Siringe I have made
pa&longs;&longs;e into the Bottle by force a great quantity of Air, of which,
becau&longs;e it admits of great Conden&longs;ation, it may take in two or
three other Bottles-ful over and above that which is naturally con
tained therein. Then I have in an exact Ballance very preci&longs;ely
weighed that Bottle with the Air compre&longs;&longs;ed within it, adju&longs;ting
the weight with &longs;mall Sands. Afterwards, the Valve being opened,
and the Air let out, that was violently conteined in the Ve&longs;&longs;el, I
have put it again into the Scales, and finding it notably aleviated,
I have by degrees taken &longs;o much Sand from the other Scale, keep
ing it by it &longs;elf, that the Ballance hath at la&longs;t &longs;tood
with the remaining counter-poi&longs;e, that is with the Bottle. And
here there is no que&longs;tion, but that the weight of the re&longs;erved Sand
is that of the Air that was forceably driven into the Bottle, and
which is at la&longs;t gone out thence. But this Experiment hitherto a&longs;
&longs;ureth me of no more but this, that the Air violently deteined in
the Ve&longs;&longs;el, weigheth as much as the re&longs;erved Sand, but how much
the Air re&longs;olutely and determinately weigheth in re&longs;pect of the
Water, or other grave matter, I do not as yet know, nor can
for the di&longs;covering of this a Rule is nece&longs;&longs;ary, which I have
found may be performed two manner of wayes, one of which
is to take &longs;uch another Bottle or Flask as the former, and in like
manner bended, with a Finger-&longs;tall of Leather, the end of which
may clo&longs;ely imbrace the Volve of the other, and let it be very
fa&longs;t tied about it. It's requi&longs;ite, that this &longs;econd Bottle be bored in
the bottom, &longs;o that as by that hole we may thru&longs;t in a Wier,
wherewith we may, at plea&longs;ure, open the &longs;aid Volve, to let out
the &longs;uperfluous Air of the other Ve&longs;&longs;el, after it hath been weighed:
but this &longs;econd Bottle ought to be full of Water. All being pre
pared in the manner afore&longs;aid, and with the Wier opening the
Volve, the Air i&longs;&longs;uing out with impetuo&longs;ity, and pa&longs;&longs;ing into the
Ve&longs;&longs;el of Water, &longs;hall drive it out by the hole at the Bottom:
and it is manife&longs;t, that the quantity of Water which &longs;hall be
thru&longs;t out, is equal to the Ma&longs;&longs;e and quantity of Air that &longs;hall
have i&longs;&longs;ued from th'other Ve&longs;&longs;el: that Water therefore being
kept, and returning to weigh the Ve&longs;&longs;el lightned of the Air com
pre&longs;&longs;ed (which I &longs;uppo&longs;e to have been weighed likewi&longs;e fir&longs;t with
the &longs;aid forced Air) and the &longs;uperfluous &longs;and being laid by, as I
directed before; it is manife&longs;t, that this is the ju&longs;t weight of &longs;o
much Air in ma&longs;&longs;e, as is the ma&longs;&longs;e of the expul&longs;ed and re&longs;erved
Water; which we are to weigh, and &longs;ee how many times its
weight &longs;hall contain the weight of the re&longs;erved &longs;and: and we may
without errour affirme, that the Water is &longs;o many times heavier
than Air; which &longs;hall not be ten times, as it &longs;eemeth
held, but very neer four hundred, as the &longs;aid Experiment &longs;heweth.
&longs;itive Gravity.
may be computed.
long-neckt gla&longs;&longs;e
bottles in which
we have our
brought to us.
The other way is more expeditious, and it may be done with
one Ve&longs;&longs;el onely, that is with the fir&longs;t accomodated after the man
ner before directed, into which I will not that any other Air be
put, more than that which naturally is found therein; but I will,
that we inject Water without &longs;uffering any Air to come out,
which being forced to yield to the &longs;upervenient Water mu&longs;t of
nece&longs;&longs;ity be compre&longs;&longs;ed: having gotten in, therefore, as much
Water as is po&longs;&longs;ible, (but yet without great violence one cannot get
in three quarters of what the Bottle will hold) put it into the
Scales, and very carefully weigh it: which done, holding the
Ve&longs;&longs;el with the neck upwards, open the Volve, letting out the
Air, of which there will preci&longs;ely i&longs;&longs;ue forth &longs;o much as there is
Water in the Bottle. The Air being gone out, put the Ve&longs;&longs;el again
into the Scales, which by the departure of the Air will be found
lightened, and abating from the oppo&longs;ite Scale the &longs;uperfluous
weight, it &longs;hall give us the weight of as much Air as there is
Water in the Bottle.
SIMP.
The Contrivances you found out cannot but be con
fully &longs;atisfie my under&longs;tanding, they another way occa&longs;ion in
me much Confu&longs;ion, for it being undoubtedly true that the Ele
ments in their proper Region are neither heavy nor light, I can
not comprehend, how and which way that portion of Air, which
&longs;eemeth to have weighed gr.
terwards have that &longs;ame Gravity in the Air, in which the &longs;and is
contained that weigheth again&longs;t it: and therefore me thinks that
the Experiment ought not to be practiced in the Element of Air,
but in a
of Gravitation, if it really be owner thereof.
SALV.
Certainly the Objection of
and therefore its nece&longs;&longs;ary, either that it be unan&longs;werable, or that
the Solution be no le&longs;&longs;e acute. That that Air, which compre&longs;
&longs;ed, appeared to weigh as much as that &longs;and, left at liberty in its
Element is no longer to weigh any thing as the Sand doth, is a thing
manife&longs;t: and therefore for making of &longs;uch an Experiment, its
requi&longs;ite to choo&longs;e a place and
the Sand might weigh: for, as hath &longs;everal times been &longs;aid, the
merged therein, &longs;o much, as &longs;uch another quantity of the &longs;aid
the Air depriveth the Air of all its Gravity. The operation, there
fore, to the end it were made exactly, ought to be tried in a
cuum,
without any diminution. In ca&longs;e therefore,
&longs;hould weigh a portion of Air in a
convinced and a&longs;&longs;ured of the bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e?
&longs;ed and violently
pent up, weigheth in
a
how its weight is to
be e&longs;timated.
SIMP.
Verily I &longs;hould: but this is to defire, or enjoyn that
which is impo&longs;&longs;ible.
SALV.
And therefore the obligation mu&longs;t needs be great that
you owe to me, when ever I &longs;hall for your &longs;ake effect an impo&longs;&longs;ibi
lity: but I will not &longs;ell you that which I have already given you:
for we, in the foregoing Experiment, weigh the Air in a
and not in the Air, or in any other Replete
the Ma&longs;s,
Gravity is &longs;ub&longs;tracted by the &longs;aid
by rea&longs;on that it re&longs;i&longs;teth its being opened, driven back, and in a
word commoved; a &longs;ign of which is its pronene&longs;s to return in&longs;tant
ly to fill the Space up again, that the immer&longs;ed ma&longs;s occupied in it,
as &longs;oon as ever it departeth thence; for if it &longs;uffered not by that
immer&longs;ion, it would not operate again&longs;t the &longs;ame. Now tell me,
when you have in the Air the Bottle before filled with the &longs;ame Air
naturally contained therein, what divi&longs;ion, repul&longs;e, or, in &longs;hort,
what mutation doth the external ambient Air receive from the &longs;eDoth
it enlarge the Bottle, whereupon the Ambient ought the more to
retire it &longs;elf to make room for it? Certainly no: And therefore
we may &longs;ay, that the &longs;econd Air is not immer&longs;ed in the Ambient,
not occupying any Space therein; but is as if it was in a
nay more, is really con&longs;tituted in it, and is placed in Vacuities that
were not repleted by the former un-conden&longs;ed Air. And, really, I
know not how to di&longs;cern any difference between the two Con&longs;ti
tutions of Inclo&longs;ed and
no-ways pre&longs;s the Inclo&longs;ed, and in that the Inclo&longs;ed doth not re
repul&longs;e the The weight
therefore that is found in that &longs;ame conden&longs;ed Air, is the &longs;ame that
it would have, were it freely di&longs;tended in a
deed, that the weight of the Sand that weigheth again&longs;t it, as ha
ving been in the open Air, would in a
more than ju&longs;t &longs;o heavy; and therefore it is nece&longs;&longs;ary to &longs;ay, that
the weighed Air is in reality &longs;omewhat le&longs;&longs;e heavy than the Sand
that counterpoi&longs;eth it, that is, &longs;o much, by how much the like
quantity of Air would weigh in a
SIMP.
I had thought that there was &longs;omething to have been
wi&longs;hed for in the Experiments before produced; but now I am
thorowly &longs;atisfied.
though very great,
of the Gravity of
Moveables hath
no part in differer
cing their Veloci
ties.
SALV.
The things by me hitherto alledged, and in particular,
this, That the difference of Gravity, although exceeding great,
hath no part in diver&longs;ifying the Velocities of Moveables, &longs;o that,
notwith&longs;tanding any thing depending on that, they would all
move with equal Celerity, is &longs;o new, and at the fir&longs;t apprehen&longs;i
on &longs;o remote from probability, that, were there not a way to de
lucidate it, and make it as clear as the Sun, it would be better
to pa&longs;&longs;e it over in &longs;ilence, than to divulge it: therefore &longs;eeing
that I have let it e&longs;cape from me, its fit that I omit neither Expe
riment nor Rea&longs;on that may corroborate it.
SAGR.
Not onely this, but many other al&longs;o of your A&longs;&longs;erti
ons are &longs;o remote from the Opinions and Doctrines commonly
received, that &longs;ending them abroad, you would &longs;tir up a great
number of Antagoni&longs;ts: in regard, that the innate Di&longs;po&longs;ition of
Men doth not &longs;ee with good eyes, when others in their Studies
di&longs;cover Truths or Fallacies, that were not di&longs;covered by them
&longs;elves: and with the title of Innovators of Doctrines, little plea
&longs;ing to the ears of many, they &longs;tudy to cut tho&longs;e knots which
they cannot untie, and with &longs;ub-terranean Mines to blow up
tho&longs;e Structures, which have been with the ordinary Tools by
patient Architects erected: but with us here, who are far from
any &longs;uch thoughts, your Experiments and Arguments are
have other more palpable Experiments, and more convincing
Rea&longs;ons we would very gladly hear them.
SALV.
The Experiment made with two Moveables, as different
in weight as may be, by letting them de&longs;cend from a place on
high, thereby to &longs;ee whether their Velocity be equal, meets with
&longs;ome difficulty: for if the height &longs;hall be great, the
which is to be opened and laterally repelled by the
cadent Body, &longs;hall be of much greater prejudice to the &longs;mall Mo
ment of the light Moveable, than to the violence of the heavy
one; whereupon in a long way the light one will be left behind:
and in a little altitude it might be doubted whether there were
really any difference, or if there were, whether it would be
&longs;en&longs;ible. Therefore I have oft been thinking to reiterate the de
&longs;cent &longs;o many times from &longs;mall heights, and to accumulate toge
ther &longs;o many of tho&longs;e minute differences of time, as might inter
cede between the arrival or fall of the heavy Body to the ground,
and the arrival of the light one, which &longs;o conjoyned, would make
a time not onely ob&longs;ervable, but ob&longs;ervable with much facility
Moreover, that I might help my &longs;elf with Motions as &longs;low as po&longs;
&longs;ible may be, in which the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the
le&longs;&longs;e in altering the effect that dependeth on &longs;imple Gravity, I
have had thoughts to cau&longs;e the Moveable to de&longs;cend upon a de
clining Plane, not much rai&longs;ed above the Plane of the Horizon;
for upon this, no le&longs;&longs;e than in perpendicularity, we may di&longs;cover
that which is done by Grave Bodies different in weight: and pro
ceeding farther, I have de&longs;ired to free my &longs;elf from any what&longs;o
ever impediment, that might ari&longs;e from the Contact of the &longs;aid
Moveables upon the &longs;aid declining Plane: and la&longs;tly, I have ta
ken two Balls, one of Lead, and one of Cork, that above an hun
dred times more grave than this, and have fa&longs;tened them to two
&longs;mall threads, each equally four or five yards long, tyed on
high: and having removed a&longs;wel the one as the other Ball from
the &longs;tate of Perpendicularity, I have let them both go in the &longs;ame
Moment, and they de&longs;cending by the Circumferences of Circles
de&longs;cribed by the equal Strings their Semidiameters, and having
pa&longs;&longs;ed beyond the Perpendicular, they afterwards by the &longs;ame
way returned back, and reiterating the&longs;e Vibrations, and re
turns of them&longs;elves neer an hundred times, they have &longs;hewn ve
ry &longs;en&longs;ibly, that the grave
time of the light one, that it doth not in an hundred, no nor in a
thou&longs;and Vibrations, anticipate the time of one &longs;mall moment,
but that they keep an equal pa&longs;&longs;e in their Recur&longs;ions. They al&longs;o
&longs;hew the Operation of the
pediment on the Motion, doth much more dimini&longs;h the Vibrati
more or le&longs;&longs;e frequent, nay, when the Arches pa&longs;&longs;ed by the Cork
were not of above five or &longs;ix degrees, and tho&longs;e of the Lead fif
ty, they did pa&longs;s them under the &longs;ame times.
SIMP.
If this be &longs;o, how is it then that the Velocity of the
Lead is not greater than that of the Cork? that pa&longs;&longs;ing a jour
ney of &longs;ixty degrees, in the time that this pa&longs;seth hardly &longs;ix?
But what would you &longs;ay,
&longs;hould both di&longs;patch their Recur&longs;ions in the &longs;ame time, when the
Cork being removed thirty degrees from the Perpendicular,
&longs;hould pa&longs;s an arch of &longs;ixty, and the Lead removed from the
&longs;ame middle point onely two degrees, &longs;hould run an arch of four? would not then the Cork be &longs;o much more &longs;wift than the Lead?
and yet Experience &longs;hews that &longs;o it happeneth: therefore ob&longs;erve,
The gr.
Perpendicular, and thence let go, &longs;wingeth, and pa&longs;&longs;ing beyond
the Perpendicular, neer fifty more degrees, de&longs;cribeth an arch
of well neer an hundred degrees; and returning of its &longs;elf back
again, it de&longs;cribeth another arch, not much le&longs;&longs;e than the former,
and continuing its Vibrations, after a great number of them, it
finally returneth to Re&longs;t: Each of tho&longs;e Vibrations are made un
der equal times a&longs;wel tho&longs;e of ninety degrees, as tho&longs;e of fifty,
twenty, ten, or four; &longs;o that by con&longs;equence, the Velocity of the
Moveable doth &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively langui&longs;h and abate, in regard, that
under equal times it doth &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively pa&longs;&longs;e arches continually
le&longs;&longs;er and le&longs;&longs;er. The like, yea the &longs;elf &longs;ame effect is performed
by the Cork, hanging by a &longs;tring of the like length, &longs;ave that
in a le&longs;&longs;e number of Vibracions it returneth to Re&longs;t, as being le&longs;s
apt, by means of its Levity, to overcome the ob&longs;tacle of the Air:
and yet neverthele&longs;s all the Vibrations, both great and &longs;mall, are
made under times equal to one another, and equal al&longs;o to the
times of the times of the Vibrations of the Lead. Whereupon it
is true, that if whil&longs;t the Lead pa&longs;&longs;eth an arch of fifty degrees,
the Cork pa&longs;seth one but of ten, the Cork is then more &longs;low
than the Lead: but it will al&longs;o happen on the other &longs;ide, that the
Cork pa&longs;seth the arch of fifty degrees, when the Lead pa&longs;seth
but that of ten or &longs;ix; and &longs;o in &longs;everal times the Lead &longs;hall be
&longs;wifter onewhile, and the Cork another while: but if the &longs;ame
Moveables &longs;hall al&longs;o under the &longs;ame equal times, pa&longs;s arches that
are equal, one may then very &longs;afely &longs;ay, that their Velocities are
equal.
SIMP.
This di&longs;cour&longs;e &longs;eems to me concluding, and not con
cluding, and I finde in my thoughts &longs;uch a Confu&longs;ion, ari&longs;ing
from the one-while &longs;wift, another-while &longs;low, another-while ex
treme &longs;low motion of both the one and other Moveable; as that
Velocities are alwaies equal.
SAGR.
Give me leave, I pray you,
words. And tell me,
&longs;aid with ab&longs;olute verity that the Velocities of the Cork and of
the Lead are equal, in ca&longs;e, that both of them departing at the
&longs;ame moment from Re&longs;t, and moving by the &longs;ame declivities, they
&longs;hould alwaies pa&longs;&longs;e equal Spaces in equal times?
SIMP.
This admits of no doubt, nor can it be contradicted.
SAGR.
It hapneth now in the Pendulums that each of them
pa&longs;&longs;eth now &longs;ixty degrees, now fifty, now thirty, now ten, now
eight, four, and two; and when each of them pa&longs;&longs;eth the Arch of
&longs;ixty degrees they pa&longs;&longs;e it in the &longs;ame time; in the Arch of fifty the
&longs;ame time is &longs;pent by both the one and the other Moveable; &longs;o in
the Arch of thirty, of ten, and of the re&longs;t: and therefore it is con
cluded, that the Velocity of the Lead in the Arch of &longs;ixty degrees,
is equal to the Velocity of the Cork in the &longs;ame Arch of &longs;ixty de
grees: and that the Velocities in the Arch of fifty, are likewi&longs;e
equal to one the other, and &longs;o in the re&longs;t. But it is not &longs;aid, that the
Velocity that is exerci&longs;ed in the Arch of &longs;ixty is equal to the Ve
locity that is exerci&longs;ed in the Arch of fifty, nor this to that of the
Arch of thirty. But the Velocities are alwaies le&longs;&longs;er, in the le&longs;&longs;er
Arches. And this is collected from our &longs;en&longs;ibly &longs;eeing the &longs;ame
Moveable con&longs;ume as much time in pa&longs;&longs;ing the great Arch of &longs;ixty
degrees, as in pa&longs;&longs;ing the le&longs;&longs;er of fifty, or the lea&longs;t of ten: and, in a
word, in their being all pa&longs;&longs;ed alwaies under equal times. It is true
therefore, that both the Lead and the Cork &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively retard the
Motion, according to the Diminution of the Arches, but yet do
not alter their harmony in keeping the equality of Velocity in all
the &longs;ame Arches by them pa&longs;&longs;ed. I de&longs;ired to &longs;ay thus much, more
to try whether I have rightly apprehended the Conceit of
tus,
of a more plain Explanation than that of
in all other things, extreamly clear, and &longs;uch, that, it being fre
quent with him to re&longs;olve Que&longs;tions, in appearance not only ob
&longs;cure, but repugnant to Nature, and to the Truth, with Rea&longs;ons,
or Ob&longs;ervations, or Experiments very trite and familiar to every
one, it hath (as I have under&longs;tood from divers) given occa&longs;ion to
one of the mo&longs;t e&longs;teemed Profe&longs;&longs;ors of our Age to put the le&longs;&longs;e
e&longs;teem upon his Novelties, holding them to have as much of Sor
didne&longs;&longs;e, for that they depend on over low and popular Funda
mentals: as if the mo&longs;t admirable and mo&longs;t-to-be-prized Proper
ty of the Demon&longs;trative Sciences, were not to &longs;pring and ari&longs;e
from Principles known, under&longs;tood, and granted by every one. But let us, for all that, continue to banquet our &longs;elves with this diet
&longs;atisfied in under&longs;tanding and admitting, That the intern Gravity
of different Moveables hath no &longs;hare in differencing their Veloci
ties, &longs;o that all of them, for ought that dependeth on that, would
move with the &longs;ame Velocities; tell us,
place the &longs;en&longs;ible and apparent inequalities of Motion; and an
&longs;wer to that In&longs;tance that
wi&longs;e confirm, I mean, of &longs;eeing a Cannon Bullet move more &longs;wift
ly than a drop of Bird-&longs;hot, for the difference of Velocity &longs;hall be
but &longs;mall, in re&longs;pect of that which I object again&longs;t you of Movea
bles of the &longs;ame matter, of which &longs;ome of the greater will de&longs;cend
in a
others which are le&longs;&longs;er will not pa&longs;&longs;e in an hour, nor in four, nor in
twenty; &longs;uch are pebbles and minute gravel-&longs;tones, e&longs;pecially,
that &longs;mall &longs;and which muddieth the Water; in which
they will not de&longs;cend in many hours &longs;o much as two fathoms,
which Stones, and tho&longs;e of no great bigne&longs;&longs;e, do pa&longs;&longs;e in one beat
of the Pul&longs;e.
SALV.
That which the
bles, the more according as they are compared to one another, le&longs;s
grave
ceeds from the &longs;ub&longs;traction of weight. But how one and the &longs;ame
Moveables that differ only in Magnitude, although they are of
the &longs;ame Matter, and of the &longs;ame Figure, requireth for its expli
cation a more &longs;ubtil di&longs;cour&longs;e, than that which &longs;ufficeth for under
&longs;tanding how the more dilated Figure of the Moveable, or the
Motion of the
tardeth the Velocity of the &longs;aid Moveable. I reduce the cau&longs;e of
the &longs;aid Problem to the Scabro&longs;ity, and Poro&longs;ity, that is common
ly, and, for the mo&longs;t part, nece&longs;&longs;arily found in the Superficies of
Solid Bodies, the which Scabro&longs;ities, in their Motion, go repul&longs;ing
and commoving the Air, or other Ambient
have an evident te&longs;timony, in that we hear the Bodies, though made
as round as is po&longs;&longs;ible for them to be, to hum whil&longs;t they pa&longs;&longs;e ve
ry &longs;wiftly thorow the Air; and they are not only heard to hum, but
to whir and whi&longs;tle, if there be but in them &longs;ome more than ordi
nary cavity or prominency. We &longs;ee al&longs;o, that in turning round
every rotund Solid maketh a little wind: And what need more? Do we not hear a notable whirring, and in a very &longs;harp Accent,
made by a Top, while it turneth round on the ground with great
Celerity? The &longs;hrilne&longs;s of which whizzing groweth flatter accor
ding as the Velocity of the
more &longs;lacken: a nece&longs;&longs;ary Argument likewi&longs;e of the commotion
and percu&longs;&longs;ion of the Air by tho&longs;e (though very &longs;mall) Scabro&longs;iIt is not to be doubted, but that the&longs;e in the
de&longs;cent of Moveables, grating upon, and repul&longs;ing the fluid Am
bient, procure retardment in the Velocity, and &longs;o much the greater,
by how much the Superficies &longs;hall be greater, as is that of le&longs;&longs;er
Solids compared to bigger.
Scabro&longs;ity and Po
ro&longs;ity of the Super
ficies of Movea
bles, a probable
cau&longs;e of their grea
ter or le&longs;&longs;er Retar
dation.
SIMP. Stay, I pray you, for here I begin to be at a lo&longs;&longs;e: for
though I under&longs;tand and admit, that the Confrication of the
um
and that it more retardeth it where
is greater, yet do I not comprehend upon what ground you call the
Superficies of le&longs;&longs;er Solids greater: & farthermore if, as you affirm, the
greater Superficies ought to cau&longs;e greater retardment, the greater
Solids ought to be the &longs;lower, which is not &longs;o: but this Objection
may ea&longs;ily be removed, by &longs;aying, that although the greater hath
a greater Superficies, it hath al&longs;o a greater Gravity, upon which
the impediment of the greater Superficies hath not &longs;o much more
prevalent influence, than the impediment of the le&longs;&longs;er Superficies
hath upon the le&longs;&longs;er Gravity, as that the Velocity of the greater
Solid &longs;hould become the le&longs;&longs;er. And therefore I &longs;ee no rea&longs;on why
one &longs;hould alter the equality of the Velocities, whil&longs;t, that looking
how much the Moving Gravity dimini&longs;heth, the faculty of the Re
tarding Superficies doth dimini&longs;h at the &longs;ame rate.
SALV.
I will re&longs;olve all that which you object in one word.
Therefore,
when, of two equal Moveables of the &longs;ame Matter, and alike in Fi
gure (which undoubtedly would move with equal &longs;wiftne&longs;&longs;e) as
well the Gravity, as the Superficies of one of them dimini&longs;heth,
(yet &longs;till retaining the &longs;imilitude of Figure) the Velocity like
wi&longs;e, for the &longs;ame rea&longs;on, would not be dimini&longs;hed in that which
was le&longs;&longs;ened.
SIMP. Really, I think, that it ought &longs;o to follow as you &longs;ay,
granting the pre&longs;ent Doctrine with a
which teacheth, that the greater or le&longs;&longs;er Gravity hath no operati
on in accelerating or retarding Motion.
SALV.
And this I confirm; and grant you likewi&longs;e your Po
&longs;ition, from whence, in my opinion, may be inferred, That in ca&longs;e
the Gravity dimini&longs;heth more than the Superficies, there may be
introduced in the Moveable, in that manner dimini&longs;hed, &longs;ome re
tardment of Motion, and that greater and greater, by how much in
proportion, the diminution of the Weight was greater than the di
minution of the Superficies
SIMP.
I make not the lea&longs;t que&longs;tion of it.
dimini&longs;hed at the
&longs;ame rate in Super
ficies as in Weight,
retaining the &longs;imi
litude of the Fi
gures.
SALV.
Now know,
mini&longs;h the Superficies &longs;o much as the Weight keeping the &longs;imili
tude of Figure. For it being manife&longs;t, that in dimini&longs;hing of grave
Bulk happens to be dimini&longs;hed more than the Superficies, (care
being had to retain the &longs;imilitude of Figure) the Gravity likewi&longs;e
would come to be more dimini&longs;hed than the Superficies. But
metry
the Bulk and the Bulk in like Solids, than between their Superfi
cies. Which for your better under&longs;tanding, I &longs;hall explain in &longs;ome
particular ca&longs;e. Therefore fancy to your &longs;elf, for example, a Dye,
one of the Sides of which is gr.
its Surfaces &longs;hall be four Square Inches, and all &longs;ix, that is, all its
Superficies twenty four Square Inches. Then &longs;uppo&longs;e the &longs;ame
Dye at three &longs;awings cut into eight &longs;mall Dice, the Side of every
one of which will be one Inch, and one of its Surfaces an Inch
Square, and its whole Superficies &longs;ix Square Inches, of which the
whole Dye contained twenty four in its Superficial content. Now,
you &longs;ee, that the Superficial content of the little Dye is the fourth
part of the Superficial content of the great one, (for &longs;ix is the
fourth part of twenty four) but the Solid content of the &longs;aid Dye
is only the eighth part: therefore the Bulk, and con&longs;equently the
Weight, doth much more dimini&longs;h than the Superficies. And if
you &longs;ubdivide the little Dye into eight others, we &longs;hall have for
the whole Superficial content of one of the&longs;e, one and an half
Square Inches, which is the &longs;ixteenth part of the Superficies of the
fir&longs;t Dye; but its Bulk, or Ma&longs;s, is only the &longs;ixty fourth part of that. You &longs;ee therefore, how that in only the&longs;e two divi&longs;ions the Bulks
decrea&longs;e four times fa&longs;ter than their Superficies: and if we &longs;hould
pro&longs;ecute the Subdivi&longs;ion, untill that we had reduced the fir&longs;t So
lid into a &longs;mall powder, we &longs;hould find the Gravity of the minute
Atomes to be le&longs;&longs;ened an hundred and an hundred times more
than their Superficies. And this which I have exemplified in
Cubes, hapneth in all like Solids, the Bulks of which are in Se&longs;
quialter proportion of their Superficies. You &longs;ee, therefore, in how
much greater proportion the Impediment of the Contact of the
Superficies of the Moveable with the
Moveables, than in greater: and if we &longs;hould add, that the Sca
bro&longs;ities in the very &longs;mall Superficies of the minute Atomes are
not happily le&longs;&longs;er than tho&longs;e of the Superficies of greater Solids,
that are diligently poli&longs;hed, ob&longs;erve how fluid, and void of all Re
&longs;i&longs;tance being opened, the
give pa&longs;&longs;age to &longs;o feeble a Virtue. And therefore take notice,
plicius,
Superficies of le&longs;&longs;er Solids is greater, in compari&longs;on of that of
bigger.
SIMP.
I am wholly &longs;atisfied: and I verily believe, that if I were
to begin my Studies again, I &longs;hould follow the Coun&longs;el of
very &longs;crupulou&longs;ly, and refu&longs;e to admit any thing for certain, &longs;ave
that which they nece&longs;&longs;arily demon&longs;trate.
SAGR.
I have taken great delight in this Di&longs;cour&longs;e; but, be
fore we pa&longs;&longs;e any further, I would be glad to be &longs;atisfied in one
particular, which newly came into my thoughts, when but ju&longs;t
now you &longs;aid, that Like-Solids are in Se&longs;quialter proportion to
their Superficies for I have &longs;een, and under&longs;tood the Propo&longs;ition
with its Demon&longs;tration, in which it is proved, That the Superficies
of Like-Solids are in duplicate proportion of their Sides; and ano
ther that proveth the &longs;ame Solids to be in triple proportion of the
&longs;ame Sides; but the proportion of Solids to their Superficies, I do
not remember that I ever &longs;o much as heard it mentioned.
other in Se&longs;quial
ter proportion to
their Superficies.
SALV.
You your &longs;elf have an&longs;wered and declared the doubt.
For that which is triple of a thing of which another is double, doth
it not come to be Se&longs;quialter of this double? Yes doubtle&longs;&longs;e.
Now,
if Superficies are in double proportion of the Lines, of which the
Solids are in triple proportion, may not we &longs;ay, That the Solids are
in Se&longs;quialter proportion of their Superficies?
SAGR.
I under&longs;tand you very well.
And although other par
ticulars, pertaining to the matter of which we have treated, do re
main for me to ask, yet if we &longs;hould thus run from one Digre&longs;&longs;ion
to another, it will be late before we &longs;hould come to the Que&longs;tions
principally intended, which concern the diver&longs;ities of the Acci
dents of the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of Solids again&longs;t Fraction; and therefore,
if you &longs;o plea&longs;e, we may return to the fir&longs;t Theme, which we pro
po&longs;ed in the beginning.
SALV.
You &longs;ay very well; but the &longs;o many, and &longs;o different
things that have been examined, have &longs;toln &longs;o much of our time,
that there is but little of it left in this day to &longs;pend in our other
principal Argument, which is full of Geometrical Demon&longs;trati
ons that are to be con&longs;idered with attention: &longs;o that I &longs;hould think
it were better to adjourn our meeting till to morrow, as well for
this which I have told you, as al&longs;o becau&longs;e I might bring with me
&longs;ome Papers, on which I have, in order, &longs;et down the Theorems and
Problems, in which are propo&longs;ed and demon&longs;trated the different
Pa&longs;&longs;ions of this Subject, which, it may be, would not otherwi&longs;e
with requi&longs;ite Method come into my mind.
SAGR.
I very gladly comply with your advice, and &longs;o much the
more willingly, in regard that, for a Conclu&longs;ion of this daies Con
ference, I &longs;hall have time to hear you re&longs;olve &longs;ome doubts that I
find in my mind concerning the Point la&longs;t handled. Of which one
is, Whether we are to hold, that the Impediment of the
may be &longs;ufficient to a&longs;&longs;ign bounds to the Acceleration of Bodies of
very grave Matter, that are of great Bulk, and of a Spherical Figure:
is contained under the lea&longs;t Superficies, and therefore le&longs;&longs;e &longs;ubject
to Retardment. Another &longs;hall be, touching the Vibrations of Pen
dulums, and this hath many heads: One &longs;hall be, Whether all,
both Great, Mean, and Little, are made really and preci&longs;ely under
equal Times: And another, What is the proportion of the Times
of Moveables, &longs;u&longs;pended at unequal &longs;trings, of the Times of their
Vibrations I mean.
SALV.
The Que&longs;tions are ingenious, and, like as it is incident
to all Truths, I &longs;uppo&longs;e, that, which ever of them we handle, it will
draw after it &longs;o many other Truths, and curious Con&longs;equences,
that I cannot tell whether the remainder of this day may &longs;uffice
for the di&longs;cu&longs;&longs;ing of them all.
SAGR.
If they &longs;hall be but as delightful as the precedent, it
would be more grateful for me to employ as many daies, not to &longs;ay,
hours, as it is unto night, and I believe that
cloy'd with &longs;uch Argumentations as the&longs;e.
SIMP.
No certainly: and e&longs;pecially, when the Que&longs;tions trea
ted of are Phy&longs;ical, touching which we read not the Opinions or
Di&longs;cour&longs;es of other Philo&longs;ophers.
Figure, Greatne&longs;s,
and Gravity, is
checked by the Re
nitence of the
dium,
ver &longs;o tenuous, in
&longs;uch &longs;ort, that the
Motion continuing,
it is reduced to
equability.
SALV.
I come therefore to the fir&longs;t, affirming without any
hæ&longs;itation, that there is not a Sphere &longs;o big, nor of Matter &longs;o grave,
but that the Renitence of the
its Acceleration, and in the continuation of the Motion reduceth
it to Equability, of which we may draw a very clear Argument
from Experience it &longs;elf. For if any falling Moveable were able in
its continuation of Motion to attain any degree of Velocity, no
Velocity that &longs;hould be conferred upon it, could be &longs;o great but
that it would depo&longs;e it, and free it &longs;elf of it by help of the Impe
diment of the
&longs;cended through the Air, gr.
acquired ten degrees of Velocity, and that with the&longs;e &longs;hould enter
into the Water, in ca&longs;e the Impediment of the Water were not
able to prohibit &longs;uch a certain
crea&longs;e it, or at lea&longs;t would continue it unto the bottom; which is
not ob&longs;erved to en&longs;ue: nay, the Water, although it were but a few
fathoms in depth, would impede and debilitate it in &longs;uch a man
ner, that it will make but a &longs;mall impre&longs;&longs;ion in the bottom of the
River or Lake. It is therefore manife&longs;t, that that Velocity, of
which the Water had ability to deprive it in a very &longs;hort way,
would never be permitted to be acquired by it, though in a depth
of a thou&longs;and Fathoms. And why &longs;hould it be permitted to gain
it in a thou&longs;and, to be taken from it again in four? What need we
more? Do we not &longs;ee the immen&longs;e
the Cannon it &longs;elf, to be in &longs;uch a manner flatted by the interpo
Ship, it but very hardly reacheth to make a dent in it? The Air al
&longs;o, though very yielding, doth neverthele&longs;&longs;e repre&longs;&longs;e the Velocity
of the falling Moveable, although it be very heavy, as we may by
&longs;uch like Experiments collect; for if from the top of a very high
Tower we &longs;hould di&longs;charge a Mu&longs;quet downwards, this will make
a le&longs;&longs;er impre&longs;&longs;ion on the ground, than if we &longs;hould di&longs;charge the
Mu&longs;quet at the height of four or &longs;ix yards above the Plane: an
evident &longs;ign, that the
the Gun, di&longs;charged on the top of the Tower, doth gradually di
mini&longs;h in de&longs;cending thorow the Air: therefore the de&longs;cending
from any what&longs;oever great height will not &longs;uffice to make it ac
quire that
it, when it had in any manner been conferred upon it. The batte
ry likewi&longs;e that the force of a Bullet, &longs;hot from a Culverin, &longs;hall
make in a Wall at the di&longs;tance of twenty Paces, would not, I be
lieve, be &longs;o great, if the Bullet was &longs;hot perpendicularly from any
immen&longs;e Altitude. I believe, therefore, that there is a Bound or
term belonging to the Acceleration of every Natural Moveable
that departs from Re&longs;t, and that the Impediment of the
the end reduceth it to ^{*} Equality, in which it afterwards alwaies
continueth.
SAGR.
The Experiments are really, in my opinion, much to
the purpo&longs;e: nor doth any thing remain, unle&longs;&longs;e the Adver&longs;ary
&longs;hould fortifie him&longs;elf, by denying, that they will hold true in great
and ponderous Ma&longs;&longs;es, and that a Cannon-bullet coming from the
Concave of the Moon, or from the upper Region of the Air,
would make a greater percu&longs;&longs;ion than coming from the Cannon.
SALV.
There is no que&longs;tion, but that many things may be
objected, and that they may not be all &longs;alved by Experiments; ne
verthele&longs;&longs;e in this contradiction, me thinks, there is &longs;omething that
may fall under con&longs;ideration;
that the Grave Body, falling from an Altitude, acquireth &longs;o much
to that height, as is plainly &longs;een in a
that being removed fifty or &longs;ixty degrees from the Perpendicular,
gaineth that Velocity and Virtue which exactly &longs;ufficeth to force it
to the like Recur&longs;ion, that little abated, which is taken from it by
the Impediment of the Air. To con&longs;titute, therefore, the Cannon
bullet in &longs;uch an Altitude as may &longs;uffice for the acqui&longs;t of an
tus,
Piece, it would &longs;uffice to &longs;hoot it upwards perpendicularly with
the &longs;aid Cannon, and then ob&longs;erving, whether in its fall it maketh
an impre&longs;&longs;ion equal to that of the percu&longs;&longs;ion made near at hand in
its i&longs;&longs;uing forth; but, indeed, I believe, that it would not be any And therefore I hold that the Velocity,
which the Bullet hath near to its going out of the Piece, would
be one of tho&longs;e that the Impediment of the Air would never &longs;uffer
it to acquire, whil&longs;t it &longs;hould with a natural Motion de&longs;cend, leaving
the &longs;tate of Re&longs;t, from any great height. I come now to the other
Que&longs;tions belonging to
&longs;eem very frivolous, and more e&longs;pecially to tho&longs;e Philo&longs;ophers that
are continually bu&longs;ied in the more profound Que&longs;tions of Natural
Philo&longs;ophy: yet, notwith&longs;tanding, will not I contemn them, being
encouraged by the Example of
this above all things; that he hath not, as one may &longs;ay, omitted any
matter that any waies merited con&longs;ideration, which he hath not
&longs;poken of: and now upon the Que&longs;tions you propounded, I think
I can tell you a certain conceit of mine upon &longs;ome Problems con
cerning Mu&longs;ick, a noble Subject, of which &longs;o many famous men,
and
reth many curious Problems: &longs;o that if I likewi&longs;e &longs;hall from &longs;o fa
miliar and &longs;en&longs;ible Experiments, draw Rea&longs;ons of admirable acci
dents on the Argument of Sounds, I may hope that my di&longs;cour&longs;es
will be accepted by you.
falling from an
Altitude, acqui
reth &longs;o much
petus
val to the ground,
as in all probabili
ty, would &longs;uffice to
recarry it to the
&longs;ame height from
whence it fell.
SAGR Not only accepted, but by me, in particular, mo&longs;t pa&longs;
&longs;ionately de&longs;ired, in regard that I taking a great delight in all Mu
&longs;ical In&longs;truments, and being rea&longs;onably well in&longs;tructed concerning
Con&longs;onances, have alwaies been ignorant and perplexed with
endeavouring to know, whence it cometh that one &longs;hould more
plea&longs;e and delight me than another; and that &longs;ome not only pro
cure me no delight, but highly di&longs;plea&longs;e me: the trite Ptoblem al
&longs;o of the two Chords &longs;et to an Uni&longs;on, one of which moveth and
actually &longs;oundeth at the touching of the other, I al&longs;o am unre&longs;ol
ved in: nor am I very clearly informed concerning the Forms of
Con&longs;onances, and other particularities.
We will &longs;ee, if from the&longs;e our
ther any &longs;atisfaction in all the&longs;e Doubts. And as to the fir&longs;t Que
&longs;tion, that is, Whether the &longs;ame
ally perform all its Vibrations, great, le&longs;&longs;er, and lea&longs;t, under Times
preci&longs;ely equal; I refer my &longs;elf to that which I have heretofore
learnt from our
Moveable that &longs;hould de&longs;cend along the Chords, that are Subten
&longs;es to any Arch, would nece&longs;&longs;arily pa&longs;&longs;e them all in equal Times,
as well the Subten&longs;e under an hundred and eighty degrees, (that
is, the whole Diameter) as the Subten&longs;es of an hundred, &longs;ixty, ten,
two, or half a degree, or of four minutes: &longs;till &longs;uppo&longs;ing that they
all determine in the lowe&longs;t Point touching the Horizontal Plane. Next as to the de&longs;cendents by the Arches of the &longs;ame Chords eli
vated above the Horizon, and that are not greater than a Qua
they pa&longs;&longs;e all in Times equal, but yet &longs;horter than the Times of
the pa&longs;&longs;ages by the Chords: an effect which hath &longs;o much of won
der in it, by how much at the fir&longs;t apprehen&longs;ion one would think
the contrary ought to follow: For the terms of the beginning,
and the end of the Motion being common, and the Right-Line be
ing the &longs;horte&longs;t, that can be comprehended between the &longs;aid
Terms, it &longs;eemeth rea&longs;onable, that the Motion made by it &longs;hould
be fini&longs;hed in the &longs;horte&longs;t Time, which yet is not &longs;o: but the &longs;hor
te&longs;t Time, and con&longs;equently, the &longs;wifte&longs;t Motion, is that made by
the Arch of which the &longs;aid Right-Line is Chord. In the next
place, as to the Times of the Vibrations of Moveables, &longs;u&longs;pended
by &longs;trings of different lengths, tho&longs;e Times are in Subduple pro
portion to the lengths of the &longs;trings, or, if you will, the lengths
are in duplicate proportion to the Times, that is, are as the Squares
of the Times: &longs;o that if, for example, the Time of a Vibration
of one
it followeth, that the length of the &longs;tring of that is quadruple to
the length of the &longs;tring of this. And in the Time of one Vibration
of that, another &longs;hall then make three Vibrations, when the &longs;tring
of that &longs;hall be nine times as long as the other. From whence doth
follow, that the length of the &longs;trings have to each other the &longs;ame
proportion, that the Squares of the Numbers of the Vibrations that
are made in the &longs;ame Times have.
ding along the
Chords, that are
Subten&longs;es to any
Arch of a Circle,
pa&longs;&longs;e as well the
greater as the le&longs;
&longs;er Chords in equal
Times.
Pendula
ing along the Ar
ches of the &longs;ame
Chords, elivated as
far as 90 deg. pa&longs;s
the &longs;aid Arches in
Times equal, but
that are &longs;horter
than the tran&longs;iti
ons along the
Chords.
Vibrations of Mo
vables, hanging at
alonger or &longs;horter
thread, are to one
another in propor
tion &longs;ubduple the
lengths of the
&longs;trings, at which
they hang.
SAGR. Then, if I have rightly under&longs;tood you, I may ea&longs;ily
know the length of a &longs;tring, hanging at any never-&longs;o-great height,
although the &longs;ublime term of the &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;ion were invi&longs;ible to me,
and I only &longs;aw the other lower extream. For if I &longs;hall fa&longs;ten a
weight of &longs;ufficient Gravity to the &longs;aid &longs;tring here below, and &longs;et
it on vibrating to and again, and a friend telling &longs;ome of its Recur
&longs;ions, and I at the &longs;ame time tell the Recur&longs;ions of another Movea
ble, &longs;u&longs;pended at a &longs;tring that is preci&longs;ely a yard long, by the
Numbers of the Vibrations of the&longs;e
Time, I will find the length of the &longs;tring. As for example, &longs;uppo&longs;e
that in the time that my friend hath counted twenty Recur&longs;ions of
the long &longs;tring, I had told two hundred and forty of my &longs;tring,
that is one yard long: &longs;quaring the two numbers twenty and two
hundred and forty, which are 400, and 57600, I will &longs;ay, that the
long &longs;tring containeth 57600 of tho&longs;e Mea&longs;ures, of which my
&longs;tring containeth 400. and becau&longs;e the &longs;tring is one &longs;ole yard, I will
divide 57600 by 400, and the quotient will be 144, and I will af
firm that &longs;tring to be 144 yards long.
of any Rope, or
&longs;tring, at which a
Moveable hang
eth, by the frequen
cy of its Vibrations
SALV.
Nor will you be mi&longs;taken one Inch; and e&longs;pecially, if
you take a great Number of Vibrations.
SAGR.
You give me frequent occa&longs;ion to admire the Riches,
&longs;o common, and, I might in a certain &longs;ence &longs;ay, vile, you go col
lecting of Notions very curious, new, and oftentimes, remote
from all imagination. I have an hundred times con&longs;idered the Vi
brations, in particular, of the Lamps in &longs;ome Churches, hanging
by very long ropes, when they have been unawares &longs;tirred by
any one: but the mo&longs;t that I inferred from that &longs;ame Ob&longs;ervati
on, was the improbability of the Opinion of tho&longs;e who hold,
that &longs;uch-like Motions are maintained and continued by the
um,
a great judgment, and withal but little bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e to &longs;pend &longs;o ma
ny hours time in vibrating an hanging Weight with &longs;o much Regu
larity: but that I &longs;hould have learnt, that that &longs;ame Moveable,
&longs;u&longs;pended at a &longs;tring of an hundred yards long, being removed
from Perpendicularity one while ninety degrees, and another
while one degree onely, or half a degree, &longs;hould &longs;pend as much time
in pa&longs;&longs;ing this little, as in pa&longs;&longs;ing that great Arch, certainly would
never have come into my head, for I &longs;till think, that it bordereth
upon Impo&longs;sibility. Now I am in expectation to hear that the&longs;e
petty Notions will a&longs;sign me &longs;uch Rea&longs;ons of tho&longs;e Mu&longs;ical Pro
blems, as may, in part at lea&longs;t, give me &longs;atisfaction.
its Vibration &longs;o li
mited; that it is
not po&longs;&longs;ible to make
it move under any
other Period.
SALV.
Above all things, you are to know, that every
lum
it is impo&longs;&longs;ible to make it move under any other Period, than that
onely one, which is natural unto it. Let any one take the &longs;tring in
hand, to which the Weight is fa&longs;tened, and trie all the wayes
he can to encrea&longs;e or decrea&longs;e the frequency of its Vibrations,
and he &longs;hall finde it labour in vain: but we may, on the contrary,
on a
on it, conferre a Motion, and a Motion con&longs;iderably great, by
reiterating the bla&longs;ts, but under the Time that is properly be
longing to its Vibrations: for if at the fir&longs;t bla&longs;t we &longs;hould have re
moved it from Perpendicularity half an Inch, adding a &longs;econd,
after that it being returned towards us, is ready to begin the &longs;e
cond Vibration, we &longs;hould conferre new Motion on it, and &longs;o
&longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively with other bla&longs;ts, but given in Time, and not when
the
and not help the Motion) and &longs;o continuing with many Impul
&longs;es, we &longs;hould confer upon it &longs;uch an
force by much than that of a bla&longs;t of our breath, will be required
to &longs;tay it.
SAGR.
I have, from my childhood, ob&longs;erved, that one man a
lone, by means of the&longs;e Impul&longs;es, given in Time, hath been able
to towl a very great Bell, and when it was to cea&longs;e, I have &longs;een
four or &longs;ix men more lay hold on the Bell-rope, and they have all
arre&longs;t that
ferred upon the Bell.
SALV.
An example, that declareth my meaning with no le&longs;&longs;e
propriety than this that I have premi&longs;ed, doth &longs;ute to render the
rea&longs;on of the admirable Problem of the Chord of the Lute or Viol,
which moveth, and maketh not onely that really to &longs;ound, which
is tuned to the Uni&longs;on, but that al&longs;o which is &longs;et to an Eighth
and a Fifth. The Chord being toucht, its Vibrations begin, and
continue all the Time that its Sound is heard to endure: the&longs;e
Vibrations make the Air neer adjacent to vibrate and tremble,
who&longs;e tremblings and quaverings di&longs;tend them&longs;elves a great way,
and &longs;trike upon all the Chords of the In&longs;trument, and al&longs;o of o
thers neer unto it: the Chord that is &longs;et to an Uni&longs;on, with that
which is toucht, being di&longs;po&longs;ed to make its Vibrations ^{*} in the
&longs;ame Time, beginneth at the fir&longs;t impul&longs;e to move a little, and
a &longs;econd, a third, a twentieth, and many more, overtaking it, all
in ju&longs;t and Periodick Times, it receiveth at la&longs;t, the &longs;ame Tre
mulation, with that fir&longs;t touched, and one may clearly &longs;ee it go,
dilating its Vibrations exactly according to the Pace of its Mo
ver. This Undulation that di&longs;tendeth it &longs;elf thorow the Air, mo
veth, and makes to vibrate, not onely the Chords, but likewi&longs;e
any other Body di&longs;po&longs;ed to trembling, and to vibrate in the very
Time of the trembling Chord: &longs;o that if we fix in the Sides of
the In&longs;trument &longs;everal &longs;mall pieces of Bri&longs;tles, or of other flexible
matters, you &longs;hall &longs;ee upon the &longs;ounding of the Viol, now one,
now another of tho&longs;e Corpu&longs;cles tremble, according as that
Chord is toucht, who&longs;e Vibrations return in the &longs;ame Time: the
others will not move at the &longs;triking of this Chord, nor will that
Bri&longs;tle tremble at the &longs;triking of another Chord. If with the Bow
one &longs;martly &longs;trike the Ba&longs;e-Chord of a Viol, and &longs;et a drinking
Gla&longs;&longs;e, thin and &longs;mooth, neer unto it, if the Tone of the Chord
be an Uni&longs;on to the Tone of the Gla&longs;&longs;e, the Gla&longs;&longs;e &longs;hall dance,
and &longs;en&longs;ibly re-&longs;ound. Again, the ample dilating of the Tremor
or Undulation of the
parently &longs;een in making the Gla&longs;&longs;e to &longs;ound, by putting a little
Water in it, and then chafing the brim or edge of it with the tip
of the finger: for the included Water is ob&longs;erved to undulate in
a mo&longs;t regular order: and the &longs;ame effect will be yet more clearly
&longs;een, by &longs;etting the foot of the Gla&longs;&longs;e in the bottom of a rea&longs;o
nable large Ve&longs;&longs;el, in which there is Water as high almo&longs;t as to
the brim of the Gla&longs;&longs;e, for making it to &longs;ound, as before, with
the Confrication of the finger, we &longs;hall &longs;ee the trembling of the
Water to diffu&longs;e it &longs;elf mo&longs;t regularly, and with great Velocity,
to a great di&longs;tance round about the Gla&longs;&longs;e; and it hath many
full of Water, to &longs;ound as afore&longs;aid, to &longs;ee the Waves in the
Water, at fir&longs;t formed with an exact equality; and it hapning
&longs;ometimes, that the Tone of the Gla&longs;&longs;e ri&longs;eth an Eighth higher, at
the &longs;ame in&longs;tant, I have &longs;een every one of the &longs;aid Waves to divide
them&longs;elves in two: an accident that very clearly proveth the
forme of the Octave to be the double.
Mu&longs;ical In&longs;tru
ment touched, mo
veth, and maketh
the Chords &longs;et to an
Uni&longs;on, Fifth and
Eighth, with it to
&longs;ound; and why.
touching Mu&longs;ical
Proportions, and
their Solutions.
SAGR.
The &longs;ame hath al&longs;o befaln me more than once, to my
delight, and al&longs;o benefit: for I &longs;tood a long time perplexed a
bout the&longs;e Forms of Con&longs;onants, not conceiving, that the Rea
&longs;on, commonly given thereof by the Authours that have hither
to written learnedly of Mu&longs;ick, were &longs;ufficiently convincing,
they tell us, that the Diapa&longs;on, that is the Eighth, is contained
by the double, the Diapente, which we call the Fifth, by the
Se&longs;quialter: for a Chord being di&longs;tended on the ^{*} Monochord,
&longs;triking it all; and afterwards &longs;triking but the half of it, by pla
cing a Bridge in the middle, one heareth an Eighth; and if the
Bridge be placed at a third of the whole Chord, touching the
whole, and then the two thirds, it &longs;oundeth a Fifth; whereupon
they infer, that the Eighth is contained between two and one, and
the Fifth between three and two. This Rea&longs;on, I &longs;ay, &longs;eemed to
me not nece&longs;&longs;arily concluding for the a&longs;&longs;igning ju&longs;tly the double
and the Se&longs;quialter, for the natural Forms of the Diapa&longs;on and
the Diapente. And that which moved me &longs;o to think, was this.
There are three ways, by which we may &longs;harpen the Tone of a
Chord: one is, by making it &longs;horter, the other is by di&longs;tending;
or making it more ten&longs;e; and the third is by making it thinner. If,
retaining the &longs;ame Tention and thickne&longs;&longs;e, we would hear an
Eighth, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary to &longs;horten it to one half, which is done by
&longs;triking it all, and then half. But if, retaining the &longs;ame length
and thickne&longs;&longs;e, we would have it ri&longs;e to an Eighth, by &longs;crewing
it higher, it will not &longs;uffice to &longs;tretch it double as much, but we
&longs;hall need the quadruple, &longs;o that, if before it was &longs;tretched by a
Weight of one pound, it will be needful to fa&longs;ten four pound
to it to &longs;harpen it to an Eighth. And la&longs;tly, if, keeping the &longs;ame
length and Tention, we would have a Chord, that by being &longs;mal
ler, rendereth an Eighth, it will be nece&longs;&longs;ary, that it retain onely
a fourth part of the thickne&longs;&longs;e of the other more Grave. And this
which I &longs;peak of the Eighth, that is, that its form taken from the
Tention, or from the thickne&longs;&longs;e of the Chord, is in duplicate
proportion to that which it receiveth from the length, is to be
under&longs;toood of all other Mu&longs;ical Intervals: for that which the
length giveth us in a Se&longs;quialter proportion, e.
and then the two thirds, if you would have it proceed from the
Tention, or from the di&longs;gro&longs;&longs;ing, you mu&longs;t double the Se&longs;qui
Grave Chord were &longs;tretched by four pound weight, fa&longs;ten to the
Acute not &longs;ix, but nine: and, as to the thickne&longs;&longs;e, make the Grave
Chord thicker than the Acute, according to the proportion of
nine to four, to have the Fifth. The&longs;e being mo&longs;t exact Experi
ments, I thought, that I &longs;aw no rea&longs;on, why the&longs;e Sage Philo&longs;o
phers &longs;hould e&longs;tabli&longs;h the form of the Eighth to be rather the dou
ble, than quadruple; and the Form of the Fifth to be rather the
Se&longs;quialter, than the double Se&longs;quiquartan. But becau&longs;e the
numbring of the Vibrations of a Chord, which in giving a &longs;ound,
are extreme frequent, is altogether impo&longs;&longs;ible, I &longs;hould always
have been in doubt, whether or no it were true, that the more
Acute Chord of the Eighth, made in the &longs;ame time, double the
number of the Vibrations of the more Grave, if the Waves,
which may be continued as long as you plea&longs;e, by making the
Gla&longs;s to &longs;ound and vibrate, had not &longs;en&longs;ibly &longs;hewn me, that in
the &longs;elf &longs;ame moment that (&longs;ometimes) the Sound is heard to ri&longs;e
to an Eighth, there are &longs;een to ari&longs;e other Waves more minute,
which with infinite &longs;moothne&longs;s cut in the middle each of tho&longs;e
fir&longs;t.
of but one &longs;tring;
called by
&longs;ennus la Tromper
te Marine.
SALV.
An excellent Ob&longs;ervation for di&longs;tingui&longs;hing one by
one the Undulations ari&longs;ing from the Tremulation of the re
&longs;ounding Body: which are tho&longs;e that diffu&longs;ing them&longs;elves tho
row the Air, make the titillation upon the Drum of our Ear, that
in our Soul becommeth a Sound: But whereas beholding and ob
&longs;erving them in the Water, endure no longer than the confrica
tion of the finger la&longs;teth, and al&longs;o in that time they are not per
manent, but are continually made and di&longs;&longs;olved, would it not
be an ingenious undertaking, if one could make, with much
exqui&longs;itene&longs;&longs;e, &longs;uch, as would continue a long time; I mean
Moneths and Years, &longs;o as to give a man opportunity mea&longs;ure,
and with ea&longs;e to number them?
SAGR.
I a&longs;&longs;ure you I &longs;hould highly value &longs;uch an Invention.
SALV.
The di&longs;covery was accidental, and the Ob&longs;ervation
and applicative improvement of it onely were mine, and I hold
it to be a Circum&longs;tance of noble Contemplation, althongh a bu&longs;i
ne&longs;&longs;e in its &longs;elf &longs;ufficiently homely. Scraping a Bra&longs;&longs;e Plate with
an Iron Chizzel to fetch out &longs;ome Spots, in moving the Chizzel to
and again upon it pretty quick, I heard it (once or twice among&longs;t
many gratings) to Sibilate and &longs;end forth a whi&longs;tling noi&longs;e, very
&longs;hrill and audible: and looking upon the Plate, I &longs;aw a long
row of &longs;mall &longs;treaks, parallel to one another, and di&longs;tant from
one another by mo&longs;t equal Intervals: returning to my &longs;craping
again, I perceived by &longs;everal trials, that in tho&longs;e &longs;crapings, and
tho&longs;e onely that whi&longs;tled, the Chizzel left the &longs;treaks upon the
there was not &longs;o much as the lea&longs;t &longs;ign of any &longs;uch &longs;treaks. Re
peating the Experiment &longs;everal times afterwards, &longs;craping now
with greater, now with le&longs;&longs;e velocity, the Sibilation hapned to
be of a Tone &longs;ometimes acuter, &longs;ometimes graver; and I ob&longs;erved
the marks made in the more acute &longs;ounds to be clo&longs;er together,
and tho&longs;e of the more grave farther a&longs;under: and &longs;ometimes al&longs;o,
according as the &longs;elf &longs;ame &longs;crape was made towards the end, with
greater velocity than at the beginning, the &longs;ound was heard to
grow &longs;harper, and the &longs;treaks were ob&longs;erved to &longs;tand thicker,
but ever with extream neatne&longs;&longs;e, and marked with exact equidi
&longs;tance: and farther-more, in the Sibilating &longs;crapes; I felt the
Chizzel to &longs;hake or tremulate in my hand, and a certain chilne&longs;&longs;e
to run along my arm; and in &longs;hort, I &longs;aw the &longs;ame effected upon
the Toole, which we u&longs;e to ob&longs;erve in whi&longs;pering, and after
wards &longs;peaking aloud, for &longs;ending forth the breath without
forming a &longs;ound, we do not perceive any moving in the throat
and mouth, in compari&longs;on of that which we di&longs;cern to be in the
Wind-pipe and Throat of every one, in &longs;ending forth the voice;
and e&longs;pecially in grave and loud Tones. I have likewi&longs;e &longs;ome
times among&longs;t the Chords of the Viols, ob&longs;erved two that were
Uni&longs;ons to the Sibilations made by &longs;craping after the manner I
told you, and that were mo&longs;t different in Tone, from which two
they preci&longs;ely were di&longs;tant a perfect Fifth, and then mea&longs;uring
the intervals of the &longs;treaks of both the Scrapes, I &longs;aw the di
&longs;tance that conteined forty five &longs;paces of the one, conteined
thirty of the other: which, indeed, is the Form attributed to the
Diapente. But here, before I proceed any farther, I will tell you,
that of the three manners of rendring a Sound Acute, that which
you refer to the &longs;lenderne&longs;&longs;e or finene&longs;&longs;e of the Chord, may
with more truth be a&longs;cribed to the Weight. For the alteration ta
ken from the thickne&longs;&longs;e, an&longs;wereth, when the Chords are of the
&longs;ame matter; and &longs;o a Gut-&longs;tring to make an Eighth, ought to be
four times thicker than the other Gut-&longs;tring; and one of Wier four
times thicker than another of Wier. But if I would make an Eighth
with one of Wier to one of Gut-&longs;tring, I am not to make it four
times thicker, but four times graver, &longs;o that, as to thickne&longs;&longs;e,
this of Wier &longs;hall not be four times thicker, but quadruple in
Gravity, for &longs;ome times it &longs;hall be more &longs;mall than its re&longs;pon
dent to the Acuter Eighth, that is of Gut-&longs;tring. Hence it com
meth to pa&longs;&longs;e that, &longs;tringing an In&longs;trument with Chords of Gold,
and another with Chords of Bra&longs;&longs;e, if they &longs;hall be of the &longs;ame
length, thickne&longs;&longs;e, and Tention, Gold being almo&longs;t twice as
heavy, the Strings &longs;hall prove about a Fifth more Grave. And
here it is to be noted, that the Gravity of the Moveable more re
others at the fir&longs;t would think: for indeed, in appearance, its more
rea&longs;onable, that the Velocity &longs;hould be retarded by the Re&longs;i&longs;tance
of the
than in one grave and &longs;lender: and yet in this ca&longs;e it happeneth
quite contrary. But pur&longs;uing our fir&longs;t Intent, I &longs;ay, That the
ncere&longs;t and immediate rea&longs;ons of the Forms of Mu&longs;ical Intervals,
is neither the length of the Chord, nor the Tention, nor the
thickne&longs;&longs;e, but the proportion of the numbers of the Vibrations,
and Percu&longs;&longs;ions of the Undulations of the Air that beat upon the
Drum of our Ear, which it &longs;elf al&longs;o doth tremulate under the
&longs;ame mea&longs;ures of Time. Having e&longs;tabli&longs;hed this Point, we may,
perhaps, a&longs;&longs;ign a very apt rea&longs;on, whence it commeth, that of
tho&longs;e Sounds that are different in Tone, &longs;ome Couples are re
ceived with great delight by our Sence, others with le&longs;s, and
others occa&longs;ion in us a very great di&longs;turbance; which is to &longs;eek a
rea&longs;on of the Con&longs;onances more or le&longs;&longs;e perfect, and of Di&longs;lo
nances. The mole&longs;tation and har&longs;hne&longs;&longs;e of the&longs;e proceeds, as I
believe, from the di&longs;cordant Pul&longs;ations of two different Tones,
which di&longs;proportionally &longs;trike the Drum of our Ear: and the
Di&longs;&longs;onances &longs;hall be extreme har&longs;h, in ca&longs;e the Times of the Vi
brations were incommen&longs;urable. For one of which take that,
when of two Chords &longs;et to an Uni&longs;on, one is &longs;ounded, and &longs;uch
a part of another, as is the Side of the Square of its Diameter;
a Di&longs;&longs;onance like to the ^{*} Tritone, or Semi-diapente. Con&longs;onan
ces, and with plea&longs;ure received, &longs;hall tho&longs;e Couples of Sounds
be, that &longs;hall &longs;trike in &longs;ome order upon the Drum; which order
requireth, fir&longs;t, that the Pul&longs;ations made in the &longs;ame Time be
commen&longs;urable in number, to the end, the Cartillage of the Drum,
may not &longs;tand in the perpetual Torment of a double inflection of
allowing and obeying the ever di&longs;agreeing Percu&longs;&longs;ions. Therefore
the fir&longs;t and mo&longs;t grateful Con&longs;onance &longs;hall be the Eighth, being,
that for every &longs;troke, that the Grave-&longs;tring or Chord giveth upon
the Drum, the Acute giveth, two; &longs;o that both beat together
in every &longs;econd Vibration of the Acute Chord; and &longs;o of the
whole number of &longs;trokes, the one half accord to &longs;trike together,
but the &longs;trokes of the Chords that are Uni&longs;ons, alwayes joyn
both together, and therefore they are, as if they were of the
&longs;ame Chord, nor make they a Con&longs;onance. The Fifth delighteth
likewi&longs;e, in regard, that for every two &longs;troaks of the Grave
Chord, the Acute giveth three: from whence it followeth, that
numbering the Vibrations of the Acute Chord, the third part of
that number will agree to beat together; that is, two Solitary ones
interpo&longs;e between every couple of Con&longs;onances; and in the Di
ate&longs;&longs;eron there interpo&longs;e three. In the &longs;econd, that is in the
&longs;ort with the other of the Graver Chord; all the re&longs;t are Di&longs;cords,
and received upon the Drum with regret, and are judged Di&longs;&longs;o
nances by the Ear.
SIMP.
I could wi&longs;h this Di&longs;cour&longs;e were a little explained.
SALV.
Suppo&longs;e this line A B the Space, and dilating of a Vi
bration of the Grave Chord; and the line C D that of the Acute
Chord, which with the other giveth the Eighth: and let A B be
divided in the mid&longs;t in E. It is manife&longs;t, that the Chords begin
ing to move at the terms A and C, by that time the Acute Vibra
tion &longs;hall be come to the term D, the other
&longs;hall be di&longs;tended onely to the half E, which
not being the bound or term of the Motion,
it &longs;trikes not: but yet a &longs;troak is made in D. The Vibrations afterwards returning from D
to C, the other pa&longs;&longs;eth from E to B, where
upon the two Percu&longs;&longs;ions of B and C &longs;trike
both together upon the Drum: and &longs;o con
tinuing to reiterate the like &longs;ub&longs;equent Vi
brations; one &longs;hall &longs;ee, that the union of the
Percu&longs;&longs;ions of the Vibrations C D with tho&longs;e of A B, happen al
ternately every other time: but the Pullations of the terms A B
are alwayes accompanied with one of C D, and that alwayes the
&longs;ame: which is manife&longs;t, for &longs;uppo&longs;ing that A and C &longs;trike to
gether; in the time that A is pa&longs;&longs;ing to B, C goeth to D, and
returneth back to C: &longs;o that the &longs;troaks at B and C are al&longs;o
together. But now let the two Vibrations A B and C D be tho&longs;e
that produce the Diapente, the times of which are in proportion
Se&longs;quialter, and divide A B of the Grave Chord, in three equal
parts in E and O; And &longs;uppo&longs;e the Vibrations to begin at the
&longs;ame moment from the terms A and C: It is manife&longs;t, that at the
&longs;troke that &longs;hall be made in D, the Vibration of A B &longs;hall have
got no farther than O, the Drum therefore receiveth the Pul&longs;a
tion D onely: again in the return from D to C, the other Vibra
tion pa&longs;&longs;eth from O to B, and returneth to O, making the Pul
&longs;ation in B, which likewi&longs;e is &longs;olitary, and in Counter-time, (an
accident to be con&longs;idered:) for we having &longs;uppo&longs;ed the fir&longs;t
Pul&longs;ations to be made at the &longs;ame moment in the terms A and C,
the &longs;econd, which was onely by the term D, was made as long after
as the time of the tran&longs;ition C D, that is A O, imports; but
that which followeth, made in B, is di&longs;tant from the other one
ly &longs;o much as is the time O B, which is the half: afterwards con
tinuing the Recur&longs;ion from O to A, whil&longs;t the other goeth from
C to D, the two Pul&longs;ations come to be made both at once in A
and D. There afterwards follow other Periods like to the&longs;e, that
the Acute Chord, and one of the Grave Chord, likewi&longs;e &longs;olita
ry, is interpo&longs;ed between the two &longs;olitary &longs;trokes of the Acute. So
that if we did but &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time divided into Moments, that is,
into &longs;mall equal Particles: &longs;uppo&longs;ing that in the two fir&longs;t moments,
I pa&longs;&longs;ed from the Concordant Pul&longs;ations made in A and C to O
and D, and that in D, I make a Percu&longs;&longs;ion: and that in the third
and fourth moment I return from D to C, &longs;triking in C, and
that from O, I pa&longs;t to B, and returned to O, &longs;triking in B; and
that la&longs;tly in the fifth and &longs;ixth moment from O and C, I pa&longs;t to
A and D &longs;triking in both: we &longs;hall have the Pul&longs;ations di&longs;tributed
with &longs;uch order upon the Drum, that &longs;uppo&longs;ing the Pul&longs;ations of
the two Chords in the &longs;ame in&longs;tant, it &longs;hall two moments after
receive a &longs;olitary Percu&longs;&longs;ion, in the third moment anothor, &longs;oli
tary likewi&longs;e, in the fourth another &longs;ingle one, and two moments
after, that is, in the &longs;ixth, two together; and here ends the
Period, and, if I may &longs;o &longs;ay, Anomaly; which Period is oft-times
afterwards replicated.
SAGR.
I can hold no longer, but mu&longs;t needs expre&longs;&longs;e the con
tent I take in hearing rea&longs;ons &longs;o appo&longs;itely a&longs;&longs;igned of effects that
have &longs;o long time held me in darkne&longs;&longs;e and blindne&longs;&longs;e. Now I
know why the Uni&longs;on differeth not at all from a &longs;ingle Tone: I
&longs;ee why the Eighth is the principal Con&longs;onance, but withal &longs;o
like to an Uni&longs;on, that, as an Uni&longs;on, it is taken and cojoyned
with others: it re&longs;embleth an Uni&longs;on, for that whereas the Pul
&longs;ations of Chords &longs;et to an Uni&longs;on, keep time in &longs;triking, the&longs;e
of the Grave Chord in an Eighth alwayes keep time with tho&longs;e
of the Acute, and of the&longs;e one interpo&longs;eth alone, and in equal
di&longs;tances, and as, one may &longs;ay, without any variety, whereupon
that Con&longs;onance is over &longs;weet. But the Fifth, with tho&longs;e its
Counter-times, and with the interpo&longs;ures of two &longs;olitary Pul&longs;a
tions of the Acute Chord, and one of the Grave Chord,
between the Couples of Di&longs;cordant Pul&longs;ations, and tho&longs;e
three &longs;olitary ones, with an interval of time, as great as the half of
that which interpo&longs;eth between each Couple, and the &longs;olitary
Percu&longs;&longs;ions of the Acute Chord, maketh &longs;uch a Titillation and
Tickling upon the Cartillage of the Drum of the Ear, that al
laying the Dulcity with a mixture of Acrimony, it &longs;eemeth at
one and the &longs;ame time to ki&longs;&longs;e and bite.
SALV.
It is convenient, in regard I &longs;ee, that you take &longs;uch de
light in the&longs;e Novelties, that I &longs;hew you the way whereby the Eye
al&longs;o, and not the Ear alone, may recreate it &longs;elf in beholding
the &longs;ame &longs;ports that the Ear feeleth. Su&longs;pend Balls of Lead or o
ther heavy matter on three &longs;trings of different lengths, but in
&longs;uch proportion, that while the longer maketh two Vibrations,
will happen, when the longe&longs;t containeth &longs;ixteen feet, or other
mea&longs;ures, of which the middle one containeth nine, and the
&longs;horte&longs;t four: and removing them all together from Perpendi
cularity, and then letting them go, you &longs;hall &longs;ee a plea&longs;ing In
termixtion of the &longs;aid
&longs;uch, that, at every fourth Vibration of the longe&longs;t, all the three
will concurre in one and the &longs;ame term together, and then again
will depart from it, reiterating anew the &longs;ame Period: the which
commixture of Vibrations, is the &longs;ame, that being made by the
Chords, pre&longs;ents to the Ear an Eighth, with a Fifth in the mid&longs;t. And if you qualifie the length of other &longs;trings in the like di&longs;po
&longs;ure, &longs;o that their Vibrations an&longs;wer to tho&longs;e of other Mu&longs;ical,
but Con&longs;onant Intervals, you &longs;hall &longs;ee other and other Inter
weavings, and alwaies &longs;uch, that in determinate times, and after
determinate numbers of Vibrations, all the &longs;trings (be they three,
or be they four) will agree to joyn in the &longs;ame moment, in the
term of their Recur&longs;ions, and from thence to begin &longs;uch another
Period: but if the Vibrations of two or more &longs;trings are either
Incommen&longs;urable, &longs;o, that they never return harmoniou&longs;ly to ter
minate determinate numbers of Vibrations, or though they be
not Incommen&longs;urable, yet if they return not till after a long time,
and after a great number of Vibrations, then the &longs;ight is con
founded in the di&longs;orderly order of irregular Intermixtures, and
the Ear with wearine&longs;&longs;e and regret receiveth the intemperate Im
pul&longs;es of the Airs Tremulations, that without Order or Rule,
&longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively beat upon its Drum.
But whither, my Ma&longs;ters, have we been tran&longs;ported for &longs;o
many hours by various Problems, and unlook't for Di&longs;cour&longs;es? We have made it Night, and yet we have handled few or none of
the points propounded; nay we have &longs;o lo&longs;t our way, that I
&longs;car&longs;e remember our fir&longs;t entrance, and that &longs;mall Introduction,
which we laid down, as the Hypothe&longs;is and beginning of the fu
ture Demon&longs;trations.
SAGR It will be convenient, therefore, that we break up our
Conference for this time, giving our Minds leave to compo&longs;e
them&longs;elves in the Nights Repo&longs;e, that we may to Morrow (if
you plea&longs;e &longs;o far to favour us) rea&longs;&longs;ume the Di&longs;cour&longs;es de&longs;ired,
and chiefly intended.
SALV.
I &longs;hall not fail to be here to Morrow at the u&longs;ual
hour, to &longs;erve and enjoy you.
GALILEUS,
HIS
DIALOGUES
OF
MOTION.
The Second Dialogue.
SALVIATUS, SAGREDUS, and SIMPLICIUS.
SAGREDUS.
ing, and we have been trying to recall to
memory our la&longs;t Con&longs;ideration, which, as
the Principle and Suppo&longs;ition, on which
you ground the Conclu&longs;ions that you in
tended to Demon&longs;trate to us, was that
Re&longs;i&longs;tance, that all Bodies have to
on,
nects and glutinates the parts, &longs;o, as that
they do not &longs;eparate and divide without a powerful attraction:
and our enquiry hath been, what might be the Cau&longs;e of that
Coherence, which in &longs;ome Solids is very vigorous; propounding
that of
many Digre&longs;&longs;ions as held us the whole day, and far from the
&longs;i&longs;tances of Solids to Fraction.
SALV.
I remember all that hath been &longs;aid, and returning to
our begun di&longs;cour&longs;e; What ever this Re&longs;i&longs;tance of Solids to brea
king by a violent attraction, is &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be, it is &longs;ufficient, that it
is to be found in them: which, though it be very great again&longs;t the
&longs;trength of one that draweth them &longs;treight out, it is ob&longs;erved to be
le&longs;&longs;e in forcing them tran&longs;ver&longs;ely, or &longs;idewaies: and thus we &longs;ee,
for example, a rod of Steel, or Gla&longs;&longs;e to &longs;u&longs;tain the length-waies a
weight of a thou&longs;and pounds, which, fa&longs;tned at Right-Angles in
to a Wall, will break if you hang upon it but only fifty. And of
this &longs;econd Re&longs;i&longs;tance we are to &longs;peak, enquiring, according to
what proportions it is found in Pri&longs;mes, and Cylinders of like and
unlike figure, length, and thickne&longs;s, and, withal, of the &longs;ame mat
ter. In which Speculation, I take for a known Principle, that which
in the Mechanicks is demon&longs;trated among&longs;t the Pa&longs;&longs;ions of the
Vectis, which we call the Leaver: namely, That in that u&longs;e of the
Leaver, the Force is to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance in Reciprocal proportion,
as the Di&longs;tances from the Fulciment to the &longs;aid Force and the Re
&longs;i&longs;tance.
SIMP.
This
any other man.
SALV.
I am content to grant him the precedency in time, but
for the firmne&longs;&longs;e o&longs; Demon&longs;tration, I think, that
ought to be preferred far before him, on one &longs;ole Propo&longs;ition of
whom, by him demon&longs;trated in his Book,
depend the Rea&longs;ons, not only of the Leaver, but of the greater
part of the other Mechanick In&longs;truments.
SAGR.
But &longs;ince that this Principle is the foundation of all
that which you intend to demon&longs;trate to us, it would be very re
qui&longs;ite, that you produce us the proof of this &longs;ame Suppo&longs;ition,
if it be not too long a work, giving us a full and perfect informati
on thereof.
SALV.
Though I am to do this, yet it will be better, that I lead
you into the field of all our future Speculations, by an enterance
&longs;omewhat different from that of
&longs;ing no more, but only that equal Weights, put into a Ballance of
equal Arms, make an
by
&longs;trate to you, that not only it is as true as the other, That unequal
Weights make an
cording to the proportion of tho&longs;e Weights Reciprocally &longs;u&longs;pen
ded, but that it is one and the &longs;ame thing to place equal Weights
at equal di&longs;tances, as to place unequal Weights at di&longs;tances that
are in Reciprocal Proportion to the Weights. Now for a plain
A B, [
its ends at the Line H I, and &longs;u&longs;tained by two Cords, H A, and I B. It is manife&longs;t, that if I &longs;u&longs;pend the whole by the Cord C, placed
in the middle of the Beam or Ballance H I, the Pri&longs;m A B will be
equilibrated, one half of its weight, being on one &longs;ide, and the other
half on the other &longs;ide of the Point of Su&longs;pen&longs;ion C by the Princi
ple that we pre&longs;uppo&longs;ed. Now let the Pri&longs;m be divided into un
equal parts by the Line D, and let the part D A be grea
ter, and D B le&longs;&longs;er; and to the end, that &longs;uch divi&longs;ion being made,
the Parts of the Pri&longs;m may re&longs;t in the &longs;ame &longs;cituation and con&longs;ti
tution, in re&longs;pect of the Line H I, let us help it with a Cord E D,
which, being fa&longs;tened in the Point E, &longs;u&longs;taineth the parts A D, and
D B: It is not to be doubted, but that there being no local muta
tion in the Pri&longs;m, in re&longs;pect of the Ballance H I, it &longs;hall remain in
the &longs;ame &longs;tate of Equilibration. But it will re&longs;t in the &longs;ame Con
&longs;titution likewi&longs;e, if the Part of the Pri&longs;m, that is now &longs;u&longs;pended at
the two extreams, or ends with Cords A H and D E, be hanged at
one &longs;ole Cord G L, placed in the mid&longs;t: and likewi&longs;e the other
part D B, will not change &longs;tate, if &longs;u&longs;pended by the middle, and
&longs;u&longs;tained by the Cord F M. So that the Cords H A, E D, and I B
being untied, and only the two Cords G L, and F M being left, the
the Point C. Now, here let us confider, that we have two Grave
Bodies A D, and D B, hanging at the terms G and F of a Beam
G F, in which the
manner, that the di&longs;tance of the &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;ion of the Weight A D
from the Point C, is the Line C G, and the other part C F, is the
di&longs;tance at which the other Weight D B hangeth. It remaineth,
therefore, only to be demon&longs;trated, that tho&longs;e Di&longs;tances have the
&longs;ame proportion to one another, as the Weights them&longs;elves have,
but reciprocally taken: that is, that the di&longs;tance G C is to the di
&longs;tance C F, as the Pri&longs;m D B to the Pri&longs;m D A, which we prove
thus. The Line G E being the half of E H, and E F the half of
E I, all G F &longs;hall be equall to all H I, and therefore equal to C I:
and taking away the common part C F, the remainder G C &longs;hall
be equal to the remainder F I, that is, to F E: and C E taken in
common, the two Lines G E and C F &longs;hall be equal: and, there
fore, as G E, is to E F, &longs;o is F C, to C G: but as G C is to E F, &longs;o is
the double to the double; that is H E to E I; that is, the Pri&longs;m
A D to the Pri&longs;m D B. Therefore by Equality of proportion,
and by Conver&longs;ion, as the di&longs;tance G C is to the di&longs;tance C F, &longs;o
is the Weight B D to the Weight D A: which is that that I was to
demon&longs;trate. If you under&longs;tand this, I believe that you will not
&longs;cruple to admit, that the two Pri&longs;mes A D, and D B make an
on the right hand of the Su&longs;pen&longs;ion C, and the other half on the
left; and that in this manner there are repre&longs;ented two equal
Weights, di&longs;po&longs;ed and di&longs;tended at two equal di&longs;tances. Again,
that the two Pri&longs;mes A D, and D B, being reduced into two Dice,
or two Balls, or into any two other Figures, (provided that they
keep the &longs;ame Su&longs;pen&longs;ions G and F) do continue to make their
mo&longs;t manife&longs;t, that Figures change not weight, where the &longs;ame
quantity of matter is retained. From which we may gather the
general Conclu&longs;ion, That two Weights, whatever they be, make
an
vities. This Principle, therefore, being e&longs;tabli&longs;hed, before we pa&longs;s
any farther, I am to propo&longs;e to Con&longs;ideration, how the&longs;e Forces,
Re&longs;i&longs;tances, Moments, Figures, may be con&longs;idered in Ab&longs;tract,
and &longs;eparate from Matter, as al&longs;o in Concrete and conjoyned
with Matter; and in this manner tho&longs;e Accidents that agree with
Figures, con&longs;idered as Immaterial, &longs;hall receive certain Modifica
tions, when we &longs;hall come to add Matter to them, and con&longs;equent
ly Gravity. As for example, if we take a Leaver, as for in&longs;tance
B A [2.] which, re&longs;ting upon the Fulciment E, we ap
ply to rai&longs;e the heavy Stone D: It is manife&longs;t by the Principle de
mon&longs;trated, that the Force placed at the end B, &longs;hall &longs;uffice to
equal the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Weight D, if &longs;o be, that its Moment
have the &longs;ame proportion to the Moment of the &longs;aid D, that the
Di&longs;tance A C hath to the Di&longs;tance C B: and this is true, if we
confider no other Moments than tho&longs;e of the &longs;imple Force in B,
and of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance in D, as if the &longs;aid Leaver were immaterial,
and void of Gravity. But if we bring to account the Gravity al&longs;o
of the In&longs;trument or Leaver it &longs;elf, which hapneth &longs;ometimes to be
of Wood, and &longs;ometimes of Iron; it is manife&longs;t, that the weight
of the Leaver, being added to the Force in B, it will alter the pro
portion, which it will be requi&longs;ite to deliver in other terms. And
therefore before we pa&longs;&longs;e any farther, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary, that we di
&longs;tingui&longs;h between the&longs;e two waies of Con&longs;ideration, calling that a
taking it ab&longs;olutely, when we &longs;uppo&longs;e the In&longs;trument to be taken
in Ab&longs;tract, that is, disjunct from the Gravity of its own Matter;
but conjoyning the Matter, as al&longs;o the Gravity, with &longs;imple and
ab&longs;olute Figures, we will phra&longs;e the Figures conjoyn'd with the
Matter, Moment, or Force compounded.
SAGR I mu&longs;t of nece&longs;&longs;ity break the Re&longs;olution I had taken,
not to give occa&longs;ion of digre&longs;&longs;ing, for I &longs;hould not be able to &longs;et
my &longs;elf to hear what remaines with attention, if a certain &longs;cruple
were not removed that cometh into my head; and it is this, That
I gue&longs;&longs;e you make compari&longs;on between the Force placed in B, and
one, and that, very probably, the greater part, re&longs;teth upon the
Plane of the Horizon: &longs;o that----
SALV.
I have rightly apprehended you, &longs;o that you need &longs;ay
no more, but only take notice, that I named not the total Gravity
of the Stone, but &longs;pake of the Moment that it hath, and exerci&longs;eth
at the Point A, the extream term of the Leaver B A, which is ever
le&longs;s than the entire weight of the Stone; and is variable according
to the Figure of the Stone, and according as it hapneth to be more
or le&longs;&longs;e elevated.
SAGR.
I am &longs;atisfied in that particular, but I have one thing
more to de&longs;ire, namely, that for my perfect information, you would
demon&longs;trate to me the way, if there be one, how I may find what
part of the total weight that is, which cometh to be born by the
&longs;ubjacent Plane, and what that which gravitates upon the Leaver
at the extream A.
Becau&longs;e I can give you &longs;atisfaction in few words, I will
not fail to &longs;erve you: therefore, de&longs;cribing a &longs;light Figure thereof,
be plea&longs;ed to &longs;uppo&longs;e, that the Weight, who&longs;e Center of Gravity is
A, [3.] re&longs;teth upon the Horizon with the term B, and
at the other end is born up by the Leaver C G, on the Fulciment
N, by a Power placed in G: and that from the Center A, and term
C, Perpendiculars be let fall to the Horizon, A O, and C F. I &longs;ay,
That the Moment of the whole Weight &longs;hall have to the Moment
of the whole Power in G, a proportion compounded of the Di
&longs;tance G N to the Di&longs;tance N C, and of F B to B O. Now, as the
Line F B is to B O, &longs;o let N C be to X. And the whole Weight A
being born by the two Powers placeed in B and C, the Power B is
to C, as the di&longs;tance F O to O B: and by Compo&longs;ition, the
two Powers B and C together, that is, the total Moment of
the whole Weight A, is to the Power in C, as the Line F B is
to the Line B O; that is, as N C to X: But the Moment of
the Power in C is to the Moment of the Power in G, as the Di
&longs;tance G N is to N C: Therefore, by Perturbation of proportion,
the whole Weight A is to the Moment of the Power in G, as G N
to X: But the proportion of G N to X is compounded of the pro
portion G N to N C, and of that of N C to X; that is, of F B to
B O: Therefore the Weight A is to the Power that bears it up in
G, in a proportion compounded of G N to N C, and of that of
F B to B O: which is that that was to be demon&longs;trated. Now re
turning to our fir&longs;t intended Argument, all things hitherto decla
red being under&longs;tood, it will not be hard to know the rea&longs;on,
whence it cometh to pa&longs;&longs;e that
PROPOSITION I.
other Frangible Matter, that being &longs;u&longs;pended length
waies, will &longs;u&longs;tain a very great Weight hanged
Thereat, will, Sidewaies, (as we &longs;aid even now) be
broken in pieces by a far le&longs;&longs;er Weight, according as
its length &longs;hall exceed its thickne&longs;s.
Wherefore let us de&longs;cribe the Solid Pri&longs;m A B C D,
fixed into a Wall by the Part A B, and in the
other extream &longs;uppo&longs;e the Force of the Weight E;
(alwaies under&longs;tanding the Wall to be erect to the Horizon,
and the Pri&longs;m or Cylinder fa&longs;tened in the Wall at Right-An
gles) it is manife&longs;t, that being to break, it will be broken in the place
B, where the Mortace in the Wall &longs;erveth for Fulciment, and B C
for the part of the Leaver in which lieth the force, and the thick
ne&longs;&longs;e of the Solid B A is the other part of the Leaver, in which
lieth the Re&longs;i&longs;tance, which con&longs;i&longs;teth in the unfa&longs;tening, or divi
ding, that is to be made of the part of the Solid B D, that is with
out the Wall from that which is within: and by what hath been
declared, the Moment
of the Force placed in
C, is to the Moment of
the Re&longs;i&longs;tance that lieth
in the thickne&longs;&longs;e of the
Pri&longs;m, that is, in the
Connection of the Ba&longs;e
B A, with the parts con
tiguous to it, as the
length C B is to the half
of B A: And therefore
the ab&longs;olute Re&longs;i&longs;tance
again&longs;t Fraction that is
in the Pri&longs;m B D,
(which ab&longs;olute Re&longs;i
&longs;tance is that which is
made by drawing it
downwards, for at that
time the motion of the Mover is the &longs;ame with that of the Body
Moved) again&longs;t the fracture to be made by help of the Leaver
in the Cylinder is the Semidiameter of its Ba&longs;e. And this is our fir&longs;t
Propo&longs;ition. And ob&longs;erve, that what I have &longs;aid ought to be un
der&longs;tood, when the Confideration of the proper Weight of the So
lid B D is removed: which Solid I have taken as weighing nothing. But in ca&longs;e we would bring its Gravity to account, conjoyning it
with the Weight E, we ought to add to the Weight E the half of
the Weight of the Solid B D: &longs;o that the Weight B D being gr.
take the Weight E, as if it were eleven pounds.
SIMP.
And why not as if it were twelve?
SALV.
The Weight E,
gravitates in re&longs;pect of B C, with all its Moment of ten pounds,
whereas if only B D were pendent, it would weigh with its whole
Moment of two pounds; but, as you &longs;ee, that Solid is di&longs;tributed
thorow all the length B C, uniformly, &longs;o that its parts near to the
extream B, gravitate le&longs;&longs;e than the more remote: &longs;o that, in a word,
compen&longs;ating tho&longs;e with the&longs;e, the weight of the whole Pri&longs;m is
brought to operate under the Center of its Gravity, which an&longs;we
reth to the middle of the Leaver B C: But a Weight hanging at
the end C, hath a Moment double to that which it would have
hanging at the middle: And therefore the half of the Weight of
the Pri&longs;m ought to be added to the Weight E, when we would u&longs;e
the Moment of both, as placed in the Term C.
SIMP.
I apprehend you very well, and, if I deceive not my &longs;elf,
me thinks, that the Power of both the Weights B D and E, &longs;o placed,
would have the &longs;ame Moment, as if the whole Weight of B D, and
the double of E were hanged in the mid&longs;t of the Leaver B C.
SALV.
It is exactly &longs;o, and you are to bear it in mind.
Here we
may immediatly under&longs;tand
PROPOSITION II.
more broad than thick, re&longs;i&longs;teth Fraction, better if it
be forced according to its breadth, than according to
its thickne&longs;&longs;e.
For under&longs;tanding of which, let a Pri&longs;m be &longs;uppo&longs;ed A D:
[4.] who&longs;e breadth is A C, and its thickne&longs;s much
le&longs;&longs;er C B: It is demanded, why we would attempt to break
it edge-waies, as in the fir&longs;t Figure it will re&longs;i&longs;t the great Weight
T, but placed flat-waies, as in the &longs;econd Figure, it will not re&longs;i&longs;t
Fulciment, one while under the Line B C, and another while under
C A, and the Di&longs;tances of the Forces to be alike in both Ca&longs;es, to
wit, the length But in the fir&longs;t Ca&longs;e, the Di&longs;tance of the Re
&longs;i&longs;tance from the Fulciment, which is the half of the Line C A, is
greater than the Di&longs;tance in the other Ca&longs;e, which is the half of B
C: Therefore the Force of the Weight T, mu&longs;t of nece&longs;&longs;ity be grea
ter than X, as much as the half of the breadth C A is greater than
half the thichne&longs;&longs;e B C, the fir&longs;t &longs;erving for the Counter-Leaver of
C A, and the &longs;econd of C B to overcome the &longs;ame Re&longs;i&longs;tance, that
is the quantity of the Conclude we therefore, that the &longs;aid Pri&longs;m or Ruler, which is
broader than it is thick, re&longs;i&longs;teth, bresking more the edge-waies
than the flat-waies, according to the Proportion of the breadth to
the thickne&longs;s.
It is requi&longs;ite that we begin in the next place
PROPOSITION III.
Moment of the proper Gravity is made in a Pri&longs;m
or Cylinder, in relation to the proper Re&longs;i&longs;tance
again&longs;t Fraction, whil&longs;t that being parallel to the
Horizon, it is made longer and longer: Which Mo
ment I find to encrea&longs;e &longs;ucce&longs;sively in duplicate Pro
portion to that of the prolongation.
For demon&longs;tration whereof, de&longs;cribe the Pri&longs;m or Cylin
der A D, firmly fa&longs;tned in the Wall at the end A, and let
it be equidi&longs;tant from the Horizon, and let the &longs;ame be
under&longs;tood to be prolonged as far as E, adding thereto the part It is manife&longs;t, that the prolongation of the Leaver A
to C encrea&longs;eth, by it &longs;elf alone, that is taken ab&longs;olutely, the
Moment of the Force pre&longs;&longs;ing again&longs;t the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the
Separation and Rupture to be made in A, according to the pro
portion of C A to
affixed
the Weight of the Solid A
the Pri&longs;m A E to the Pri&longs;m A
as that of the length A C, to the length A
being put together, the Moment compounded of both is in double
proportion to ei
ther of them. We
conclude there
fore, That the Mo
ments of the For
ces of Pri&longs;mes and
Cylinders of equal
thickne&longs;&longs;e, but of
unequal length, are
to one another in
duplicate proporti
on to that of their
Lengths; that is,
are as the Squares of
their Lengths.
We will &longs;hew, in
the &longs;econd place,
according to what proportion the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of Fraction in Pri&longs;mes
and Cylinders encrea&longs;eth, when they continue of the &longs;ame length,
and encrea&longs;e in thickne&longs;s. And here I &longs;ay, that
PROPOSITION IV.
thickne&longs;s, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction encrea&longs;eth
in a proportion iriple to the Diameters of their
Thickne&longs;&longs;es, that is, of their Ba&longs;es.
Let the two Cylinders be the&longs;e A and
5.]
who&longs;e equal lengths are D G, and F H, the unequal
the Circles, who&longs;e Diameters are C D, and E F. I &longs;ay,
that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder
Cylinder A again&longs;t Fraction, in a proportion triple to that which
the Diameter F E hath to the Diameter D C. For if we con&longs;ider
the ab&longs;olute and &longs;imple Re&longs;i&longs;tance that re&longs;ides in the
is, in the Circles E F, and D C to breaking, offering them vio
lence by pulling them end-waies, without all doubt, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance
of the Cylinder
by how much the Circle E F is greater than C D; for the Fibres,
Filaments, or tenacious parts, which hold together the Parts of the
Solid, are &longs;o many the more.
the Parts or Di&longs;tances, at which the Forces are applied are the Lines
D G, and F H, the Fulciments are in the Points D and F; but the
other Parts or Di&longs;tances, at which the Re&longs;i&longs;tances are placed, are
the Semidiameters of the Circles D C and E F, becau&longs;e the Fila
ments di&longs;per&longs;ed thorow the whole Superficies of the Circles are as
if they were all reduced into the Centers: con&longs;idering, I &longs;ay, tho&longs;e
Leavers, we would be under&longs;tood to intend, that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance in
the Center of the Ba&longs;e E F again&longs;t the Force of H, is &longs;o much grea
ter than the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e C D, again&longs;t the Force placed
in G, (and the Forces in G and H are of equal Leavers D G, and
F H) as the Semidiameter F E is greater than the Semidiameter
D C, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction, therefore, in the Cylinder
B, encrea&longs;eth above the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder A, according
to both the proportions of the Circles E F and D C, and of their
Semidiameters, or, if you will, Diameters:
the Circles is double of that of the Diameters; Therefore the pro
portion of the Re&longs;i&longs;tances, which is compounded of them, is in
triplicate proportion of the &longs;aid Diameters: Which is that which
I was to prove.
portion to their Sides, we may likewi&longs;e conclude,
&longs;tances of Cylinders of equal Length, are to one another as the Cubes
of their Diameters.
From that which we have Demon&longs;trated we may likewi&longs;e con
clude, that
COROLARY.
Se&longs;quialter proportion to that of the &longs;aid Cylinders.
The which is manife&longs;t, becau&longs;e the Pri&longs;ms and Cylinders,
equal in height, are to one another, in the &longs;ame proportion as
their
&longs;aid
in triplicate proportion to the &longs;aid Sides or Diameters: Therefore
the proportion of the Re&longs;i&longs;tances is Se&longs;quialter to the proportion
of the &longs;aid Solids, and, con&longs;equently, to the Weights of the &longs;aid
Solids.
SIMP.
It is convenient, that, before we proceed any farther, I
be re&longs;olved of a certain Doubt, and this it is, That I have not hi
therto heard propo&longs;ed to Con&longs;ideration another certain kind of
Re&longs;i&longs;tance, that, in my opinion, is &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively dimini&longs;hed in So
lids, according as they are more and more prolonged, and not on
ly in u&longs;ing them &longs;idelongs, but al&longs;o leng thwaies, in the &longs;elf &longs;ame
&longs;u&longs;tain a great weight, than if it were &longs;hort: &longs;o that I believe, that
a Ruler of Wood or Iron will &longs;u&longs;tain a much greater weight, if it
&longs;hall be &longs;hort, than if it &longs;hall be very long; under&longs;tanding it al
waies to be u&longs;ed lengthwaies, and not tran&longs;ver&longs;ly; and al&longs;o
its own weight being accounted for, which in the longer is
greater.
SALV.
I fear,
others, are deceived, if &longs;o be, that I have rightly apprehended your
meaning, &longs;o that you would &longs;ay, that a Cord gr.
long cannot &longs;u&longs;tain &longs;o much, as if u&longs;e were made but of one or two
yards of the &longs;ame Rope.
SIMP.
That is it, which I would have &longs;aid, and as yet it &longs;eemeth
a very probable Propo&longs;ition.
SALV.
But I hold it not only improbable, but fal&longs;e: and think
that I can very ea&longs;ily reclaim you from your Errour. Therefore
let us &longs;uppo&longs;e this Rope A B, [6.] fa&longs;tned on high by
the end A, and by the other end let there hang the Weight C,
by the force of which, the &longs;aid Rope is to be broken. Do you
a&longs;&longs;ign me the particular place,
to happen.
SIMP.
Let it be in the place D.
SALV.
I ask what is the cau&longs;e why it &longs;hould break in D.
SIMP.
The rea&longs;on thereof is, becau&longs;e the Rope was not &longs;trong
enough in that part, to &longs;u&longs;tain gr.
for &longs;o much is the Rope D B with the Stone C.
SALV.
Therefore when ever &longs;uch a Rope &longs;hall come to be vio
lently &longs;tretched by tho&longs;e hundred pounds of weight, it &longs;hall break
in that place.
SIMP So I think.
SALV.
But tell me now; if one did hang the &longs;ame Weight, not
at the end of the Rope
in E, or el&longs;e did tye the Rope not at the height A, but very near,
and almo&longs;t at the Point D it &longs;elf, as in F, tell me, I &longs;ay, whether
the Point D would feel the &longs;ame weight of an hundred pounds.
SIMP.
It would &longs;o, &longs;till joyning the piece of Rope E
Stone C.
SALV.
If then the Rope in the Point D commeth to be drawn
by the &longs;aid hundred pounds of weight, it will break by your con
ce&longs;&longs;ion. And yet F E, is a &longs;mall piece of the length A
you &longs;ay then, that the long Rope is weaker than the &longs;hort one?
Errour, in which you have had many Companions, and tho&longs;e in
other things very knowing. And let us go on: and having demon
&longs;trated, that Pri&longs;ms and Cylinders encrea&longs;e their Moments above
provided, that they retain the &longs;ame thickne&longs;&longs;e) and that likewi&longs;e,
the&longs;e that are equally long, but different in thickne&longs;&longs;e, encrea&longs;e
their Re&longs;i&longs;tances according to the proportion of the Cubes of the
Sides or Diameters of their Ba&longs;es, we may enquire what befal
leth to tho&longs;e Solids, being different in length and thickne&longs;s, in which
I ob&longs;erve, that
PROPOSITION V.
have their Re&longs;i&longs;tances again&longs;t Fraction, in a propor
tion compounded of the proportion of the Cubes of the
Diameters of their Ba&longs;es, and of the proportion of
their lengths reciprocally taken.
Let the&longs;e two A B C, and D E F, [
7.] be &longs;uch Cy
linders. I &longs;ay, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder A C &longs;hall be to
the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder D F, in a proportion com
pounded of the proportion of the Cube of the Diameter A B, to
the Gube of the Diameter D E, and of the proportion of the
Length E F to the Length B C. Suppo&longs;e E G equal to B C, and to
the Lines A B, and D E, let C H be a third proportional, and I,
a fourth; and as E F is to B C, &longs;o let I be to S. And becau&longs;e the
Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder A C is to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylin
der D G, as the Cube A B to the Cube D E; that is, as the Line
A B to the Line I: and the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder G D is to
the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder D F, as the Length F E is to the
Length E G; that is, as the Line I is to S: Therefore by Equali
ty of proportion, as the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder A C is to the
Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder D F, &longs;o is the Line A B to S: But the
Line A B is to S, in a proportion compounded of A B to I, and of
I to S: Therefore the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder A C is to the Re
&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder D F, in a proportion compounded of A B
to I, that is, as the Cube of A B to the Cube of D E, and of the
proportion of the Line I to S; that is, of the Length E F to the
Length B C: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.
After the Propo&longs;ition la&longs;t demon&longs;trated, we will con&longs;ider what
hapneth between like Cylinders and Pri&longs;ms, of which we will de
mon&longs;trate, how that
PROPOSITION VI.
ded, that is to &longs;ay, re&longs;ulting from their Gravities,
and from their Lengths, which are, as it were, Lea
vers, have to one another a proportion Se&longs;quialter to
that which is between the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of their &longs;ame
Ba&longs;es.
For demon&longs;tration of which let us de&longs;cribe the two like Cy
linders A B, and C D, [8.] I &longs;ay, that the Mo
ment of the Cylinder A B, to overcome the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of its
Ba&longs;e B, hath to the Moment of C D, to overcome the Re&longs;i&longs;tance
of its Ba&longs;e C, a proportion Se&longs;quialter to that which the &longs;ame Re
&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e B, hath to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e D:
And becau&longs;e the Moments of the Solids A B, and C D, to over
come the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of their Ba&longs;es B and D, are compounded of
their Gravities, and of the Forces of their Leavers, and the Force
of the Leaver A B is equal to the Force of the Leaver C D, and
that becau&longs;e the length A B hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Semi
diameter of the Ba&longs;e B, (by the &longs;imilitude of the Cylinders) that
the Length C D hath to the Semidiameter of the Ba&longs;e D; it re
maineth, that the total Moment of the Cylinder A B, be to the
total Moment of C D, as the &longs;ole Gravity of the Cylinder A B is
to the &longs;ole Gravity of the Cylinder C D; that is, as the &longs;aid Cy
linder A B is to the &longs;aid C D: But the&longs;e are in triplicate propor
tion to the Diameters of their Ba&longs;es
of the &longs;ame
con&longs;equently in duplicate proportion to their &longs;ame
fore the Moments of Cylinders are in Se&longs;quialter proportion to
the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of their
SIMP.
This Propo&longs;ition, indeed, is not only new, but unexpe
cted to me, and at fir&longs;t &longs;ight, very remote from the judgment that
I &longs;hould have conjecturally pa&longs;t upon it: for in regard, that the&longs;e
Figures are in all other re&longs;pects alike, I &longs;hould have thought that
their Moments likewi&longs;e &longs;hould have retained the &longs;ame proportion
towards their proper Re&longs;i&longs;tances.
SAGR.
This is the Demon&longs;tration of that Propo&longs;ition, that in
the beginning of our Di&longs;cour&longs;es, I &longs;aid, I thought------I had &longs;ome
glimps of.
SALV.
That which now befalleth,
alike, till that a certain, and that no very fixed or accurate Ob&longs;er
vation &longs;eemed to repre&longs;ent unto me, that Solids do not contain
an equal tenure in their Toughne&longs;s, but that the bigger are le&longs;&longs;e
apt to &longs;uffer violent accidents, as lu&longs;ty men are more damnified by
their falls than little children; and, as in the begining we &longs;aid, we
&longs;ee a great
height, and not a &longs;mall Pri&longs;in or little Cylinder of Marble. This
&longs;ame Ob&longs;ervation gave me the hint for finding of that which I am
now about to demon&longs;trate; a Quality truly admirable, for that
among&longs;t the infinite Solid-like Figures, there are not &longs;o much
as two, who&longs;e Moments retain the &longs;ame proportion towards their
proper Re&longs;i&longs;tances.
SIMP.
Now you put me in mind of &longs;omething in&longs;erted by
&longs;totle
Rea&longs;on, whence it is, that
much the more weak, and bend more and more, although the &longs;hort
ones be the &longs;lendere&longs;t, and the long ones thicke&longs;t: and, if I well re
member, he reduceth the Rea&longs;on to the &longs;imple Leaver.
SALV.
It is very true, and becau&longs;e the Solution &longs;eemeth not
wholly to remove the cau&longs;e of doubting
who, the truth is, with his mo&longs;t learned
enobled and illu&longs;trated that Work, enlargeth him&longs;elf with other
accute Speculations for the obviating all difficulties, yet him&longs;elf
al&longs;o remaining perplexed in this point, whether, the lengths and
thickne&longs;&longs;es of &longs;uch Solid Figures, encrea&longs;ing with the &longs;elf &longs;ame
proportion, they ought to retain the &longs;ame tenure in their Tough
ne&longs;&longs;es and Re&longs;i&longs;tances again&longs;t their breaking, and likewi&longs;e again&longs;t
their bending. After I had long con&longs;idered thereon, I have, in
this manner found, that which I am about to tell you. And fir&longs;t
I will demon&longs;trate that
PROPOSITION VII.
and no more, that is reduced (being charged with its
own weight) to the ultimate &longs;tate between breaking
and holding it &longs;elf together: &longs;othat every greater, as
being unable to re&longs;i&longs;t its own weight, will break,
and every le&longs;&longs;er re&longs;i&longs;teth &longs;ome Force that is employed
again&longs;t it to break, it.
Let the heavy Pri&longs;m be A B [
utmo&longs;t length of its Con&longs;i&longs;tance, &longs;o that being lengthned
never &longs;o little more it will break: I &longs;ay, that this is the only
one among&longs;t all tho&longs;e that are like unto it, (which yet are infinite)
that is capable of being reduced to that dubious and tickli&longs;h &longs;tate;
&longs;o that every greater being oppre&longs;&longs;ed with its own weight will
break, and every le&longs;&longs;er not, nay, will be able to re&longs;i&longs;t &longs;ome additi
on of a new violence, over and above that of its own weight. Fir&longs;t, take the Pri&longs;m C E, like to, and greater than A B.
I &longs;ay, that
this cannot con&longs;i&longs;t, but will break, being overcome by its own
Gravity. Suppo&longs;e the part C D as long as A B.
And becau&longs;e the
Re&longs;i&longs;tance C D is to that of A B, as the Cube of the thickne&longs;&longs;e of
C D to the Cube of the thickne&longs;s of A B; that is, as the Pri&longs;m
C E to the Pri&longs;m A B (being alike:) Therefore the Weight of
C E is the greate&longs;t that can be &longs;u&longs;tained at the length of the Pri&longs;m
C D: But the Length C E is greater: Therefore the Pri&longs;m C E
will break. But let F G be le&longs;&longs;et: it &longs;hall be demon&longs;trated like
wi&longs;e (&longs;uppo&longs;ing F H equal to B A) that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of F G is
to that of A B, as the Pri&longs;m F G is to the Pri&longs;m A B, in ca&longs;e that the
Di&longs;tance A B, that is F H, were equal to F G, but it is greater:
Therefore the Moment of the Pri&longs;m F G, placed in G, doth not
&longs;uffice to break the Pri&longs;m F G.
SAGR.
A mo&longs;t manife&longs;t and brief Demon&longs;tration, inferring the
truth and nece&longs;&longs;ity of a Propo&longs;ition that at fir&longs;t &longs;ight &longs;eemeth far
from probability. It would be requi&longs;ite, therefore, to alter much
the proportion betwixt the Length and Thickne&longs;&longs;e of the greater
Pri&longs;m by making it thicker or &longs;horter, to the end it might be re
duced to that nice &longs;tate of indifferency between holding and brea
king; and the Inve&longs;tigation of that &longs;ame State, as I think, would
be no le&longs;&longs;e ingenuous.
SALV. Nay, rather more, as it is al&longs;o more laborious: and I am
to you: Therefore
PROP. VIII. PROBL. I.
ken by its own weight, and al&longs;o a greaver length, be
ing given, to find the thickne&longs;&longs;e of another Cylinder
or Pri&longs;m that under-given length is the only one, and
bigge&longs;t, that can re&longs;i&longs;t its own weight.
Let the Cylinder B C [
10.] be the bigge&longs;t that
can re&longs;i&longs;t its own weight, and let D E be a Length greater
than A C; it is required to find the Thickne&longs;&longs;e of the Cylin
der, that under the Length D E is the greate&longs;t re&longs;i&longs;ting its own
weight. Let I be a third proportional to the Lengths D E, and
A C; and as D E is to I, &longs;o let the Diameter F D be to the Dia
meter B A: and make the Cylinder F E. I &longs;ay, that this is the big
ge&longs;t, and only one among&longs;t all that are like to it that re&longs;i&longs;teth its
own weight. To the Lines D C and I let M be a third propor
tional, and O a fourth. And &longs;uppo&longs;e F G equal to A C.
And be
cau&longs;e the Diameter F D is to the Diameter A B, as the Line D E
to I, and O is a fourth proportional to D E and I, the Cube of
F D &longs;hall be to the Cube of B A as D E is to O: But as the Cube of
F D is to the Cube of B A, &longs;o is the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder
D G to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder B C: Therefore the Re&longs;i
&longs;tance of the Cylinder D G is to that of the Cylinder B C, as the
Line D F is to O. And becau&longs;e the Moment of the Cylinder B C
is equal to its Re&longs;i&longs;tance, if we &longs;hew that the Moment of the Cylin
der F E is to the Moment of the Cylinder B C, as the Re&longs;i&longs;tance
D F to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance B A; that is, as the Cube of F D to the Cube
of B A; that is, as the Line D E to O, we &longs;hall have our intent:
that is, that the Moment of the Cylinder F E is equal to the Re&longs;i
&longs;tance placed in F D. The Moment of the Cylinder F E is to the
Moment of the Cylinder D G, as the Square of D E is to the
Square of A C; that is, as the Line D E to I: But the Moment of
the Cylinder D G is to the Moment of the Cylinder B C, as the
Square D F to the Square B A; that is, as the Square of D E to the
Square of I; that is, as the Square of I to the Square of M; that
is, as I to O: Therefore, by Equality of proportion, as the Mo
ment of the Cylinder F E is to the Moment of the Cylinder B C,
&longs;o is the Line D E to O; that is, the Cube D F to the Cube
B A; that is, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e D F to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance
SAGR This,
to be born in mind at the fir&longs;t hearing, therefore I could wi&longs;h, that
you would plea&longs;e to repeat it.
SALV.
I will do what you &longs;hall command; but haply it would
be better to produce one more conci&longs;e and &longs;hort: but then it will
be requi&longs;ite to de&longs;cribe a Figure &longs;omewhat different.
SAGR.
The favour will then be the greater: and be&longs;tow upon
me the draught of that already explained, that I may at my lea&longs;ure
con&longs;ider it again.
SALV.
I will not fail to &longs;erve you.
Now, &longs;uppo&longs;e a Cylinder A,
[11.] the Diameter of who&longs;e Ba&longs;e let be the Line D C,
and let this A be the greate&longs;t that can &longs;u&longs;tain it &longs;elf and not break,
than which we will find a bigger, which likewi&longs;e &longs;hall be the big
ge&longs;t al&longs;o, and the only one that &longs;u&longs;taineth it &longs;elf. Let us de&longs;ire one
like to the &longs;aid A, and as long as the a&longs;&longs;igned Line, and let this be gr.
Lines D C, and K L let M N be a third proportional; which let be
the Diameter of the Ba&longs;e of the Cylinder X, in length equal to E. I &longs;ay, that this X is that which we &longs;eek.
And becau&longs;e the Re&longs;i
&longs;tance D C is to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance K L, as the Square D C to the
is, as the Cylinder E to the Cylinder X; that is, as the Moment E
to the Moment X: But the Re&longs;i&longs;tance K L is to M N, as the Cube
of K L is to the Cube of M N; that is, as the Cube B C to the
Cube K L; that is, as the Cylinder A to the Cylinder E; that is,
as the Moment A to the Moment E: Therefore, by Perturbation
of proportion, as the Re&longs;i&longs;tance D C is to M N, &longs;o is the Moment
A to the Moment X: Therefore the Pri&longs;m X, is in the &longs;ame Con&longs;ti
tution of Moment and Re&longs;i&longs;tance as the Pri&longs;m A.
performed another
way.
But let us make the Problem more general, and let the Propo
&longs;ition be this:
any Length
ne&longs;&longs;e af the Cylinder who&longs;e Length is
Moment towards its Re&longs;i&longs;tance retaineth the &longs;ame
proportion, that the Moment of the Cylinder
tion made more ge
neral.
Rea&longs;&longs;uming the above &longs;aid Figure and almo&longs;t the &longs;ame Me
thod, we will &longs;ay: Becau&longs;e the Moment of the Cylinder
F E hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Moment of the part
D G, that the Square E D hath to the Square F G; that is that
the Line D E hath to I: and becau&longs;e the Moment of the Cylinder
F G is to the Moment of the Cylinder A C, as the Square F D to
the Square A B; that is, as the Square D E to the Square I; that
is, as the Square I to the Square M; that is, as the Line I to O:
Therefore,
&longs;ame proportion to the Moment of the Cylinder A C, that the
Line D E hath to the Line O; that is, that the Cube D E hath
to the Cube of I; that is, that the Cube of F D hath to the
Cube of A B; that is, that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e F D hath to
the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e A B: Which was to be performed.
Now, let it be ob&longs;erved, that from the things hitherto demon&longs;tra
ted, we may plainly gather, how Impo&longs;&longs;ible it is, not only for Art, but
for Nature her &longs;elf to encrea&longs;e her Machines to an immen&longs;e Va&longs;t
ne&longs;&longs;e: &longs;o that it would be impo&longs;&longs;ible by Art to build extraordina
ry va&longs;t Ships, Palaces, or Temples, who&longs;e ^{*} Oars, Sail-yards, Beams,
Iron Bolts, and, in a word, their other parts &longs;hould con&longs;i&longs;t or hold
together: neither again could Nature make Trees of unmea&longs;ura
ble greatne&longs;&longs;e, for that their Arms or Bows being oppre&longs;&longs;ed with
their own weight would at la&longs;t break: and likewi&longs;e it would be
impo&longs;&longs;ible for her to make &longs;tructures of Bones for men, Hor&longs;es, or
other Animals, that might &longs;ub&longs;i&longs;t, and proportionatly perform
their Offices, when tho&longs;e Animals &longs;hould be augmented to im
men&longs;e heights, unle&longs;&longs;e &longs;he &longs;hould take Matter much more hard and
Refi&longs;ting than that which &longs;he commonly u&longs;eth, or el&longs;e &longs;hould de
form tho&longs;e Bones by augmenting them beyond their due Symetry,
and making the Figure or &longs;hape of the Animal to become mon
&longs;trou&longs;ly big: Which haply was hinted by my mo&longs;t Witty Poet,
where de&longs;cribing an huge Giant, he &longs;aith,
in the Ships or
Gallies of the
Mediterrane, up
on which our
Author was a
Coa&longs;ter.
magnified beyond
their ratural &longs;ize,
would not &longs;ub&longs;i&longs;t, if
it be required to
retain the &longs;ame
proportion of thick
ne&longs;s and hardne&longs;s
in them that is in
tho&longs;e of Natural
Animals.
Bone of an Animal
enlarged to thrice
the Natural pro
portion, how much
thicker it ought to
be to perform its
office.
And for a &longs;hort example of this that I &longs;ay, [
12.] I
have heretofore drawn the Figure of a Bone only trebled in
Length, and augmented in Thickne&longs;&longs;e in &longs;uch proportion, as that
it may in its great Animal perform the office proportionate to that
of the le&longs;&longs;er Bone in a &longs;maller Animal, and the Figures are the&longs;e:
whereby you &longs;ee what a di&longs;proportionate Figure that of the aug
mented Bone becometh. Whence it is manife&longs;t, that he that would
in an huge Giant keep the proportions that the Members have in
&longs;i&longs;ting to make Bone of, or el&longs;e mu&longs;t admit that its Strength is in
proportion much more weak than in Men of middle Stature: other
wi&longs;e, encrea&longs;ing the Giant to an immea&longs;urable height he would be
oppre&longs;&longs;ed, and fall under his own weight. Whereas on the con
trary, in dimini&longs;hing of Bodies we do not &longs;ee the Strength and
Forces to dimini&longs;h in the &longs;ame proportion, nay, in the le&longs;&longs;er the
Robu&longs;tiou&longs;ne&longs;&longs;e encrea&longs;eth with a great proportion. So that I
believe, that a little Dog could carry on his back two or three Dogs
equal to him&longs;elf, but I do not think that an Hor&longs;e could carry &longs;o
much as one &longs;ingle Hor&longs;e of his own &longs;ize.
SIMP.
But if it be &longs;o, I have great rea&longs;on to doubt the Im
men&longs;e bulks that we &longs;ee in Fi&longs;hes, for (if I rightly under&longs;tand
you) a Whale &longs;hall be as big as ten Elephants, and yet they &longs;u
&longs;tain them&longs;elves.
SALV.
Your doubt,
dition which I perceived not before, which is al&longs;o able to make
Giants and other very big Animals to con&longs;i&longs;t, and act them&longs;elves
no le&longs;&longs;e than &longs;maller, and this will happen when not only Strength
is added to the Bones and other Parts, who&longs;e office it is to &longs;u&longs;tain
their own and the &longs;upervenient weight; but the &longs;tructure of the
Bones being left with the &longs;ame proportions, the &longs;ame Fabricks
would ju&longs;t in the &longs;ame manner, yea, with much more ea&longs;e, con
&longs;i&longs;t, when the Gravity of the matter of tho&longs;e Bones, or that of
the Fle&longs;h, or whatever el&longs;e is to re&longs;t it &longs;elf upon the Bones is dimini
&longs;hed in that proportion: and of this &longs;econd Artifice, Nature hath
made u&longs;e in the framing of Fi&longs;hes, making their Bones, and Pulps,
not only very light, but without any Gravity.
SIMP.
I &longs;ee very well,
deth: you will &longs;ay, that becau&longs;e the Element of Water is the Ha
bitation of Fi&longs;hes, which by its Corpulence, or, as others will, by
its Gravity dimini&longs;heth the weight of Bodies demerged in it, for
that rea&longs;on the Matter of Fi&longs;hes, not weighing any thing, may be
&longs;u&longs;tained without &longs;urcharging their Bones: but this doth not &longs;uf
fice, for although the re&longs;t of the &longs;ub&longs;tance of the Fi&longs;h weigh not,
yet without doubt the matter of their Bones hath its weight:
and who will &longs;ay, that the Rib of a Whale that is as big as a
Beam doth not weigh very much, and in Water &longs;inketh to the Bot
tom? The&longs;e therefore &longs;hould not be able to &longs;ub&longs;i&longs;t in &longs;o va&longs;t a
Bulk.
SALV.
You argue very cunningly; and for an an&longs;wer to your
Doubt, tell me, whether you have ob&longs;erved Fi&longs;hes to &longs;tand im
moveable under water at their plea&longs;ures, and not to de&longs;cend to
wards the Bottom, or rai&longs;e them&longs;elves towards the top without
making &longs;ome motion with their Fins?
SIMP.
This is a very manife&longs;t Ob&longs;ervation.
Fi&longs;hes do equili
brate them&longs;elves
in the Water.
SALV.
This power therefore that the Fi&longs;hes have to &longs;tay them
&longs;elves, as if they were immoveable in the mid&longs;t of the Water, is a
mo&longs;t infallible argument, that the Compofition of their Corporeal
Ma&longs;&longs;e equalleth the Specifick Gravity of the Water, &longs;o that if
there be found in them &longs;ome parts that are more grave than the
Water, it is nece&longs;&longs;arily requi&longs;ite that they have others &longs;o much
le&longs;&longs;e grave, &longs;o that the If therefore
the Bones be more grave, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that the Pulps, or other
Matters that are in them, be more light; and the&longs;e will with their
lightne&longs;&longs;e counterpoi&longs;e and compen&longs;ate the weight of the Bones. So that in Aquatick Animals the quite contrary hapneth to that
which befals the Terre&longs;trial, namely, that in the latter it is the of
fice of the Bones to &longs;u&longs;tain their own weight, and the weight of
the Fle&longs;h; and in the former, the
beareth up its own weight, and that of the Bones. And therefore
cea&longs;e to wonder how there may be mo&longs;t va&longs;t Animals in the Wa
ter, but not on the Earth, that is, in the Air.
greater than the
Terre&longs;trial, and for
what Rea&longs;on.
SIMP.
I am &longs;atisfied, and moreover ob&longs;erve, that the&longs;e which
we call Terre&longs;trial Animals, ought with more rea&longs;on to be called
Aerial; becau&longs;e in the Air they really live, and by the Air they are
environ'd, and of the Air they breath.
SAGR.
The Di&longs;cour&longs;e of
Doubt and its Solution. And farthermore I comprehend very ea
&longs;ily, that one of the&longs;e huge Fi&longs;hes being haul'd on &longs;hore, could not
perchance be able to &longs;u&longs;tain it &longs;elf for any time; but that the Con
nections of the Bones being relaxed, its Ma&longs;&longs;e would be cru&longs;h'd un
der its own weight.
SALV.
For the pre&longs;ent, I encline to the &longs;ame Opinion: nor am
I far from thinking that the &longs;ame would happen to that huge Ship,
which floating in the Sea is not di&longs;&longs;olved by its weight, and the bur
den of its Lading and Artilery, but on dry ground, and environed
with Air, it perhaps would fall in pieces. But let us pur&longs;ue our bu
&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e, and demon&longs;trate, that
PROP. IX. PROBL. II.
e&longs;t Weight &longs;u&longs;tained by it being given, to find the
greate&longs;t Length, beyond which being prolonged. it
would break under its own Weight.
Let there be given the Pri&longs;me A C (
13.) with its
weight, and likewi&longs;e let the Weight D be given, the great
e&longs;t that can be &longs;u&longs;tained by the extreme C: it is required to
finde the greate&longs;t Length unto which the &longs;aid Pri&longs;me may be pro
longed, without breaking. As the weight of the Pri&longs;me A C is to
the Compound of the weights A C, with the double of the
Weight D, &longs;o let the length C A be to C A H: between which
let A G be a Mean-Proportional. I &longs;ay that A G is the Length
&longs;ought. For the depre&longs;&longs;ing Moment of the Weight D in C, is
equal to the Moment of the double weight D, if it be placed in
the middle of A C, where is al&longs;o the Center of the Moment of
the Pri&longs;me A C: The Moment, therefore, of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of
the Pri&longs;me A C, which re&longs;ides in A, is equivalent to the gravi
tation of the double of the Weight D with the weight A C, but
hanged in the mid&longs;t of A C. And becau&longs;e it hath been made,
that as the Moment of the &longs;aid Weights &longs;o &longs;ituated, that is, of
the double of D, with A C, is to the Moment of A C, &longs;o is H A
to A C, between which A G is a Mean Proportional: There
fore the Moment of D doubled with the Moment of A C, is to
the Moment A C, as the Square G A to the Square A C: But the
pre&longs;&longs;ing Moment of the Pri&longs;me G A, is to the Moment of A C,
as the Square G A to the Square A C: Therefore the Length
A G is the greate&longs;t that was &longs;ought, namely, that unto which the
Pri&longs;me A G being prolonged, it would &longs;u&longs;tain it &longs;elf, but beyond
it would break.
Hitherto we have con&longs;idered the Moments and Re&longs;i&longs;tances of
&longs;olid Pri&longs;mes and Cylinders, one end of which is &longs;uppo&longs;ed im
moveable, and to the other onely the Force of a pre&longs;&longs;ing weight
is applyed, con&longs;idering it by it &longs;elf alone, or joyned with the
Gravity of the &longs;ame Solid, or el&longs;e the &longs;ole Gravity of the &longs;aid
Solid. Now I de&longs;ire that we may &longs;peak &longs;omething of tho&longs;e &longs;ame
Pri&longs;mes or Cylinders, in ca&longs;e they were &longs;u&longs;tained at both ends, or
did re&longs;t upon one &longs;ole point taken between the ends. And fir&longs;t,
I &longs;ay that,
PROPOSITION X.
&longs;hall be reduced to its greate&longs;t Length, beyond which
it would not &longs;u&longs;tain it &longs;elf, whether it be born up in
the middle by one &longs;ole Fulciment, or el&longs;e by two at
the ends, may be double in length to that which
&longs;hould be fa&longs;tned in the Wall, that is &longs;u&longs;tained at but
one end.
Which of it &longs;elt is very obvious; for if we &longs;hall &longs;up
po&longs;e of the Cylinder which I de&longs;cribe A B C, its
half A B to be the utmo&longs;t Length that is able to be
&longs;u&longs;tained, being fa&longs;tened at the end B, it &longs;hall be &longs;u&longs;tained in the
&longs;ame manner, if being laid upon the Fulciment G, it &longs;hall be
counterpoi&longs;ed by its other half B C. And likewi&longs;e, if of the Cy
linder D E F, the Length &longs;hall be &longs;uch that onely one half of it
can be &longs;u&longs;tained, being fa&longs;tened at the end D, and con&longs;equent
ly the other E F, fixed at the end F; it is manife&longs;t, that placing
the Fulciments H and I under the ends D and F, every Moment
of Force or of Weight that is added in E, will there make the
Fracture.
That which requireth a more &longs;ubtil Speculation is, when &longs;ub
&longs;tracting from the proper Gravity of &longs;uch Solids, it were pro
pounded to us
PROP. XI. PROBL. III.
plied to the middle of a Cylinder &longs;u&longs;tained at the
ends, would &longs;uffice to break it, could do the &longs;ame,
applied in any other place, neerer to one end than to
the other.
As for Example, whether we de&longs;iring to break a Staffe
and took it with the ends in our hands, and &longs;etting our
knee, to the mid&longs;t of it, the &longs;ame Force that &longs;hould &longs;uf
fice to break it in that manner, would al&longs;o &longs;uffice in ca&longs;e the knee
SAGR.
I think the Problem is toucht upon by
SALV.
The Que&longs;tion of
for he &longs;eeks no more, but to render a rea&longs;on why le&longs;&longs;e labour is
required to break the Staffe, holding the hands at the ends of it,
that is, far di&longs;tant from the Knee, than if we held them neerer:
and he giveth a general Rea&longs;on of the &longs;ame, reducing the cau&longs;e
of it to the Leavers, which are longer when the Arms are ex
tended, gra&longs;ping the ends. Our Que&longs;tion addeth &longs;omething
more, &longs;eeking whether, &longs;etting the Knee in the mid&longs;t, or in ano
ther place, but alwayes keeping the hands at the ends, the &longs;ame
Force &longs;erveth in all &longs;ituations.
SAGR.
At fir&longs;t apprehen&longs;ion it &longs;hould &longs;eem that it doth, for
that the two Leavers retain in a certain fa&longs;hion the &longs;ame Moment,
&longs;eeing that as the one is &longs;hortned, the other is lengthened.
SALV.
Now you &longs;ee, how ea&longs;ie it is to make Equivocations,
and with what caution and circum&longs;pection we are to walk, lea&longs;t
we run into them. This that you &longs;ay, and which indeed at the
fir&longs;t &longs;ight carrieth with it &longs;o much of probability, is in the &longs;trict
ne&longs;&longs;e of it &longs;o fal&longs;e, that whether the Knee, which is the Fulci
ment of the two Leavers, be placed or not placed in the mid&longs;t,
it maketh &longs;uch alteration, that of that Force which would &longs;uffice
to make the Fracture in the mid&longs;t, it being to be made in &longs;ome
other place, it will not &longs;uffice to apply four times &longs;o much, nor
ten, nor an hundred, no nor a thou&longs;and. Upon this we will
make &longs;ome general Con&longs;ideration, and then we will come to the
Specifick Determination of the Propo&longs;ition, according to which,
the Forces for making of Fractures gradually vary more in one
point than in another.
Let us fir&longs;t de&longs;igne this Truncheon A B to be broken in the
mid&longs;t upon the Fulciment C, and neer unto that let us de&longs;igne
it again, but under the Characters D E, to be broken on the
Fulciment F, remote from the middle. Fir&longs;t it is manife&longs;t, that
the Di&longs;tances A C and C B being equal, the Force &longs;hall be &longs;ha
red equally in the ends B and A. Again, according as the Di
&longs;tance D F groweth le&longs;&longs;e than the Di&longs;tance A C, the Moment
of the Force placed in D groweth le&longs;&longs;e than the Moment in A,
that is placed at the Di&longs;tance C A, and le&longs;&longs;eneth according to
the proportion of the Line D F to A C; and con&longs;equently, it is
requi&longs;ite to encrea&longs;e it to equalize or exceed the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of F:
But the Di&longs;tance D F may dimini&longs;h
the Di&longs;tance A C: Therefore it is requi&longs;ite, that it be po&longs;&longs;ible for
the Force to be applyed in D, to encrea&longs;e
may countervail the Re&longs;i&longs;tance in F. But, on the contrary, ac
to dimini&longs;h the Force in E, that it may compen&longs;ate the Re&longs;i
&longs;tance in F: But the Di&longs;tance F E in relation to C B, cannot en
crea&longs;e
D, no nor yet to the double: Therefore, the Force in E, that it
may compen&longs;ate the Re&longs;i&longs;tance in F, &longs;hall be alwayes more than
half of the Force in B. We may comprehend, therefore, the ne
ce&longs;&longs;ity of augmenting the Moments of the Collected Forces in E
and D infinitely to equalize or exceed the Re&longs;i&longs;tance placed in F,
according as the Fulciment F &longs;hall approach neerer and neerer
to the end D.
What will
Mu&longs;t he not con
fe&longs;&longs;e the Virtue of Geometry to be a more powerful in&longs;trument
than all others, to &longs;harpen the Wit, and di&longs;po&longs;e it to di&longs;cour&longs;e
and &longs;peculate well? and that
his Scholars &longs;hould be well grounded in the Mathematicks? I
have very well under&longs;tood the nature of the Leaver, and how
that its Length encrea&longs;ing or decrea&longs;ing, the Moment of the
Force and of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance augmented or dimini&longs;hed, and yet in
the determination of the pre&longs;ent Problem I deceived my &longs;elf, and
that not a little, but infinitely much.
SIMP.
The truth is, I begin to &longs;ee that Logick, although it
be a mo&longs;t appo&longs;ite In&longs;trument to regulate our Di&longs;cour&longs;e, doth
not attain, as to the prompting of the Mind with Invention,
unto the acutene&longs;&longs;e of Geometry.
SAGR.
In my conceit, Logick giveth us to under&longs;tand, whe
ther the Di&longs;courfes and Demon&longs;trations already made and found
are concluding, but that it teacheth us how to finde concluding
Di&longs;cour&longs;es and Demon&longs;trations; the truth is, I do not believe:
But it will be better, that
portion the Moments of the Forces do go increa&longs;ing, to overcome
the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the &longs;ame Piece of Wood, according to the &longs;e
veral places of the Fracture.
SALV.
The proportion that you &longs;eek, proceedeth after &longs;uch
a manner, that
PROPOSITION XII.
upon which we would make the Fracture of the &longs;aid
Cylinder, the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of tho&longs;e two places have
the &longs;ame proportion to each other, as have the Re
ctangles made by the Di&longs;tances of tho&longs;e places
reciprocally taken.
Let the two Forces (
16.) be A and B the lea&longs;t, to
break in C, and E and F likewi&longs;e the lea&longs;t, to break in D. I &longs;ay the Forces A and B have the &longs;ame proportion to the
Forces E and F, that the Rectangle A D B hath to the Rectan
gle A C B. For the Forces A and B, have to the Forces E and F, a
proportion compounded of the Forces A and B, to the Force
B, of B to F, and of F to E and E: But as the Forces A and
B are to the Force B, &longs;o is the Length B A to A C; and as the
Force B is to F, &longs;o is the Line D B to B C; and as the Force F is
to F and E, &longs;o is the Line D A to A B: Therefore the Forces A
and B have to the Forces E and F a proportion compounded of
the&longs;e three, namely, of B A to A C, of D B to B C, and of D A
A B. But of the two proportions D A to A B, and A B to A C,
is compounded the proportion of D A to A C: Therefore the
Forces A and B have to the Forces E and F, the proportion com
pounded of this D A to A C, and of the other D B to D C. But the Rectangle A D B hath to the Rectangle A C B, a pro
portion compounded of the &longs;ame D A to A C, and of D B to
B C: Therefore the Forces A and B are to the Forces E and F,
as the Rectangle A D B is to the Rectangle A C B; which is as
much as to &longs;ay, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction in C, hath the
&longs;ame proportion to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction in D, that
the Rectangle A D B hath to the Rectangle A C B: Which was
to be demon&longs;trated.
In con&longs;equence of this Theorem we may re&longs;olve a Problem of
great Curio&longs;ity; and it is this:
PROP. XIII. PROBL. IV.
ported at the middle of a Cylinder or Pri&longs;me, where
the Re&longs;i&longs;tance is leafl; and there being given a
Weight greater than that, to find in the &longs;aid Cylin
der, the point at which the given greater Weight may
be &longs;upporited as the greate&longs;t Weight.
Let the given weight greater than the greate&longs;t weight that
can be &longs;upported at the middle of the Cylinder A B, have
unto the &longs;aid greate&longs;t weight, the proportion of the line E
to F: it is required to find the point in the Cylinder at which the
&longs;aid given weight commeth to be &longs;upported as the bigge&longs;t. Be
tween E and F let G be a Mean-Proportional; and as E is to G,
&longs;o let A D be to S, S &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;er than A D. Let A D be the
Diameter of the Semicircle A H D: in which &longs;uppo&longs;e A H equal
to S; and joyn together H and D, and take D R equal to it. I &longs;ay that R is the point &longs;ought, at which the given weight,
greater than the greate&longs;t that can be &longs;upported at the middle of the
Cylinder D, would become as the greate&longs;t weight. On the length
RN, and conjoyn N and
D: And becau&longs;e the two
Squares N R and R D are
equal to the Square N D;
that is, to the Square A D;
that is, to the two A H and
and H D; and H D is equal
to the Square D R: There
fore the Square N R, that
is, the Rectangle A R B
&longs;hall be equal to the Square A H; that is, to the Square S: But
the Square S is to the Square A D, as F to E; that is, as the
greate&longs;t &longs;upportable Weight at D to the given greater Weight:
Therefore this greater &longs;hall be &longs;upported at R, as the greate&longs;t
that can be there &longs;u&longs;tained. Which is that that we &longs;ought.
SAGR.
I under&longs;tand you very well, and am con&longs;idering that
the Pri&longs;me A B having alwayes more &longs;trength and re&longs;i&longs;tance a
gain&longs;t Pre&longs;&longs;ion in the parts that more and more recede from the
middle, whether in very great and heavy Beams one may take
of the weight; which in Beams of great Rooms would be commo
dious, and of no &longs;mall pro&longs;it. And it would be pretty, to find what
Figure that Solid ought to have, that it might have equal Re&longs;i
&longs;tance in all its parts; &longs;o as that it were not with more ea&longs;e to be
broken by a weight that &longs;hould pre&longs;&longs;e it in the mid&longs;t, than in any
other place.
SALV.
I was ju&longs;t about to tell you a thing very notable and
plea&longs;ant to this purpo&longs;e. I will a&longs;&longs;ume a brief Scheme for the bet
ter explanation of my meaning. This Figure D B is a Pri&longs;m, who&longs;e
Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction in the term A D by a Force pre&longs;&longs;ing
at the term B, is le&longs;&longs;e than the Re&longs;i&longs;tance that would be found in
the place C I, by how much the length C B is le&longs;&longs;er than B A; as
hath already been demon
&longs;trated. Now &longs;uppo&longs;e the
&longs;aid Pri&longs;me to be &longs;awed
Diagonally according to the
Line FB, &longs;o that the oppo
&longs;ite Surfaces may be two
Triangles, one of which to
wards us is F A B. This So
lid obtains a quality contrary to the Pri&longs;me, to wit, that it le&longs;&longs;e re
&longs;i&longs;teth Fraction by the Force placed in B at the term C than at A,
by as much the Length C
&longs;ily prove: For imagining the Section C N O parallel to the other
A F D, the Line
&longs;ame proportion, as the Line A
&longs;uppo&longs;e the Fulciment of the two Leavers to be in the Points A
and C, who&longs;e Di&longs;tances are
&longs;hall be like: and therefore that Moment which the
at
Di&longs;tance A
above the &longs;ame Re&longs;i&longs;tance, were it placed at the Di&longs;tance C N:
ced at the Di&longs;tance C N, from the
Re&longs;i&longs;tance in A &longs;o much as the Rectangle C O is le&longs;&longs;e than the
Rectangle A D; that is, &longs;o much as the Line C N is le&longs;s than A
that is, C
again&longs;t
whole D A O again&longs;t
A B. We have therefore from the Beam or Pri&longs;me D B, taken
away a part, that is half, cutting it Diagonally, and left the Wedge
or triangular Pri&longs;m
Qualities, namely, that more re&longs;i&longs;ts the more it is &longs;hortned, and this
in &longs;hortning lo&longs;eth its toughne&longs;s as fa&longs;t. Now this being granted,
a cut, by which taking away that which is &longs;uperfluous, there remai
neth a Solid of &longs;uch a
&longs;tance.
SIMP.
It mu&longs;t needs be &longs;o; for where there is a tran&longs;ition from
the greater to the le&longs;&longs;er, one meeteth al&longs;o with the equal.
SAGR.
But the bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e is to find how we are to guide the
Saw for making of this Section.
SIMP.
This &longs;eemeth to me as if it were a very ea&longs;ie bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e;
for if in &longs;awing the Pri&longs;m diagonally, taking away half of it, the
Figure that remains retaineth a contrary quality to that of the
whole Pri&longs;m, &longs;o as that in all places wherein this acquireth &longs;trength,
that as fa&longs;t lo&longs;eth it, me thinks, that keeping the middle way, that
is, taking only the half of that half, which is the fourth part of the
whole, the remaining Figure will not gain or lo&longs;e &longs;trength in any
of all tho&longs;e places wherein the lo&longs;&longs;e and the gain of the other two
Figures were alwaies equal.
SALV.
You have not hit the mark,
&longs;hew you, it will appear in reality, that that which may be cut off
from the Pri&longs;m, and taken away without weakening it is not its
fourth part, but the third. Now it remaineth (which is that that
was hinted by
PROP. XIV. PROBL. V.
made; Which I will prove to be a Parabolical
Line.
But fir&longs;t it is nece&longs;&longs;ary to demon&longs;trate a certain Lemma, which
is this:
LEMMA I.
ments in &longs;uch &longs;ort that the two Distances where at the Forces
are to be placed, have to each other double the proportion of
the Di&longs;tances at which the Re&longs;i&longs;tances &longs;ball be, which Re&longs;i
&longs;tances are to each other as their Di&longs;tances, the &longs;u&longs;taining
Powers &longs;hall be equal.
Let A B and C D be two Leavers divided upon their Fulciments
E and F, in &longs;uch &longs;ort that the Di&longs;tance E B hath to F D a pro
portion double to that which the Di&longs;tance E A hath to F C. I &longs;ay,
be equal to each other. Let E G be &longs;uppo&longs;ed a Mean-Proporti
onal between E B and F D; therefore as B E is to E G, &longs;o &longs;hall
G E be to F D, and A E to C
of A to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of C. And becau&longs;e that as E G is to
&longs;o is A E to C
be to
regard that the two Leavers
D C and G A are divided pro
portionally in the Points
E) in ca&longs;e the Power that being
placed at D compen&longs;ates the
Re&longs;i&longs;tance of C were at G, it
would countervail the &longs;ame Re&longs;i&longs;tance of C placed in A: But by
what hath been granted, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of A hath the &longs;ame propor
tion to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of C, that AE hath to C
hath to E G: Therefore the Power G, or if you will D, placed at
B will &longs;u&longs;tain the Re&longs;i&longs;tance placed at A: Which was to be de
mon&longs;trated.
This being under&longs;tood: in the Surface
let the Parabolical Line
cording to which let the &longs;aid Pri&longs;me be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be &longs;awed, the
Solid compri&longs;ed between the Ba&longs;e A D, the Rectangular Plane
A G, the Bight Line B G, and the Superficies D G B
incurvated according to the Curvity of the Parabolical Line I &longs;ay, that
that Solid is through
out of equal Re&longs;i
&longs;tance. Let it be cut
by the Plane C O pa
rallel to A D; and
imagine two Leavers
divided and &longs;uppor
ted upon the Fulciments A and C; and let the Di&longs;tances of one
be B A and A F, and of the other B C, and C N. And becau&longs;e in
the Parabola
Square of C N, it is manife&longs;t, that the Di&longs;tance
hath to the Di&longs;tance
which the other Di&longs;tance A
cau&longs;e the Re&longs;i&longs;tance that is to be equal by help of the Leaver
equal by help of the Leaver
the Rectangle O C; which is the &longs;ame that the Line A
N C, which are the other two Di&longs;tances of the Leavers; it is ma
nife&longs;t by the fore going Lemma, that the &longs;ame Force that being
wi&longs;e equal the Re&longs;i&longs;tance C O. And the &longs;ame may be demon&longs;tra
ted, if one cut the Solid in any other place: therefore that Parabo
lical Solid is throughout of equal Re&longs;i&longs;tance. In the next place,
that cutting the Pri&longs;me according to the Parabolical Line F N B,
the third part of it is taken away, appeareth, For that the Semi
Parabola F N
contained between two parallel Planes, that is, between the Rect
angles F B and D G, whereby they retain the &longs;ame Proportion, as
tho&longs;e their Ba&longs;es: But the Rectangle F
miparabola F N
the Parabolick Line, we take away the third part of it. Hence we
&longs;ee, that
more than thirty three in the hundred, without dimini&longs;hing their
Strength in the lea&longs;t; which in great Ships, in particular, for bea
ring the Decks may be of no &longs;mall benefit; for that in &longs;uch kind
of Fabricks Lightne&longs;&longs;e is of infinite importance.
SAGR.
The Commodities are &longs;o many, that it would be tedi
ous, if not impo&longs;&longs;ible, to mention them all.
the&longs;e, would more gladly under&longs;tand that the alleviation is made
according to the a&longs;&longs;igned proportions. That the Section, according
to the Diagonal Line, cuts away half of the weight I very well
know: but that the other Section according to the Parabolical Line
takes away the third part of the Pri&longs;me I can believe upon the
word of
Ca&longs;e Science would better plea&longs;e me than Faith.
SALV.
I &longs;ee then that you would have the Demon&longs;tration,
whether or no it be true, that the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Pri&longs;me over and
above this, which for this time we will call a Parabolical Solid, is
the third part of the whole Pri&longs;me. I am certain that I have for
merly demo&longs;trated it; I will try now whether I can put the
Demon&longs;tration together again: to which purpo&longs;e I do remember
that I made u&longs;e of a Certain Lemma of
him in his
LEMMA II.
ly, and the exce&longs;&longs;es be equal to the lea&longs;t of them, and there be as
many more, each of them equal to the greate&longs;t; the Squares of all
the&longs;e &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;e than the triple of the Squares of tho&longs;e that
exceed one another: but they &longs;hall be more than triple to tho&longs;e
others that remain, the Square of the greate&longs;t being &longs;ub
&longs;tracted.
This being granted: Let the Parabolick Line A
in this Rectangle A C For if it be
not &longs;o, it will be either more than the third part, or le&longs;&longs;e. Let it be
&longs;uppo&longs;ed that it may be
le&longs;&longs;e, and to that which is
wanting &longs;uppo&longs;e the Space
X to be equal. Then di
viding the Rectangle con
tinually into equal parts
with Lines parallel to the
Sides
&longs;hall in the end arrive at
&longs;uch parts, as that one of them &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;e than the Space X. Now let one of them be the Rectangle O
where the other Parallels inter&longs;ect the Parabolick Line, let the Pa
rallels to A P pa&longs;&longs;e: and here I will &longs;uppo&longs;e a Figure to be cir
cum&longs;cribed about our Mixt-Triangle, compo&longs;ed of Rectangles,
which are
yet be le&longs;s than the third part of the Rectangle C P, in regard that
the exce&longs;&longs;e of that Figure over and above the Mixed Triangle is
much le&longs;&longs;e than the Rectangle
the Space X.
SAGR. Softly, I pray you, for I do not &longs;ee how the exce&longs;&longs;e of
this circum&longs;cribed Figure above the Mixt Triangle is con&longs;iderably
le&longs;&longs;er than the Rectangle
SALV.
Is not the Rectangle
angles by which our Parabolical Line pa&longs;&longs;eth; I mean the&longs;e,
I H, H F, F E, E G, and G A, of which one part only lyeth with
out the Mixt Triangle? And the Rectangle
po&longs;ed to be le&longs;&longs;e than the Space X? Therefore if the Triangle to
gether with X did, as the Adver&longs;ary &longs;uppo&longs;eth, equalize the third
part of the Rectangle C P the circum&longs;cribed Figure that adjoyns
to the Triangle &longs;o much le&longs;&longs;e than the Space X, will remain even
yet le&longs;&longs;e than the third part of the &longs;aid Rectangle C P.
cannot be, for it is more than a third part, therefore it is not true
that our Mixt Triangle is le&longs;&longs;e than one third of the Rectangle.
SAGR.
I under&longs;tand the Solution of my Doubt.
requi&longs;ite now to prove unto us, that the Circum&longs;cribed Figure is
more than a third part of the Rectangle C P; which, I believe, will
be harder to do.
SALV.
Not at all.
For in the Parabola the Square of the Line
D E hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Square of Z G, that the Line
the Rectangle A G, their heights A K and K L being equal. There
fore the proportion that the Square E D hath to the Square Z G;
that is, the Square L A hath to the Square A K, the Rectangle K E
hath likewi&longs;e to the Rectangle K Z. And in the &longs;elf-&longs;ame manner
we might prove that the other Rectangles L F, M H, N I, O B are
to one another as the Squares of the Lines M A, N A, O A, P A. Con&longs;ider we in the next place, how the Circum&longs;cribed Figure is
compounded of certain Spaces that are to one another as the
Squares of the Lines that exceed with Exce&longs;&longs;es equal to the lea&longs;t,
and how the Rectangle C P is compounded of &longs;o many other Spa
ces each of them equal to the Greate&longs;t, which are all the Rectan
gles equal to O B. Therefore, by the Lemma of
Circum&longs;cribed Figure is more than the third part of the Rectangle
C P: But it was al&longs;o le&longs;&longs;e, which is impo&longs;&longs;ible: Therefore the
Mixt-Triangle is not le&longs;&longs;e than one third of the Rectangle C P. I &longs;ay likewi&longs;e, that it is not more: For if it be more than one
third of the Rectangle C P, &longs;uppo&longs;e the Space X equal to the ex
ce&longs;&longs;e of the Triangle above the third part of the &longs;aid Rectangle
C P, and the divi&longs;ion and &longs;ubdivi&longs;ion of the Rectangle into Rect
angolets, but alwaies equal, being made, we &longs;hall meet with &longs;uch as
that one of them is le&longs;&longs;er than the Space X; which let be done:
and let the Rectangle
the Figure as before, we &longs;hall have in&longs;cribed in the Mixt-Triangle
a Figure compounded of the Rectangles V O, T N, S M, N L, Q K,
which yet &longs;hall not be le&longs;s
than the third part of the
great Rectangle C P, for
the Mixt Triangle doth
much le&longs;&longs;e exceed the In
&longs;cribed Figure than it doth
exceed the third part of
the Rectangle C P; Be
cau&longs;e the exce&longs;&longs;e of the
Triangle above the third part of the Rectangle C P is equal to
the Space X which is greater than the Rectangle
&longs;o is con&longs;iderably greater than the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Triangle above
the In&longs;cribed Figure: For to the Rectangle
golets A G, G E, E
ce&longs;&longs;es of the Triangle above the In&longs;cribed
half: And therefore the Triangle exceeding the third part of the
Rectangle C P, by much more (exceeding it by the Space X)
than it exceedeth its in&longs;cribed
be greater than the third part of the Rectangle C P:
by the Lemma pre&longs;uppo&longs;ed:
portion to the Rectangles compounding the In&longs;cribed
the Aggregate of of all the Squares of the Lines equal to the big
ge&longs;t, hath to the Squares of the Lines that exceed equally, &longs;ub&longs;tra
cting the Square of the bigge&longs;t: And therefore (as it hapneth in
Squares) the whole Aggregate of the bigge&longs;t (that is the Rectan
gle C P) is more than triple the Aggregate of the exceeding
ones, the bigge&longs;t deducted, that compound the In&longs;cribed
gure. Therefore the Mixt-Triangle is neither greater nor le&longs;&longs;er
than the third part of the Rectangle C P: It is therefore equal.
the Parabola &longs;hewn
by one &longs;ingle De
mon&longs;tration.
SAGR.
A pretty and ingenuous Demon&longs;tration: and &longs;o much
the more, in that it giveth us the Quadrature of the Parabola, &longs;hew
ing it to be
proving that which
rent, but both very admirable, methods of a great number of Pro
po&longs;itions. As hath likewi&longs;e been demon&longs;trated lately by
Valerius,
&longs;tration is &longs;et down in the Book that he writ of the Center of the
Gravity of Solids.
A Treati&longs;e which verily is not to come behind any one
that hath been written by the mo&longs;t
pre&longs;ent and all pa&longs;t Ages: which when it was read by our
mick,
was then proceeding to write on the &longs;ame Subject: in regard he
&longs;aw the whole bu&longs;ine&longs;s &longs;o happily found and demon&longs;trated by the
&longs;aid
SAGR.
I was informed of all the&longs;e things by our
and have be&longs;ought him withall that he would one day let me &longs;ee
his Demon&longs;trations that he had &longs;ound at the time when he met
with the
SALV.
I have a Copy of them, and will impart them to you,
for you will be much plea&longs;ed to &longs;ee the variety of Methods, which
the&longs;e two Authors take to inve&longs;tigate the &longs;ame Conclu&longs;ions, and
their Demon&longs;trations: wherein al&longs;o &longs;ome of the Conclu&longs;ions have
different Explanations, howbeit in effect equally true.
SAGR.
I &longs;hall be very glad to &longs;ee them, therefore when you re
turn to our wonted Conferences you may do me the favour to
bring them with you.
fi&longs;tance of the Solid taken from the Pri&longs;me by a Parabolick Secti
on, being an Operation no le&longs;&longs;e ingenuous than beneficial in many
Mechanical Works, it would be good that Artificers had &longs;ome ea
&longs;ie and expedite Rule how they may draw the &longs;aid Parabolick
Line upon the Plane of the Pri&longs;me.
SALV.
There are &longs;everal waies to draw tho&longs;e Lines, but two
that are more expedite than all the re&longs;t, I will de&longs;cribe unto you.
than another can with Compa&longs;&longs;es &longs;lightly draw upon a paper
four or &longs;ix Circles of different &longs;izes, I can de&longs;ign thirty or forty
Parabolick Lines no le&longs;&longs;e exact, &longs;mall, and &longs;mooth than the Cir
cumferences of tho&longs;e Circles. I have a
round, no bigger than a Nut, this thrown upon a Steel Mirrour
held, not erect to the Horizon, but &longs;omewhat inclined, &longs;o that the
a Parabolical Line finely and &longs;moothly de&longs;cribed, and wider or
narrower according as the Projection &longs;hall be more or le&longs;s elevated. Whereby al&longs;o we have a clear and &longs;en&longs;ible Experiment that the
Motion of Projects is made by Parabolick Lines: an Effect ob&longs;er
ved by none before our
Demon&longs;tration of it in his
ly peru&longs;e at our next meeting. Now the
by its motion tho&longs;e Parabola's, mu&longs;t be rouled a little in the hands
that it may be warmed, and &longs;omewhat moy&longs;tned, for by this
means it will leave its track more apparent upon the Mirrour. The
other way to draw the Line that we de&longs;ire upon the Pri&longs;me is after
this manner. Let two Nailes be fa&longs;tned on high in a Wall, at an
equal di&longs;tance from the Horizon, and remote from one another
twice the breadth of the Rectangle upon which we would trace the
Semiparabola, and to the&longs;e two Nails tye a &longs;mall thread of &longs;uch a
length that its doubling may reach as far as the length of the
Pri&longs;me; this &longs;tring will hang in a Parabolick
cing out upon the Wall the way that the &longs;aid String maketh on it,
we &longs;hall have a whole Parabola de&longs;cribed: which a Perpendicular
that hangeth in the mid&longs;t between the&longs;e two Nailes will divide
into two equal parts. And for the transferring or &longs;etting off of
that Line afterwards upon the oppo&longs;ite Surfaces of the Pri&longs;me it is
not difficult at all, &longs;o that every indifferent Arti&longs;t will know how
to do it. The &longs;ame Line might be drawn upon the &longs;aid Sur
face of the Pri&longs;me by help of the Geometrical Lines delineated up
on the
de&longs;cribe a Para
bola.
We have hitherto demon&longs;trated &longs;o many Conclu&longs;ions touching
the Contemplation of the&longs;e Re&longs;i&longs;tances of Solids again&longs;t Fraction
by having fir&longs;t opened the way unto the Science with &longs;uppo&longs;ing the
direct Re&longs;i&longs;tance for known, that we may in pur&longs;uance of them
proceed forwards to the finding of other, and other Conclu&longs;ions,
with their Demon&longs;trations of tho&longs;e which in Nature are infinite. Only at pre&longs;ent, for a final conclu&longs;ion of this daies Conferences,
I will add the Speculation of the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of the Hollow Solids
which Art, and chiefly Nature, u&longs;eth in an hundred Operations,
when without encrea&longs;ing the weight &longs;he greatly augmenteth the
&longs;trength: as is &longs;een in the Bones of Birds, and in many Canes that For if a Wheat Straw that &longs;upports an Ear that is heavier than the
whole Stalk, were made of the &longs;ame quantity of matter but were
ma&longs;&longs;ie or &longs;olid, it would be much le&longs;&longs;e repugnant to Fraction or
Flection. And with the &longs;ame Rea&longs;on Art hath ob&longs;erved, and Ex
perience confirmed, that an hollow Cane, or a Trunk of Wood
or Metal, is much more firm and tough than if being of the &longs;ame
weight and length it were &longs;olid, which con&longs;equently would be
more flender, and therefore Art hath contrived to make Lances hol
low within when they are de&longs;ired to be &longs;trong and light. We will
&longs;hew therefore, that
PROPOSITION XV.
long, one of which is Hollow, and the other Ma&longs;sie,
have to each other the &longs;ame proportion, as their Dia
meters.
Let the Cane or Hollow Cylinder be A E, [
17.]
and the Cylinder I N Ma&longs;&longs;ie, and equall in weight and length. I &longs;ay, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cane A E hath the &longs;ame propor
tion to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the &longs;olid Cylinder, as the Diameter
A B hath to the Diameter I L. Which is very manife&longs;t; For the
Cane and the Cylinder I N being equal, and of equal lengths, the
Circle I L that is Ba&longs;e of the Cylinder &longs;hall be equal to the Ring
A B that is Ba&longs;e of the Cane A E, (I call the Superficies that re
maineth when a le&longs;&longs;er Circle is taken out of a greater that is Con
centrick with it a Ring:) and therefore their Ab&longs;olute Re&longs;i&longs;tan
ces &longs;hall be equal: but becau&longs;e in breaking cro&longs;&longs;e-waies we make
u&longs;e in the Cylinder I N of the length L N for a Leaver, and of the
point L for a Fulciment, and of the Semidiameter or Diameter L I
for a Counter-Leaver; and in the Cane the part of the Leaver,
that is the Line B E is equal to L N; but the Counter-Leaver at
the Fulciment B is the Diameter or Semidiameter A B: It is mani
fe&longs;t therefore that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cane exceedeth that of
the Solid Cylinder as much as the Diameter A B exceeds the Dia
meter I L; Which is that that we &longs;ought. Toughne&longs;s therefore is ac
quired in the hollow Cane above the Toughne&longs;s of the &longs;olid Cylin
der according to the proportion of the Diameters: provided al
waies that they be both of the &longs;ame matter, weight, and length.
It would be well, that in con&longs;equence of this we try to inve&longs;tigate
that which hapneth in other Ca&longs;es indifferently between all Canes
and &longs;olid Cylinders of equal length, although unequal in quantity
of weight, and more or le&longs;s evacuated. And fir&longs;t we will demon
&longs;trate, that
PROP. XVI. PROBL. VI.
may be found equal to it.
This Operation is very ea&longs;ie.
For let the Line A B, be the Dia
meter of the Cane, and C D the Diameter of the Hollow or
Cavity. Let the Line A E be &longs;et off upon the greater Circle
equal to the Diameter C D, and conjoyn E B. And becau&longs;e in
the Semicircle A E B the Angle E is Right
Angle, the Circle who&longs;e Diameter is A B
&longs;hall be equall to the two Circles of the Di
ameters A E and E B: But A E is the Dia
meter of the Hollow of the Cane: Therefore
the Circle who&longs;e Diameter is E B, &longs;hall be
equal to the Ring A C B D: And therefore
the &longs;olid Cylinder, the Circle of who&longs;e Ba&longs;e
hath the Diameter E B &longs;hall be equal to the
Cane, they being of the &longs;ame length. This demon&longs;trated, we may
pre&longs;ently be able
PROP. XVII. PROBL. VII.
any what&longs;oever Cane and Cylinder, their lengths be
ing equal.
LET the Cane A B E, and the Cylinder R S M, be of equal
length: it is required to find what proportion the Re&longs;i&longs;tances
have to each other. By the precedent let the Cylinder I L N
be found equal to the Cane, and of the &longs;ame length; and to the
Lines I L and R S (Diameters of the Ba&longs;es of the Cylinders I N and
R M) let the Line V be a fourth
Proportional. I &longs;ay, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance
of the Cane A E is to the Re&longs;i
&longs;tance of the Cylinder R M, as the
Line A B is to V. For the Cane
A E being equal to, and of the
&longs;ame length with the Cylinder
I N, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cane
&longs;hall be to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the
Cylinder, as the Line A B is to I L:
But the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder I N is to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the
Cylinder R M, as the Cube I L is to the Cube R S; that is, as the
Line I L to V: Therefore,
A E hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder
R M, that the Line A B hath to V: Which is that that was &longs;ought.
GALILEUS,
HIS
DIALOGUES
OF
MOTION.
The Third Dialogue.
SALVIATUS, SAGREDUS, and SIMPLICIUS.
OF LOCAL MOTION.
old Subject. There is nothing in Nature more
antient than
many and great Volumns have been written
by Philo&longs;ophers: But yet there are &longs;undry
Symptomes and Properties in it worthy of
our Notice, which I find not to have been hi
therto ob&longs;erved, much le&longs;&longs;e demon&longs;trated by
any. Some &longs;light particulars have been no
ted: as that the Natural Motion of Grave Bodies continually accelle-
declared in what proportion that Acceleration is made. For no man,
that I know, hath ever demon&longs;trated, That there is the &longs;ame proportion
between the Spaces, thorow which a thing moveth in equal Times, as
there is between the Odde Numbers which follow in order after a Vnite. It hath been ob&longs;erved that Projects [or things thrown or darted with vi
olence] make a Line that is &longs;omewhat curved; but that this line is a Pa
rabola, none have hinted: Yet the&longs;e, and &longs;undry other things, no
le&longs;&longs;e worthy of our knowledg, will I here demon&longs;trate: And which
is more, I will open a way to a mo&longs;t ample and excellent Science,
of which the&longs;e our Labours &longs;hall be the Elements: into which more
&longs;ubtil and piercing Wits than mine will be better able to dive.
In the fir&longs;t part we con&longs;ider
&longs;uch things as re&longs;pect Equable or Vniforme Motion. In the &longs;econd we
write of Motion naturally accelerate. In the third we treat of Violent
Motion, or
OF EQVABLE MOTION.
Definition, which I thus deliver.
DEFINITION.
By an Equable or Uniform Motion, I under&longs;tand that by which a
Moveable in all equal Times pa&longs;&longs;eth thorow equal Spaces.
ADVERTISEMENT.
that an Equable Motion, whereby equal Spaces are pa&longs;t in equal
Times) this Particle
for it may happen, that a Moveable may pa&longs;&longs;e thorow equal Spaces in cer
tain equal Times, though the Spaces be not equal which it hath gone in
le&longs;&longs;er, though equal parts of the &longs;ame Time. From this our Definition
follow the&longs;e four Axiomes:
AXIOMEL
In the &longs;ame Equable Motion that Space is greater which is pa&longs;&longs;ed
in a longer Time, and that le&longs;&longs;er which is pa&longs;t in a &longs;horter.
AXIOME II.
In the &longs;ame Equable Motion, the greater the Space is that hath
been gone thorow, the longer was the Time in which the Move
able was going it.
AXIOME III.
The Space which a greater Velocity pa&longs;&longs;eth in any Time, is great
er than the Space which a le&longs;&longs;er Velocity pa&longs;&longs;eth in the &longs;ame
Time.
AXIOME IV.
The Velocity which pa&longs;&longs;eth a greater Space, is greater than the
Velocity which pa&longs;&longs;eth a le&longs;&longs;er Space in the &longs;ame Time.
THEOR. I. PROP. I.
If a Moveable moving with an Equable Motion,
and with the &longs;ame Velocity pa&longs;&longs;e two &longs;everal
Spaces, the Times of the Motion &longs;hall be to
one another as the &longs;aid Spaces.
the two Spaces A B and B C: and let D E be the Time of the Moti
on thorow A B; and let the Time of the Motion thorow B C be E F
I &longs;ay that the Time D E to the Time E F, is as the Space A B to the
Space B C. Protract the Spaces and Times on both &longs;ides, towards
G H and I K, and in A G take any number of Spaces equal to A B,
any number of Spaces equal to B C, and in F K take the &longs;ame number
of Times equal to the Time E F. This done, the Space B G will con
tain ju&longs;t as many Spaces equal to B A, as the Time E I containeth
Times equal to E D, equimultiplied according to what ever Rate; And
likewi&longs;e the Space B H will contain as many Spaces equal to B C, as
multiplied. And fora&longs;much as D E is the Time of the Motion thorow
A B, the whole Time E I, &longs;hall be the Time of the whole Space of the
Motion thorow B G, by rea&longs;on that the Motion is Equable, and that the
number of the Times in E I equal to D E, is the &longs;ame with the number
of Spaces in B G, equal to B A: For the &longs;ame rea&longs;on E K is the Time
of the Motion thorow H B. Now in regard the Motion is Equable, if the
Space G B were equal to H B, the Time I E would be equal to E K:
and if G B be greater than B H, I E &longs;hall likewi&longs;e be greater than E K:
and if le&longs;&longs;er, le&longs;&longs;er. They are therefore four Magnitudes; A B the fir&longs;t,
B C the &longs;econd, D E the third, and E F the Fourth; and the fir&longs;t
and third, to wit, the Space A B, and Time D E, there were taken the
Time I E, and the Space G B equimultiple, according to any multi
plication; and it hath been demon&longs;trated that the&longs;e do at once either
equal, or fall &longs;hort of, or el&longs;e exceed the Time E K, and Space B H,
which are equimultiple of the &longs;econd and fourth: Therefore the fir&longs;t
bath to the &longs;econd, to wit the Space A B to the Space B C, the &longs;ame
proportion that the third hath to the fourth, to wit, the Time D E to
the Time E F. Which was to be demon&longs;trated.
THEOR. II. PROP. II.
If a Moveable in equal Times pa&longs;&longs;e thorow two
Spaces, the &longs;aid Spaces will be to each other,
as the Velocities. And if the Spaces are to each
other as the Velocities, the Times will be
equal.
Spaces pa&longs;t, by the Moveable in equal times; the Space A B with
the Velocity D E, and the Space B C with the Velocity E F. I
&longs;ay, that the Space A B is to the Space B C, as the Velocity D E is to
the Velocity E F: and thus I prove it. Take as before, of the Spaces
and Velocities equi-multiples, accordieg to any what ever Rate, &longs;ci
licet G B and I E, of A B and D E, and likewi&longs;e H B and K E, of
B C and E F: It may be concluded as above, that G B and I E are
both at once either equal to, or fall &longs;hort of, or el&longs;e exceed the equi-mul
tiples of D H and E K. Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is proved.
THEOR. III. PROP. III.
The Times in which the &longs;ame Space is pa&longs;t tho
row by unequal Velocities, have the &longs;ame pro
portion to each other as their Velocities contra
rily taken.
and according to both the&longs;e let a Motion be made thorow the &longs;ame
Space C D. I &longs;ay the Time in which the Velocity A pa&longs;&longs;eth the
Space C D, &longs;hall be to the Time in which the Velocity B pa&longs;&longs;eth the
&longs;aid Space, as the Velocity B to the Velocity A. As A is to B, &longs;o let
C D be to C E: Then, by the
former Propo&longs;ition, the Time in
C D, &longs;hall be the &longs;ame with
the Time in which B pa&longs;&longs;eth
C E. But the Time in which
the Velocity B pa&longs;&longs;eth C E, is
to the Time in which it pa&longs;&longs;eth C D, as C E is to C D: Therefore
the Time in which the Velocity A pa&longs;&longs;eth C D, is to the Time in which
the Velocity B pa&longs;&longs;eth the &longs;ame C D, as C E is to C D; that is, the Ve
locity B is to the Velocity A: Which was to be proved.
THEOR. IV. PROP. IV.
If two Moveables move with an Equable Mo
tion, but with unequal Velocities, the Spaces
which they pa&longs;&longs;e in unequal Times, are to each
other in a proportion compounded of the pro
portion of the Velocities, and of the propor
tion of the Times.
F: And let the proportion of the Velocity of the Moveable E be
to the Velocity of the Moveable F, as A is to B: And let the Time
in which E is moved, be unto the Time in which F is moved, as C is
to D. I &longs;ay the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by E, with the Velocity A in the Time C, is to
the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by F, with the Velocity B in the Time D, in a proportion
compounded of the proportion of the Velocity A to the Velocity B, and ofLet the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by the
Moveable E, with the Velocity A in the Time C, be G: And as the
Velocity A is to the Velocity B,
&longs;o let G be to I: And as the
Time C is to the Time D, &longs;o
let I be to L: It is manife&longs;t,
that I is the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by F
in the &longs;ame Time in which E
pa&longs;&longs;eth thorow G; &longs;eeing that
the Spaces G and I are as the
Velocities A and B; and &longs;eeing that as the Time C is to the Time D, &longs;o
is I unto L; and &longs;ince that I is the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by the Moveable F in the
Time C: Therefore L &longs;hall be the Space that F pa&longs;&longs;eth in the Time D,
with the Velocity B: But the proportion of G to L, is compounded of the
proportions of G to I, and of I to L; that is, of the proportions of the
Velocity A to the Velocity B, and of the Time C to the Time D:
Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is demon&longs;trated.
THEOR. V. PROP. V.
If two Moveables move with an Equable Motion,
but with unequal Velocities, and if the Spaces
pa&longs;&longs;ed be al&longs;o unequal, the Times &longs;hall be to
each other in a proportion compounded of the
proportion of the Spaces, and of the proporti
on of the Velocities contrarily taken.
the Velocity of B, as V to T, and let the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed, be as S to
R. I &longs;ay the proportion of the Time in which A is moved to the
Time in which B is moved, &longs;hall be compounded of the proportions of the
Velocity T to the Velocity V, and of the Space S to the Space R. Let C be
the Time of the Motion A;
the Velocity V, &longs;o let the
Time C be to the Time E:
And for a&longs;much as C is the
Time in which A with
the Velocity V pa&longs;&longs;eth the
Space S; and that the
Time C is to the Time E, as the Velocity T of the Moveable B is to the
Velocity V, E &longs;hall be the Time in which the Moveable B would pa&longs;&longs;eAgain as the Space S is to the Space R, &longs;o let the
Time E be to the Time G: Therefore G is the Time in which B would
pa&longs;&longs;e the Space R. And becau&longs;e the proportion of C to G is compounded
of the proportions of C to E, and of E to G; And &longs;ince the proportion
of C to E is the &longs;ame with that of the Velocities of the Moveables A and
B contrarily taken; that is, with that of T and V; And the proportion
of E to G is the &longs;ame with the proportion of the Spaces S and R: There
fore the Propo&longs;ition is demon&longs;trated.
THEOR. VI. PROP. VI.
If two Moveables move with an Equable Motion,
the proportion of their Velocities &longs;hall be com
pounded of the proportion of the Spaces pa&longs;
&longs;ed, and of the proportion of the Times con
trarily taken.
Motion; and let the Spaces by them pa&longs;&longs;ed, be as V to T; and
let the Times be as S to R. I &longs;ay that the proportion of the Ve
locity of the Moveable A, to that of the Velocity of B, &longs;hall be
compounded of the proportions of the Space V to the Space T, and
of the Time R to the Time S. Let C be the Velocity with which the
Moveable A pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space V in the Time S: And let the Velocity C
be to the Velo-
Space V is to
the Space T;
And E &longs;hall
be the Veloci
ty with which
the Moveable
B pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space T in the Time S: Again, let the Velocity E be to the
other Velocity G, as the Time R is to the Time S; And G &longs;hall be the
Velocity with which the Moveable B pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space T in the Time R. We have therefore the Velocity C, wherewith the Moveable A pa&longs;&longs;eth
the Space V in the Time S; and the Velocity G, wherewith the Move
able B pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space T in the Time R: And the proportion of C to
G is compounded of the proportions of C to E and of E to G: But the
proportion of C to E, is &longs;uppo&longs;ed the &longs;ame with that of the Space V to
the Space T; and the proportion of E to G, is the &longs;ame with that of R
to S: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is manifest.
cademick, e.
Galileus.
SALV.
This that we have read, is what our ^{*}
of the Equable Motion. We will pa&longs;s therefore to a more &longs;ubtil and
new Contemplation touching the Motion Naturally Accelerate:
and behold here the Title and Introduction.
OF MOTION
NATVRALLY ACCELERATE.
company Equable Motion; we are now to treat of another kind of
Motion which we call Accelerate. And fir&longs;t it will be expedient to
find out and explain a Definition be&longs;t agreeing to that which Nature
makes u&longs;e of. For though it be not nconvenient to feign a Motion at plea
&longs;ure, and then to con&longs;ider the Accidents that attend it (as tho&longs;e have
done, who having framed in their imagination Helixes and Conchoi
des, which are Lines ari&longs;ing from certain Motions, although not u&longs;ed
by Nature, and upon that Suppo&longs;ition have laudably demon&longs;trated the
Symptomes thereof) yet in regard that Nature maketh u&longs;e of a certain
kind of Acceleration in the de&longs;cent of Grave Bodies, we are re&longs;olved to
&longs;earch out and contemplate the pa&longs;&longs;ions thereof, and &longs;ee whether the
Definition that we are about to produce of this our Accelerate Motion,
doth aptly and congruou&longs;ly &longs;ute with the E&longs;&longs;ence of Motion Naturally
Accelerate. After many long and laborious Studies we have found out
a Definition which &longs;eemeth to expre&longs;&longs;e the true nature of this Accelerate
Motion, in regard that all the Natural Experiments that fall under
the Ob&longs;ervation of our Sen&longs;es, do agree with tho&longs;e its properties that
we intend anon to demon&longs;trate. In this Di&longs;qui&longs;ition we have been a&longs;&longs;i
&longs;ted, and as it were led by the hand by that ob&longs;ervation of the u&longs;ual
Method and common procedure of Nature her &longs;elf in her other Operati
ons, wherein &longs;he con&longs;tantly makes u&longs;e of the Fir&longs;t, Simple&longs;t, and Ea
&longs;ie&longs;t Means that are: for I believe that no man can think that Swim
ming or flying can be performed in a more &longs;imple or ea&longs;ie way, than that
which Fi&longs;hes and Birds do u&longs;e out of a Natural In&longs;tinct. Why there
fore &longs;hall not I be per&longs;waded, that, when I &longs;ee a Stone to acquire conti
nually new additions of Velocity in its de&longs;cending from its Re&longs;t out of &longs;ome
high place, this encrea&longs;e made in the &longs;imple&longs;t ea&longs;ie&longs;t and mo&longs;t obvious
manner that we can imagine? Now if we &longs;eriou&longs;ly examine all the ways
that can be devi&longs;ed, we &longs;hall find no encrea&longs;es, no acqui&longs;itions
le&longs;&longs;e intricate or more intelligible than that which ever encrea&longs;eth or
makes its additions after the &longs;ame manner. This appeareth by the great
Affinity For as the Equability or
Vniformity of Motion is defined and expre&longs;&longs;ed by the Equability of the
equal Spaces are pa&longs;t in equal Times) &longs;o by the &longs;ame Equability of the
parts of Time, we may perceive, that the encrea&longs;e of Celerity in the Natu
ral Motion of Grave Bodies, is made after a Simple and plain manner;
conceiving in our Mind that their Motion is continually accelerated uni
formly and at the &longs;ame Rate, whil&longs;t equal additions of Celerity are
conferred upon them in all equal Times. So that taking any equal par
ticles of Time beginning from the fir&longs;t In&longs;tant in which the Moveable
departeth from Re&longs;t, and entereth upon its De&longs;cent, the Degree of
Velocity acquired in the fir&longs;t and &longs;econd Particles of Time, is double the
degree of Velocity that the Moveable acquired in the fir&longs;t Particle: and
the degree of Velocity that it acquireth in three Particles, is triple, and
that in four quadruple to the &longs;ame Degree of the fir&longs;t Time: As, for
our better under&longs;tanding, if a Moveable &longs;hould continue its Motion
according to the degree or moment of Velocity acquired in the fir&longs;t Parti
cle of Time, and &longs;hould extend its cour&longs;e equably with that &longs;ame De
gree; this Motion would be twice as &longs;low as that which it would obtain
according to the degree of Velocity acquired in two Particles of Time:
So that it will not be improper if we under&longs;tand the Intention of the Ve
locity, to proceed according to the Exten&longs;ion of the Time. From whence
we may frame this Definition of the Motion of which we are about to
treat.
DEFINITION.
Motion Accelerate in an Equable or Vniform
Proportion, I call that which departing from
Re&longs;t, &longs;uperaddeth equal moments of Velocity
in equal Times.
SAGR.
Though it were Irrational for me to oppo&longs;e this or any
other Definition a&longs;&longs;igned by any what&longs;oever Author, they being all
Arbitrary, yet I may very well, without any offence, que&longs;tion whe
ther this Definition, which is under&longs;tood and admitted in Ab&longs;tract,
doth &longs;ute, agree, and hold true in that &longs;ort of Accelerate Motion,
which Grave Bodies de&longs;cending naturally do exerci&longs;e. And becau&longs;e
the Authour &longs;eemeth to promi&longs;e us, that the Natural Motion of
Grave Bodies is &longs;uch as he hath defined it, I could wi&longs;h that &longs;ome
Scruples were removed that trouble my mind; that &longs;o I might apply
my &longs;elf afterwards with greater attention to the Proportions and
Demon&longs;trations which are expected.
SALV.
I like well, that you and
Doubts as they come in the way: which I do imagine will be the
and that, either were re&longs;olved by conferring with the Author, or
removed by my own con&longs;idering of them.
SAGR.
Whil&longs;t I am fancying to my &longs;elf a Grave De&longs;cending
Moveable to depart from Re&longs;t, that is from the privation of all
Velocity, and to enter into Motion, and in that to go encrea
&longs;ing, according to the proportion after which the Time encrea&longs;eth
from the fir&longs;t in&longs;tant of the Motion; and to have gr.
Pul&longs;ations, acquired eight degrees of Velocity, of which in the
fourth Pul&longs;ation it had gained four, in the &longs;econd two, in the
fir&longs;t one, Time being &longs;ubdivi&longs;ible
the Antecedent Velocity alwayes dimini&longs;hing at that Rate, there
will bt no degree of Velocity &longs;o &longs;mall, or, if you will, of Tardity
&longs;o great, in which the &longs;aid Moveable is not found to be con&longs;ti
tuted, after its departure from infinite Tardity, that is, from
Re&longs;t. So that if that degree of Velocity which it had at four Pul
&longs;ations of Time, was &longs;uch, that maintaining it Equable, it would
have run two Miles in an hour, and with the degree of Velocity
that it had in the &longs;econd Pul&longs;ation, it would have gone one mile
an hour, it mu&longs;t be granted, that in the In&longs;tants of Time neeter
and neerer to its fir&longs;t In&longs;tant of moving from Re&longs;t, it is &longs;o &longs;low,
as that (continuing to move with that Tardity) it would not have
pa&longs;&longs;ed a Mile in an hour, nor in a day, nor in a year, nor in a
thou&longs;and; nay, nor have gone one &longs;ole foot in a greater time:
An accident to which me thinks the Imagination but very unea
&longs;ily accords, &longs;eeing that Sen&longs;e &longs;heweth us, that a Grave Falling
Body commeth down &longs;uddenly, and with great Velocity.
SALV.
This is one of tho&longs;e Doubts that al&longs;o fell in my way
upon my fir&longs;t thinking on this affair, but not long after I remo
ved it: and that removal was the effect of the &longs;elf &longs;ame Expe
riment which at pre&longs;ent &longs;tarts it to you. You &longs;ay, that in your
opinion, Experience &longs;heweth that the Moveable hath no &longs;ooner
departed from Re&longs;t, but it entereth into a very notable Velocity:
and I &longs;ay, that this very Experiment proves it to us, that the fir&longs;t
Impetus's of the Cadent Body, although it be very heavy, are
mo&longs;t &longs;lack and &longs;low. Lay a Grave Body upon &longs;ome yielding mat
ter, and let it continue upon it till it hath pre&longs;&longs;ed into it as far as
it can with its &longs;imple Gravity; it is manife&longs;t, that rai&longs;ing it a yard
or two, and then letting it fall upon the &longs;ame matter, it &longs;hall
with its percu&longs;&longs;ion make a new pre&longs;&longs;ure, and greater than that
made at fir&longs;t by its meer weight: and the effect &longs;hall be cau&longs;ed
by the falling Moveable conjoyned with the Velocity acquired in
the Fall: which impre&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall be greater and greater, accord
ing as the Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall come from a greater height; that is,
according as the Velocity of the Percutient &longs;hall be greater. We
locity of a falling heavy Body; by the quality and quantity of
the Percu&longs;&longs;ion. But tell me Sirs, that Beetle which being let fall
upon a Stake from an height of four yards, driveth it into the
ground, gr.
&longs;hall drive it much le&longs;&longs;e, and le&longs;&longs;e from an height of one, and
le&longs;&longs;e from a foot; and la&longs;tly lifting it up an inch, what will it do
more than if without any blow it were laid upon it? Certainly
but very little, and the operation would be wholly impercep
tible, if it were rai&longs;ed the thickne&longs;&longs;e of a leaf. And becau&longs;e the
effect of the Percu&longs;&longs;ion is regulated by the Velocity of the Percu
tient, who will que&longs;tion but that the Motion is very &longs;low, and
the Velocity extreme &longs;mall, where its operation is impercep
tible? See now of what power Truth is, &longs;ince the &longs;ame Experi
ment that &longs;eemed at the fir&longs;t blu&longs;h to hold forth one thing, be
ing better con&longs;idered, a&longs;certains us of the contrary. But without
having recour&longs;e to that Experiment (which without doubt is mo&longs;t
per&longs;wa&longs;ive) me-thinks that it is not hard to penetrate &longs;uch a
Truth as this by meer Di&longs;cour&longs;e. We have an heavy &longs;tone &longs;u
&longs;tained in the Air at Re&longs;t: let it be di&longs;engaged from its uphol
der, and &longs;et at liberty; and, as being more grave than the Air, it
goeth de&longs;cending downwards, and that not with a Motion Equa
ble, but &longs;low in the beginning, and continually afterwards ac
celerate: and &longs;eeing that the Velocity is Augmentable and Di
mini&longs;hable
Moveable departing from an infinite Tardity (for &longs;uch is Re&longs;t)
entereth immediately into ten degrees of Velocity, rather than in
one of four, or in this more than in one of two, of one, of half
one, or of the hundredth part of one; and to be &longs;hort, in all
the infinite le&longs;&longs;er? Pray you hear me.
I do not think that you
would &longs;cruple to grant me, that the acqui&longs;t of the Degrees of Ve
locity of the falling Stone may be made with the &longs;ame Order as
is the Diminution and lo&longs;&longs;e of the &longs;ame degrees, when with an
impellent Virtue it is driven upwards to the &longs;ame height: But if
that be &longs;o, I do not &longs;ee how it can be &longs;uppo&longs;ed that in the diminu
tion of the Velocity of the a&longs;cendent Stone, &longs;pending it all, it
can come to the &longs;tate of Re&longs;t before it hath pa&longs;&longs;ed thorow all the
degrees of Tardity.
SIMP.
But if the greater and greater degrees of Tardity are
infinite, it &longs;hall never &longs;pend them all; &longs;o that the a&longs;cendent
Grave will never attain to Re&longs;t, but will move
retarding: a thing which we &longs;ee not to happen.
SALV.
This would happen,
&longs;hould &longs;tay for &longs;ome time in each degree: but it pa&longs;&longs;eth thorow
them, without &longs;taying longer than an in&longs;tant in any of them.
there are infinite In&longs;tants, therefore they are &longs;ufficient to an&longs;wer
to the infinite degrees of Velocity dimini&longs;hed. And that the
a&longs;cendent Grave Body per&longs;i&longs;ts not for any quantitative Time in
one and the &longs;ame degree of Velocity, may thus be made out:
Becau&longs;e, a certain quantitative Time being a&longs;&longs;igned it in the fir&longs;t
in&longs;tant of that Time, and likewi&longs;e in the la&longs;t, the Moveable
&longs;hould be found to have one and the &longs;ame degree of Velocity, it
might by this &longs;econd degree be likewi&longs;e driven upwards &longs;uch an
other Space, like as from the fir&longs;t it was tran&longs;ported to the &longs;e
cond; and by the &longs;ame rea&longs;on it would pa&longs;&longs;e from the &longs;econd to
the third, and, in &longs;hort, would continue its Motion Uniform
infinitum.
SAGR.
From this Di&longs;cour&longs;e, as I conceive, one might derive a
very appo&longs;ite Rea&longs;on of the Que&longs;tion controverted among&longs;t Philo. &longs;ophers, Touching what &longs;hould be the Cau&longs;e of the acceleration
of the Natural Motion of Grave Moveables. For when I confider
in the Grave Body driven upwards, its continual Diminution of
that Virtue impre&longs;&longs;ed upon it by the Projicient, which &longs;o long as
it was &longs;uperiour to that other contrary one of Gravity, forced it
upwards, this and that being come to an
able cea&longs;eth to ri&longs;e any higher, and pa&longs;&longs;eth thorow the &longs;tate of
Re&longs;t, in which the
ly that exce&longs;&longs;e is &longs;pent, which it before had above the Gravity of
the Moveable, whereby prevailing over the &longs;ame, it did drive
it upwards. And the Diminution of this forrein
ing, and con&longs;equently the advantage beginning to be on the part
of the Gravity, the De&longs;cent al&longs;o beginneth but &longs;low, in regard
of the oppo&longs;ition of the Virtue impre&longs;&longs;ed, a con&longs;iderable part of
which &longs;till remaineth in the Moveable: but becau&longs;e it doth go
continually dimini&longs;hing, and is &longs;till with a greater and greater
proportion overcome by the Gravity, hence ari&longs;eth the continual
Acceleration of the Motion.
SIMP.
The conceit is witty, but more &longs;ubtil than &longs;olid: for in
ca&longs;e it were concludent, it &longs;alveth onely tho&longs;e Natural Motions
to which a Violent Motion preceded, in which part of the extern
Virtue &longs;till remains in force: but where there is no &longs;uch remaining
impul&longs;e, as where the Moveable departeth from a long Quie&longs;
cence, the &longs;trength of your whole Di&longs;cour&longs;e vani&longs;heth.
SAGR.
I believe that you are in an Errour, and that this Di
&longs;tinction of Ca&longs;es which you make, is needle&longs;&longs;e, or, to &longs;ay bet
ter,
on the Project by the Projicient &longs;ometimes much, and &longs;ometimes
little Vertue; &longs;o as that it may be &longs;tricken upwards an hundred
yards, and al&longs;o twenty, or four, or one?
SIMP.
No doubt but there may.
SAGR.
And no le&longs;&longs;e po&longs;&longs;ible is it, that the &longs;aid Virtue impre&longs;&longs;ed
&longs;hall &longs;o little &longs;eperate the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Gravity, as not to
rai&longs;e the Project above an inch: and finally the Virtue of the
Projicient may be onely &longs;o much, as ju&longs;t to equalize and com
pen&longs;ate the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Gravity, &longs;o as that the Moveable
is not driven upwards, but onely &longs;u&longs;tained. So that when you
hold a Stone in your hand, what el&longs;e do you, but impre&longs;&longs;e on it
&longs;o much Virtue impelling upwards, as is the faculty of its Gra
vity drawing downwards? And this your Virtue, do you not
continue to keep it impre&longs;&longs;ed on the Stone all the time that you
hold it in your hand? What &longs;ay you, is it dimini&longs;hed by your
long holding it? And this &longs;u&longs;tention which impedeth the Stones
de&longs;cent, what doth it import, whether it be made by your hand,
or by a Table, or by a Rope, that &longs;u&longs;pends it? Doubtle&longs;&longs;e no
thing at all. Conclude with your &longs;elf therefore,
the precedence of a long, a &longs;hort, or a Momentary Re&longs;t to the
Fall of the Stone, makes no alteration at all, &longs;o that the Stone
&longs;hould not alwaies depart affected with &longs;o much Virtue contrary
to Gravity, as did exactly &longs;uffice to have kept it in Re&longs;t.
SALV.
I do not think it a &longs;ea&longs;onable time at pre&longs;ent to enter
upon the Di&longs;qui&longs;ition of the Cau&longs;e of the Acceleration of Natu
ral Motion: touching which &longs;undry Philo&longs;ophers have produced
&longs;undry opinions: &longs;ome reducing it to the approximation unto
the Center others to the le&longs;&longs;e parts of the
maining to be perforated; others to a certain Extru&longs;ion of the
Ambient
Moveable, goeth driving and continually thru&longs;ting it; which
Fancies, and others of the like nature, it would be nece&longs;&longs;ary to
examine, and with &longs;mall benefit to an&longs;wer. It &longs;erveth our Au
thours turn at the pre&longs;ent, that we under&longs;tand that he will de
clare and demon&longs;trate to us &longs;ome Pa&longs;&longs;ions of an Accelerate Mo
tion (be the Cau&longs;e of its Acceleration what it will) &longs;o as that the
Moments of its Velocity do go encrea&longs;ing, after its departure from
Re&longs;t with that mo&longs;t &longs;imple proportion wherewith the Continua
tion of the Time doth encrea&longs;e: which is as much as to &longs;ay, that
in equal Times there are made equal additaments of Velocity. And if it &longs;hall be found, that the Accidents that &longs;hall hereafter
be demon&longs;trated, do hold true in the Motion of Naturally De
&longs;cendent and Accelerate Grave Moveables, we may account,
that the a&longs;&longs;umed Definition taketh in that Motion of Grave Bo
dies, and that it is true, that their Acceleration doth encrea&longs;e ac
cording as the Time and Duration of the Motion encrea&longs;eth.
SAGR.
By what as yet is &longs;et before my Intellectuals, it appears
to me that one might with (haply) more plainne&longs;&longs;e define, and yet
rate is that in which the Velocity goeth encrea&longs;ing according as
the Space encrea&longs;eth that is pa&longs;&longs;ed thorow: So that, for example,
the degree of Velocity acquired by the Moveable in a de&longs;cent of
four yards &longs;hould be double to that that it would have after it had
de&longs;cended a Space of two, and this double to that acquired in the
Space of the fir&longs;t Yard. For I do not think that it can be doubted,
but that that Grave Moveable which falleth from an height of &longs;ix
yards hath, and percu&longs;&longs;eth with an
it had when it had de&longs;cended three yards, and triple to that which
it had at two, and &longs;extuple to that had in the Space of one.
SALV.
I comfort my &longs;elf in that I have had &longs;uch a Companion
in my Errour: and I will tell you farther, that your Di&longs;cour&longs;e hath
&longs;o much of likelihood and probability in it, that our Author him&longs;elf
did not deny unto me, when I propo&longs;ed it to him, that he likewi&longs;e
had been for &longs;ome time in the &longs;ame mi&longs;take.
terwards extreamly wondred at, was to &longs;ee in four plain words,
di&longs;covered, not only the falfity, but impo&longs;&longs;ibility of two Propo&longs;i
tions that carry with them &longs;o much of &longs;eeming truth, that having
propounded them to many, I never met with any one but did freely
admit them to be &longs;o.
SIMP.
Certainly I &longs;hould be of the number, and that the De
&longs;cendent Grave Moveable
locity at the rate of the Space, and that the Moment of the &longs;ame
Percutient is double, coming from a double height, &longs;eem to me Pro
po&longs;itions to be granted without any hæ&longs;itation or controver&longs;ie.
SALV.
And yet they are as fal&longs;e and impo&longs;&longs;ible, as that Moti
on is made in an in&longs;tant. And hear a clear proof of the &longs;ame.
In
ca&longs;e the Velocities have the &longs;ame proportion as the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed,
or to be pa&longs;&longs;ed, tho&longs;e Spaces &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed in equal Times: if
therefore the Velocities with which the falling Moveable pa&longs;&longs;eth
the Space of four yards, were double to the Velocities with which it
pa&longs;&longs;eth the two fir&longs;t yards (like as the Space is double to the Space)
then the Times of tho&longs;e Tran&longs;itions are equal: but the &longs;ame Move
able's pa&longs;&longs;ing the four yards, and the two in one and the &longs;ame Time,
hath place only in In&longs;tantaneous Motion.
falling grave
yards in a le&longs;&longs;er than it doth the four. Therefore it is fal&longs;e that its
Velocity encrea&longs;eth as its Space. The other Propo&longs;ition is demon
&longs;trated to be fal&longs;e with the &longs;ame per&longs;picuity. For that which per
cu&longs;&longs;eth being the &longs;ame, the difference and Moment of the Percu&longs;&longs;ton
cannot be determined but by the difference of Velocity; If there
fore the percutient, coming from a double height, make a Percu&longs;&longs;i
on with a double Moment, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that it &longs;trike with a dou
ble Velocity:
ter altitude to be longer.
SAGR.
This is too great an Evidence, too great a Facility
wherewith you manife&longs;t ab&longs;truce Conclu&longs;ions: this extream ea&longs;i
ne&longs;s rendreth them of le&longs;&longs;e value than they were whil&longs;t they lay hid
under contrary appearances. I believe that the Generality of men
little pre&longs;&longs;e tho&longs;e Notions which are ea&longs;ily obtained, in compari
&longs;on of tho&longs;e about which men make &longs;o long and inexplicable alter
cations.
SALV.
To tho&longs;e which with great brevity and clarity &longs;hew the
fallacies of Propo&longs;itions that have been commonly received for
true by the generality of people, it would be a very tolerable in
jury to return them only &longs;lighting in&longs;tead of thanks: but there is
much di&longs;plea&longs;ure and mole&longs;tation in another certain affection
&longs;ometimes found in &longs;ome men, that pretending in the &longs;ame Studies
at lea&longs;t Parity with any whom&longs;oever, do &longs;ee that they have let
pa&longs;s &longs;uch and &longs;uch for true Conclu&longs;ions, which afterwards by
another, with a &longs;hort and ea&longs;ie di&longs;qui&longs;ition, have been detected and
convicted for fal&longs;e. I will not call that affection Envy, that is ac
cu&longs;tomed to convert in time to hatred and de&longs;pite again&longs;t the di&longs;
coverers of &longs;uch Fallacies, but I will call it an itch, and a de&longs;ire to
be able rather to maintain their inveterate Errours, than to per
mit the reception of new-di&longs;covered Truths. Which humour &longs;ome
times induceth them to write in contradiction of tho&longs;e truths
which are but too perfectly known unto them&longs;elves only to keep
the Reputation of others low in the opinion of the numerous and
ill-informed Vulgar. Of &longs;uch fal&longs;e Conclu&longs;ions received for true,
and very ea&longs;ie to be confuted, I have heard no &longs;mall number from
our
SAGR.
And you mu&longs;t not deprive us of them; but in due time
impart them to us, when a particular Meeting &longs;hall be appointed
for them. For the pre&longs;ent, continuing the di&longs;cour&longs;e we are about,
I think that by this time we have e&longs;tabli&longs;hed the Definition of Mo
tion uniformly Accelerate, treated of in the en&longs;uing di&longs;cour&longs;es,
and it is this;
departing from Re&longs;t &longs;uperadds equal Moments of Velocity in
equal Times.
SALV.
That Definition being confirmed, the Author asketh
and &longs;uppo&longs;eth but one only Principle to be true, namely:
SVPPOSITION.
&longs;ame Moveable upon Planes of different inclinations
are equal then, when the Elevations of the &longs;aid
Planes are equal.
By the Elevation of an inclined Plane he meaneth the Per
pendicular, which from the higher term of the &longs;aid Plane
falleth upon the Horizontal Line produced along by the
lower term of the &longs;aid Plane inclined: as for better under&longs;tanding;
the Line A B being parallel to the Horizon, upon which let the two
Planes C A, and C D be inclined:
the Perpendicular C B falling up
on the Horizontal Line B A the
Author calleth the Elevation
of the Planes C A and C D;
and &longs;uppo&longs;eth that the degrees of
Velocity of the &longs;ame Moveable
de&longs;cending along the inclined Planes C A and C D, acqui
red in the Terms A and D are equal, for that their Elevation is
the &longs;ame C B. And &longs;o great al&longs;o ought the degree of Velocity be
under&longs;tood to be which the &longs;ame Moveable falling from the Point
C would acquire in the term B.
SAGR.
The truth is, this Suppo&longs;ition hath in it &longs;o much of pro
bability, that it de&longs;erveth to be granted without di&longs;pute, alwaies
pre&longs;uppo&longs;ing that all accidental and extern Impediments are re
moved, and that the Planes be very Solid and Ter&longs;e, and the Move
able in Figure mo&longs;t perfectly Rotund, &longs;o that neither the Plane,
nor the Moveable have any unevenne&longs;s. All Contra&longs;ts and Im
pediments, I &longs;ay, being removed, the light of Nature dictates to
me without any difficulty, that a Ball heavy and perfectly round
de&longs;cending by the Lines C A, C D, and C B would come to the
terms A D, and B with equal
SALV.
You argue very probably; but over and above the pro
bability, I will by an Experiment &longs;o increa&longs;e the likelihood, as that
it wants but little of being equal to a very nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;trati
on. Imagine this leafe of Paper to be a Wall erect at Right-angles
to the Horizon, and at a Nail, fa&longs;tned in the &longs;ame, hang a Ball or
Plummet of Lead, weighing an ounce or two, &longs;u&longs;pended by the
&longs;mall thread A B, two or three yards long, perpendicular to the
Horizon: and on the Wall draw an Horizontal Line D C, cutting
Inches, or thereabouts, from the Wall: Then transferring the
&longs;tring A B with the Ball into C, let go the &longs;aid Ball; which you will
&longs;ee fir&longs;t to de&longs;cend
de&longs;cribing C B D, and
to pa&longs;s &longs;o far beyond
the Term B, that run
ning along the Arch
B D it will ri&longs;e almo&longs;t
as high as the de&longs;igned
Parallel C D, wanting
but a very &longs;mall mat
ter of reaching to it,
the preci&longs;e arrival thi
ther being denied it by
the Impediment of the Air, and of the Thread. From which we
may truly conclude, that the
the Ball in its de&longs;cent along the Arch C B, was &longs;o much as &longs;ufficed
to carry it upwards along &longs;uch another Arch B D unto the &longs;ame
height: having made, and often reiterated this Experiment, let
us drive into the Wall, along which the Perpendicular A B pa&longs;&longs;eth,
another Nail, as in E or in F, which is to &longs;tand out five or &longs;ix In
ches; and this to the end that the thread A B, returning as before
to carry back the Ball C along the Arch C B, when it is come to
B, the Thread &longs;topping at the Nail E may be con&longs;trained to move
along the Circumference B G, de&longs;cribed about the Center E: by
which we &longs;hall &longs;ee what that &longs;ame
fore, being conceived in the &longs;ame term B, carried the &longs;ame Move
able along the Arch B D unto the height of the Horizontal Line
C D. Now, Sirs, you &longs;hall with delight &longs;ee the Ball carried unto
the Horizontal Line in the Point G; and the &longs;ame will happen if
the &longs;top be placed lower, as in F, where the Ball would de&longs;cribe
the Arch B I, evermore terminating its a&longs;cent exactly in the Line
C D: and in ca&longs;e the Check were &longs;o low that the overplus of the
thread beneath it cannot reach to the height of C D, (which would
happen if it were nearer to the point B than to the inter&longs;ection of
A B with the Horizontal Line C D) then the thread would
whirle and twine about the Nail. This experiment leaveth no
place for our doubting of the truth of the Suppo&longs;ition: for the
two Arches C B and D B being equall, and &longs;cituate alike, the
acqui&longs;t of Moment made along the De&longs;cent in the Arch C B, is
the &longs;ame with that made along the De&longs;cent in the Arch D B. But
the Moment acquired in
&longs;ame Moveable upwards along the Arch
ment acquired in the De&longs;cent D
nerally every Moment acquired along the De&longs;cent of an Arch is
equall to that which hath power to make the &longs;ame Moveable re
a&longs;cend along the &longs;ame Arch:
Moveable a&longs;cend along all the Arches
&longs;ince they are made by one and the &longs;ame Moment acquired along
the De&longs;cent C
that are acquired by the De&longs;cents along the Arches D
I
SAGR.
Your Di&longs;cour&longs;e is in my Judgment very Rational, and
the Experiment &longs;o appo&longs;ite and pertinent to verifie the
that it very well de&longs;erveth to be admitted as if it were Demon
&longs;trated.
SALV.
I will not con&longs;ent,
&longs;elves than we ought; and the rather for that we are chiefly to
make u&longs;e of this A&longs;&longs;umption in Motions made upon &longs;treight and
not curved Superficies; in which the Acceleration proceedeth with
degrees very different from tho&longs;e wherewith we &longs;uppo&longs;e it to pro
ceed in &longs;treight Planes. In&longs;omuch, that although the Experiment
alledged &longs;hews us, that the de&longs;cent along the Arch C
on the Moveable &longs;uch a Moment, as that it is able to re-carry it
to the &longs;ame height along any other Arch
we cannot with the like evidence &longs;hew, that the &longs;ame would hap
pen in ca&longs;e a mo&longs;t exact
clined according to the inclinations of the Chords of the&longs;e &longs;ame
Arches: yea, it is credible, that Angles being formed by the &longs;aid
Right Planes in the term
ty according to the Chord C
ing according to the Chords
them, would lo&longs;e of its
attain the height of the Line C D.
ved, which prejudiceth the Experiment, I do believe, that the un
der&longs;tanding may conceive, that the
riveth vigour from the quantity of the De&longs;cent) would be able to
remount the Moveable to the &longs;ame height. Let us therefore take
this at pre&longs;ent for a
which will come to be e&longs;tabli&longs;hed hereafter by &longs;eeing other Con
clu&longs;ions rai&longs;ed upon this Hypothe&longs;is to an&longs;wer, and exactly jump
with the Experiment. The Author having &longs;uppo&longs;ed this only Prin
ciple, he pa&longs;&longs;eth to the Propo&longs;itions, demon&longs;tratively proving them;
of which the fir&longs;t is this;
THEOR. I. PROP. I.
The time in which a Space is pa&longs;&longs;ed by a Movea
ble with a Motion Vniformly Accelerate, out of
Re&longs;t, is equal to the Time in which the &longs;ame
Space would be pa&longs;t by the &longs;ame Moveable
with an Equable Motion, the degree of who&longs;e
Velocity is &longs;ubduple to the greate&longs;t and ulti
mate degree of the Velocity of the former Vni
formly Accelerate Motion.
Space
Accelerate, out of Re&longs;t in C: and let the greate&longs;t and la&longs;t de-
A B
&longs;ure upon
points of divi&longs;ion draw as many Lines, continued
out unto the Line
Velocity after the fir&longs;t In&longs;tant A. Then divide
F B
G F
if the Parallels of the Triangle
out unto
the Parallels contained in the Quadrilatural Figure
equal to the Aggregate of all the Parallels compre
hended in the Triangle
to tho&longs;e contained in the Triangle
pezium Now &longs;ince all and &longs;ingular the In&longs;tants of Time
do an&longs;wer to all and &longs;ingular the Points of the Line A B; and &longs;ince the
Parallels contained in the Triangle
celeration or encrea&longs;ing Velocity, and the Parallels contained in the Pa
rallelogram do likewi&longs;e repre&longs;ent as many degrees of Equable Motion or
unencrea&longs;ing Velocity: It appeareth, that as many Moments of Velocity
pa&longs;&longs;ed in the Accelerate Motion according to the encrea&longs;ing Parallels of the
Triangle A E B, as in the Equable Motion according to the Parallels of
the Parallelogram G B: Becau&longs;e what is wanting in the fir&longs;t half of the
cient Moments are repre&longs;ented by the Parallels of the Triangle A
I E F.
in the &longs;ame Time by two Moveables, one whereof is moved with a Mo
tion uniformly Accelerated from Re&longs;t, the other with a Motion Equable
according to the Moment &longs;ubduple of that of the greate&longs;t Velocity of the
Accelerated Motion: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.
THEOR. II. PROP. II.
If a
on uniformly Accelerate, the Spaces which it
pa&longs;&longs;eth in any what&longs;oever Times are to each
other in a proportion Duplicate of the &longs;ame
Times; that is, they are as the Squares of
them.
and let
and let
beginning of the Motion) de&longs;cendeth uniformly accelerating; and let the
the Space
tion of that which the Time
Or, if you will, that the Spaces
another in the &longs;ame proportion as the Squares
A D.
from the points D and E draw the Parallels
P E
of Velocity acquired in the In&longs;tant D of the Time
&longs;tant E of the Time
mon&longs;trated in the la&longs;t Propo&longs;ition concerning Spaces, that
tho&longs;e are equal to one another, of which two Moveables
have pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time, the one by a Moveable out
of Re&longs;t with a Motion uniformly Accelerate, and the
other by the &longs;ame Moveable with an Equable Motion,
who&longs;e Velocity is &longs;ubduple to the greate&longs;t acquired by the
Accelerate Motion: Therefore
Lquable Motions, who&longs;e Velocities &longs;hould be as the half of
therefore that the&longs;e Spaces
the TimesBut in the fourth Propo&longs;ition of the Fir&longs;t Book we have demon&longs;trated:
That the Spaces pa&longs;t by two Moveables with an Equable Motion are
to each other in a proportion compounded of the proportion of the Velo
cities and of the proportion of the Times: But in this ca&longs;e the propor
tion of the Velocities and the proportion of the Times is the &longs;ame
as the half of
O D,
&longs;ed is double to the proportion of the Times. Which was to be demon
&longs;trated.
is double to the proportions of the greate&longs;t degrees of Velocity: that is,
of the Lines
COROLARY I.
der from the fir&longs;t In&longs;tant or beginniug of the Motion, as &longs;uppo&longs;e
A D, D E, E F, F G,
from an Vnite:
portion of the exce&longs;&longs;es of the Squares of Lines that equally exceed
one another, and the exce&longs;&longs;e of which is equal to the least of them,
or, if you will, of Squares that follow one another, beginning
Unitate.
cording to the &longs;imple Series of Numbers in equal Times, the Spaces
pa&longs;t in tho&longs;e Times make their encrea&longs;e according to the Series of
odd Numbers from an Vnite.
SAGR.
Be plea&longs;ed to &longs;tay your Reading, whil&longs;t I do paraphra&longs;e
touching a certain Conjecture that came into my mind
but even now; for the explanation of which, unto your under
&longs;tanding and my own, I will de&longs;cribe a &longs;hort Scheme: in which I
fan&longs;ie by the Line A I the continuation of the Time after the fir&longs;t
In&longs;tant, applying the Right Line A F unto A according to any
Angle: and joyning together the Terms I F, I divide the Time A I
in half at C, and then draw C B parallel to I F.
ring B C, as the greate&longs;t degree of Velocity which beginning from
Re&longs;t in the fir&longs;t In&longs;tant of the Time
ing to the encrea&longs;e of the Parallels to B C, drawn in the Triangle
of the Time) I admit without di&longs;pute, upon what hath been &longs;aid
already, That the Space pa&longs;t by the falling Moveable with the
Space that the &longs;aid Moveable would pa&longs;&longs;e, in ca&longs;e it were in the
&longs;ame Time
Velocity &longs;hould be equal to E C, the half of B C. I now proceed
farther, and imagine the Moveable; having de&longs;cended with an
C the degree of Velocity B C: It is ma
nife&longs;t, that if it did continue to move
with the &longs;ame degree of Velocity B C,
without farther
pa&longs;&longs;e in the following Time C I, a Space
double to that which it pa&longs;&longs;ed in the equal
Time
Velocity E C, the half of the Degree B C. But becau&longs;e the Moveable de&longs;cendeth
with a Velocity encrea&longs;ed alwaies Uni
formly in all equal Times; it will add to
the degree C B in the following Time
C I, tho&longs;e Tame Moments of Velocity
that encrea&longs;e according to the Parallels of
the Triangle B F G, equal to the Triangle So that adding to the degree of
Velocity G I, the half of the degree F G, the greate&longs;t of tho&longs;e ac
quired in the
the Triangle B F G, we &longs;hall have the degree of Velocity I N, with
which, with an Uniform Motion, it would have moved in the
Time C I: Which degree I N, being triple the degree E C, pro
veth that the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;econd Time C I ought to be tri
ple to that of the fir&longs;t Time C
added to
be enlarged unto
continue for all the Time I O with the degree of Velocity I F,
acquired in the
I F being Quadruple to E C, the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed would be Quadruple
to that pa&longs;&longs;ed in the equal fir&longs;t Time
encrea&longs;e of the Uniform
to that of the Triangle
Motion addeth the degree equal to E C, Q R being added, equal
to E C, we &longs;hall have the whole Equable Velocity exerci&longs;ed in the
Time I O, quintuple to the Equable Velocity of the fir&longs;t Time
and therefore the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed quintuple to that pa&longs;t in the fir&longs;t
Time We &longs;ee therefore, even by this familiar computation,
That the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed in equal Times by a Moveable which
departing from Re&longs;t goeth acquiring Velocity, according to the
encrea&longs;e of the Time, are to one another as the odd Numbers
that pa&longs;&longs;ed in the double Time is quadruple to that pa&longs;&longs;ed in the
&longs;ubduple, that pa&longs;&longs;ed in the triple Time is nonuple; and, in a word,
that the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed are in duplicate proportion to their Times;
that is, as the Squares of the &longs;aid Times.
SIMP.
I mu&longs;t confe&longs;&longs;e that I have taken more plea&longs;ure in this
plain and clear di&longs;cour&longs;e of
ob&longs;cure Demon&longs;tration of the
&longs;atisfied, that the bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e is to &longs;ucceed as hath been &longs;aid, the
Definition of Uniformly
granted. But whether this be the
maketh u&longs;e in the Motion of its de&longs;cending Grave Bodies, I yet
make a que&longs;tion: and therefore for information of me, and of
others like unto me, me thinks it would be &longs;ea&longs;onable in this place
to produce &longs;ome Experiment among&longs;t tho&longs;e which were &longs;aid to be
many, which in &longs;undry Ca&longs;es agree with the Conclu&longs;ions demon
&longs;trated.
SALV. You, like a true
and &longs;o it is u&longs;ual and convenient to do in Sciences that apply
Mathematical Demon&longs;trations to Phy&longs;ical Conclu&longs;ions, as we &longs;ee
in the Profe&longs;&longs;ors of Per&longs;pection,
and others, who with Sen&longs;ible Experiments confirm tho&longs;e their
Principles that are as the foundations of all the following Structure:
and therefore I de&longs;ire that it may not be thought &longs;uperfluous, that
we di&longs;cour&longs;e with &longs;ome prolixity upon this fir&longs;t and grand funda
mental on which we lay the weight of the Immen&longs;e Machine of
infinite Conclu&longs;ions, of which we have but a very &longs;mall part &longs;et
down in this Book by our
the way and door that hath been hitherto &longs;hut unto all Specula
tive Wits. Touching Experiments, therefore, the
not omitted to make &longs;everal; and to a&longs;&longs;ure us, that the
on of natural-de&longs;cending Graves hapneth in the afore&longs;aid propor
tion, I have many times in his company &longs;et my &longs;elf to make a triall
thereof in the following Method.
In a pri&longs;me or Piece of Wood, about twelve yards long, and
half a yard broad one way, and three Inches the other, we made,
upon the narrow Side or edge a Groove of little more than an Inch
wide; we &longs;hot it with the Grooving Plane very &longs;traight, and to
make it very &longs;mooth and &longs;leek, we glued upon it a piece of Vellum,
poli&longs;hed and &longs;moothed as exactly as can be po&longs;&longs;ible: and in it we
have let a brazen Ball, very hard, round, and &longs;mooth, de&longs;cend. Having placed the &longs;aid Pri&longs;me Pendent, rai&longs;ing one of its ends
above the Horizontal Plane a yard or two at plea&longs;ure, we have let
the Ball (as I &longs;aid) de&longs;cend along the Grove, ob&longs;erving, in the
manner that I &longs;hall tell you pre&longs;ently, the Time which it &longs;pent in
a&longs;&longs;ure our &longs;elves of the Time, in which we never found any diffe
rence, no not &longs;o much as the tenth part of one beat of the Pul&longs;e. Having done, and preci&longs;ely ordered this bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e, we made the
&longs;ame Ball to de&longs;cend only the fourth part of the length of that
Grove: and having mea&longs;ured the time of its de&longs;cent, we alwaies
found it to be punctually half the other. And then making trial of
other parts, examining one while the Time of the whole Length
with the Time of half the Length, or with that of 2/3, or of 3/4, or, in
brief, with any whatever other Divi&longs;ion, by Experiments repeated
near an hundred Times, we alwaies found the Spaces to be to one
another as the Squares of the Times. And this in all Inclinations
of the Plane, that is, of the Grove in which the Ball was made to
de&longs;cend. In which we ob&longs;erved moreover, that the Times of the
De&longs;cents along &longs;undry Inclinations did retain the &longs;ame proportion
to one another, exactly, which anon you will &longs;ee a&longs;&longs;igned to them,
and demon&longs;trated by the Author. And as to the mea&longs;uring of the
Time; we had a good big Bucket full of Water hanged on high,
which by a very &longs;mall hole, pierced in the bottom, &longs;pirted, or, as
we &longs;ay, &longs;pin'd forth a &longs;mall thread of Water, which we received
with a &longs;mall cup all the while that the Ball was de&longs;cending in the
Grove, and in its parts; and then weighing from time to time the
&longs;mall parcels of Water, in that manner gathered, in an exact pair
of &longs;cales, the differences and proportions of their Weights gave
ju&longs;tly the differences and proportions of the Times; and this with
&longs;uch exactne&longs;&longs;e, that, as I &longs;aid before, the trials being many
and many times repeated, they never differed any con&longs;iderable
matter.
SIMP.
I &longs;hould have received great &longs;atisfaction by being pre&longs;ent
at tho&longs;e Experiments: but being confident of your diligence in
making them, and veracity in relating them, I content my &longs;elf, and
admit them for true and certain.
SALV.
We may, then, rea&longs;&longs;ume our Reading, and go on.
COROLLARY II.
It is collected in the &longs;econd place, that if any two Spaces are ta
ken from the beginning of the Motion, pa&longs;&longs;ed in any Times,
tho&longs;e Times &longs;hall be unto each other as one of them is to a
Space that is the Mean proportional between them.
tion S, to which S X is a Mean-proportional, the Time of the de&longs;cent
along S T, &longs;hall be to the Time of the de&longs;cent along S V, as S T to S X;
or, if you will, the Time along S V &longs;hall be to the Time along S T,For it is demon&longs;trated, that Spaces
pa&longs;&longs;ed are in duplicate proportion to the Times, or, (which
is the &longs;ame) are as the Squares of the Times: But the pro
portion of the Space VS to the Space ST is double to the
proportion of V S to SX, or is the &longs;ame that V S, and S X
&longs;quared have to one another: Therefore, the proportion of
the Times of the Motion by V S, and ST, is as the Spaces or
Lines V S to S X.
SCHOLIUM.
larly, may be under&longs;tood al&longs;o to hold true in the Motions made along
Planes of any whatever Inclination; for it is &longs;uppo&longs;ed, that in them
the degree of Acceleration encrea&longs;eth in the &longs;ame proportion; that
is, according to the encrea&longs;e of the Time; or, if you will, according
to the &longs;imple and primary Series of Numbers.
SALV.
Here I de&longs;ire
beit perhaps with too much tediou&longs;ne&longs;&longs;e in the opinion of
us,
explained what from that which hath been already &longs;aid and de
mon&longs;trated, and al&longs;o from the knowledge of certain Mechanical
Conclu&longs;ions heretofore learnt of our
to adjoyn for the greater confirmation of the truth of the Princi
ple, which hath been examined by us even now with probable
Rea&longs;ons and Experiments: and, which is of more importance, for
the Geometrical proof of it, let me fir&longs;t demon&longs;trate one &longs;ole Ele
mental
SAGR.
If our advantage &longs;hall be &longs;uch as you promi&longs;eus, there
is no time that I would not mo&longs;t willingly &longs;pend in di&longs;cour&longs;ing
about the confirmation and thorow e&longs;tabli&longs;hing the&longs;e Sciences of
Motion: and as to my own particular, I not only grant you liber
ty to &longs;atisfie your &longs;elf in this particular, but moreover entreat you
to gratifie, as &longs;oon as you can, the Curio&longs;ity which you have begot
in me touching the &longs;ame: and I believe that
&longs;ame mind.
SIMP.
I cannot deny what you &longs;ay.
Seeing then that I have your permi&longs;&longs;ion, I will in the
fir&longs;t place con&longs;ider, as an Effect well known, That
LEMMA.
upon different Inclinations of Planes, and the greate&longs;t is by the
Line elevated perpendicularly above the Horizon, and by the
others inclined, the &longs;aid Velocity dimini&longs;heth according as they
more and more depart from Perpendicularity, that is, as they in
cline more obliquely: &longs;o that the Impetus, Talent, Energy, or, we
may &longs;ay, Moment of de&longs;cending is dimini&longs;hed in the Moveable by
the &longs;ubjected Plane, upon which the &longs;aid Moveable lyeth and
de&longs;cendeth.
And the better to expre&longs;s my &longs;elf, let the Line A B be perpen
dicularly erected upon the Horizon A C: then &longs;uppo&longs;e the
&longs;ame to be declined in &longs;undry Inclinations towards the Horizon, as
in A D, A E, A F,
of the Grave Body in de&longs;cending is along the Perpendicular B A,
and le&longs;s than that along D A,
and yet le&longs;s along E A; and
&longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively dimini&longs;hing along
the more inclined F
nally is wholly extinct in the
Horizontal C
Moveable is indifferent either
to Motion or Re&longs;t, and hath not
of it &longs;elf any Inclination to
move one way or other, nor yet
any Re&longs;i&longs;tance to its being mo
ved: for as it is impo&longs;&longs;i
ble that a Grave Body, or a
Compound thereof &longs;hould move naturally upwards, receding from
the Common Center, towards which all Grave Matters con&longs;pire
to go, &longs;o it is impo&longs;&longs;ible that it do &longs;pontaneou&longs;ly move, unle&longs;s
with that Motion its particular Center of Gravity do acquire Proxi
mity to the &longs;aid Common Center: &longs;o that upon the Horizontal
which here is under&longs;tood to be a Superficies equidi&longs;tant from the
&longs;aid Center, and therefore altogether void of Inclination, the
petusHaving under&longs;tood this mutation of
which, in an old Treati&longs;e of the Mechanicks, written heretofore
in
diffu&longs;ely and demon&longs;tratively proved, upon the occa&longs;ion of con
&longs;idering the Original and Nature of the admirable In&longs;trument cal
led the Screw, and it is, With what proportion that mutation of
Planes.
As, for example, in the inclined Plane A F, drawing its Eleva
tion above the Horizontal, that is, the Line F C, along the which
the
greate&longs;t; it is &longs;ought what proportion this Moment hath to the
Moment of the &longs;ame Moveable along the Declivity F A: Which
Proportion, I &longs;ay, is Reciprocal to the &longs;aid Lengths. And this is
the
able anon to Demon&longs;trate. Hence it is manife&longs;t, That the
of De&longs;cent of a Grave Body is as much as the Re&longs;i&longs;tance or lea&longs;t
force that &longs;ufficeth to arre&longs;t and &longs;tay it. For this Force or Re&longs;i
&longs;tance, and its mea&longs;ure, I will make u&longs;e of the Gravity of another
Moveable. Let us now upon the Plane F A put the Moveable G
tyed to a thread which &longs;liding over F hath fa&longs;tned at its other end
the Weight H: and let us con&longs;ider that the Space of the De&longs;cent
or A&longs;cent of the Weight H along the Perpendicular, is alwaies
equal to the whole A&longs;cent or De&longs;cent of the other Moveable G
along the ^{*} Declivity A F, but yet not to the A&longs;cent or De&longs;cent
along the Perpendicular, in which only the &longs;aid Moveable G (like
as every other Moveable) exerci&longs;eth its Re&longs;i&longs;tance. Which is
manife&longs;t: for con&longs;idering in the Triangle AFC the Motion of
the Moveable G, as for example, upwards from A to F, to be com
po&longs;ed of the tran&longs;ver&longs;e Horizontal Line A C, and of the Perpendi
cular C F:
which the Moveable, as hath been &longs;aid, hath no Re&longs;i&longs;tance to mo
ving (it not making by that Motion any lo&longs;s, nor yet acqui&longs;t in
regard of its particular di&longs;tance from the Common Center of Grave
Matters, which in the Horizon continueth &longs;till the &longs;ame) it remai
neth that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance be only in re&longs;pect of the
make along the Perpendicular C F. Whil&longs;t therefore the Grave
Moveable G, moving from
Space C F to re&longs;i&longs;t in its
able H de&longs;cendeth along the Perpendicular of nece&longs;&longs;ity as far as
the whole Space F
De&longs;cent maintains it &longs;elf alwaies the &longs;ame, be the Motion of the
&longs;aid Moveables little or much (by rea&longs;on they are tyed toge
ther) we may confidently affirm, that in ca&longs;e there were an
librium,
ments, the Velocities, or their Propen&longs;ions to Motion, that is the
Spaces which they would pa&longs;s in the &longs;ame Time &longs;hould an&longs;wer re
ciprocally to their Gravities, according to that which is demon&longs;tra
ted in all ca&longs;es of Mechanick Motions: &longs;o that it &longs;hall &longs;uffice to
impede the de&longs;cent of G, if H be but &longs;o much le&longs;s grave than it, as
in proportion the Space C F is le&longs;&longs;er than the Space F
F C; and then the
H and G &longs;hall have equal Moments, and the Motion of the &longs;aid
Moveables &longs;hall cea&longs;e.
Energy, Moment, or Propen&longs;ion of a Moveable to Motion is the
&longs;ame as is the Force or &longs;malle&longs;t Re&longs;i&longs;tance that &longs;ufficeth to &longs;top it;
and becau&longs;e it hath been concluded, that the Grave Body H is &longs;uf. ficient to arre&longs;t the Motion of
the Grave Body G: Therefore
the le&longs;&longs;er Weight H, which in
the Perpendicular F C imploy
eth its total Moment, &longs;hall be
the preci&longs;e mea&longs;ure of the par
tial Moment that the greater
Weight G exerci&longs;eth along the
inclined Plane F
mea&longs;ure of the total Moment of
the &longs;aid Grave Body G, is the
&longs;elf &longs;ame, (&longs;ince that to impede
the Perpendicular De&longs;cent of a
Grave Body there is required the oppo&longs;ition of &longs;uch another Grave
Body, which likewi&longs;e is at liberty to move Perpendicularly:)
Therefore the partial
Plane F A &longs;hall be to the grand and total
along the Perpendicular F C, as the Weight H to the Weight G:
that is, by Con&longs;truction, as the &longs;aid Perpendicular F C, the Eleva
tion of the inclined Plane, is to the &longs;ame inclined Plane F A:
Which is that that by the
&longs;trated, and which by our Author, as we &longs;hall &longs;ee, is &longs;uppo&longs;ed as
known in the &longs;econd part of the Sixth Propo&longs;ition of the pre&longs;ent
Treati&longs;e.
Plane.
SAGR.
From this that you have already concluded I conceive
one may ea&longs;ily deduce, arguing
that the Moments of the &longs;ame Moveable, along Planes variou&longs;ly
inclined (as F A and F I) that have the &longs;ame Elevation, are to each
other in Reciprocal proportion to the &longs;ame Planes.
SALV.
This being agreed on, we
will pa&longs;s in the next place to demon&longs;trate the
that
THEOREM.
Motion from the &longs;ame height along Planes in any manner inclined
at the arrival to the Horizon are alwaies equal, Impediments be
ing removed.
Here we are in the fir&longs;t place to adverti&longs;e you, that it having
been proved, that in any Inclination of the Plane the Move
able from its rece&longs;&longs;ion from Quie&longs;&longs;ence goeth encrea&longs;ing its Ve
locity, or quantity of its
Time (according to the Definition which the Author giveth of
Motion naturally Accelerate) whereupon, as he hath by the pre
cedent Propo&longs;ition demon&longs;trated, the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed are in dupli
cate proportion to the Times, and, con&longs;equently, to the degrees
of Velocity: look what the
moved, &longs;uch proportionally &longs;hall be the degrees of Velocity gai
ned in the &longs;ame Time; &longs;eeing that both the&longs;e and tho&longs;e encrea&longs;e
with the &longs;ame proportion in the &longs;ame Time.
Now let the inclined Plane be A B, its elevation above the Ho
rizon the Perpendicular A C, and the Horizontal Plane C B: and
becau&longs;e, as was even now concluded, the
along the Perpendicular A C is to the
the inclined Plane A B, as A B is to A C, let there be taken in the
inclined Plane A B, A D a third proportional to A B and A C:
The
that is along A D, as A C is to
A D: And therefore the Move
able in the &longs;ame Time that it
would pa&longs;s the Perpendicular
Space AC, &longs;hall likewi&longs;e pa&longs;s the
Space A D, in the inclined Plane
A B, (the Moments being as
the Spaces:) And the degree of Velocity in C &longs;hall have the &longs;ame
proportion to the degree of Velocity in D, as A C hath to A D:
But the degree of Velocity in B is to the &longs;ame degree in D, as the
Time along A B is to the Time along AD, by the definition of
Accelerate Motion; And the Time along AB is to the Time along
A D, as the &longs;ame A C, the Mean Proportional between B A and
A D, is to A D, by the la&longs;t Corollary of the &longs;econd Propo&longs;ition:
Therefore the degrees of Velocity in B and in C have to the de
gree in D, the &longs;ame Proportion as A C hath to A D; and therefore
are equal: Which is the
By this we may more concludingly prove the en&longs;uing third
ple; and it is, That the Time along the inclined Plane, hath to the
Time along the Perpendicular, the &longs;ame proportion as the &longs;aid In
clined Plane and Perpendicular. For if we put the ca&longs;e that BA
be the Time along A B, the Time along A D &longs;hall be the Mean
between them, that is A C, by the &longs;econd Corollary of the &longs;econd
Propo&longs;ition: But if C A be the Time along A D, it &longs;hall likewi&longs;e
be the Time along
equal Times: And therefore in ca&longs;e B
is the Time along
By the &longs;ame di&longs;cour&longs;e one &longs;hall prove, that the Time along
is to the Time along the inclined Plane
Therefore,
Directly, to the Time along the inclined Plane
One might al&longs;o by the &longs;ame application of the
gredus
&longs;ixth Propo&longs;ition of the
for the pre&longs;ent, which he perhaps thinketh too tedious, though in
deed it is of &longs;ome importance in the&longs;e matters of Motion.
SAGR.
You may &longs;ay extreamly delightful, and mo&longs;t nece&longs;&longs;ary
to the perfect under&longs;tanding of that Principle.
SALV.
I will go on, then, in my Reading of the Text.
THEOR. III. PROP. III.
If a Moveable departing from Re&longs;t do move along
an Inclined Plane, and al&longs;o along the Perpendi
cular who&longs;e heights are the &longs;ame, the Times of
their Motions &longs;hall be to one another as the
Lengths of the &longs;aid Plane and Perpendicular.
who&longs;e heights are the &longs;ame above the Horizon C B, to wit,
the &longs;elf &longs;ame Line B A. I &longs;ay, that the Time of the De&longs;cent
of the &longs;ame Moveable upon the Plane A C, hath the &longs;ame Proporti
on to the Time of the De&longs;cent along the Perpendicular A B, as the
Length of the Plane A C hath to the Length of the &longs;aid Perpendi
cular. For let any number of Lines D G, E I, F L, be drawn, Paral
lel to the Horizon C B: It is manife&longs;t from the A&longs;&longs;umption fore
going, that the degrees of Velocity of the Moveable, departing from
A the beginning of Motion, acquired in the Points G and D are
and &longs;o the degrees in the Points I and E; as al&longs;o the degrees in L
and F. And if not only the&longs;e Parallels, but many more were &longs;up
po&longs;ed to be drawn from all the points imagined to be in the Line
A B, untill they meet the Line A C, the Mo-
extreams [or ends] of every one of tho&longs;e
Parallels, &longs;hall be alwaies equal to one ano
ther: Therefore the two Spaces A C and A B
are pa&longs;t with the &longs;ame degree of Velocity:
But it hath been demon&longs;trated, that if two
Spaces be pa&longs;&longs;ed by a Moveable with one
and the &longs;ame degree of Velocity, the Times
of the Motions have the &longs;ame proportion as
tho&longs;e Spaces: Therefore the Time of the Motion along A C is to the
Time along A B, as the Length of the Plane A C to the length of the
Perdendicular A B. Which was to be demon&longs;trated.
SAGR.
It &longs;eemeth to me, that the &longs;ame might very clearly and
conci&longs;ely be concluded, it having fir&longs;t been proved that the &longs;um of
the Accelerate Motion of the Tran&longs;itions along A C and A B, is
as much as the Equable Motion, who&longs;e degree of Velocity is &longs;ub
duple to the greate&longs;t degree C B: Therefore the two Spaces AC
and A B being pa&longs;&longs;ed with the &longs;ame Equable Motion, it hath been
&longs;hewn, by the Fir&longs;t Propo&longs;ition of the fir&longs;t, that the Times of the
Tran&longs;itions &longs;hall be as the &longs;aid Spaces.
COROLLARY.
Hence is collected, that the Times of the De&longs;cents along Planes
of different Inclination, but of the &longs;ame Elevation, are to
one another according to their Lengths.
minated by the &longs;ame Horizontal C B; it &longs;hall in like manner be
demon&longs;trated, that the Time of the De&longs;cent along A M, is to the
Time along A B, as the Line A M to A B: But as the Time A B is
to the Time along A C, &longs;o is the Line A B to A C: Therefore,
æquali,
along A C.
THEOR. IV. PROP. IV.
The Times of the Motions along equal Planes,
but unequally inclined, are to each other in
&longs;ubduple proportion of the Elevations of tho&longs;e
Planes Reciprocally taken.
qually inclined, B A and B C, and let A E and C D be Hori
zontal Lines, drawn as far as the Perpendicular B D: Let the
Elevation of the Plane B A be B E; and let the Elevation of the
Plane B C be B D: And let B I be a Mean Proportional between the
Elevations D B and B E: It is manife&longs;t
duple the proportion of D B to B E. Now
I &longs;ay, that the proportion of the Times
of the De&longs;cents or Motions along the
Planes B A and B C, are the &longs;ame with
the proportion of D B to B I Reciprocal
ly taken: So that to the Time B A the
Elevation of the other Plane B C, that is
B D be Homologal; and to the Time along
B C, B I be Homologal: Therefore it is
to be demon&longs;trated, That the Time along B A is to the Time along
B C, as D B is to B I. Let I S be drawn equidi&longs;tant from D C.
And
becau&longs;e it hath been demon&longs;trated that the Time of the De&longs;cent
along B A, is to the Time of the De&longs;cent along the Perpendicular
B E, as the &longs;aid B A is to B E; and the Time along B E is to the
Time along B D, as B E is to B I; and the Time along B D is to the
Time along B C, as B D to B C, or as B I to B S: Therefore,
li,
or as C B to BS: But C B is to B S, as D B to B I: Therefore the
Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t:
THEOR. V. PROP. V.
The proportion of the Times of the De&longs;cents
along Planes that have different Inclinations
and Lengths, and the Elivations unequal, is
compounded of the proportion of the Lengths
of tho&longs;e Planes, and of the &longs;ubduple proporti
on of their Elevations Reciprocally taken.
who&longs;e Lengths are unequal, as al&longs;o their Elevations. I &longs;ay,
the proportion of the Time of the De&longs;cent along A C to the
Time along A B, is compounded of the proportion of the &longs;aid A C
to A B, and of the &longs;ubduple proportion of their Elevation Recipro
cally taken. For let the Perpendicular A D be drawn, with which
let the Horizontal Lines B G and C D inter&longs;ect, and let A L be a
Mean-proportional between C A and A E; and from the point L let
a Parallel be drawn to the Horizon inter&longs;ecting
proportional between C A and A E. And becau&longs;e
the Time along A C is to the Time along A E, as
the Line F A to A E; and the Time along A E is
to the Time along A B, as the &longs;aid A E to the &longs;aid
A B: It is manife&longs;t that the Time along A C is to
the Time along A B, as A F to A B. It remaineth,
therefore, to be demon&longs;trated, that the proportion
of A F to A B is compounded of the proportion of
C A to A B, and of the proportion of G A to A L;
which is the &longs;ubduple proportion of the Elevati
ons D A and A G Reciprocally taken. But that is manife&longs;t, C A
being put between F A and A B: For the proportion of F A to A C
is the &longs;ame as that of L A to A D, or of G A to A L; which is &longs;ub
duple of the proportion of the Elevations G A and A D; and the
proportion of C A to A B is the proportion of the Lengths: Therefore
the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.
THEOR. VI. PROP. VI.
If from the highe&longs;t or lowe&longs;t part of a Circle,
erect upon the Horizon, certain Planes be
drawn inclined towards the Circumference,
the Times of the De&longs;cents along the &longs;ame
&longs;hall be equal.
recited upon the lowe&longs;t point, that is upon the contact with the
Horizon, let be F A, and from the highe&longs;t point A let certain
Planes A B and A C incline towards the Circumference: I &longs;ay that the
Times of the De&longs;cents along the &longs;ame are equal. Let B D and C E be
two Perpendiculars let fall unto the Diameter; and let A I be a Mean
Proportional between the AltitudesAnd
becau&longs;e the Rectangles F A E and
F A D are equal to the Squares of
A C and A B; And al&longs;o becau&longs;e
that as the Rectangle F A E, is to
the Rectangle F A D, &longs;o is E A to
A D. Therefore as the Square of
C A is to the Square of B A,
&longs;o is the Line E A to the Line
A D. But as the Line E A is to
D A, &longs;o is the Square of I A to the Square of A D: Therefore
the Squares of the Lines C A and A B are to each other as the Squares
of the Lines I A and A D: And therefore as the Line C A is to A B,
&longs;o is I A to A D: But in the precedent Propo&longs;ition it hath been demon
&longs;trated that the proportion of the Time of the De&longs;cent along A C to the
Time of the De&longs;cent by A B, is compounded of the proportions of C A
to A B, and of D A to A I, which is the &longs;ame with the proportion of
B A to A C: Therefore the proportion of the Time of the De&longs;cent along
A C, to the Time of the De&longs;cent along A B, is compounded of the pro
portions of C A to A B, and of B A to A C: Therefore the proporti
on of tho&longs;e Times is a proportion of equality: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition
is evident.
ly that in the en&longs;uing Figure the Moveable pa&longs;&longs;eth in equal Times along
C A and D A. For let B A be equal to the &longs;aid D A, ond let fall the
Perpendiculars B E and D F: It is manife&longs;t by the Elements of the
according to the Line A B C, is
to its total Moment, as B E to B A;
Weight upon the Elevation A D,
is to its total Moment, as D F to
D A or B A: Therefore the Mo
ment of the &longs;aid Weight upon the
Plane inclined according to D A,
is to the Moment upon the Plane
inclined according to A B C, as
the Line D F to the Line B E:
Therefore the Spaces which the
&longs;aid Weight &longs;hall pa&longs;&longs;e in equal
Times along the Inclined Planes C A and D A, &longs;hall be to each other as
the Line B E to D F; by the &longs;econd Propo&longs;ition of the Fir&longs;t Book:
But as B E is to D F, &longs;o A C is demon&longs;trated to be to D A:
Therefore the &longs;ame Moveable will in equal Times pa&longs;&longs;e the Lines
C A and D A.
D G L, (cutting C A in the point I) and B H, Parallels to A F:
And the Angle A D I &longs;hall be equal to the Angle D C A, for that
the parts L A and A D of the Circumference &longs;ubtending them, are
equal, and the Angle D A C common to them both: Therefore of
the equiangled Triangles C A D and D A I, the &longs;ides about the
equal Angles &longs;hall be proportional: And as C A is to A D, &longs;o is
D A to A I, that is B A to A I, or H A to A G; that is, B E to
D F: Which was to be proved.
perpendicular to the Horizon: and
from the highe&longs;t Term D let a Plane
Circumference. I &longs;ay that the De
&longs;cent along the Plane D F, and the
Fall along the Diameter B C, will
be pa&longs;&longs;ed by the &longs;ame Moveable in
equal Times. For let F G be drawn
parallel to the Horizon A B, which
&longs;hall be perpendicular to the Diameter
D C, and let a Line conjoyn F and
C: and becau&longs;e the Time of the Fall
along D C, is to the Time of the Fall along D G, as the Mean
Proportional between C D and D G, is to the &longs;aid D G; and the
in the Semicircle, is a Right Angle, and F G perpendicular to D C:)
Therefore the Time of the Fall along D C is to the Time of the Fall
along D G, as the Line F D to D G: But it hath been demon&longs;trated
that the Time of the De&longs;cent along D F, is to the Time of the Fall
along D G, as the &longs;ame Line D F is to D G: The Times, therefore,
of the De&longs;cent along D F and Fall along D C, are to the Time of the
Fall along the &longs;aid D G in the &longs;ame proportion: Therefore they are
equal. It will likewi&longs;e be demon&longs;trated, if from the lowe&longs;t Term C,
one &longs;hould rai&longs;e the Chord C E, and draw E H parallel to the Hori
zon, and conjoyn E and D, that the Time of the De&longs;cent along E C
equals the Time of the Fall along the Diameter D C.
COROLLARY I.
Hence is collected that the Times of the De&longs;cents along all the
Chords drawn from the Terms C or D are equal to one
another.
COROLLARY II.
It is al&longs;o collected that if the Perpendicular and inclined Plane
de&longs;cend from the &longs;ame point along which the De&longs;cents are
made in equal Times, they are in a Semicircle who&longs;e Dia
meter is the &longs;aid Perpendicular.
COROLLARY III.
Hence it is collected that the Times of the Motions along inclined
Planes, are then equal, where the Elevations of equal parts of
tho&longs;e Planes &longs;hall be to one another as their Longitudes.
gure &longs;ave one are equal, the Elevation of the part A B being equal
to A D, that is, that B E &longs;hall be to the Elevation D F, as C A
to D A.
SAGR.
Pray you Sir be plea&longs;ed to &longs;tay your Reading of what
followeth until that I have &longs;atisfied my &longs;elf in a Contemplation
that ju&longs;t now cometh into my mind, which if it be not a delu&longs;i
on, is not far from being a plea&longs;ing diverti&longs;ement: as are all &longs;uch
that proceed from Nature or nece&longs;&longs;ity.
It is manife&longs;t, that if from a point a&longs;&longs;igned in an Horizontal
Plane, one &longs;hall produce along the &longs;ame Plane infinite right Lines
every way, upon each of which a point is under&longs;tood to move with
an Equable Motion, all beginning to move in the &longs;ame in&longs;tant
being equal, there &longs;hall con&longs;equently be de&longs;cribed by tho&longs;e move
able points Circumferences of Circles alwayes bigger and bigger,
all concentrick about the fir&longs;t point a&longs;&longs;igned: ju&longs;t in the &longs;ame
manner as we &longs;ee it done in the Undulations of &longs;tanding Water,
when a &longs;tone is dropt into it; the percu&longs;&longs;ion of which &longs;erveth to
give the beginning to the Motion on every &longs;ide, and remaineth
as the Center of all the Circles that happen to be de&longs;igned &longs;ucce&longs;
&longs;ively bigger and bigger by the &longs;aid Undulations. But if we ima
gine a Plane erect unto the Horizon, and a point be noted in the
&longs;ame on high, from which infinite Lines are drawn inclined, ac
cording to all inclinations, along which we fancy grave Movea
bles to de&longs;cend, each with a Motion naturally Accelerate
with tho&longs;e Velocities that agree with the &longs;everal Inclinations;
&longs;uppo&longs;ing that tho&longs;e de&longs;cending Moveables were continually vi&longs;i
ble, in what kind of Lines &longs;hould we &longs;ee them continually di&longs;po&longs;ed? Hence my wonder ari&longs;eth, &longs;ince that the precedent Demon&longs;trati
ons a&longs;&longs;ure me, that they &longs;hall all be alwayes &longs;een in one and the
&longs;ame Circumference of Circles &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively encrea&longs;ing, according
as the Moveables in de&longs;cending go more and more &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively re
ceding from the highe&longs;t point in which their Fall began: And the
better to declare my &longs;elf, let the chiefe&longs;t point A be marked, from
which Lines de&longs;cend according to any Inclinations A F, A H, and
the Perpendicular A B, in which taking the points C and D, de
&longs;cribe Circles about them that pa&longs;s by
the point A, inter&longs;ecting the inclined
Lines in the points F, H, B, and E, G,
I. It is manife&longs;t, by the fore-going
Demon&longs;trations, that Moveables de
&longs;cendent along tho&longs;e Lines departing
at the &longs;ame Time from the term A,
one &longs;hall be in E, the other &longs;hall be in
G, and the other in I; and &longs;o con
tinuing to de&longs;cend they &longs;hall arrive
in the &longs;ame moment of Time at F, H,
and B: and the&longs;e and infinite others continuing to move along the
infinite differing Inclinations, they &longs;hall alwayes &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively arrive
at the &longs;elf-&longs;ame Circumferences made bigger & bigger
From the two Species, therefore, of Motion of which Nature makes
u&longs;e, ari&longs;eth, with admirable harmonious variety, the generation of in
&longs;inite Circles. She placeth the one as in her Seat, and original be
ginning, in the Center of infinite concentrick Circles; the other
is con&longs;tituted in the &longs;ublime or highe&longs;t Contact of infinite Circum
ferences of Circles, all excentrick to one another: Tho&longs;e proceed
from Motions all equal and Equable; The&longs;e from Motions all al
that de&longs;cend along the infinite different Inclinations. But we fur
ther adde, that if from the two points a&longs;&longs;igned for the Emanations,
we &longs;hall &longs;uppo&longs;e Lines to proceed, not onely along two Superfi
cies Horizontal and Upright [or erect] but along all every ways
like as from tho&longs;e, beginning at one &longs;ole point, we pa&longs;&longs;ed to the
production of Circles from the lea&longs;t to the greate&longs;t, &longs;o beginning
from one &longs;ole point we &longs;hall &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively produce in&longs;inite Spheres,
or we may &longs;ay one Sphere, that &longs;hall
bigne&longs;&longs;es: And this in two fa&longs;hions; that is, either with placing
the original in the Center, or el&longs;e in the Circumference of tho&longs;e
Spheres.
SALV.
The Contemplation is really ingenuous, and adequate
to the Wit of
SIMP.
Though I am at lea&longs;t capable of the Speculation, ac
cording to the two manners of the production of Circles and
Spheres, with the two different Natural Motions, howbeit I do
not perfectly under&longs;tand the production depending on the Acce
lerate Motion and its Demon&longs;tration, yet notwith&longs;tanding that
licence of a&longs;&longs;igning for the place of that Emanation as well the
lowe&longs;t Center, as the highe&longs;t Spherical Superficies, maketh me to
think that its po&longs;&longs;ible that &longs;ome great Mi&longs;tery may be contained
in the&longs;e true and admirable Conclu&longs;ions: &longs;ome Mi&longs;tery I &longs;ay
touching the Creation of the Univer&longs;e, which is held to be of
Spherical form, and concerning the Re&longs;idence of the Fir&longs;t
Cau&longs;e.
SALV.
I am not unwilling to think the &longs;ame: but &longs;uch pro
found Speculations are to be expected from Sharper Wits than
ours. And it &longs;hould &longs;uffice us, that if we be but tho&longs;e le&longs;&longs;e noble
Workmen that di&longs;cover and draw forth of the Quarry the
Marbles, in which the Indu&longs;trious Statuaries afterwards make
wonderful Images appear, that lay hid under rude and mi&longs;haped
Cru&longs;ts. Now, if you plea&longs;e, we will go on.
THEOR. VII. PROP. VII.
If the Elevations of two Planes &longs;hall have a pro
portion double to that of their Lengths, the
Motions in them from Re&longs;t &longs;hall be fini&longs;hed in
equal Times.
and let their Elevations be F A and D A, and let F A have the
&longs;ame proportion to D A, as A E hath to A B. I &longs;ay that the Times
of the Motions along the Planes A E and A B, out of Re&longs;t in A areDraw Horizontal Parallels to the Line of Elevation E F and
B D, which cutteth A E in G. And be-
double the proportion of E A to A B; and
as F A to A D, &longs;o is E A to A G: There
fore the proportion of E A to A G, is dou
ble the proportion of E A to A B: There
fore A B is a Mean-Proportional between
E A and A G: And becau&longs;e the Time of the
De&longs;cent along A B, is to the Time of the De
&longs;cent along A G, as A B to A G; and the
Time of the De&longs;cent along AG, is to the Time of the De&longs;cent along A E, as
A G is to the Mean-proportional between A G and A E, which is A B:
Therefore
unto it &longs;elf: Therefore the Times are equal: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.
THEOR. VIII. PROP. VIII.
In Planes cut by the &longs;ame Circle, erect to the
Horizon, in tho&longs;e which meet with the end of
the erect Diameter, whether upper or lower,
the Times of the Motions are equal to the
Time of the Fall along the Diameter: and in
tho&longs;e which fall &longs;hort of the Diameter, the
Times are &longs;horter; and in tho&longs;e which inter
&longs;ect the Diameter, they are longer.
Horizon. That the Times of the Motions along the Planes pro
duced out of the Terms A and B unto the Circumference are equal,
hath already been demon&longs;trated: That the Time of the De&longs;cent along
the Plane D F, not reaching to the
by drawing the Plane D B, which
&longs;hall be both longer and le&longs;&longs;e decli
ning than D F. Therefore the Time
along D F is &longs;horter than the Time
along D B, that is, along A B. And
that the Time of the De&longs;cent along
the Plane that inter&longs;ecteth the Dia
meter, as C O is longer, doth in the
&longs;ame manner appear, for that it is
longer and le&longs;&longs;e declining than C B: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is de
mon&longs;trated.
THEOR. IX. PROP. IX.
If two Planes be inclined at plea&longs;ure from a point
in a Line parallel to the Horizon, and be inter
&longs;ected by a Line which may make Angles Al
ternately equal to the Angles contained be
tween the &longs;aid Planes and Horizontal Parallel,
the Motion along the parts cut off by the &longs;aid
Line, &longs;hall be performed in equal Times.
be inclined at plea&longs;ure C D and C E, and in any point of the
Line C D make the Angle C D F equal to the Angle X C E:
and let the Line D F cut the Plane C E in F, in &longs;uch a manner that
the Angles C D F and C F D may be equal to the Angles X C E, L C D
Alternately taken. I &longs;ay, that
C D and C F are equal. And
that (the Angle C D F being
&longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the Angle
X C E) the Angle C F D is
equal to the Angle D C L, is
manife&longs;t. For the Common An
gle D C F being taken from the
three Angles of the Triangle
C D F equal to two Right An
gles, to which are equal all the Angles made with to the Line L X
at the point C, there remains in the Triangle two Angles C D F and
C F D, equal to the two Angles X C E and L C D: But it was &longs;up
po&longs;ed that C D F is equal to the Angle X C E: Therefore the remaining
Angle C F D is equal to the remaining angle D C L. Let the Plane
C E be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the Plane C D, and from the points D and
E rai&longs;e the Perpendiculars D A and E B, unto the Horizontal Paral
lel X L; and from C unto D F let fall the Perpendicular C G. And
becau&longs;e the Angle C D G is equal to the Angle E C B; and becau&longs;e
D G C and C B E are Right Angles; The Triangles C D G and
C B E &longs;hall be equiangled: And as D C is to C G, &longs;o let C E be
to E B: But D C is equal to C E: Therefore C G &longs;hall be equal to
E B. And inregard that of the Triangles D A C and C G F, the An
gles C and A are equal to the Angles F and G: Therefore as C D is to
D A, &longs;o &longs;hall F C be to C G; and Alternately, as D C is to C F, &longs;oThe proportion therefore of the Elevations
of the Planes equal to C D and C E, is the &longs;ame with the proportion
of the Longitudes D C and C E: Therefore, by the fir&longs;t Corollary of
the precedent Sixth Propo&longs;ition, the Times of the Dc&longs;cent along the
&longs;ame &longs;hall be equal: Which mas to be proved.
Horizontal Parallel A S. Becau&longs;e the Triangle C S F is like to
the Triangle D G C, it &longs;hall be, that as S F is to F C, &longs;o is G C
to C D. And becau&longs;e the Triangle C F G is like to the Triangle
D C A, it &longs;hall be, that as F C is to C G, &longs;o is C D to D A:
Therefore,
S F is to C G, &longs;o is C G to
D A: Thorefore C G is a
S F and D A: And as DA
is to S F, &longs;o is the Square
D A unto the Square C G
Again, the Triangle A C D
being like to the Triangle
C G F, it &longs;hall be, that as
D A is to D C, &longs;o is G C
to C F: and, Alternately,
as D A is to G C, &longs;o is D C to C F; and as the Square of D A
is to the Square of C G, &longs;o is the Square of D C to the Square of
C F. But it hath been proved that the Square D A is to the
Square C G as the Line D A is to the Line F S: Therefore, as the
Square D C is to the Square C F, &longs;o is the Line D E to F S: There
fore, by the &longs;eventh fore-going, in regard that the Elevations D A
and F S, of the Planes C D, and C F are in double proportion to
their Planes; the Times of the Motions along the &longs;ame &longs;hall be
equal.
THEOR. X. PROP. X.
The Times of the Motions along &longs;everal Inclina
tions of Planes who&longs;e Elevations are equal,
are unto one another as the Lengths of tho&longs;e
Planes, whether the Motions be made from
Re&longs;t, or there hath proceeded a Motion from
the &longs;ame height.
they come to the Horizon D C, in &longs;uch &longs;ort as that the Motion
along A B precedeth the Motions along B D and B C. I &longs;ay,
that the Time of the Motion along B D, is to the Time along B C, asLet A F be drawn parallel to the Ho
rizon, to which continue out D B, meeting it in F; and let F E be
a Mean-proportional between D F and F B; and draw E O parallel
to D C, and A O &longs;hall be a Mean-proportional between C A and
A B: But if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time
along A B, to be as A B, the Time a-And the
Time along all A C, &longs;hall be as the
Mean-proportional A O; and along
all F D &longs;hall be F E: Wherefore the
Time along the remainder B C &longs;hall
be B O; and along the remainder
B D &longs;hall be B E. But as B E is to
B O, &longs;o is B D to B C: Therefore
the Times along B D and B C, after the De&longs;cent along A B and
F B, or which is the &longs;ame, along the Common part A B, &longs;hall be to
one another as the Lengths B D and B C: But that the Time along
B D, is to the Time along B C, out of Re&longs;t in B, as the Length
B D to B C, hath already been demon&longs;trated. Therefore the Times
of the Motions along different Planes who&longs;e Elevations are equal, are
to one another as the Lengths of the &longs;aid Planes, whether the Motion
be made along the &longs;ame out of Re&longs;t, or whether another Motion of
the &longs;ame Altitude do precede tho&longs;e Motions: Which was to be de
mon&longs;trated.
THEOR. XI. PROP. XI.
If a Plane, along which a Motion is made out of
Re&longs;t, be divided at plea&longs;ure, the Time of
the Motion along the fir&longs;t part, is to the Time
of the Motion along the &longs;econd, as the &longs;aid
fir&longs;t part is to the exce&longs;&longs;e whereby the &longs;ame
part &longs;hall be exceeded by the Mean-Propor
tional between the whole Plane and the &longs;ame
fir&longs;t part.
which let be divided at plea&longs;ure in C; and let A F be a Mean
proportional between the whole B A and the fir&longs;t part A C;
C F &longs;hall be the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Mean proportional F A above the part
A C. I &longs;ay the Time of the Motion along A C is to the Time of the
following Motion along C B, as A C to C F. Which is manife&longs;t;
A B, as A C to the Mean-proportional A F: There-
the Time along the remainder C B as A C to C F:
If therefore the Time along A C be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be
the &longs;aid A C, the Time along C B &longs;hall be C F:
Which was the Propo&longs;ition.
ate Plane A C B, but by the inflected Plane A C D
until it come to the Horizon B D, to which from F a Parallel is
drawn F E. It &longs;hall in like manner be
A C is to the Time along the reflected
Plane C D, as A C is to C E. For
the Time along A C is to the Time a
long C B, as A C is to C F: But the
Time along C B, after A C hath been
demon&longs;trated to be to the Time along
C D, after the &longs;aid De&longs;oent along
A C, as C B is to C D; that is, as
C F to C E: Therefore,
the Time along C D, as the Line A C to C E.
THEOR. XII. PROP. XII.
If the Perpendicular and Plane Inclined at plea
&longs;ure, be cut between the &longs;ame Horizontal
Lines, and Mean-Proportionals between
them and the parts of them contained betwixt
the common Section and upper Horizontal
Line be given; the Time of the Motion a
long the Perpendicular &longs;hall have the &longs;ame
proportion to the Time of the Motion along
the upper part of the Perpendicular, and af
terwards along the lower part of the inter&longs;e
cted Plane, as the Length of the whole Per
pendicular hath to the Line compounded of
the Mean-Proportional given upon the Per
pendicular, and of the exce&longs;&longs;e by which the
whole Plane exceeds its Mean-Proporttonal.
er; between which let the Perpendicular A C, and inclined
Plane D F, be cut in B; and let A R be a Mean-Proportional
between the whole Perpendicular C A, and the upper part A B; and
let F S be a Mean-proportional between the whole Inclined Plane D F,
and the upper part B F. I &longs;ay, that the Time of the Fall along the
whole Perpendicular A C hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Time along
its upper part A B, with the lower of the Plane, that is, with B D,
as A C hath to the Mean-proporti
onal of the Perpendicular, that is
ce&longs;&longs;e of the whole Plane D F above
its Mean-proportional F S. Let a
Line be drawn from R to S, which
&longs;hall be parallel to the two Horizon
tal Lines. And becau&longs;e the Time of
the Fall along all A C, is to the
Time along the part A B, as C A is
to the Mean proportional A R, if we &longs;uppo&longs;e A C to be the Time of
the Fall along A C, A R &longs;hall be the Time of the Fall along A B,
and R C that along the remainder B C. For if the Time along A C
be &longs;uppo&longs;ed, as was done, to be A C it &longs;elf the Time along F D &longs;hall
be F D; and in like manner D S may be concluded to be the Time a
long B D, after F B, or after A B. The Time therefore along the
whole A C, is A R, with R C; And the Time along the inflected
Plane A B D, &longs;hall be A R, with S D: Which was to be proved.
Plane were taken, as &longs;uppo&longs;e N O; and the Demonstration is the
&longs;ame.
PROBL I. PROP. XIII.
A Perpendicular being given, to Inflect a Plane
unto it, along which, when it hath the &longs;ame
Elevation with the &longs;aid Perpendicular, it may
make a Motion after its Fall along the Per
pendicular in the &longs;ame Time, as along the
&longs;ame Perpendicular
let the part B C be equal; and draw the Horizontal Lines
C E and A G. It is required from B to inflect a Plane reach
ing to the Horizon C E, along which a Motion, after the Fall outLet
C D be equal to C B, and drawing B D, let B E be applied equal to both
B D and D C. I &longs;ay B E is the Plane required.
Continue out E B to
meet the Horizontal Line A G in G;
tween the &longs;aid E G and G B. E F &longs;hall
be to F B, as E G is to G F; and the
Square E F &longs;hall be to the Square F B, as
the Square E G is to the Square G F;
that is as the Line E G to G B: But
E G is double to G B: Therefore the
Square of E F is double to the Square of F B: But al&longs;o the Square of
D B is double to the Square of B C: Therefore, as the Line E F is to
F B, &longs;o is D B to B C: And by Compo&longs;ition and Permutation, as E B is
to the two D B and B C, &longs;o is B F to B C: But B E is equal to the two
D B and B C: Therefore B F is equal to the &longs;aid B C, or B A. If there
fore A B be under&longs;tood to be the Time of the Fall along A B, G B &longs;hall
be the Time along G B, and G F the Time along the whole G E: There
fore B F &longs;hall be the Time along the remainder B E, after the Fall from
G, or from A, which was the Propo&longs;ition.
PROBL. II. PROP. XIV.
A
given, to find a part in the upper
lar which &longs;hall be pa&longs;t
equal to that in which the inclined
pa&longs;t after the Fall along the part found in the
Perpendicular.
It is
required in the Perpendicular A D to find a part which &longs;hall be
pa&longs;t
pa&longs;t after the Fall along the &longs;aid part. Draw the Horizontal Line C B;
and as B A more twice A C is to A C, &longs;o let E A be to A R; And from
R let fall the Perpendicular R X unto D B. I &longs;ay X is the point requi
red. And becau&longs;e as B A more twice A C is to A C, &longs;o is C A to A E,
by Divi&longs;ion it &longs;hall be that as B A more A C is to A C, &longs;o is C E to E A:
And becau&longs;e as B A is to A C, &longs;o is E A to A R, by Compo&longs;ition it &longs;hall
be that as B A more A C is to A C, &longs;o is E R to R A: But as B A more
A C is to A C, &longs;o is C E to E A: Therefore, as C E is to E A, &longs;o is E R,
to R A, and both the Antecedents to both the Con&longs;equents, that is, C RFarther
more, becau&longs;e as B A is to A C, &longs;o E A is &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be to A R, and,
as B A is to A C, &longs;o is X A to A R: There
fore, as E A is to A R, &longs;o is X A to A R:
Therefore E A and X A are equal. Now if
we under&longs;tand the Time along R A to be as
R A, the Time along R C &longs;hall be R E, the
Mean-Proportional between C R and R A:
And A E &longs;hall be the Time along A C after
R A or after X A: But the Time along X A
is X A, &longs;o long as R A is the Time along R
A: But it hath been proved that X A and
A E are equal: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is proved.
PROBL. III.
A
given, to find a part in the
tended downwards which &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the
&longs;ame. Time as the inflected
along the given Perpendicular.
It
is required in the Perpendicular extended downwards to find a
part which from the Fall out of A &longs;hall be pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time as
B C is pa&longs;&longs;ed from the &longs;ame Fall out of A. Draw the Horizontal Line
A D, with which let C B meet extended to D; and let D E be a Mean
proportional between C D and D B;
A G be a third Proportional to B A and
A F. I &longs;ay, B G is the Space that after
the Fall A B &longs;hall be pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame
Time, as the Plane B C &longs;hall be pa&longs;t af
ter the &longs;ame Fall. For if we &longs;uppo&longs;e
the Time along A B to be as A B, the
Time along D B &longs;hall be as D B: And
becau&longs;e D E is the Mean-proportional
between B D and D C, the &longs;ame D E
&longs;hall be the Time along the whole D C, and B E the Time along the Part
or Remainder B C
Fall: But B F is equal to B E: Which was the Propo&longs;ition to be proved.
the Fall A B.
THEOR. XIII.
If the parts of an inclined
lar, the Times of who&longs;e Motions
equal, be joyned together at the &longs;ame point, a
Moveable coming out of any &longs;ublimer Height
&longs;hall &longs;ooner pa&longs;&longs;e the &longs;aid part of the inclined
at the &longs;ame Point E, the Times of who&longs;e Motions from off Re&longs;t in
E are equal, and in the Perpendicular continued out, let a &longs;ublime
point A be taken at plea&longs;ure, out of which the Moveables may be let
fall. I &longs;ay, that the Inclined Plane E C &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed in a le&longs;&longs;e Time
than the Perpendicular E B, after the Fall A E. Draw a Line from C
to B, and having drawn the Horizontal Line A D continue out C E till
it meet the &longs;ame in D; and let D F be a Mean-Proportional between
C D and D E; and let A G be a
A E; and draw F G and D G. And
becau&longs;e the Time of the Motion along
E C and E B out of Re&longs;t in E are
equal, the Angle C &longs;hall be a Right
Angle, by the &longs;econd Corollary of the
Sixth Propo&longs;ition; and A is a Right
Angle, and the Vertical Angles
at E are equal: Therefore the Tri
angles A E D and C E B are equian
gled, and the Sides about equal An
gles are Proportionals: Therefore as
B E is to E C, &longs;o is D E to E A. Therefore the Rectangle B E A is
equal to the Rectangle C E D: And
becau&longs;e the Rectangle C D E ex
ceedeth the Rectangle C E D, by the Square E D, and the Rectangle
B A E doth exceed the Rectangle B E A, by the Square E A: The
exce&longs;&longs;e of the Rectangle C D E above the Rectangle B A E, that is of
the Square F D above the Square A G &longs;hall be the &longs;ame as the exce&longs;&longs;e
of the Square D E above the Square A E; which exce&longs;s is the
Square D A: Therefore the Square F D is equal to the two Squares
G A and A D, to which the Square G D is al&longs;o equal: Therefore the
gle D F G, and the Angle E G F is le&longs;&longs;c than the Angle E F G, and
the oppo&longs;ite Side E F le&longs;&longs;e than the Side E G. Now if we &longs;uppo&longs;e
the Time of the Fall along A E to be as A E, the Time by D E &longs;hall
be as D E; and A G being a Mean-Proportional between B A and A E,
A G &longs;hall be the Time along the whole A B, and the part E G &longs;hall be
the Time along the Part E BAnd it may in like man
ner be proved that E F is the Time along E C after the De&longs;cent D E, or
after the Fall A E: But E F is proved to be le&longs;&longs;er than E G: Therefore
the Propo&longs;ition is proved.
COROLLARY.
By this and the precedent it appears, that the Space that is pa&longs;
&longs;ed along the Perpendicular after the Fall from above in the
&longs;ame Time in which the Inclined Plane is pa&longs;t, is le&longs;&longs;e than
that which is pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time as in the Inclined, no fall
from above preceding, yet greater than the &longs;aid Inclined
Plane.
from the &longs;ublime Term A the Time of the Conver&longs;ion along E C is
&longs;horter than the Time of the Progre&longs;&longs;ion along E B; It is manife&longs;t that
the Space that is pa&longs;t along E B in a Time equal to the Time along E C
is le&longs;s than the whole Space E B. And that the &longs;ame Space along the
Perpendicular is greater than E C is mani
fe&longs;ted by rea&longs;&longs;uming the Figure of the pre-
Perpendicular B G hath been demon&longs;trated
to be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame Time as B C after
the Fall A B: But that B G is greater than
B C is thus collected. Becau&longs;e B E and F B
are equal, and B A le&longs;&longs;er than B D, F B,
hath greater proportion to B A, than E B
hath to B D: And, by Compo&longs;ition, F A
hath greater proportion to A B, than E D
to D B: But as F A is to A B, &longs;o is G F
to F B, (for A F is the Mean-Proportional
between B A and A G:) And in like man
ner, as E D is to B D, &longs;o is C E to E B: Therefore G B hath greater
proportion to B F, than C B hath to B E: Therefore G B is greater
than B C.
PROBL. IV.
A
given, to a&longs;&longs;ign a part in the given
which after the Fall along the
the Motion may be made in a Time equal to
that in which the Moveable
the
required in B E to a&longs;&longs;ign a Space along which the Moveable af
ter the Fall along A B may move in a Time equal to that in which
the &longs;aid Perpendicular A B is pa&longs;&longs;ed
parallel to the Horizon, with which let the Plane prolonged meet in D;
and &longs;uppo&longs;e F B equal to B A; and as B D
is to D F, &longs;o let F D be to D E. I &longs;ay, that
equalleth the Time along A B, out of Re&longs;t
in A. For if we &longs;uppo&longs;e A B to be the Time
along A B, D B &longs;hall be the Time along
D B. And becau&longs;e, as B D is to D F, &longs;o is
F D to D E, D F &longs;hall be the Time along
the whole Plane D E, and B F along the
part B E out of D: But the Time along
B E after D B, is the &longs;ame as after A B: Therefore the Time along B E
after A B &longs;hall be B F, that is, equal to the Time
Which was the Propo&longs;ition.
Any Space in the Perpendicular being given from
the a&longs;&longs;igned beginning of Motion that is
pa&longs;&longs;ed in a Time given, and any other le&longs;&longs;er
Time being al&longs;o given, to find another Space in
the &longs;aid Perpendicular that may be pa&longs;&longs;ed in
the given le&longs;&longs;er Time.
A B, who&longs;e Time from the beginning A let be A B: and let the
Horizon be C B E, and let a Time be given le&longs;s than A B, to
which let B C be noted equal in the Horizon: It is required in the
&longs;aid Perpendicular to find a Space equal to the &longs;ame A B that &longs;hall be
pa&longs;&longs;ed in the Time B C. Draw a Line from A to
And becau&longs;e B C is le&longs;&longs;e than B A, the Angle
B A C &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;e than the Angle B C A. Let
C A E be made equal to it, and the Line A E meet
with the Horizon in the Point E, to which &longs;up
po&longs;e E D a Perpendicular, cutting the Perpendi
cular in D, and let D F be cut equal to B A. I
&longs;ay, that the &longs;aid F D is a part of the Perpendi
cular along which the Lation from the beginning
of Motion in A, the Time B C given will be &longs;pent. For if in the Right-angled Triangle A E D, a
Perpendicular to the oppo&longs;ite Side A D, be drawn
E B, A E &longs;hall be a Mean-Proportional betwixt
D A and A B, and B E a Mean-Proportional betwixt D B and B A,
or betwixt F A and A B (for F A is equal to D B.) And in regard
A B hath been &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be the Time along A B, A E, or E C &longs;hall be
the Time along the whole A D, and E B the Time along A F: There
fore the part B C &longs;hall be the Time along the part F D: Which was
intended.
PROBL. VI. PROP. XIX.
Any Space in the Perpendicular pa&longs;&longs;ed from the
beginning of the Motion being given, and the
Time of the Fall being a&longs;&longs;igned, to find the
Time in which another Space. equal to the gi
ven one, and taken in any part of the &longs;aid Per
pendicular, &longs;hall be afterwards pa&longs;t by the
&longs;ame Moveable.
ginning of the Motion in A, to which let D B be another equal Space
taken any where at plea&longs;ure, and let the Time of the Motion along
A C be given, and let it be A C. It is required to &longs;ind the Time of the
About the whole A B de
&longs;cribe a Semicircle A E B, and from
B, and draw a Line from A to E;
which &longs;hall be greater than E C. Let E F be out equall to E C: I &longs;ay,
that the remainder F A is the Time
of the Motion along D B. For be
cau&longs;e A E is a Mean-proportional be
twixt B A and and A C, and A C
is the Time of the Fall along A C;
A E &longs;hall be the Time along the
Whole A B. And becau&longs;e C E is a
Mean-proportional betwixt D A and
A C, (for D A is equal to B C)
C E, that is E F &longs;hall be the Time
along A D: Therefore the Remainder A F &longs;hall be the Time along the
Remainder B B: Which is the Propo&longs;ition.
COROLLARY.
Hence is gathered, that if the Time of any Space
as the &longs;aid Spaec, the Time thereof after another Space is ad
ded &longs;hall be the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Mean-proportional betwixt
the Addition and Space taken together, and the &longs;aid Space
above the Mean-proportional betwixt the fir&longs;t Space and the
Addition.
added, The Time along A B after S A &longs;hall be the exce&longs;&longs;e of
the Mean-proportional betwixt S B and B A above the
Mean-proportional betwixt B A and A S.
PROBL VII. PROP. XX.
Any Space and a part therein after the begining
of the Motion being given, to find another
part towards the end that &longs;hall be pa&longs;t in the
&longs;ame Time as the fir&longs;t part given.
ing of the Motion in C be C D. It is required to find another
part towards the end B, which &longs;hall be pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time asTake a Mean-proportional betwixt B C and C D,
to which &longs;uppo&longs;e B A equal; and let C E be a third proportional be-I &longs;ay, that E B is the Space that after
the Fall out of C &longs;hall be past in the &longs;ame Time as the &longs;aid
C D is pa&longs;&longs;ed. For if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time along C B
to be as C B; B A (that is the Mean-proportional betwixt
B C and C D) &longs;hall be the Time along C D. And becau&longs;e
C A is the Mean proportional betwixt B C and C E, C A
&longs;hall be the Time along C E: But the whole B C is the
Time along the Whole C B: Therefore the part B A &longs;hall be
the Time along the part E B, after the Fall out of C: But
the &longs;aid B A was the Time along C D: Therefore C D and
E B &longs;hall be pa&longs;t in equal Times out of Re&longs;t in C: Which
was to be done.
THEOR. XIV. PROP. XXI.
If along the Perpendicular a Fall be made
te,
a part is taken at plea&longs;ure, pa&longs;&longs;ed in any Time,
after which an Inflex Motion followeth along
any Plane however Inclined, the Space which
along that Plane is pa&longs;&longs;ed in a Time equal to
the Time of the Fall already made along the
Perpendicular &longs;hall be to the Space then pa&longs;
&longs;ed along the Perpendicular more than double,
and le&longs;&longs;e than triple.
from the begining A let a Fall be made, of which let a part A C
be taken at plea&longs;ure; then out of C let any Plane G be inclined at
plea&longs;ure: along which after the Fall along A C let the Motion be con
tinued. I &longs;ay, the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by that Motion along C G in a Time
equall to the Time of the Fall along A C, is more than double, and le&longs;s
than triple that &longs;ame Space A C. For &longs;uppo&longs;e C F equal to A C, and
extending out the Plane G C as far as the Horizon in E, and as C E
is to E F, &longs;o let F E be to E G. If therefore we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time of
E C, and C F or C A the Time of the Motion along C G. Therefore
it is to be proved that the
double, and le&longs;&longs;e than
triple the &longs;aid C A. For
in regard that as C E is
to E F, &longs;o is F E to E G;
therefore al&longs;o &longs;o is C F to
F G. But E C is le&longs;&longs;e
than E F: Therefore C F
&longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;e than F G, and
G C more than double to
F C or A C. And moreover, in regard that F E is le&longs;&longs;e than double to
E C, (for E C is greater than C A or C F) G F &longs;hall al&longs;o be le&longs;&longs;e
than double to F C, and G C le&longs;&longs;e than triple to C F or C A: Which
was to be demon&longs;trated.
hapneth in the Perpendicular and Inclined Plane, holdeth true al&longs;o if
after the Motion a Plane &longs;omewhat inclined it be inflected along a more
inclining Plane, as is &longs;een in the other Figure: And the Demon&longs;tration
is the &longs;ame.
Two unequall Times being given, and a Space
that is pa&longs;t
in the &longs;horte&longs;t of tho&longs;e given Times, to inflect
a Plane from the highe&longs;t point of the Perpen
dicular unto the Horizon, along which the
Moveable may de&longs;cend in a Time equal to the
longe&longs;t of tho&longs;e Times given.
the Space that is pa&longs;t
Time B, be C D. It is required from the Term C to inflect
bend] As B is to A, &longs;o let C D be to another Line, to which let C X
be equal that de&longs;cendeth from C unto the Horizon: It is manife&longs;t that
the Plane C X is that along which the Moveable de&longs;cendeth in the Gi
ven Time A. For it hath been demon&longs;trated, that the Time along the
inclined Plane hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Time along its ^{*} Eleva-
The Time, therefore, along C X is to the Time along C D, as C X is to
C D, that is, as the Time A is to the Time B: But the Time B is that
in which the Perpendicular is pa&longs;t
that in which the Plane C X is pa&longs;&longs;ed.
cular.
A Space pa&longs;t
any Time being given, to inflect a Plane from
the lowe&longs;t term of that Space, along which,
after the Fall along the Perpendicular, a Space
equal to any Space given may be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the
&longs;ame Time: which neverthele&longs;&longs;e is more than
double, and le&longs;&longs;e than triple the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed
along the Perpendicular.
A C be pa&longs;t
double, and le&longs;&longs;e than triple. It is required from the Terme C
to inflect a Plane, along which a Moveable after the Fall along A C
may in the &longs;ame Time A C pa&longs;&longs;e a Space equal to the &longs;aid I R. Let
R N, and N M be equal to A C: And look what proportion the part
I M hath to M N, the &longs;ame &longs;hall the Line A C have to another, equal
to which draw C E from C to
tinue out towards O, and take
C F, F G, and G O, equal to
the &longs;aid R N, N M, and M I. I &longs;ay, that the Time along the
inflected Plane C O, after the
Fall A G, is equal to the Time
A C out of Re&longs;t in A. For in
regard that as O G is to G F,
&longs;o is F C to C E by Compo&longs;ition it &longs;hall be that as O F is to F G or F C,
&longs;o is F E to E C; and as one of the Antecedents is to one of the Con
&longs;equents, &longs;o are all to all; that is, the whole O E is to E F as F E to
E C: Therefore O E, E F, and E C are Continual Proportionals:
be the Time along E C; and E F the Time along the whole E O; and
the part C F that along the part C O: But C F is equal to the &longs;aid C A:
Therefore that is done which was required: For the Time C A is the
Time of the Fall along A C
to C A) is the Time along C O, after the De&longs;cent along E C, or after
the Fall along A C: Which was the Propo&longs;ition.
Motion be not made along the Perpendicular, but along an Inclined Plane:
As in the following Figure, in which let the preceding Lation be made
along the inclined Plane A S beneath the Horizon A E: And the Demon
&longs;tration is the very &longs;ame.
SCHOLIUM.
If one ob&longs;erve well, it &longs;hall be manife&longs;t, that the le&longs;&longs;e the given
Line I R wanteth of being triple to the &longs;aid A C, the nearer
&longs;hall the Inflected Plane, along which the &longs;econd Motion is
to be made, which &longs;uppo&longs;e to be C O, come to the Perpen
dicular, along which in a Time equal to A C a Space &longs;hall
be pa&longs;&longs;ed triple to A C.
near equal to M N: And if, as I M is to M N by Con&longs;truction, &longs;o
A C is to C E, then it is evident that the &longs;aid C E will be found but
little bigger than C A, and, which followeth of con&longs;equence, the point E
&longs;hall be found very near the point A, and C O to containe a very acute
almo&longs;t to concur both in
one Line. And on the
contrary, if the &longs;aid I R
were but a very little
more than double the
&longs;aid A C, I M &longs;hould
be a very &longs;hort Line. Hence it may happen
al&longs;o that A C may come
to be very &longs;hort in re&longs;pect of C E which &longs;hall be very long, and &longs;hall ap
proach very near the Horizontal Parallel drawn from C. And from
hence we may collect, that if in the pre&longs;ent Figure after the De&longs;cent along
the inclined Plane A C, a Reflexion be made along the Horizontal Line,
asgr.
in a Time equal to the Time of the De&longs;cent along A C would be exactly
double to the Space A C. And it appears that the like Di&longs;cour&longs;e may be
here applied: For it is apparent by what hath been &longs;aid, that &longs;ince O E
And if a part of the Horizontal Line T C double to C A be divided in
two equal parts in V, the exten&longs;ion towards X &longs;hall be prolonged
finitum,
proportion of the Infinite Line T X to the Infinite Line V X, &longs;hall be
no other than the proportion of the Infinite Line V X to the Infinite
Line X C.
&longs;ame Rea&longs;oning that we u&longs;ed in the Demon&longs;tration of the fir&longs;t Propo&longs;i
tion. For re&longs;uming the Triangle A B C, repre&longs;enting to us by its Pa
rallels to the Ba&longs;e B C the Degrees of Velocity continually encrea&longs;ed ac
cording to the encrea&longs;es of the Time; from which, &longs;ince they are infi
nite, like as the Points are infinite in the Line A C, and the In&longs;tants
in any Time, &longs;hall re&longs;ult the Superficies of that &longs;ame Triangle, if we
under&longs;tand the Motion to continue for &longs;uch another Time, but no far
ther with an Accelerate, but with an Equable Motion, according to the
greate&longs;t degree of Velocity acquired, which degree is repre&longs;ented
by the Line B C. Of &longs;uch degrees &longs;hall be made up an Aggregate like to
a Parallelogram A D B C, which is the double ofWherefore the Space which
with degrees like to tho&longs;e &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame
Time, &longs;hall be double to the Space pa&longs;t with the de
grees of Velocity repre&longs;ented by the Triangle A B C:
But along the Horizontal Plane the Motion is Equa
ble, for that there is no cau&longs;e of Acceleration, or Re
tardation: Therefore it may be concluded that the
Space C D, pa&longs;&longs;ed in a Time equall to the Time A C is double to the
Space A C: For this Motion is made
to the Parallels of the Triangle; and that according to the Parallels
of the Parallelogram, which, becau&longs;e they are infinite, are donble to
the infinite Parallels of the Triangle.
&longs;wiftne&longs;s is to be found in the Moveable, is indelibly impre&longs;&longs;ed upon it
of its own nature, all external cau&longs;es of Acceleration or Retardation
being removed; which hapneth only in Horizontal Planes: for in de
clining Planes there is cau&longs;e of greater Acceleration, and in the ri&longs;ing
Planes of greater Retardation. From whence in like manner it fol
loweth that the Motion along the Horizontal Plane is al&longs;o Perpetual:
for if it be Equable, it can neither be weakned nor retarded, nor much
le&longs;&longs;e de&longs;troyed. Farthermore, the degree of Celerity acquired by the
Moveable in a Natural De&longs;cent, being of its own Nature Indelible and
Penpetual, it is worthy con&longs;ideration, that if after the De&longs;cent along a
declining Plane a Reflexion be made along another Plane that is ri&longs;ing,
in this latter there is cau&longs;e of Retardation, for in the&longs;e kind of Planes
mixture of certain contrary Affections, to wit, that degree of Celerity
acquired in the precedent De&longs;cent, which would of it &longs;elf carry the Move
able uniformly
De&longs;cent according to that &longs;ame proportion of Acceleration wherewith it
alwaies moveth. So that it will be but rea&longs;onable, if, enquiring what
accidents happen when the Moveable after the De&longs;cent along any incli
ned Plane is Reflected along &longs;ome ri&longs;ing Plane, we take that greate&longs;t de
gree acquired in the De&longs;cent to keep it &longs;elf perpetually the &longs;ame in the
A&longs;cending Plane; But that there is &longs;uperadded to it in the A&longs;cent the
Natural Inclination downwards, that is the Motion from Re&longs;t Accelerate
according to the received proportion: And le&longs;t this &longs;hould, perchance, be
&longs;omewhat intricate to be under&longs;tood, it &longs;hall be more clearly explained by a
Scheme.
Plane A B, from which let the Reflex Motion be continued along another
Ri&longs;ing Plane B C: And in the fir&longs;t place let the Planes be equal, and
elevated at equal Angles to the Horizon G H. Now it is manife&longs;t, that
the Moveable
Velocity according to the increa&longs;e of its Time, and that the degree in B
is the greate&longs;t of tho&longs;e acquired and by Nature immutably impre&longs;&longs;ed, I
mean the Cau&longs;es of new Acceleration or Retardation being removed:
of Acceleration, I &longs;ay, if it &longs;hould pa&longs;&longs;e any farther along the extended
Plane; and of Retardation, whil&longs;t the Reflection is making along the
Acclivity B C: But along the Horizontal Plane G H the Equable Mo
tion according to the de-
from A unto B would ex
tend
&longs;uch a Velocity would
that be which in a Time
equal to the Time of the
De&longs;cent along A B would pa&longs;&longs;e a Space in double the Horizon to the &longs;aid
A B. Now let us &longs;uppo&longs;e the &longs;ame Moveable to be Equably moved with
the &longs;ame degree of Swiftne&longs;&longs;e along the Plane B C, in &longs;uch &longs;ort that al&longs;o
in this Time equal to the Time of the De&longs;cent along A B a Space may be
pa&longs;&longs;ed a long B C extended double to the &longs;aid A B. And let us under
&longs;tand that as &longs;oon as it beginneth to a&longs;cend there naturally befalleth the
&longs;ame that hapneth to it from A along the Plane A B, to wit, a certain
De&longs;cent
of which, as it befalleth in A B, it may de&longs;cend as much in the &longs;ame
Time along the Reflected Plane as it doth along A B: It is manife&longs;t, that
by this &longs;ame Mixture of the Equable Motion of A&longs;cent, and the Acce
lerate of De&longs;cent the Moveable may be carried up to the Term C along
the Plane B C according to tho&longs;e degrees of Velocity, which &longs;hall beAnd that two points at plea&longs;ure D and E being taken, equally
remote from the Angle B, the Tran&longs;ition along D B is made in a Time
equal to the Time of the Reflection along B E, we may collect from hence:
Draw D F, which &longs;hall be Parallel to B C; for it is manife&longs;t that the
De&longs;cent along A D is reflected along D F: And if after D the Move
able pa&longs;&longs;e along the Horizontal Plane D E, the
the &longs;ame as the
And therefore the degree of Velocity in D is equal to the degree in E. From the&longs;e things, therefore, we may rationally affirm, that, if a de
&longs;cent be made along any inclined Plane, after which a Reflection may
follow along an elevated Plane, the Moveable may by the conceived
Impetus
Horizon. As if a De&longs;cent be made along A B, the Moveable would
pa&longs;&longs;e along the Reflected Plane B C, untill it arrive at the Horizon
A C D; and that not only when the Inclinations of the Planes are
equal, but al&longs;o when they are unequal, as is the Plane B D: For it was
first &longs;uppo&longs;ed, that the degrees of Velocity are equal, which are acqui
red upon Planes unequally inclined, &longs;o long as the Elevation of tho&longs;e
Planes above the Horizon was the &longs;ame: But, if there being the &longs;ame
Inclination of the Planes E B and B D, the De&longs;cent along E B &longs;ufficeth
to drive the Moveable along the Plane BD as far as D, &longs;eeing this Impul&longs;e
tus
point B; and if the
Impetus
in B, whether the
Moveable de&longs;cend a
long A B, or along E B: It is manife&longs;t, that the Moveable &longs;hall be in
the &longs;ame manner driven along B D, after the De&longs;cent along A B, and
after that along E B: But it will happen that the Time of the A&longs;cent
along B D &longs;hall be longer than along B C, like as the De&longs;cent along
E B is made in a longer time than along A B: But the Proportion of
tho&longs;e Times was before demon&longs;trated to be the &longs;ame as the Lengths of
tho&longs;e Planes. Now it follows, that we &longs;eek the proportion of the Spaces
pa&longs;t in equal Times along Planes, who&longs;e Inclinations are different, but
their Elevations the &longs;ame; that is, which are comprehended between
the &longs;ame Horizontal Parallels. And this hapneth according to the fol
lowing Propo&longs;ition.
THEOR. XV. PROP. XXIV.
There being given between the &longs;ame Horizontal
Parallels a Perpendicular and a
ted from its lowe&longs;t term, the Space that a
Moveable after the Fall along the
cular pa&longs;&longs;eth along the Elevated
Time equal to the Time of the Fall, is greater
than that
the &longs;ame.
be the Perpendicular A E; and let the Elevated Plane be E B,
along which after the Fall along the Perpendicular A E out of
the Term E let a Reflexion be made towards B. I &longs;ay, that the Space,
along which the Moveable a&longs;cendeth in a Time equal to the Time of the
De&longs;cent A E, is greater than A E, but le&longs;&longs;e than double the &longs;ame A E. Let E D be equal to A E, and as E B is to B D, &longs;o let D B be to B F.
It
&longs;hall be proved, fir&longs;t that the point F is the Term at which the Moveable
with a Reflex Motion along E B arriveth in a Time equal to the Time
A E: And then, that E F is greater than E A, but le&longs;&longs;e than double the
&longs;ame. If we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time of the De&longs;cent along A E to be as A E,
the Time of the De&longs;cent along B E, or A&longs;cent along E B &longs;hall be as the
&longs;ame Line B E: And D B being a Mean-Proportional betwixt E B
and B F, and B E being the Time of De&longs;cent along the whole B E, B D
&longs;hall be the Time of the De&longs;cent along B F, and the Remaining part
D E the Time of the
maining part F E: But
the Time along F E
quiete
Time of the A&longs;cent a
long E F is the &longs;ame, &longs;ince that the Degree of Velocity in E was acqui
red along the De&longs;cent B E, or A E: Therefore the &longs;ame Time D E &longs;hall
be that in which the Moveable after the Fall out of A along A E,
with a Reflex Motion along E B &longs;hall reach to the Mark F: But it hath
been &longs;uppo&longs;ed that E D is equal to the &longs;aid A E: Which was fir&longs;t to be
proved. And becau&longs;e that as the whole E B is to the whole B D, &longs;o is the
part taken away D B to the part taken away B F, therefore, as the whole
E B is to the whole B D, &longs;o &longs;hall the Remainder E D be to D F:
But E B is greater than B D: Therefore E D is greater than D F, and
E F le&longs;&longs;e than double to D E or A E: Which was to be proved.
along the Perpendicular, but along an Inclined Plane; and the Demon
&longs;tration is the &longs;ame, provided that the Reflex Plane be le&longs;&longs;e ri&longs;ing, that is,
longer than the declining Plane.
THEOR. XVI.
If after the De&longs;cent along any Inclined Plane a
Motion follow along the Plane of the Hori
zon, the Time of the De&longs;cent along the Incli
ned Plane &longs;hall be to the Time of the Motion
along any Horizontal Line; as the double
Length of the Inclined Plane is to the Line ta
ken in the Horizon.
the De&longs;cent along A B let a Motion follow along the Horizon, in
which take any Space B D. I &longs;ay, that the Time of the De&longs;cent
along A B to the Time of the Motion along B D is as the double of A B
to B D. For B C being &longs;uppo&longs;ed
the double of A B, it is manife&longs;t by
ted that the Time of the De&longs;cent
along A B is equal to the Time of
the Motion along B C: But the
Time of the Motion along B C is to
the Time of the Motion along B D, as the Line C B is to the Line B D:
Therefore the Time of the Motion along A B is the Time along B D, as
the Double of A B is to B D: Which was to be proved.
PROBL X. PROP. XXVI.
A Perpendicular between two Horizontal
lel Lines, as al&longs;o a Space greater than the &longs;aid
being given, to rai&longs;e a
pendicular, along which the Moveable may
with a Reflex Motion after the Fall along the
given, and in a Time equal to the Time of the
Fall along the
and B C; and let F E be greater than B A, but le&longs;&longs;e than double
the &longs;ame. It is required between the &longs;aid Parallels from the point
B to rai&longs;e a Plane, along which the Moveable after the Fall from A to
B may with a Reflex Motion in a Time equal to the Time of the Fall
along A B pa&longs;&longs;e a Space a&longs;cending equal to the &longs;aid E F. Suppo&longs;e E D
equall to A B, the Remaining Part D F &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;e, for that the whole
E F is le&longs;&longs;e than double to A B: Let D I be equal to D F, and as E I is
to I D, &longs;o let D F be to another Space F X, and out of B let the Right-I &longs;ay, that the Plane along B O
is that along which after the Fall A B a Moveable in a Time equal
to the Time of the Fall along A B pa&longs;&longs;eth a&longs;cending a Space equal to
the given Space E F. Suppo&longs;e B R and R S equal to the &longs;aid E D and
D F. And becau&longs;e that as E I is to I D, &longs;o is D F to F X; therefore,
by Compo&longs;ition, as E D is to D I, &longs;o &longs;hall D X be to X F; that is, as
E D is to D F, &longs;o &longs;hall D X be to X F, and E X to X D; that is, as
B O is to O R, &longs;o &longs;hall R O be to O S: And if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time
along A B to be A B, the Time along O B &longs;hall be the &longs;ame O B, and
R O the Time along O S, and the Remaining Part B R the Time along
the Remaining Part S B, de&longs;cending from O to B: But the Time of
the De&longs;cent along S B from Rest in O, is equal to the Time of the
A&longs;cent from B to S after the Fall A B: Therefore B O is the Plane ele
vated from B, along which after the Fall along A B the Space B S
equal to the given Space E F is pa&longs;&longs;ed in the Time B R or B A: Which
was required to be done.
THEOR. XVII. PROP. XXVII.
If a Moveable de&longs;cend along unequal
who&longs;e Elevation is the &longs;ame, the Space that
&longs;hall be pa&longs;t along the lower part of the longe&longs;t
in a Time equal to that in which the whole
&longs;horter
that is compounded of the &longs;aid &longs;horter
and of the part to which that &longs;horter
hath the &longs;ame
exceedeth the &longs;horte&longs;t.
A D is the &longs;ame; and in the lower part of A C take the Space
C E, equal to the &longs;aid A B; and as C A is to A E, (that is to
the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Plane C A above A B) &longs;o let C E be to E F. I &longs;ay,
that the Space F C is that which is pa&longs;t after the De&longs;cent out of A in
a Time equal to the Time ofFor
the whole C A, being to the
whole A E, as the part taken
away C E is to the part taken
away E F, therefore the re
maining part E A &longs;hall be to
the remaining part A F, as the
whole C A is to the whole A E: Therefore the three Spaces C A,
A E, and A F are three Continual proportionals. And if the Time
along A B be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be as A B, the Time along A C &longs;hall be as
A C, and the Time along A F &longs;hall be as A E, and along the remain
ing part F C &longs;hall be as E C: But E C is equal to the &longs;aid A B: There
fore the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.
THEOR. XVIII. PROP. XXVIII.
point of Contact let A B be the Diameter, and A E B two Chords
at plea&longs;ure: We are to a&longs;&longs;ign the proportion of the Time of the
Fall along A B to the Time of the De&longs;cent along both the Chords
A E B. Let B E be continued out till it meet the Tangent in G, and
I &longs;ay,
that the Time along A B is to the Time along A E B, as A E is to A E F. For in regard the Angle F A B is equal to the Angle F A E, and the An
gle E A G to the Angle A B F, the whole Angle G A F &longs;hall be equal to
the two Angles F A B, and A B F;
to which al&longs;o the Angle G F A
is equal to G A. And becau&longs;e the
Rectangle B G E is equal to the
Square of G A, it &longs;hall likewi&longs;e
be equal to the Square of G F, and
the three Lines B G, G F, and
G E &longs;hall be proportionals. And
if we &longs;uppo&longs;e A E to be the Time
along A E, G E &longs;hall be the Time
along G E, and G F the Time along the whole G B, and E F the Time
along E B, after the De&longs;cent out of G, or out of A, along A E: The Time,
therefore, along A E, or along A B &longs;hall be to the Time along A E B, as
A E is to A E F: Which was to be determined.
Let G F be cut equal to G A: It is manife&longs;t
that G F is the Mean-proportional between B G, and G E. The re&longs;t as
before.
PROBL.
Any Horizontal Space being given upon the
end of which a Perpendicular is erected,
in which a part is taken equal to half of the
Space given in the Horizontal a Moveable fal
ling from that height, and turned along the
Horizon, &longs;hall pa&longs;&longs;e the Horizontal Space to
gether with the Perpendicular in a &longs;horter
Time than any other Space of the
cular with the &longs;ame Horizontal Space.
B C, and on B let there be a Perpendicular erected, in which let
B A be the half of the fore&longs;aid B C. I &longs;ay, that the Time in which
a Moveable let fall out of A pa&longs;&longs;eth both the Spaces A B and B C is the
&longs;horte&longs;t of all Times in which the &longs;aid Space B C with a part of the
Perpendicular, whether greater or le&longs;&longs;er than the part A B, &longs;hall be pa&longs;
&longs;ed. Let a greater be taken, as in the &longs;ir&longs;t Figure, or le&longs;&longs;er, as in the
It is to be proved that the Time in which the
Spaces E B and B C are pa&longs;&longs;ed is longer than the Time in which A B
and B C are pa&longs;&longs;ed. Let the Time along A B be as A B; the &longs;ame &longs;hall
be the Time of the Motion along the Horizontal Space B G; becau&longs;e
B C is double to A B, and the Time along both the Spaces A B C &longs;hall
be double of O B A. Let B O
E B and B A. B O &longs;hall be the
Time of the Fall along E B.
Again, let the Horizontal Space
B D be double to the &longs;aid B E:
It is manife&longs;t that the Time of it
after the Fall E B is the &longs;ame
B O. As D B is to B C, or as
E B is to B A, &longs;o let O B be to
B N: and in regard the Motion
along the Horizontal Plane is Equable, and O B being the Time along
B D after the Fall out of E, therefore N B &longs;hall be the Time along B C
after the Fall from the &longs;ame Altitude E. Hence it is manife&longs;t, that O B,
together with B N is the Time along E B C; and becau&longs;e the double of
B A is the Time along A B C; it remains to be proved, that O B, to
gether with B N is more than double B A. Now becau&longs;e O B is a Mean
between E B and B A, the proportion of E B to B A is double the pro
portion of O B to B A: and, in regard that E B is to B A, as O B is to
B N, the proportion of O B to B N &longs;hall al&longs;o be double the proportion of
O B to B A: But that proportion of O B to B N is compounded of the
proportions of O B to B A, and of A B to B N: therefore the proportion
of A B to B N is the &longs;ame with that of O B to B A. Therefore B O,
B A, and B N are three continual Proportionals, and O B, together with
B N, are greater than double B A: Whereupon the Propo&longs;ition is ma
nife&longs;t.
THEOR.
If a Perpendicular be let fall from any point of the
Horizontal Line, and out of another point in
the &longs;ame Horizontal Line a Plane be drawn
forth untill it meet the Perpendicular, along
which a Moveable de&longs;cendeth in the &longs;horte&longs;t
time unto the &longs;aid Perpendicular, this Plane
&longs;hall be that which cutteth off a part equall to
the di&longs;tance of the a&longs;&longs;igned point from the end
of the Perpendicular.
rizontal Line A C, in which let there be any point C, and in the
Perpendicular let the Di&longs;tance B E be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the Di
&longs;tance B C, and draw C E. I &longs;ay, that of all Planes inclined out of
the point C till they meet the Perpendicular C E is that, along which
in the &longs;horte&longs;t of all Times the De&longs;centFor
let the Planes C F and C G be inclined
above and below, and draw I K a Tan
gent unto the Semidiameter B C of the
de&longs;cribed Circle in C, which &longs;hall be
equidi&longs;tant from the Perpendicular;
and unto the &longs;aid C F let E K be Paral
lel cutting the Circumference of the Cir
cle in L: It is manife&longs;t that the Time of
the De&longs;cent along L E is equal to the
Time of the De&longs;cent along C E: But
the Time along K E is longer than along
L E: Therefore the Time along K E is
longer than that along C E: But the
Time along K E is equal to the Time a
long C F, they being equal, and drawn
according to the &longs;ame Inclination: Likewi&longs;e &longs;ince C G, and I E are
equal, and inclined according to the &longs;ame Inclination, the Times of the
Motions along them &longs;hall be equal: But H E being &longs;horter than I E, the
Time along it is al&longs;o &longs;horter than I E: Therefore the Time al&longs;o along
C E, (which is equal to the Time along H E) &longs;hall be &longs;horter than the
Time along I E: The Propo&longs;ition, therefore, is manife&longs;t.
THEOR.
If a Right-Line &longs;hall be in any manner inclined
upon the Horizontal Line, the Plane produced
from a given point in the Horizon untill it
meet with the Inclined Plane, along which
the De&longs;cent is made in the &longs;horte&longs;t of all
Times, is that which &longs;hall divide the Angle
contained between the two
drawn from the given
Horizontal Line, the other to the Inclined
Line, into two equal parts.
zontal Line A B, and let any point A be given in the Hori
zon, and from it let A C be drawn Perpendicular to A B,
and A E Perpendicular to C D, and let the Line F A divide the
Angle C A E into two equal parts. I &longs;ay, that of all Planes incli
ned out of any point of the Line C D to the point A that &longs;ame pro
duced along F A is it along
the &longs;horte&longs;t of all Times. Let
F G be drawn Parallel to AE;
the alternate Angles G F A
and F A E &longs;hall be equal: But
E A F is equal to that other
F A G: Therefore of the Tri
angle the Sides F G and G A
&longs;hall be equal. If therefore
about the Center G, at the di
&longs;tance G A, a Circle be de&longs;cri
bed it &longs;hall pa&longs;&longs;e by F, and &longs;hall
touch the Horizontal, and the Inclined Lines in the points A and F:
For the Angle G F C is a Right Angle, and likewi&longs;e G F is equidi&longs;tant
to A E: Whence it is manife&longs;t that all Lines produced from the point
A unto the inclined Plane do extend beyond the Circumference, and,
which followeth of con&longs;equence, that the Motions along the &longs;ame do
take up more Time than along F A. Which was to be demon&longs;trated.
LEMMA.
If two Circles touch one another within, the innermo&longs;t of which
toucheth &longs;ome Right Line, and the exteriour one cutteth it,
three Lines produced from the Contact of the Circles unto
three points of the Tangent Right-Line, that is, to the Con
tact of the interiour Circle, and to the Sections of the exte
riour &longs;hall contain equall Angles in the Contact of the
Circles.
Centers be B, that of the le&longs;&longs;er, and C that of the greater; and let
the interiour Circle touch any Line F G in the point H, and let the grea
ter cut it in the points F and G, and connect the three Lines A F, A H,
and A G. I &longs;ay, that the Angles by
equal. Produce A H untill it meeteth
the Circumference in I, and from the
Centers draw B H and C I, and thorow
the &longs;aid Centers let B C be drawn,
which continued forth &longs;hall meet with
the Contact A, and with the Circum
ferences of the Circles in O and N. And becau&longs;e the Angles I C N and
H O B are equal, for as much as either
of them is double to the Angle I A N,
the Lines B H and C I &longs;hall be Parallels: And becau&longs;e B H drawn
from the Center to the Contact is Perpendicular to F G; C I &longs;hall al&longs;o be
Perpendicular to the &longs;ame, and the Arch F I equal to the Arch I G, and,
which followeth of con&longs;equence, the Angle F A I to the Angle I A G:
Which was to be demon&longs;trated.
THEOR.
If two points be taken in the Horizon, and any
Line &longs;hould be inclined from one of them to
wards the other, out of which a Right-Line is
drawn unto the Inclined Line, cutting off a
part thereof equal to that which is included
between the points of the Horizon, the De
&longs;cent along this la&longs;t drawn &longs;hall be &longs;ooner per
formed, than along any other Right Lines pro
duced from the &longs;ame point unto the &longs;aid Incli
ned Line. And along other Lines which are
on each hand of this by equal Angles a De
&longs;cent &longs;hall be made in equal Times.
the Right Line B C, in which from the Term B take B D equal to
the &longs;aid B A, and draw a Line from A to D. I &longs;ay, that the De
&longs;cent along A D is more &longs;wiftly made, than along any other what&longs;oever
drawn from the point A unto the inclined Line B C. For out of the
points A and D unto B A and
A E and D E, inter&longs;ecting one
another in E: and fora&longs;much as
in the equicrural Triangle A B D
the Angles B A D and B D A
are equal, the remainders to the
Right-Angles D A E and E D A
&longs;hall be equal. Therefore a Circle
de&longs;cribed about the Center E at
the di&longs;tance A E &longs;hall al&longs;o pa&longs;&longs;e
by D; and the Lines B A and
B D will touch it in the points A
and D. And &longs;ince A is the end of the Perpendicular A E, the De&longs;cent
along A D &longs;hall be &longs;ooner performed, than along any other produced from
the &longs;ame Term A unto the Line B C beyond the Circumference of the
Circle: Which was fir&longs;t to be proved.
F, and at the di&longs;tance F A the Circle A G C be de&longs;cribed cutting the
Tangent Line in the points G and C; drawing A G and A C they &longs;hall
make equal Angles with the middle Line A D by what hath been afore
Times &longs;eeing that they terminate in A unto the Circumference of the
Circle A G O from the highe&longs;t point of it A.
PROBL. XII. PROP.
A Perpendicular and Plane inclined to it being
given, who&longs;e height is one and the &longs;ame, as al
&longs;o the highe&longs;t term, to find a point in the Per
pendicular above the common term, out of
which if a Moveable be demitted that &longs;hall
afterwards turn along the inclined Plane, the
&longs;aid Plane may be pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time in
which the
pa&longs;&longs;ed.
&longs;ame, be A B and A C. It is required in the Perpendicular B A,
continued out from the point A to find a Point out of which a
Moveable de&longs;cending may pa&longs;&longs;e the Space A C in the &longs;ame Time in
which it will pa&longs;&longs;e the &longs;aid Perpendicular A B out of Re&longs;t in A. Draw
D C E at Right-Angles to A C, and let C D be cut equal to A B, and
draw a Line from A to D: The Angle A D C &longs;hall be greater than the
Angles C A D: (for C A is greater than A B or C D:) Let the
Angle D A E be equal to the Angle A D E; and to A E let E F an in
clined Plane be Perpen-
ing prolonged meet in F,
and unto both A I and
A G &longs;uppo&longs;e C F to be
equal, and by G draw
G H equidi&longs;tant to the
Horizon. I &longs;ay, that H
is the point which is
&longs;ought. For &longs;uppo&longs;ing the
Time of the Fall along
the Perpendicular A B
to be A B, the Time along
A C ex quiete in A &longs;hall be the &longs;ame A C. And becau&longs;e in the Right
angled Triangle A E F, from the Right Angle E unto the Ba&longs;e A F,
E C is a Perpendicular, A E &longs;hall be a Mean-Proportional betwixt F A
and A C, and C E a Mean betwixt A C and C F, that is, betwixt C A
and A I: and fora&longs;much as the Time of A C out of A is A C, A E
cau&longs;e in the Equicrural Triangle A E D the Side A E is equal to the
Side E D, E D &longs;hall be the Time along A F, and E C is the Time along
A I: Therefore C D, that is A B &longs;hall be the Time along A F
ete
A G out of G, or out of H: Which was to be done.
PROBL.
An inclined
lime term is the &longs;ame being given, to find a
more &longs;ublime point in the Perpendicular pro
longed out of which a Moveable falling, and
being turned along the inclined
pa&longs;&longs;e them both in the &longs;ame Time, as it doth
the &longs;ole inclined
our Term.
Term A is the &longs;ame. It is required in the Perpendicular prolonged
from A to find a &longs;ublime point, out of which the Moveable de&longs;cen
ding, and being turned along the Plane A B, may pa&longs;&longs;e the a&longs;&longs;igned part
of the Perpendicular and the Plane A B in the &longs;ame Time, as it would the
&longs;ole Plane A B out of Re&longs;t in A.
rizontal Line
be B C, and
let A N be
cut equal to
A C; and as
A B is to B N,
&longs;o let A L be
to L C: and
unto A L let
A I be equal,
and unto A C
and B I let C
E be a third
proportional,
marked in the
Perpendicular A C produced. I &longs;ay, that C E is the Space acquired;
&longs;o that the Perpendicular being extended above A, and the part A X
equal to C E being taken, a Moveable out of X will pa&longs;&longs;e both theDraw the Horizontal Line X R Parallel to B C, with which let B A
being prolonged meet in R, and then A B being continued out unto D
draw E D Parallel to C B, and upon A D de&longs;cribe a Semicircle, and
from B, and Perpendicular to D A, erect B F till it meet with the Cir
cumference. It is manife&longs;t that F B is a Mean-proportional betwixt
A B and B D, and that the Line drawn from F to A is a Mean-propor
tional betwixt D A and A B. Suppo&longs;e B S equal to B I, and F H equal
to F B: And becau&longs;e, as A B is to B D, &longs;o is A C to C E, and becau&longs;e
B F is a Mean-proportional betwixt A B and B D, and becau&longs;e B I is a
Mean-proportional betwixt A C and C E; therefore as B A is to A C,
&longs;o is F B to B S. And becau&longs;e as B A is to A C, or A N, &longs;o is F B to
B S, therefore, by Conver&longs;ion of the proportion, B F is to F S, as A B is
to B N, that is, A L to L C; therefore the Rectangle under F B and
C L, is equal to the Rectangle under A L, and S F: But this Rectangle
A L, and S F, is the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Rectangle under A L and F B, or A I
and B F, over and above the Triangle A I and B S, or A I B; and the
Rectangle F B and L C is the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Rectangle A C and B F
over and above the Rectangle A L and B F: But the Rectangle A C and
B F is equal to the Rectangle A B I; (for as B A is to A C, &longs;o is F B to
B I:) The exce&longs;&longs;e, therefore, of the Rectangle A B I above the Rectan
gle A I and B F, or A I and F H, is equal to the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Rectangle
A I and F H above the Rectangle A I B: Therefore twice the Rectan
gle A I and F H is equal to the two Rectangles A B I and A I B; that
is twice A I B with the Square of B I. Let the Square A I be common
to both, and twice the Rectangle A I B with the two Squares A I, and
I B, (that is, the Square A B) &longs;hall be equal to twice the Rectangle
A I and F H, with the Square A I: Again, taking in commonly the
Square B F; the two Squares A B and B F, that is the &longs;ole Square A F
&longs;hall be equal to twice the Rectangle A I and F H, with the two Squares
A I and F B, that is A I and F H: But the &longs;ame Square A F is equal
to twice the Rectangle A H F, with the two Squares A H and H F:
Therefore twice the Rectangle A I and F H, with the Squares A I and
F H, are equal to twice the Rectangle A H F, with the Squares A H
and H F: And, the Common Square H F being taken away, twice the
Rectangle A I and F H, with the Square A I, &longs;hall be equal to twice the
Rectangle A H F, with the Square A H. And becau&longs;e that in all the
Rectangles F H is the Common Side, the Line A H &longs;hall be equal to A I:
For if it &longs;hould be greater or le&longs;&longs;er, then the Rectangles F H A and the
Square H A would al&longs;o be greater or le&longs;&longs;er than the Rectangles F H and
I A, and the Square I A: Contrary to what hath been demon&longs;trated.
the Time along A C &longs;hall be as A C, and I B the Mean-proportional be
twixt A C and C E &longs;hall be the Time along C E, or along X A from
Re&longs;t in X: And becau&longs;e betwixt D A and A B, or R B and B A the
A B the Mean is B F, to which F H is equal; Therefore,
&longs;tratis,
after the Fall out of X; &longs;ince the Time along the &longs;aid A B
A, &longs;hall be A B. Therefore the Time along X A is I B; and along A B
after R A, or after X A, is A I: Therefore the Time along X A B &longs;hall
be as A B, namely the &longs;elf-&longs;ame with the Time along the &longs;ole A B
ete Which was the Propo&longs;ition.
PROBL. XIV. PROP. XXXV.
An Inflected Line unto a given
ing a&longs;&longs;igned, to take part in the Inflected Line,
along which alone
made in the &longs;ame Time, as it would be along
the &longs;ame together with the Perpendicular.
It is
required in B C to take a part, along which alone out of Re&longs;t a
Motion may be made in the &longs;ame Time as it would along the &longs;ame
together with the Perpendicular A B. Draw the Horizon A D, with
which let the Inclined Line C B prolonged meet in E; and &longs;uppo&longs;e B F
equal to B A, and on the Center E at the di&longs;tance E F de&longs;cribe the Circle
F I G; and continue out F E unto the Circumference in G; and as G B
is to B F, &longs;o let B H be to H F; and let H I touch the Circle in I. Then
out of B erect B K
F C, with which
let the Line E I L
meet in L; and la&longs;t
of all let fall L M
Perpendicular to E
L, meeting B C in
M. I &longs;ay, that along
the Line B M from
Rest in B a Motion
may be made in the
&longs;ame Time, as it
would beLet E N be made
equal to E L. And becau&longs;e as G B is to B F, &longs;o is B H to H F; there
fore, by Permutation as G B is to B H, &longs;o will B F be to F H; and, by
Divi&longs;ion, G H &longs;hall be to H B, as B H is to H F: Wherefore the Rect
angle G H F &longs;hall be equal to the Square H B: But the &longs;aid Rectangle
is al&longs;o equal to the Square H I: Therefore B H is equal to the &longs;ame H I.
H I are equal, and the Angles B and I Right Angles, the Side B L &longs;hall
likewi&longs;e be equal to the Side L I: But E I is equal to E F: Therefore the
whole Line L E, or N E is equal to the two Lines L B and E F: Let
the Common Line E F be taken away, and the remainder F N &longs;hall be
equal to L B: And F B was &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to B A: Therefore L B &longs;hall
be equal to the two Lines A B and B N. Again, if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the
Time along A B to be the &longs;aid A B, the Time along E B &longs;hall be equal to
E B; and the Time along the whole E M &longs;hall be E N, namely, the
Mean-proportional betwixt M E and E B: I berefore the Time of the
De&longs;cent of the remaining part B M after E B, or after A B, &longs;hall be the
&longs;aid B N: But it hath been &longs;uppo&longs;ed, that the Time along A B is A B:
Therefore the Time of the Fall along both A B and B M is A B N:
And becau&longs;e the Time along E B
B M
B M; and this is B L: The Time, therefore, along both A B M
But it was proved that B L is equal to the two A B and B N: Therefore
the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.
Continue
out C B to E, and unto E C erect a Perpendicular at B, which being
prolonged &longs;uppo&longs;e B H equal to the exce&longs;&longs;e of B E above B A; and to the
Angle B H E let the Angle H E L be equal; and let E L continued out
meet with B K in L; and from L erect the Perpendicular L M unto E L
meeting B C in M. I &longs;ay, that
the Plane B C. For becau&longs;e
the Angle M L E is a Right
Angle, therefore B L &longs;hall be
a Mean-proportional betwixt
M B and B E; and L E a
Mean proportional betwixt M
E and E B; to which E L let
E N be cut equal: And the
three Lines N E, E L, and
L H &longs;hall be equal; and H B &longs;hall be the exce&longs;&longs;e of N E above B L: But
the &longs;aid H B is al&longs;o the exce&longs;&longs;e of N E above N B and B A: Therefore
the two Lines N B and B A are equal to B L. And if we &longs;uppo&longs;e E B
to be the Time along E B, B L &longs;hall be the Time along B M
B; and B N &longs;hall be the Time of the &longs;ame B M after E B or after A B;
and A B &longs;hall be the Time along A B: Therefore the Times along A B M,
namely, A B N, are equal to the Times along the &longs;ole Line B M
LEMMAI.
B continue forth B E D at plea&longs;ure, and draw a Line from F to B. I
&longs;ay, that F B is a Mean-proportional be-Draw a Line from E
to F, and by B draw the Tangent B G;
which &longs;hall be Parallel to the former C D:
Wherefore the Angle D B G &longs;hall be equal
to the Angle F D B, like as the &longs;ame G B D
is equal al&longs;o to the Angle E F B in the al
tern Portion or Segment: Therefore the
Triangles F B D and F E B are alike: And,
as B D is to B F, &longs;o is F B to B E.
LEMMA II.
proportion to B C, than D E hath to E F. I &longs;ay, that A B is greater
than D E. For becau&longs;e A B hath to B C
therefore look what proportion A B hath to
B C, the &longs;ame &longs;hall D E have to a Line le&longs;
&longs;er than E F; let it have it to E G: And
becau&longs;e A B to B C, is as D E, to E G, there
fore, by Compo&longs;ition, and by converting the Proportion, as C A is to A B,
&longs;o is G D to D E: But C A is greater than G D: Therefore B A &longs;hall
be greater than D E.
LEMMA III.
and to A C let B E be drawn from B Pa
rallel: And out of any Center taken in the
&longs;ame de&longs;cribe the Circle B O E S, touching
A B in B, and cutting the Circumference of
the Quadrant in I; and draw a Line from
C to B, and another from C to I continued
out to S. I &longs;ay, that the Line C I is alwaies
le&longs;&longs;e than C O. Draw a Line from A to I;
which toucheth the Circle B O E. And if
D I be drawn it &longs;hall be equal to D B: And
becau&longs;é D B toucheth the Quadrant, the &longs;aid
D I &longs;hall likewi&longs;e touch it; and &longs;hall be Per-
cle B O E in I. And, becau&longs;e the Angle A I C is greater than the An
gle A B C, as in&longs;i&longs;ting on a larger Periphery: Therefore the Angle
S I N &longs;hall be al&longs;o greater than the &longs;ame A B C: Therefore the Portion
I E S is greater than the Portion B O; and the Line C S, nearer to the
Center, greater than C B: Therefore al&longs;o C O is greater than C I;
for that S C is to C B, as O C is to C I.
Figure) the Quadrant B I C were
will cut the Circle C I B: Wherefore
D I al&longs;o is equal to the &longs;aid D B; and
the Angle D I A &longs;hall be Obtu&longs;e, and
therefore A I N will al&longs;o cut B I N:
And becau&longs;e the Angle A B C is le&longs;&longs;e
than the Angle A I C, which is equal
to S I N; and this now is le&longs;&longs;e than that
which would be made at the Contact in
I by the Line S I: Therefore the Porti
on S E I is much greater than the Por
tion B O: Wherefore,
to be demon&longs;trated.
THEOR.
If from the lowe&longs;t point of a Circle erect unto
the Horizon a Plane &longs;hould be elevated &longs;ub
tending a Circumference not greater than a
Quadrant, from who&longs;e Terms two other
Planes are Inflected to any point of the Cir
cumference, the De&longs;cent along both the Infle
cted Planes would be performed in a &longs;horter
Time than along the former elevated Plane
alone, or than along but one of the other two,
namely, along the lower.
Circle erect unto the Horizon on the lower point C, in which let
C D be an elevated Plane; and let two Planes be inflected from the
Terms D and C to any point in the Circumference taken at plea&longs;ure,
as B. I &longs;ay, that the Time of the De&longs;cent along both tho&longs;e Planes D B C
is &longs;horter than the Time of the De&longs;cent along the &longs;ole Plane D C, or
along the other only B CLet the Horizontal Line M D A
the Perpendiculars D N and M C to M D, and B N to B D; and about
the Right-angled Triangle D B N de&longs;cribe the Semicircle D F B N,
cutting D C in F; and let D O be a Mean-proportional betwixt C D
and D F; and A V a Mean-proportional betwixt C A and A B: And
let P S be the time in which the whole D C, or B C, &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed;
(for it is manife&longs;t that they &longs;hall be both pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time;) And
look what proportion C D hath to D O, the &longs;ame &longs;hall the Time S P
have to the Time P R: the Time P R &longs;hall be that in which a Movea
ble out of D will pa&longs;&longs;e D F; and R S that in which it &longs;hall pa&longs;&longs;e the re
mainder F C. And becau&longs;e P S is al&longs;o the Time in which the Movea
ble out of B &longs;hall pa&longs;&longs;e B C; if it be &longs;uppo&longs;ed that as B C is to C D, &longs;o is
S P to P T, P T &longs;hall be the Time of the De&longs;cent out of A to C: by
rea&longs;on D C is a Mean-proportional betwixt A C and C B, by what was
before demon&longs;trated: La&longs;t of all, as C A is to A V, &longs;o let T P be to
in which thé Moveable out
of A de&longs;cendeth to B. And
becau&longs;e of the Circle D F N
the Diameter erect to the
Horizon is D N, the Lines
D F and D B &longs;hall be pa&longs;
&longs;ed in equal Times. So that
if it &longs;hould be demon&longs;tra
ted that the Moveable would
&longs;ooner pa&longs;&longs;e B C after the
De&longs;cent D B, than F C after the Lation D F; we &longs;hould have our in
tent. But the Moveable will with the &longs;ame Celerity of Time pa&longs;&longs;e B C
coming out of D along D B, as if it came out of A along A B: for that
in both the De&longs;cents D B and A B it acquireth equal Moments of Velo
city: Therefore it &longs;hall re&longs;t to be demon&longs;trated that the Time is &longs;horter
in which B C is pa&longs;&longs;ed after A B, than that in which F C is pa&longs;t after
D F. But it hath been demon&longs;trated, that the Time in which B C is
pa&longs;&longs;ed after A B is G T; and the Time of F C after D F is R S. It is
to be proved therefore, that R S is greater than G T: Which is thus
done. Becau&longs;e as S P is to P R, &longs;o is C D to D O, therefore, by Conver
&longs;ion of proportion, and by Inver&longs;ion, as R S is to S P, &longs;o is O C to C D:
and as S P is to P T, &longs;o is D C to C A: And, becau&longs;e as T P is to PG,
&longs;o is C A to A V: Therefore al&longs;o, by Conver&longs;ion of the proportion, as
P T is to T G, &longs;o is A C to C V: therefore, ex equali, as R S is to G T,
&longs;o is O C to C V. But O C is greater than C V, as &longs;hall anon be de
mon&longs;trated: Therefore the Time R S is greater than the Time G T:
Which it was required to demon&longs;trate. And becau&longs;e C F is greater than
C B, and F D le&longs;&longs;e than B A, therefore C D &longs;hall have greater propor
tion to D F than C A to A B: And as C D is to D F, &longs;o is the Square
tionals: And as C A is to A B, &longs;o is the Square C V to the Square
V B: Therefore C O hath greater proportion to O F, than C V to V B:
Therefore, by the foregoing Lemma, C O is greater than C V. It is
manife&longs;t moreover, that the Time along D C is to the Time along
D B C, as D O C is to D O together with C V.
SCHOLIUM.
From the&longs;e things that have been demon&longs;trated may evidently
be gathered, that the &longs;wifte&longs;t of all Motions betwixt Term
and Term is not made along the &longs;horte&longs;t Line, that is by the
Right, but along a portion of a Circle.
zon, let the Arch A C be divided into any number of equal parts,
A D, D E, E F, F G, G C; and let Right-lines be drawn from C to
the Points A, D, E, F, G, H; and al&longs;o by Lines joyn A D, D E, E F,
F G. and G C. It is manifest, that the Motion along the two Lines
A D C is &longs;ooner performed than along the
But out of Re&longs;t in A, D C is &longs;ooner pa&longs;t
than the two A D C: But along the two
D E C out of Re&longs;t in A the De&longs;cent is
likewi&longs;e &longs;ooner made than along the &longs;ole
C D: Therefore the De&longs;cent along the
three Lines A D E C &longs;hall be performed
&longs;ooner than along the two A D C. And
in like manner the De&longs;cent along A D E
preceding, the Motion is more &longs;peedily con
&longs;ummated along the two EFC than along the &longs;ole FC: Therfore along the
four A D E F C the Motion is quicklier accompli&longs;hed than along the
three A D E C: And &longs;o, in the la&longs;t place, along the two F G C after the
precedent De&longs;cent along A D E F the Motion will be &longs;ooner con&longs;umma
ted than along the &longs;ole F C: Therefore along the five A D E F G C
the De&longs;cent &longs;hall be effected in a yet &longs;horter Time than along the four
A D E F C: Whereupon the nearer by in&longs;cribed Poligons we approach
the Circumference, the &longs;ooner will the Motion be performed between the
two a&longs;&longs;igned points A C.
in a Circumference le&longs;&longs;e than the Quadrant: and the Ratiocination is
the &longs;ame.
PROBL.XV. PROP. XXXVII.
A Perpendicular and Inclined Plane of the &longs;ame
Elevation being given, to find a part in the In
clined Plane that is equal to the Perpendicu
lar, and pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame Time as the &longs;aid
Perpendicular.
It is
required in the Inclined to find a part equal to the Perpendicular
A B, that after Re&longs;t in A may be pa&longs;&longs;ed in a Time equal to the
Time in which the Perpendicular is pa&longs;&longs;ed. Let A D be equal to A B,
and cut the Remainder B C in two equal parts in I; and as A C is to
A E; to which let D G be equal: It
is manife&longs;t that E G is equal to A D
and to A B. I &longs;ay moreover, that
this &longs;ame E G is the &longs;ame that is
pa&longs;&longs;ed by the Moveable coming out
of Re&longs;t in A in a Time equal to the
Time in which the Moveable fall eth along A B. For becau&longs;e that as
A C is to C I, &longs;o is C I to A E, or I D to D G; Therefore by Conver&longs;ion
of the proportion, as C A is to A I, &longs;o is D I to I G. And becau&longs;e as the
whole C A is to the whole A I, &longs;o is the part taken away C I to the part
I G; therefore the Remaining part I A &longs;hall be to the Remainder A G,
as the whole C A is to the whole A I: Therefore A I is a Mean-propor
tional betwixt C A and A G; and C I a Mean-proportional betwixt
C A and A E: If therefore we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time along A B to be as A B;
A C &longs;hall be the Time along A C, and C I or I D the Time along A E:
And becau&longs;e A I is a Mean-proportional betwixt C A and A G; and
C A is the Time along the whole A C: Therefore A I &longs;hall be the Time
along. A G; and the Remainder I C that along the Remainder G C: But
D I was the Time along A E: Therefore D I and I C are the Times
along both the Spaces A E and C G: Therefore the Remainder D A &longs;hall
be the Time along E G, to wit, equal to the Time along A B. Which was
to be done.
COROLLARIE.
Hence it is manife&longs;t, that the Space required is an intermedial be
tween the upper and lower parts that are pa&longs;t in equal
Times.
Two Horizontal Planes cut by the Perpendicular
being given, to find a &longs;ublime point in the
pendicular, out of which Moveables falling
and being reflected along the Horizontal
the De&longs;cents along the &longs;aid Horizontal
namely, along the upper and along the lower,
pa&longs;&longs;e Spaces that have to each other any given
proportion of the le&longs;&longs;er to the greater.
A C B, and let the given proportion of the le&longs;&longs;e to the greater be
N to F G. It is required in the Perpendicular A B to find a point
on high, out of which a Moveable falling, and reflected along C D may
in a Time equal to the Time of its Fall, pa&longs;&longs;e a Space, that &longs;hall have
unto the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by the other Moveable coming out of the &longs;ame &longs;ub
lime point in a Time equal to the Time of its Fall with a Reflex Motion
along the Plane B E the &longs;ame proportion as the given Line N batb toLet G H be
made equal to the
&longs;aid N; and as F H
is to H G, &longs;o let
B C be to C L. I &longs;ay,
L is the &longs;ublime
point required. For
taking C M double
to C L, draw L M
meeting the Plane
B E in O; B O
&longs;hall be double to
B L: And becau&longs;e,
as F H is to H G, &longs;o is B C to C L; therefore, by Compo&longs;ition and In
ver&longs;ion, as H G, that is, N is to G F, &longs;o is C L to L B, that is, C M to
B O: But becau&longs;e C M is double to L C; let the Space C M be that
which by the Moveable coming from L after the Fall L C is pa&longs;&longs;ed along
the Plane C D; and by the &longs;ame rea&longs;on B O is that which is pa&longs;&longs;ed after
the Fall L B in a Time equal to the Time of the Fall along L B; fora&longs;
much as B O is double to B L: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.
SAGR.
Really me thinks that we may ju&longs;tly grant our
mian
of this his Treati&longs;e of &longs;hewing us a
Subject.
from one &longs;ole Principle the Demon&longs;trations of &longs;o many Propo&longs;iti
ons, maketh me not a little to wonder how this bu&longs;ine&longs;s e&longs;caped
unhandled by
there are found many great Volumns of
SALV.
There is extant a &longs;mall Fragment of
took towards the di&longs;covery of the Proportion of
of its Varieties along different So that indeed one
may &longs;ay, that never till now was the door opened to a new Con
templation fraught with infinite and admirable Conclu&longs;ions, which
in times to come may bu&longs;ie other Wits.
SAGR.
for example) of the Circle demon&longs;trated by
his
&longs;truce, &longs;o tho&longs;e produced and demon&longs;trated in this &longs;hort Tractate,
when they &longs;hall come to the hands of other Speculative Wits, &longs;hall
be a manuduction unto infinite others mote admirable: and it is to
be believed that thus it will happen by rea&longs;on of the Nobility of
the Argument above all others Phy&longs;ical.
This daies Conference hath been very long and laborious; in
which
Demon&longs;trations; many of which,
an hour a piece well to comprehend them: a task that
my &longs;elf to perform at lea&longs;ure, you leaving the Book in my hands &longs;o
&longs;oon as we &longs;hall have heard this part that remains about the Moti
on of Projects: which &longs;hall, if you &longs;o plea&longs;e, be to morrow.
SALV.
GALILEUS,
HIS
DIALOGUES
OF
MOTION.
The Fourth Dialogue.
SALVIATUS, SAGREDUS, and SIMPLICIUS.
SALVIATUS.
without interpo&longs;ing any
and &longs;ee here the
OF THE MOTION OF
PROJECTS.
turally Accelerate
we have con&longs;idered above. In this Contemplation which we are now
entering upon, I will attempt to declare, and with &longs;olid Demon&longs;trations
ledge, which befall a Moveable whil&longs;t it is moved with a Motion com
pounded of a twofold Lation, to wit, of the Equable and Naturally
Accelerate: and this is that Motion, which we call the Motion of Pro
jects: who&longs;e Generation I constitute to be in this manner.
an Horizontal Plane, all impediment &longs;ecluded: Now it is manife&longs;t by
what we have el&longs;ewhere &longs;poken at large, that that Motion will be Equa
ble and Perpetual along the &longs;aid Plane, if the Plane be extended
finitum
able, which I conceive to be endued with Gravity, being come to the end
of the Plane, proceeding forward, it addeth to the Equable and Indeli
ble fir&longs;t Lation that propen&longs;ion downwards which it receiveth from its
Gravity, and from thence a certain Motion doth re&longs;ult compounded of
the Equable Horizontal, and of the De&longs;cending naturally. Accellerate
Lations: which I call
mon&longs;trate; the fir&longs;t of which &longs;hall be this.
THEOR.I. PROP.I.
of the Horizontal Equable, and of the Naturally
Accelerate downwards, &longs;hall de&longs;cribe a Semipara
bolical Line in its Lation.
SAGR.
It is requi&longs;ite,
believe, al&longs;o of
am not &longs;o far gone in Geometry as to have &longs;tudied
lonius,
bola's, and of the other Conick Sections, without the knowledge
of which, and of their Pa&longs;&longs;ions, I do not think that one can under
&longs;tand the Demon&longs;trations of other Propo&longs;itions depending on
them. And becau&longs;e already in the very fir&longs;t Propo&longs;ition it is pro
po&longs;ed by the Author to prove the Line de&longs;cribed by the Project to
be Parabolical, I imagine to my &longs;elf, that being to treat of none
but &longs;uch Lines, it is ab&longs;olutely nece&longs;&longs;ary to have a perfect know
ledge, if not of all the Pa&longs;&longs;ions of tho&longs;e Figures that are demon
&longs;trated by
ence in hand.
SALV.
You undervalue your &longs;elf very much, to make &longs;trange
of tho&longs;e Notions, which but even now you admitted as very well
under&longs;tood: I told you heretofore, that in the Treati&longs;e of Re&longs;i
&longs;tances we had need of the knowledge of certain Propo&longs;itions of
SAGR.
It may be either that I knew them by chance, or that I
might for once gue&longs;&longs;e at, and take for granted &longs;o much as &longs;erved my
turn in that Tractate: but here where I imagine that we are to
hear all the Demon&longs;trations that concern tho&longs;e Lines, it is not con
venient, as we &longs;ay, to &longs;wallow things whole, lo&longs;ing our time and
pains.
SIMP.
But as to what concerns me, although
as I believe he is, well provided for his occa&longs;ions, the very fir&longs;t
Terms already are new to me: for though our Philo&longs;ophers have
handled this Argument of the Motion of Projects, I do not remem
ber that they have confined them&longs;elves to de&longs;ine what the Lines
are which they de&longs;cribe, &longs;ave only in general that they are alwaies
Curved Lines, except it be in Projections Perpendicularly upwards. Therefore in ca&longs;e that little Geometry that I have learnt from
clid
ficient to render me capable of the Notions requi&longs;ite for the under
&longs;tanding of the following Demon&longs;trations, I mu&longs;t content my &longs;elf
with bare Propo&longs;itions believed, but not under&longs;tood.
SALV.
But I will have you to know them by help of the Au
thor of this Book him&longs;elf, who when he heretofore granted me a
&longs;ight of this his Work, becau&longs;e I al&longs;o at that time was not perfect
in the Books of
two mo&longs;t principal Pa&longs;&longs;ions of the Parabola without any other Pre
cognition, of which two, and no more, we &longs;hall &longs;tand in need in
the pre&longs;ent Treati&longs;e; which are both likewi&longs;e proved by
but after many others, which it would take up a long time to look
over, and I am de&longs;irous that we may much &longs;horten the Journey, ta
king the fir&longs;t immediately from the pure and &longs;imple generation of
the &longs;aid Parabola, and from this al&longs;o immediately &longs;hall be deduced
the Demon&longs;tration of the &longs;econd. Coming therefore to the fir&longs;t;
De&longs;cribe the Right Cone, who&longs;e Ba&longs;e let be the Circle I B K C,
and Vertex the point L, in which, cut by a Plane parallel to the
Side L K, ari&longs;eth the Section B A C
called a Parabola; and let its Ba&longs;e
B C cut the Diameter I K of the
Circle I B K C at Right-Angles;
and let the Axis of the Parabola
A D be Parallel to the &longs;ide L K;
and taking any point F in the Line
B F A, draw the Right-Line F E
parallel to B D. I &longs;ay, that the Square
of B D hath to the Square of F E
the &longs;ame proportion that the Axis
D A hath to the part A E. Let a Plane parallel to the Circle I B K C
a Circular Section, who&longs;e Diameter is G E H. And becau&longs;e upon
the Diameter I K of the Circle I B K, B D is a Perpendicular, the
Square of B D &longs;hall be equal to the Rectangle made by the parts
I D and D K: And likewi&longs;e in the upper Circle which is under&longs;tood
to pa&longs;&longs;e by the points G F H, the Square of the Line F E is equal
to the Rectangle of the parts G E H: Therefore the Square of B D
hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Square of F E, that the Rectangle
I D K hath to the Rectangle G E H. And becau&longs;e the Line E D is
Parallel to H K, E H &longs;hall be equal to D K, which al&longs;o are Parallels:
And therefore the Rectangle I D K &longs;hall have the &longs;ame proportion
to the Rectangle G E H, as I D hath to G E; that is, that D A hath
to A E: Therefore the Rectangle I D K to the Rectangle G E H,
that is, the Square B D to the Square F E, hath the &longs;ame proportion
that the Axis D A hath to the part A E: Which was to be de
mon&longs;trated.
The other Propo&longs;ition, likewi&longs;e nece&longs;&longs;ary to the pre&longs;ent Tract,
we will thus make out. Let us de&longs;cribe the Parabola, of which let the
Axis C A be prolonged out unto D; and taking any point B, let the
Line B C be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be continued out by the &longs;ame Parallel un
to the Ba&longs;e of the &longs;aid Parabola;
and let D A be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal
to the part of the Axis C A. I &longs;ay,
that the Right-Line drawn by
the points D and B, falleth not
within the Parabola, but without,
&longs;o as that it only toucheth the
&longs;ame in the &longs;aid point B: For, if
it be po&longs;&longs;ible for it to fall within,
it cutteth it above, or being pro
longed, it cutteth it below. And
in that Line let any point G be
taken, by which pa&longs;&longs;eth the Right
Line F G E. And becau&longs;e the
Square F E is greater than the
Square G E, the &longs;aid Square F E
&longs;hall have greater proportion to
the Square B C, than the &longs;aid Square G E hath to the &longs;aid B C. And
becau&longs;e, by the precedent, the Square F E is to the Square B C as
E A is to A C; therefore E A hath greater proportion to A C, than
the Square G E hath to the Square B C; that is, than the Square
E D hath to the Square D C: (becau&longs;e in the Triangle D G E as
G E is to the Parallel B C, &longs;o is E
A C, that is, to A
E A
gles E A D &longs;hall have greater proportion to the Square C D, than
the Square E D hath to the Square D C: Therefore four Rectan
gles E A D &longs;hall be greater than the Square E D: which is fal&longs;e,
for they are le&longs;&longs;e; becau&longs;e the parts E A and A D of the Line E D
are not equal: Therefore the Line D B toucheth the Parabola in B,
and doth not cut it: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.
SIMP.
You proceed in your Demon&longs;trations too &longs;ublimely,
and &longs;till, as far as I can perceive, &longs;uppo&longs;e that the Propo&longs;itions of
&longs;elves, which is not &longs;o. And the impo&longs;ing upon me, ju&longs;t now, that
four Rectangles E A
parts E A and A
me, but leaveth me in doubt.
SALV.
The truth is, all the Mathematicians that are not vulgar
&longs;uppo&longs;e that the Reader hath ready by heart the Elements of
you of a Propo&longs;ition in the &longs;econd Book, in which it is demon&longs;trated
that when a Line is cut into equal parts, and into unequal, the
Rectangle of the unequal parts is le&longs;s than the Rectangle of the
equal, (that is, than the Square of the half) by &longs;o much as is the
Square of the Line comprized between the Sections. Whence it is
manife&longs;t, that the Square of the whole, which continueth four
Squares of the Half, is greater than four Rectangles of the unequal
parts. Now it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that we bear in mind the&longs;e two Propo&longs;i
tions which have been demon&longs;trated, taken from the Conick Ele
ments, for the better under&longs;tanding the things that follow in the
pre&longs;ent Treati&longs;e: for of the&longs;e two, and no more, the Author
makes u&longs;e. Now we may rea&longs;&longs;ume the Text to &longs;ee in what manner
he doth demon&longs;trate his fir&longs;t Propo&longs;ition, in which he intendeth to
prove unto us, That the Line de&longs;cribed by the Grave Moveable,
when it de&longs;cends with a Motion compounded of the Equable
Horizontal, and of the Natural
[or along]
of A unto B: and the &longs;upport of the Plane failing in B let there be
derived upon the Moveable from its own Gravity a Motion naturally
downwards according to the Perpendicular B N. Let the Line B E be
&longs;uppo&longs;ed applyed unto the Plane A B right out, as if it were the Efflux
or mea&longs;ure of the Time, on which at plea&longs;ure note any equal parts of
Time, B C, C D, D E: And out of the points B C D E &longs;uppo&longs;e Per
pendicular Lines to be let fall equidi&longs;tant or parallel to B N: In the fir&longs;t
of which take any part C I, who&longs;e quadruple take in the following one
D F, nonuple E H, and &longs;o in the re&longs;t that follow according to the propor-
proportion of the Lines. And if unto the Moveable moved beyond B
towards C with the Equable Lation we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Perpendicular
De&longs;cent to be &longs;uperadded according to the quantity C I, in the Time
B C it &longs;hall be found con&longs;tituted in the Term I. And proceeding farther,
in the double of B C, the
Space of the De&longs;cent down
wards &longs;hall be quadruple to
the fir&longs;t Space C I: For
it hath beendemon&longs;trated in
the fir&longs;t Trastate, that the
Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed by GraveBo
dies with a Motion Natu
rally Accelerate are in du
plicate proportion of their Times. And it likewi&longs;e followeth, that the
Space E H pa&longs;&longs;ed in the Time B E, &longs;hall be as G. So that it is manife&longs;tly
proved, that the Spaces E H, D F, C I, are to one another as the Squares
of the Lines E B, D B, C B. Now from the points I, F, and H draw
the Right Lines I O, F G, H L, Parallel to the &longs;aid E B; and each of
the Lines H L, F G, and I O &longs;hall be equal to each of the other Lines
E B, D B, and C B; as al&longs;o each of tho&longs;e B O, B G, and B L, &longs;hall be
equal to each of tho&longs;e C I, D F, and E H: And the Square H L &longs;hall
be to the Square F G, as the Line L B to B G: And the Square F G
&longs;hall be to the Square I O, as G B to B O: Therefore the Points I, F,
and H are in one and the &longs;ame Parabolical Line. And in like manner
it &longs;hall be demon&longs;trated, any equalparticles of Time of what&longs;oever Mag
nitude being taken, that the place of the Moveable who&longs;e Motion is
compounded of the like Lations, is in the &longs;ame Times to be found in the
&longs;ame Parabolick Line: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.
SALV.
This Conclu&longs;ion is gathered from the Conver&longs;ion of the
fir&longs;t of tho&longs;e two Propo&longs;itions that went before, for the Parabola
being, for example, de&longs;cribed by the points B H, if either of the
two F or I were not in the de&longs;cribed Parabolick Line, it would be
within, or without; and by con&longs;equence the Line F G would be
either greater or le&longs;&longs;er than that which &longs;hould determine in the Pa
rabolick Line; Wherefore the Square of HL would have, not to
the Square of F G, but to another greater or le&longs;&longs;er, the &longs;ame pro
portion that the Line L B hath to BG, but it hath the &longs;ame propor
tion to the Square of F G: Therefore the point F is in the Parabo
lick Line: And &longs;o all the re&longs;t,
SAGR.
It cannot be denied but that the Di&longs;cour&longs;e is new, in
genious and concludent, arguing
that the Tran&longs;ver&longs;e Motion doth continue alwaies Equable, and
ally Accelerating according to a proportion double to the Times;
and that tho&longs;e Motions and their Velocities in mingling be not al
tered, di&longs;turbed, and impeded, &longs;o that finally the Line of the Pro
ject do not in the continuation of the Motion degenerate into an
other kind; a thing which &longs;eemeth to me to be impo&longs;&longs;ible. For, in
regard that the Axis of our Parabola, according to which we &longs;up
po&longs;e the Natural Motion of Graves to be made, being Perpendicu
lar to the Horizon, doth terminate in the Center of the Earth; and
in regard that the Parabolical Line doth &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively enlarge from
its Axis, no Project would ever come to terminate in the Center, or
if it &longs;hould come thitherwards, as it &longs;eemeth nece&longs;&longs;ary that it mu&longs;t,
the Line of the Project &longs;hould de&longs;cribe another mo&longs;t different from
that of the Parabola.
SIMP.
I add to the&longs;e difficulties &longs;everal others; one of which is
that we &longs;uppo&longs;e, that the Horizontal Plane which hath neither accli
vity or declivity is a Right Line; as if that &longs;uch a Line were in all
its parts equidi&longs;tant from the Center, which is not true: for depart
ing from its middle it goeth towards the extreams, alwaies more and
more receding from the Center, and therefore alwaies a&longs;cending:
which of con&longs;equence rendereth it Impo&longs;&longs;ible that its Motion
&longs;hould be perpetual, or that it &longs;hould for any time continue Equa
ble, and nece&longs;&longs;itates it to grow continually more and more weak. Moreover, it is, in my Opinion, impo&longs;&longs;ible to avoid the Impedi
ment of the
the Tran&longs;ver&longs;e Motion, and the Rule of the Acceleration in falling
Grave Bodies. By all which difficulties it is rendred very improba
ble that the things demon&longs;trated with &longs;uch incon&longs;tant Suppo&longs;i
tions &longs;hould afterwards hold true in the practical Experiments.
SALV.
All the Objections and Difficulties alledged are &longs;o
well grounded, that I e&longs;teem it impo&longs;&longs;ible to remove them; and
for my own part I admit them all, as al&longs;o I believe the Author
him&longs;elf would do. And I grant that the Conclu&longs;ions thus demon
&longs;trated in Ab&longs;tract, do alter and prove fal&longs;e, and that &longs;o egregiou&longs;
ly, in Concrete, that neither is the Tran&longs;ver&longs;e Motion Equable,
nor is the Acceleration of the Natural in the proportion &longs;uppo&longs;e,
nor is the Line of the Project Parabolical, B
contrary, I de&longs;ire that you would not &longs;cruple to grant to this our
Author that which other famous Men have &longs;uppo&longs;ed, although
fal&longs;e. And the &longs;ingle Authority of
one: who in his Mechanicks, and in the fir&longs;t Quadrature of the
Parabola, taketh it as a true Principle, that the
or Stilliard is a Right Line in all its points equidi&longs;tant from the
Common Center of Grave
which the Weights are hanged, are parallel to one another. Which
the In&longs;truments we u&longs;e, and the Di&longs;tances which we take are &longs;o
&longs;mall in compari&longs;on of our great remotene&longs;s from the Center of
the Terre&longs;trial Globe, that we may very well take a Minute of a
degree of the great Circle as if it were a Right Line, and two Per
pendiculars that &longs;hould hang at its extreams as if they were Paral
lels. For if we were in practical Operations to keep account of
&longs;uch like Minutes, we &longs;hould begin to reprove the Architects, who
with the Plumb Line &longs;uppo&longs;e that they rai&longs;e very high Towers
between Lines equidi&longs;tant. And I here add, that we may &longs;ay that
were con&longs;tituted remote at an infinite di&longs;tance from the Center;
in which ca&longs;e their A&longs;&longs;umptions were not fal&longs;e: And that therefore
they did conclude by Ab&longs;olute Demon&longs;tration. Again, if we will
practice the demon&longs;trated Conclu&longs;ions in terminate Di&longs;tances, by
&longs;uppo&longs;ing an immen&longs;e Di&longs;tance, we ought to defalk from the
truth demon&longs;trated that which our Di&longs;tance from the Center doth
import, not being really infinite, but yet &longs;uch as that it may be
termed Immen&longs;e in compari&longs;on of the Artifices that we make u&longs;e
of, the greate&longs;t of which will be the Ranges of Projects, and among&longs;t
the&longs;e that only of Canon &longs;hot; which though it be great, yet &longs;hall
it not exceed four of tho&longs;e Miles of which we are remote from the
Center well-nigh &longs;o many thou&longs;ands: and the&longs;e coming to deter
mine in the Surface of the Terre&longs;trial Globe may very well only in
&longs;en&longs;ibly alter that Parabolick Figure, which we grant would be
extreamly transformed in going to determine in the Center. In
the next place as to the perturbation proceeding from the Impedi
ment of the
its &longs;o great multiplicity of Varieties, incapable of being brought
under any certain Rules, and reduced to a Science: for if we
&longs;hould propo&longs;e to con&longs;ideration no more but the Impediment which
the Air procureth to the Motions con&longs;idered by us, this alone &longs;hall
be found to di&longs;turb all, and that infinite waies, according as we
infinite waies vary the Figures, Gravities, and Velocities of the
Moveables. For as to the Velocity, according as this &longs;hall be grea
ter, the greater &longs;hall the oppo&longs;ition be that the Air makes again&longs;t
them, which &longs;hall yet more impede the &longs;aid Moveable according as
they are le&longs;s Grave: &longs;o that although the de&longs;cending Grave Body
ought to go Accelerating in a duplicate proportion to the Duration
of its Motion, yet neverthele&longs;s, albeit the Moveable were very
Grave, in coming from very great heights, the Impediment of the
Air &longs;hall be &longs;o great, as that it will take from it all power of far
ther encrea&longs;ing its Velocity, and will reduce it to an Uniform and
Equable Motion: And this Adequation &longs;hall be &longs;o much the &longs;ooner
obtained, and in &longs;o much le&longs;&longs;er heights, by how much the Moveable That Motion al&longs;o which along the Horizontal
Plane, all other Ob&longs;tacles being removed, ought to be Equable
and perpetual, &longs;hall come to be altered, and in the end arre&longs;ted by
the Impediment of the Air: and here likewi&longs;e &longs;o much the &longs;ooner,
by how much the Moveable &longs;hall be Lighter. Of which Accidents
of Gravity, of Velocity, and al&longs;o of Figure, as being varied &longs;eve
ral waies, there can no fixed Science be given. And therefore that
we may be able Scientifically to treat of this Matter it is requi&longs;ite
that we ab&longs;tract from them; and, having found and demon&longs;trated
the Conclu&longs;ions ab&longs;tracted from the Impediments, that we make
u&longs;e of them in practice with tho&longs;e Limitations that Experience &longs;hall
from time to time &longs;hew us. And yet neverthele&longs;s the benefit &longs;hall
not be &longs;mall, becau&longs;e &longs;uch Matters, and their Figures &longs;hall be made
choice of as are le&longs;s &longs;ubject to the Impediments of the
&longs;uch are the very Grave, the Rotund: and the Spaces, and the
Velocities for the mo&longs;t part will not be &longs;o great, but that their ex
orbitances may with ea&longs;ie ^{*} Allowance be reduced to a certainty.
Yea more, in Projects practicable by us, that are of Grave Matters,
and of Round Figure, and al&longs;o that are of Matters le&longs;&longs;e Grave,
and of Cylindrical Figure, as Arrows, &longs;hot from Slings or Bows,
the variation of their Motion from the exact Parabolical Figure
&longs;hall be altogether in&longs;en&longs;ible. Nay, (and I will a&longs;&longs;ume to my &longs;elf
a little more freedom) that in ^{*} In&longs;truments that are practicable by
us, their &longs;malne&longs;s rendreth the extern and accidental Impediments,
of which that of the
very &longs;mall note, I am able by two experiments to make manife&longs;t. I will con&longs;ider the Motions made thorow the Air, for &longs;uch are tho&longs;e
chiefly of which we &longs;peak: again&longs;t which the &longs;aid Air in two man
ners exerci&longs;eth its power. The one is by more impeding the Movea
bles le&longs;s Grave, than tho&longs;e very Grave. The other is in more oppo
&longs;ing the greater than the le&longs;s Velocity of the &longs;ame Moveable. As
to the fir&longs;t; Experience &longs;hewing us that two Balls of equal
bigne&longs;s, but in weight one ten or twelve times more Grave than the
other, as, for example, one of Lead and another of Oak would
be, de&longs;cending from an height of 150, or 200 Yards, arrive to the
Earth with Velocity very little different, it a&longs;&longs;ureth us that the Im
pediment or Retardment of the Air in both is very &longs;mall: for if
the
that of Wood, were but little retarded, and this much, the Lead at
its coming to the ground &longs;hould leave the Wood a very con&longs;idera
ble Space behind, &longs;ince it is ten times more Grave; which never
thele&longs;s doth not happen: nay, its Anticipation &longs;hall not be &longs;o
much as the hundredth part of the whole height. And between a
half &longs;o much as it, the difference of the Times of their coming to Now becau&longs;e the
tus
Yards (which is &longs;o much that continuing it in an Equable Moti
on it would in a like Time run 400 Yards) is very con&longs;iderable in
compari&longs;on of the Velocity that we confer with
chines, upon our Projects (excepting the
on the Fire) we may without any notable Errour conclude and
account the Propo&longs;itions to be ab&longs;olutely true that are demon&longs;tra
ted without any regard had to the alteration of the
the next place as touching the other part, that is to &longs;hew, that the
Impediment that the &longs;aid Moveable receiveth from the Air whil&longs;t
it moveth with great Velocity is not much greater than that which
oppo&longs;eth it in moving &longs;lowly, the en&longs;uing Experiment giveth us
full a&longs;&longs;urance of it. Su&longs;pend by two threads both of the &longs;ame
length, gr.
having fa&longs;tned the &longs;aid threads on high, let both the
moved from the &longs;tate of Perpendicularity; but let the one be re
moved 80. or more degrees, and the other not above 4 or 5: &longs;o
that one of them being left at liberty de&longs;cendeth, and pa&longs;&longs;ing be
yond the Perpendicular, de&longs;cribeth very great Arches of 160, 150,
140,
other &longs;winging freely pa&longs;&longs;eth little Arches of 10, 8, 6,
al&longs;o dimini&longs;hing them in like manner by little and little. Here I
&longs;ay, in the fir&longs;t place, that the fir&longs;t
degrees in as much Time as the other doth its 10, 8,
whence it is manife&longs;t, that the Velocity of the fir&longs;t
and 18 times greater than the Velocity of the &longs;econd: &longs;o that in
ca&longs;e the greater Velocity were to be more impeded by the Air than
the le&longs;&longs;er, the Vibrations &longs;hould be more ^{*} rare in the greate&longs;t
Arches of 180, or 160 degrees,
and al&longs;o of 2, and of 1; but this is contradicted by Experience:
for if two A&longs;&longs;i&longs;tants &longs;hall &longs;et them&longs;elves to count the Vibrations,
one the greate&longs;t, the other the lea&longs;t, they will find that they &longs;hall
number not only tens, but hundreds al&longs;o, without di&longs;agreeing one
&longs;ingle Vibration, yea, or one &longs;ole point. And this ob&longs;ervati
on joyntly a&longs;&longs;ureth us of the two Propo&longs;itions, namely, that the
greate&longs;t and lea&longs;t Vibrations are all made one after another under
equal Times, and that the Impediment and Retardment of the Air
operates no more in the &longs;wifte&longs;t Motion, than in the &longs;lowe&longs;t:
contrary to that which before it &longs;eemed that we our &longs;elves al&longs;o
would have judged for company.
SAGR. Rather, becau&longs;e it cannot be denied but that the Air
impedeth both tho&longs;e and the&longs;e, &longs;ince they both continually grow
more languid, and at la&longs;t cea&longs;e, it is requi&longs;ite to &longs;ay that tho&longs;e Re
tardations are made with the &longs;ame proportion in the one and in the And then, the being to make greater Re&longs;i&longs;tance
at one time than at another, from what other doth it proceed, but
only from its being a&longs;&longs;ailed at one time with a greater
Velocity, and at another time with le&longs;&longs;er? And if this be &longs;o then the
&longs;ame quantity of the Velocity of the Moveable is at once the Cau&longs;e
and the Mealure of the quantity of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance. Therefore all
Motions, whether they be &longs;low or &longs;wift, are retarded and impe
ded in the &longs;ame proportion: a Notion in my judgment not con
temptible.
SALV.
We may al&longs;o in this &longs;econd ca&longs;e conclude, That the
Fallacies in the Conclu&longs;ions, which are demon&longs;trated, ab&longs;tracting
from the extern Accidents, are in our In&longs;truments of very &longs;mall
con&longs;ideration, in re&longs;pect of the Motions of great Velocities of
which for the mo&longs;t part we &longs;peak, and of the Di&longs;tances which are
but very &longs;mall in relation to the Semidiameter and great Circles of
the Terre&longs;trial Globe.
SIMP.
I would gladly hear the rea&longs;on why you &longs;eque&longs;trate
the Projects from the
the force of the Powder, from the other Projects made by Slings,
Bows, or Cro&longs;s-bows, touching their not being in the &longs;ame manner
&longs;ubject to the Acceleration and Impediment of the Air.
SALV.
I am induced thereto by the exce&longs;&longs;ive, and, as I may &longs;ay,
Supernatural Fury or Impetuou&longs;ne&longs;s with which tho&longs;e Projects are
driven out: For indeed I think that the Velocity with which a
let is &longs;hot out of a Musket or Piece of Ordinance may without any
Hyperbole be called Supernatural. For one of tho&longs;e
&longs;cending naturally thorow the Air from &longs;ome immen&longs;e height, its
Velocity, by rea&longs;on of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Air will not go in
crea&longs;ing perpetually: but that which in Cadent
Gravity is &longs;een to happen in no very great ^{*} Space, I mean their
being reduced in the end to an Equable Motion, &longs;hall al&longs;o happen
after a De&longs;cent of thou&longs;ands of yards, in a
and this determinate and ultimate Velocity may be &longs;aid to be the
greate&longs;t that &longs;uch a
which Velocity I account to be much le&longs;&longs;er than that which cometh
to be impre&longs;&longs;ed on the &longs;ame And of this
a very appo&longs;ite Experiment may adverti&longs;e us. At an height of an
hundred or more yards let off a Musket charged with a Leaden
with the &longs;ame Musket &longs;hoot again&longs;t &longs;uch another Stone at the Di
&longs;tance of a yard or two, and then &longs;ee which of the two
more flatted: for if that coming from on high be le&longs;s ^{*} dented than
the other, it &longs;hall be a &longs;ign that the Air hath impeded it, and dimi
ni&longs;hed the Velocity conferred upon it by the Fire in the beginning
of the Motion: and that, con&longs;equently, &longs;o great a Velocity the Air
for in ca&longs;e the Velocity impre&longs;&longs;ed upon it by the Fire &longs;hould not
exceed that which it might acquire of its &longs;elf de&longs;cending naturally,
the battery downwards ought rather to be more valid than le&longs;s. I have not made &longs;uch an Experiment, but incline to think that a
Musket or Cannon Bullet falling from never &longs;o great an height,
will not make that percu&longs;&longs;ion which it maketh in a Wall at a Di
&longs;tance of a few yards, that is of &longs;o few that the &longs;hort perforation,
or, if you will, Sci&longs;&longs;ure to be made in the Air &longs;ufficeth not to ob
viate the exce&longs;s of the &longs;upernatural impetuo&longs;ity impre&longs;&longs;ed on it by
the Fire. This exce&longs;&longs;ive
cau&longs;e &longs;ome deformity in the Line of the Projection; making
the beginning of the Parabola le&longs;s inclined or curved than the end.
practical Operations: among&longs;t the which the principal is the com
po&longs;ition of a Table for the Ranges, or Flights, which containeth
the di&longs;tances of the Falls of And becau&longs;e the&longs;e kinds of Projections are made with Mortar
Pieces, and with no great charge; in the&longs;e the
&longs;upernatural, the Ranges de&longs;cribe their Lines very exactly.
where the Author de&longs;ireth to lead us to the Contemplation and
Inve&longs;tigation of the
with a Motion compounded of two. And fir&longs;t of that compoun
ded of two Equable Motions; the one Horizontal, and the other
Perpendicular.
THEOR. II. PROP. II.
If any Moveable be moved with a twofold Equa
ble Motion, that is, Horizontal and Perpen
dicular, the
compounded of both the Motions &longs;hall be
tentia
Motions.
and let the Mutations of the Perpendicular an&longs;wer to the Space
A B, and let B C an&longs;wer to the Horizontal Lation pa&longs;&longs;ed in
the &longs;ame Time. Fora&longs;much therefore as the Spa-
tion in the &longs;ame Time, their Moments &longs;hall be to
cach other as the &longs;aid A B and B C. But the
Moveable which is moved according to the&longs;e two Mutations &longs;hall de-But A C is
potentia
pounded of both the Moments A B and B C, is
both taken together: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.
SIMP.
It is nece&longs;&longs;ary that you ea&longs;e me of one Scruple that
cometh into my mind, it &longs;eemeth to me that this which is now con
cluded oppugneth another Propo&longs;ition of the former Tractate: in
which it is affirmed, That the
from A into B is equal to that coming from A into C; and now it is
concluded, that the
SALV.
The Propo&longs;itions,
different from one another. Here the Author &longs;peaks of one &longs;ole
Moveable moved with one &longs;ole Motion, but compounded of two,
both Equable; and there he &longs;peaks of two Moveables moved
with Motions Naturally Accelerated, one along the Perpendicular
A B, and the other along the Inclined Plane A C: and moreover,
the Times there are not &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal, but the Time along
the Inclined Plane A C is greater than the Time along the Perpen
dicular A B: but in the Motion &longs;poken of at pre&longs;ent, the Motions
along A B, B C and A C are under&longs;tood to be Equable, and made
in the &longs;ame Time.
SIMP.
Excu&longs;e me, and go on, for I am &longs;atisfied.
SALV.
The Author proceeds to &longs;hew us that which hapneth
concerning the
one Motion compounded of two, that is to &longs;ay, the one Horizon
tal and Equable, and the other Perpendicular but Naturally-Acce
lerate, of which in fine the Motion of the Project is compounded,
and by which the Parabolick Line is de&longs;cribed; in each point of
which the Author endeavours to determine what the
Project is; for under&longs;tanding of which he &longs;heweth us the manner,
or, if you will, Method of regulating and mea&longs;uring that &longs;ame
petus
Moveable de&longs;cending with a Natural-Accelerate Motion departing
from Re&longs;t is made, &longs;aying:
THEOR. III. PROP. III.
take in &longs;ome point C; and &longs;uppo&longs;e the &longs;aid A C to be the Time or
Mea&longs;ure of the Time of the &longs;aid Fall along the Space A C, as al&longs;o
the Mea&longs;ure of the
the De&longs;cent along A C. Now let there be taken in the &longs;aid Line
A B any other Point, as &longs;uppo&longs;e B, in which we are to determine of the
Impetus
A C, Let A S be a Mean-proportional betwixt B A and A C. We will
demon&longs;trate that the
A C. Let the Horizontal Line C D be double to the &longs;aid A C; and B E
double to B A. It appeareth by what hath been demon&longs;trated, That the
Cadent along A C being turned along the Horizon C D, and according
to the
Space C D in a Time equal to that
in which the &longs;aid A C is pa&longs;&longs;ed
likewi&longs;e that B E is pa&longs;&longs;ed in the
&longs;ame time as A B: But the Time of
the De&longs;cent along A B is A S: There
fore the Horizontal Line B E is
pa&longs;&longs;ed in A S. As the Time S A is
to the Time A C, &longs;o let E B be to
B L. And becau&longs;e the Motion by
B E is Equable, the Space B L &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the Time A C ac
cording to the Moment of Celerity in B: But in the &longs;ame Time A C
the Space C D is pa&longs;&longs;ed, according to the Moment of Velocity in C:
the Moments of Velocity therefore are to one another as the Spaces
which according to the &longs;ame Moments are pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame Time:
Therefore the Moment of Velocity in C is to the Moment of Celerity in
B, as D C is to B L. And becau&longs;e as D C is to B E, &longs;o are their halfs,
to wit, C A to A B: but as E B is to B L, &longs;o is B A to A S: Therefore,
exæquali,
of Velocity in C is to the Moment of Velocity in B, &longs;o is C A to A S; that
is, the Time along C A to the Time along A B. I he manner of Mea&longs;u
ring the
makes a Motion of De&longs;cent is therefore manife&longs;t; which
Time.
regard we are to &longs;peak for the future of the Motion compounded of the
Equable Horizontal, and of the Naturally Accelerate downwards, (for
from this Mixtion re&longs;ults, and by it is de&longs;igned the Line of the Project,
that is a Parabola;) it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that we define &longs;ome common mea&longs;ure
according to which we may mea&longs;ure the Velocity,
of both the Motions. And &longs;eeing that of the Equable Motion the de
grees of Velocity are innumerable, of which you may not take any
promi&longs;cuou&longs;ly, but one certain one which may be be compared and con
joyned with the Degree of Velocity naturally Accelerate. I can think of
no more ea&longs;ie way for the electing and determining of that, than by a&longs;
&longs;uming another of the &longs;ame kind. And that I may the better expre&longs;s
my meaning; Let A C be Perpendicular to the Horizon C B; and A C
which is de&longs;cribed by the Compo&longs;ition of two Lations; of which one is
that of the Moveable de&longs;cending along A C with a Motion Naturally
Acceler ate
on according to the Horizontal Line A D. The
along the De&longs;cent A C is determined by the quantity of the &longs;aid height
A C; for the
one and the &longs;ame: but in the Horizontal
Line one may a&longs;&longs;ign not one, but innume
rable Degrees of Velocities of Equable
Motions: out of which multitude that I
may &longs;ingle out, and as it were point with
the finger to that which I make choice of,
I extend or prolong the Altitude C A
&longs;ublimi,
will pitch upon A E; from which if I
conceive in my mind a Moveable to fall
ex quiete
petus
Moveable being turned along A D to be moved; and its degree of
Vclocity to be that, which in the Time of the De&longs;cent along E A pa&longs;&longs;eth
a Space in the Horizon double to the &longs;aid E A. This Præmonition I
judged nece&longs;&longs;ary.
parabola A B &longs;hall be called by me the Horizontal Line
termined, I call the Sublimity, or height.
tion.
SAGR. Stay, I pray you, for here me thinks it is convenient to
adorn this Opinion of our Author with the conformity of it to
the Conceit of
ties of the Equable Motions of the Revolutions of the Cœle&longs;tial
Bodies; who, having perhaps had a conjecture that no Moveable
could pa&longs;&longs;e from Re&longs;t into any determinate degree of Velocity in
which it ought afterwards to be perpetuated, unle&longs;s by pa&longs;&longs;ing
thorow all the other le&longs;&longs;er degrees of Velocity, or, if you will,
greater degrees of Tardity, which interpo&longs;e between the a&longs;&longs;igned
degree, and the highe&longs;t degree of Tardity, that is of Re&longs;t, &longs;aid that
God after he had created the Moveable Cœle&longs;tial
might a&longs;&longs;ign them tho&longs;e Velocities wherewith they were afterwards
them, they departing from Re&longs;t, to move along determinate Spaces
with that Natural Motion in a Right Line, according to which we
&longs;en&longs;ibly &longs;ee our Moveables to move from the &longs;tate of Re&longs;t &longs;ucce&longs;
&longs;ively Accelerating. And he addeth, that having made them to
acquire that degree in which it plea&longs;ed him that they &longs;hould after
wards be perpetually con&longs;erved, he converted their Right or direct
Motion into Circular; which only is apt to con&longs;erve it &longs;elf Equa
ble, alwaies revolving without receding from, or approaching to
any prefixed term by them de&longs;ired. The Conceit is truly worthy
of
of pa&longs;&longs;ed over in &longs;ilence by him, and di&longs;covered by our Author by
taking off the Mask or Poetick Repre&longs;entation, do &longs;hew it to be
in its native a&longs;pect a true Hi&longs;tory. And I think it very credible that
we having by the Doctrine of A&longs;tronomy &longs;ufficiently competent
Knowledge of the Magnitudes of the Orbes of the Planets, and of
their Di&longs;tances from the Center about which they move, as al&longs;o
of their Velocities, our Author (to whom
not unknown) may &longs;ometime for his curio&longs;ity have had &longs;ome
thought of attempting to inve&longs;tigate whether one might a&longs;&longs;ign a
determinate Sublimity from which the
ting, as from a &longs;tate of Re&longs;t, and moved for certain Spaces with a
Right and Naturally Accelerate Motion, afterwards converting
the Acquired Velocity into Equable Motions, they might be found
to corre&longs;pond with the greatne&longs;s of their Orbes, and with the Times
of their Revolutions.
I think I do remember that he hath heretofore told me,
that he had once made the Computation, and al&longs;o that he found
it exactly to an&longs;wer the Ob&longs;ervations; but that he had no mind to
&longs;peak of them, doubting le&longs;t the two many Novelties by him di&longs;
covered, which had provoked the di&longs;plea&longs;ure of many again&longs;t him,
might blow up new &longs;parks.
&longs;ire he may of him&longs;elf by the Doctrine of the pre&longs;ent Tract give
him&longs;elf content.
&longs;hew;
PROBL. I. PROP. IV.
How in a Parabola given, de&longs;cribed by the Pro
ject, the
determined.
titude D B, with which continued out on high the Tangent of the
Parabola C A meeteth in A; and along theAnd if the Amplitude C D
be equal to the whole Altitude D A, B I &longs;hall be equal to B A and B D. And if the Time of the Fall along A B, and the Moment of Velocity
acquired in B along the De&longs;cent A B
mea&longs;ured by the &longs;aid A B, then D C (that is twice B I) &longs;hall be the
Space which &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed by the
zontal Line in the &longs;ame Time: But in the &longs;ame Time falling along B D
out of Re&longs;t in B, it &longs;hall pa&longs;s the Altitude B D: Therefore the Movea
ble falling out of Re&longs;t in A along A B,
being converted with the
pa&longs;s a Space equal to D C. And the
Fall along B D &longs;upervening, it pa&longs;&longs;eth
the Altitude B D, and de&longs;cribes the
Parabola B C; who&longs;e
Term C is compounded of the Equable
Tran&longs;ver&longs;al who&longs;e Moment is as A B,
and of another Moment acquired in the
Fall B D in the Term D or C; which
Moments are Equal. If therefore we
&longs;uppo&longs;e A B to be the Mea&longs;ure of one of them, as &longs;uppo&longs;e of the Equa
ble Tran&longs;ver&longs;al; and B I, which is equal to B D, to be the Mea&longs;ure of
the
quantity of the Moment compound of them both: Therefore it &longs;hall be
the quantity or Mea&longs;ure of the whole Moment which the Project de&longs;cend
ing along the Parabola B C &longs;hall acquire ofThis pre
mi&longs;ed, take in the Parabola any point E, in which we are to determine
of theDraw the Horizontal Parallel E F,
and let B G be a Mean-proportional between B D and B F. And fora&longs;
much as A B or B D is &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be the Mea&longs;ure of the Time, and of
the Moment of the Velocity in the Fall B D
be the Time, or the Mea&longs;ure of the Time, and of the
out of B. If therefore B O be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to B G, the Diagonal
drawn from A to O &longs;hall be the quantity of the
A B hath been &longs;uppo&longs;ed the determinator of the Time, and of the
tus
continue the &longs;ame: And B O determineth the
along the De&longs;cent
A B and B O areTherefore that is
manife&longs;t which was &longs;ought.
SAGR.
The Contemplation of the Compo&longs;ition of the&longs;e diffe
rent
from this mixture, is &longs;o new to me, that it leaveth my mind in no
&longs;mall confu&longs;ion. I do not &longs;peak of the mixtion of two Motions
Horizontal Line, and the other along the Perpendicular, for I very
well comprehend that there is made a Motion of the&longs;e two
tia
ari&longs;eth upon the mixing of the Equable-Horizontal and Perpendi
cular-Naturally-Accelerate Motion. Therefore I could wi&longs;h we
might toge ther a little better con&longs;ider this bu&longs;ine&longs;s.
SIMP.
And I &longs;tand the more in need thereof in that I am not
yet &longs;o well &longs;atisfied in Mind as I &longs;hould be, in the Propo&longs;itions that
are the fir&longs;t foundations of the others that follow upon them. I
will add, that al&longs;o in the Mixtion of the two Motions Equable
Horizontal, and Perpendicular, I would better under&longs;tand that Now,
want and de&longs;ire.
SALV.
Your de&longs;ire is very rea&longs;onable: and I will e&longs;&longs;ay whe
ther my having had a longer time to think thereon may facilitate
your &longs;atisfaction. But you mu&longs;t bear with and excu&longs;e me if in di&longs;
cour&longs;ing I &longs;hall repeat a great part of the things hitherto delivered
by our Author.
It is not po&longs;&longs;ible for us to &longs;peak po&longs;itively touching Motions and
their Velocities or
Accelerate, unle&longs;s we fir&longs;t agree upon the Mea&longs;ure that we are to
u&longs;e in the commen&longs;uration of tho&longs;e Velocities, as al&longs;o of the Time. As to the Mea&longs;ure of the Time, we have already that which is
commonly received by all of Hours, Prime-Minutes, and Se
conds,
mon Mea&longs;ure received by all, &longs;o it is requi&longs;ite to a&longs;&longs;ign another
Mea&longs;ure for the Velocities that is commonly under&longs;tood and re
ceived by every one; that is, which every where is the &longs;ame. The
Author, as hath been declared, adjudged the Velocity of Naturally
de&longs;cending Grave-Bodies to be fit for this purpo&longs;e; the encrea&longs;ing
Velocities of which are the &longs;ame in all parts of the World. So that
that &longs;ame degree of Velocity which (for example) a Ball of Lead of
a pound acquireth in having, departing from Re&longs;t, de&longs;cended Per
pendicularly as much as the height of a Pike, is alwaies, and in all
places the &longs;ame, and therefore mo&longs;t commodious for explicating
the quantity of the
&longs;cent. Now it remains to find a way to determine likewi&longs;e the
Quantity of the
that all tho&longs;e which di&longs;cour&longs;e about it may form the &longs;ame conceit
of its greatne&longs;s and Velocity; &longs;o that one may not imagine it more
&longs;wift, and another le&longs;s; whereupon afterwards in conjoyning and
mingling this Equable Motion imagined by them with the e&longs;tabli
&longs;hed Accelerate Motion &longs;everal men may form &longs;everal Conceits of
&longs;everal greatne&longs;&longs;es of
way more commodious, than the making u&longs;e of the
the Moveable from time to time acquires in the Naturally-Accele
rate Motion, any acquired Moment of which being reduced into
an Equable Motion retaineth its Velocity preci&longs;ely limited, and
&longs;uch, that in &longs;uch another Time as that wherein it did De&longs;cend, it
pa&longs;&longs;eth double the Space of the Height from whence it fell. But
becau&longs;e this is the principal point in the bu&longs;ine&longs;s that we are upon,
it is good to make it to be perfectly under&longs;tood by &longs;ome particular
Example. Rea&longs;&longs;uming therefore the Velocity and
red by the Cadent Moveable, as we &longs;aid before, from the height
of a Pike, of which Velocity we will make u&longs;e for a Mea&longs;ure of
other Velocities and
&longs;ing, for example, that the Time of that Fall be four &longs;econd Mi
nutes of an hour, to find by this &longs;ame Mea&longs;ure how great the
petus
greater, or le&longs;&longs;er, we ought not from the proportion that this other
height hath to the height of a Pike to argue and conclude the quan
tity of the
example, that the Moveable falling from quadruple the height
hath acquired quadruple Velocity, for that it is fal&longs;e: for that the
Velocity of the Naturally-Accelerate Motion doth not increa&longs;e or
decrea&longs;e according to the proportion of the Spaces, but according
to that of the Times, than which that of the Spaces is greater in a
duplicate proportion, as was heretofore demon&longs;trated. Therefore
when in a Right Line we have a&longs;&longs;igned a part for the Mea&longs;ure of
the Velocity, and al&longs;o of the Time, and of the Space in that Time
pa&longs;&longs;ed (for that for brevity &longs;ake all the&longs;e three Magnitudes are
often repre&longs;ented by one &longs;ole Line,) to find the quantity of the
Time, and the degree of Velocity that the &longs;ame Moveable would
have acquired in another Di&longs;tance we &longs;hall obtain the &longs;ame, not
immediataly by this &longs;econd Di&longs;tance, but by the Line which &longs;hall
be a Mean-proportional betwixt the two Di&longs;tances. But I will
better declare my &longs;elf by an Example. In the Line A C Perpendi
cular to the Horizon let the part A B be under&longs;tood to
be a Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by a Moveable naturally de&longs;cending
with an Accelerate Motion: the Time of which pa&longs;
&longs;age, in regard I may repre&longs;ent it by any Line, I will, for
brevity, imagine it to be as much as the &longs;ame Line A B
and likewi&longs;e for a Mea&longs;ure of the
acquired by that Motion, I again take the &longs;ame Line
A B; &longs;o that of all the Spaces that are in the progre&longs;s of
the Di&longs;cour&longs;e to be con&longs;idered the part A B may be the
Mea&longs;ure. Having all our plea&longs;ure e&longs;tabli&longs;hed under one
&longs;ole Magnitude A B the&longs;e three Mea&longs;ures of different kinds of
it be required to determine in the a&longs;&longs;igned Space, and at the height
A C, how much the Time of the Fall of the Moveable from A to
C is to be, and what the
acquired in the &longs;aid Term C, in relation to the Time and to the Both the&longs;e que&longs;tions &longs;hall be re&longs;olved
taking A D the Mean-proportional betwixt the two Lines A C
and A B; affirming the Time of the Fall along the whole Space
A C to be as the Time A D is in relation to A B, a&longs;&longs;igned in the
beginning for the Quantity of the Time in the Fall A B. And like
wi&longs;e we will &longs;ay that the
Cadent Moveable &longs;hall obtain in the Term C, in relation to the
A B, being that the Velocity encrea&longs;eth with the &longs;ame proportion
as the Time doth: Which Conclu&longs;ion although it was a&longs;&longs;umed as
a
on thereof above in the third Propo&longs;ition.
This point being well under&longs;tood and proved, we come to the
Con&longs;ideration of the
ons: whereof let one be compounded of the Horizontal and alwaies
Equable, and of the Perpendicular unto the Horizon, and it al&longs;o
Equable: but let the other be compounded of the Horizontal like
wi&longs;e alwaies Equable, and of the Perpendicular Naturally-Accele
rate. If both &longs;hall be Equable, it hath been &longs;een already that the
both, as for more plainne&longs;s we will thus Exemplifie. Let the Move
able de&longs;cending along the Perpendicular A B be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to have,
for example, three degrees of Equable
ported along A B towards C, let the &longs;aid Velocity and
&longs;uppo&longs;ed four degrees, &longs;o that in the &longs;ame Time that falling it would
pa&longs;s along the Perpendicular, gr.
it would in the Horizontal pa&longs;s four, but in
that compounded of both the Velocities it
cometh in the &longs;ame Timefrom the point A un
to the Term C, de&longs;cending all the way along the Diagonal Line
A C, which is not &longs;even yards long, as that &longs;hould be which is com
pounded of the two Lines A B, 3, and B C, 4, but is 5; which 5 is
Squares of 3 and 4, which are 9 and 16, and joyning the&longs;e together,
they make 25 for the Square of A C, which is equal to the two
Squares of A B and B C: whereupon A C &longs;hall be as much as is the
Side, or, if you will, Root of the Square 25, which is 5. For a con&longs;tant
and certain Rule therefore, when it is required to a&longs;&longs;ign the
Quantity of the
one Horizontal, and the other Perpendicular, and both Equable,
together the Root of the Aggregate is to be extracted, which &longs;hall
give us the quantity of the And thus in the foregoing example, that Moveable that by vertue
of the Perpendicular Motion would have percu&longs;&longs;ed upon the Hori
zon with three degrees of Force, and with only the Horizontal Mo
tion would have percu&longs;&longs;ed in C with four degrees, percu&longs;&longs;ing with
both the
Percutient moved with five degrees of Velocity and Force. And
this &longs;ame Percu&longs;&longs;ion would be of the &longs;ame Impetuo&longs;ity in all the
points of the Diagonal A C, for that the compounded
are alwaies the &longs;ame, never encrea&longs;ing or dimini&longs;hing.
Let us now &longs;ee what befalls in compounding the Equable Hori
zontal Motion with another Perpendicular to the Horizon which
beginning from Re&longs;t goeth Naturally Accelerating. It is already
manife&longs;t, that the Diagonal, which is the Line of the Motion com
pounded of the&longs;e two, is not a Right Line, but Semiparabolical,
as hath been demon&longs;trated; ^{*} in which the
tinually encrea&longs;ing by means of the continual encrea&longs;e of the Ve
locity of the Perpendicular Motion: Wherefore, to determine what
the
is requi&longs;ite fir&longs;t to a&longs;&longs;ign the Quantity of the Uniform Horizontal
ble in the point a&longs;&longs;igned: the which cannot be determined without
the con&longs;ideration of the Time &longs;pent from the beginning of the
Compo&longs;ition of the two Motions: which Con&longs;ideration of the
Time is not required in the Compo&longs;ition of Equable Motions, the
Velocities and
where there is in&longs;erted into the mixture a Motion which beginning
from extream Tardity goeth encrea&longs;ing in Velocity according to
the continuation of the Time, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that the quantity of
the Time do &longs;hew us the quantity of the degree of Velocity in the
a&longs;&longs;igned point: for, as to the re&longs;t, the
two (as in Uniform Motions) is
compounding. But here again I will better explain my meaning by
an example. In A C the Perpendicular to the Horizon let any part
be taken A B; the which I will &longs;uppo&longs;e to &longs;tand for the Mea&longs;ure
of the Space of the Natural Motion made along the &longs;aid Perpen
dicular, and likewi&longs;e let it be the Mea&longs;ure of the Time, and al&longs;o of
the degree of Velocity, or, if you will, of the
nife&longs;t in the fir&longs;t place, that if the
an Equable Motion, the quantity of its Velocity &longs;hall be &longs;uch that
in the Time A B it &longs;hall pa&longs;s a Space double to the Space A B, which
let be the Line B D. Then let B C be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to B A, and
B and E we &longs;hall de&longs;cribe the Parabolick Line B E I. And becau&longs;e
that in the Time A B with the
or C E is pa&longs;&longs;ed, double to A B, and in &longs;uch another Time the Per
pendicular B C is pa&longs;&longs;ed with an acqui&longs;t of
the &longs;aid Horizontal Line; therefore the Moveable in &longs;uch another
Time as A B &longs;hall be found to have pa&longs;&longs;ed from B to E along the
Parabola B E with an
the And becau&longs;e one of them is Horizontal, and the
other Perpendicular, the
in Power to them both, that is
double to one of them. So that
&longs;uppo&longs;ing B F equal to B A, and
drawing the Diagonal A F, the
&longs;hall be greater than the Percu&longs;
&longs;ion in B of the Moveable fal
ling from the Height A, or than
the Percu&longs;&longs;ion of the Horizon
tal
to the proportion of A F to
A B. But in ca&longs;e, &longs;till retaining
B A for the Mea&longs;ure of the
Space of the Fall from Re&longs;t in
A unto B, and for the Mea&longs;ure of the Time and of the
the falling Moveable acquired in B, the Altitude B O &longs;hould not be
equal to, but greater than A B, taking B G to be a Mean-propor
tional betwixt the &longs;aid A B and B O, the &longs;aid B G would be the
Mea&longs;ure of the Time and of the
Fall from the height B O; and the Space along the Horizontal
Line, which being pa&longs;&longs;ed with the
would be double to A B, &longs;hall, in the whole duration of the Time
B G, be &longs;o much the greater, by how much in proportion B G is
greater than B A. Suppo&longs;ing therefore L B equal to B G, and draw
ing the Diagonal A L, it &longs;hall give us the quantity compounded of
the two
Parabola is de&longs;cribed; and of which the Horizontal and Equable is
that acquired in B by the fall of A B, and the other is that acquired
in O, or, if you will, in I by the De&longs;cent B O, who&longs;e Time, as al&longs;o
the quantity of its Moment was B G. And in this Method we &longs;hall
inve&longs;tigate the
its Altitude were le&longs;&longs;er than the Sublimity A B, taking the Mean
proportional betwixt them both: which being &longs;et off upon the Ho
rizontal Line in the place of B F, and the Diagonal drawn, as A F,
we &longs;hall hereby have the quantity of the
term of the Parabola.
which.
And to what hath hitherto been propo&longs;ed touching
Blows, or if you plea&longs;e, Percu&longs;&longs;ions of &longs;uch like Projects, it is ne
ce&longs;&longs;ary to add another very nece&longs;&longs;ary Con&longs;ideration; and this it is:
That it doth not &longs;uffice to have regard to the Velocity only of the
Project for the determining rightly of the Force and Violence of the
Percu&longs;&longs;ion, but it is requi&longs;ite likewi&longs;e to examine apart the State
and Condition of that which receiveth the Percu&longs;&longs;ion, in the effica
cy of which it hath for many re&longs;pects a great &longs;hare and intere&longs;t. And fir&longs;t there is no man but knows that the thing &longs;mitten doth &longs;o
much &longs;uffer violence from the Velocity of the Percutient by how
much it oppo&longs;eth it, and either totally or partially checketh its
Motion: For if the Blow &longs;hall light upon &longs;uch an one as yieldeth to
the Velocity of the Percutient without any Re&longs;i&longs;tance, that Blow
&longs;hall be nullified: And he that runneth to hit his Enemy with his
Launce, if at the overtaking of him it &longs;hall fall out that he moveth,
giving back with the like Velocity, he &longs;hall make no thru&longs;t, and the
Action &longs;hall be a meer touch without doing any harm.
But if the Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall happen to be received upon an Object
which doth not wholly yield to the Percutient, but only partially,
the Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall do hurt, though not with its whole
only with the exce&longs;s of the Velocity of the &longs;aid Percutient above
the Velocity of the recoile and rece&longs;&longs;ion of the Object percu&longs;&longs;ed:
&longs;o that, if g.
city upon the Percu&longs;&longs;ed Body, which giving back in part retireth
with 4 degrees, the
6 degrees. And la&longs;tly, the Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall be entire and perfect on
the part of the Percutient when the thing percu&longs;&longs;ed yieldeth not,
but wholly oppo&longs;eth and &longs;toppeth the whole Motion of the Percu
tient; if haply there can be &longs;uch a ca&longs;e. And I &longs;ay on the part of
the Percutient, for when the Body percu&longs;&longs;ed moveth with a contra
ry Motion towards the Percutient, the Blow and Shock &longs;hall be
&longs;o much the more Impetuous by how much the two Velocities uni
ted are greater than the &longs;ole Velocity of the Percutient. More
over, you are likewi&longs;e to take notice, that the more or le&longs;s yielding
may proceed not only from the quality of the Matter more or le&longs;s
hard, as if it be of Iron, of Lead, or of Wooll,
the Po&longs;ition of the Body that receiveth the Percu&longs;&longs;ion. Which Po
&longs;ition if it &longs;hall be &longs;uch as that the Motion of the Percutient hap
neth to hit it at Right-Angles, the
be the greate&longs;t: but if the Motion &longs;hall proceed obliquely, and, as
we &longs;ay, a&longs;lant, the Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall be weaker; and that more, and
more according to its greater and greater Obliquity: for an Ob
ject in that manner &longs;cituate, albeit of very &longs;olid matter, doth not
damp or arre&longs;t the whole
which &longs;lanting pa&longs;&longs;eth farther, continuing at lea&longs;t in &longs;ome part to When
therefore we have even now determined of the greatne&longs;s of the
to be under&longs;tood to be meant of the Percu&longs;&longs;ion received upon a
Line at Right Angles with the &longs;ame Parabolick Line, or with the
Line that is Tangent to the Parabola in the fore&longs;aid point: for
although that &longs;ame Motion be compounded of an Horizontal and
a Perpendicular Motion, the
upon the Horizontal Plane, or upon that erect to the Horizon, be
ing received upon them both obliquely.
SAGR.
Your &longs;peaking of the&longs;e Blows, and the&longs;e Percu&longs;&longs;ions
hath brought into my mind a Problem, or, if you will, Que&longs;tion
in the Mechanicks, the &longs;olution whereof I could never find in any
Author, nor any thing that doth dimini&longs;h my admiration, or &longs;o
much as in the lea&longs;t afford my judgment &longs;atisfaction. And my
doubt and wonder lyeth in my not being able to comprehend
whence that Immen&longs;e Force and Violence &longs;hould proceed, and on
what Principle it &longs;hould depend, which we &longs;ee to con&longs;i&longs;t in Per
cu&longs;&longs;ion, in that with the &longs;imple &longs;troke of an Hammer, that doth
not weigh above eight or ten pounds, we &longs;ee &longs;uch Re&longs;i&longs;tances to be
overcome as would not yield to the weight of a Grave Body that
without Percu&longs;&longs;ion hath an
upon it, albeit the weight of this be many hundreds of pounds
more. I would likewi&longs;e find out a way to mea&longs;ure the Force of this
Percu&longs;&longs;ion, which I do not think to be infinite, but rather hold
that it hath its Term in which it may be compared, and in the end
Regulated with other Forces of pre&longs;&longs;ing Gravities, either of Lea
vers, or of Screws, or of other Mechanick In&longs;truments, of who&longs;e
multiplication of Force I am thorowly &longs;atisfied.
SALV.
You are not alone in the admirablene&longs;s of the effect,
and the ob&longs;curity of the cau&longs;e of &longs;o &longs;tupendious an Accident. I
ruminated a long time upon it in vain, my &longs;tupifaction &longs;till encrea
&longs;ing; till in the end meeting with our
him a double &longs;atisfaction: fir&longs;t in hearing that he al&longs;o had been a
long time at the &longs;ame lo&longs;s; and next in under&longs;tanding that after he
had at times &longs;pent many thou&longs;ands of hours in &longs;tudying and con
templating thereon, he had light upon certain Notions far from
our fir&longs;t conceptions, and therefore new, and for their Novelty to
be admired. And becau&longs;e that I already &longs;ee that your Curio&longs;ity
would gladly hear tho&longs;e Conceits which are Remote from common
Conjecture, I &longs;hall not &longs;tay for your entreaty, but I give you my
word that &longs;o &longs;oon as we &longs;hall have fini&longs;hed the Reading of this
Treati&longs;e of Projects, I will &longs;et before you all tho&longs;e Fancies, or, I
might &longs;ay, Extravagancies that are yet left in my memory of the
Di&longs;cour&longs;es of the Academick. In the mean time let us pro&longs;ecute
the Propo&longs;itions of our Author.
PROBL. II. PROP. V.
In the Axis of a given Parabola prolonged to find
a &longs;ublime point out of which the Moveable
falling &longs;hall de&longs;cribe the &longs;aid Parabola.
Axis H E; in which a Sublimity is to be found, out of which the
Moveable falling, and converting the
along the Horizontal Line, de&longs;cribeth the Parabola A B. Draw the
Horizontal Line A G, which &longs;hall be Parallel to B H, and &longs;uppo&longs;ing A F
equal to A H draw the Right Line F B, which toucheth the Parabola in
B, and cutteth the Horizontal Line A G in G; and unto F A and A G
let A E be a third Proportional. I &longs;ay, that E is the &longs;ublime Point re
quired, out of which the Moveable falling
petus
taking the
Parabola A B. For if we &longs;uppo&longs;e
E A to be the Mea&longs;ure of the Time
of the Fall from E to A, and of
the
(that is a Mean-proportional be
tween E A and A F) &longs;hall be the
Time and the
from F to A, or from A to H. And
becau&longs;e the Moveable coming out of
E in the Time E A with the
rizontal Lation with an Equable Motion the double of E A; There
fore likewi&longs;e moving with the &longs;ame
pa&longs;s the double of G A, to wit, the Mean-proportional B H (for the
Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed with the &longs;ame Equable Motion are to one another as the
Times of the &longs;aid Motions:) And along the Perpendicular A H &longs;hall
be pa&longs;&longs;ed with a Motion
the Amplitude H B, and Altitude A H are pa&longs;&longs;ed by the Moveable in the
&longs;ame Time: Therefore the Parabola A B &longs;hall be de&longs;cribed by the
De&longs;cent of the Project coming from the Sublimity E: Which was re
quired.
COROLLARY.
Hence it appeareth that the half of the
Semiparabola (which is the fourth part of the Amplitude of
the whole Parabola) is a Mean-proportional betwixt its Al
titude and the Sublimity out of which the Moveable falling
de&longs;cribeth it.
PROBL. III.
The Sublimity and Altitude of a Semiparabola
being given to find its Amplitude.
which let the Altitude C B and
the Sublimity B A be given: It is
required in the Horizontal Line
D C to find the Amplitude of the
Semiparabola that is de&longs;cribed out of
the Sublimity B A with the Alti
tude B C. Take a Mean proportional
between C B and B A, to which let
C D be double, I &longs;ay, that C D is
the Amplitude required. The which
is manife&longs;t by the precedent Propo&longs;ition.
THEOR. IV. PROP. VII.
In Projects which de&longs;cribe Semiparabola's of the
&longs;ame Amplitude, there is le&longs;s
in that which de&longs;cribeth that who&longs;e Ampli
tude is double to its Altitude, than in any
other.
ble to its Altitude C B; and in its Axis extended on high let B A
be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the Altitude B C; and draw a Line from
A to D which toucheth the Semiparabola in D, and &longs;hall cut the Hori
zontal Line B E in E; and B E &longs;hall be equal to B C or to B A: It is
manife&longs;t that it is de&longs;cribed by the Project who&longs;e Equable Horizontal
Impetus
and the
a thing coming to CWhence it is manife&longs;t, that the
Impetus
Diagonal A E, that isNow let there be
another Semiparabola G D, who&longs;e Amplitude is the &longs;ame C D, and the
Altitude C G le&longs;s, or greater than the Altitude B C, and let H D touch
the &longs;ame, cutting the Horizontal Line drawn by G in the point K; and
as H G is to G K, &longs;o let K G be to G L: by what hath been demon&longs;trated
G L &longs;hall be the Altitude from which the Project falling de&longs;cribeth theLet G M be a Mean-proportional betwixt A B and
G L; G M &longs;hall be the Time, and the Moment or
Project falling from L, (for it hath been &longs;uppo&longs;ed that A B is the Mea
&longs;ure of the Time and
tional betwixt B C and C G: this G N &longs;hall be the Mea&longs;ure of the
Time and the
Impetus
from G to C. If therefore a
Line be drawn
from M to N
it &longs;hall be the
the Mea&longs;ure of
the
the Project a
long the Para
bola B D, &longs;cri
king in the
term D. Which
Impetus,
is greater than the
who&longs;e quantity was A E. For becau&longs;e G N is &longs;uppo&longs;ed the Mean-pro
portional betwixt B C and C G, and B C is equal to B E, that is to H G;
(for they are each of them &longs;ubduple to D C:) Therefore as C G is to
G N, &longs;o &longs;hall N G be to G K: and, as C G or H G is to G K, &longs;o &longs;hall the
Square N G be to the Square of G K: But as H G is to G K, &longs;o was
K G &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be to G L: Therefore as N G is to the Square G K, &longs;o
is K G to G L: But as K G is to G L, &longs;o is the Square K G unto the
Square G M, (for G M is the Mean between K G and G L:) Therefore
the three Squares N G, K G, and G M are continual proportionals: And
the two extream ones N G and G M taken together, that is the Square
M N is greater than double the Square K G, to which the Square A E
is double: Therefore the Square M N is greater than the Square A E:
and the Line M N greater than the Line A E: Which was to be de
mon&longs;trated.
CORROLLARY I.
Hence it appeareth, that on the contrary, in the Project out of D
along the Semiparabola D B, le&longs;s
along any other according to the greater or le&longs;&longs;er Elevation
of the Semiparabola B D, which is according to the Tan
gent A D, containing half a Right-Angle upon the Hori
zon.
COROLLARRY II.
And that being &longs;o, it followeth, that if Projections be made with
the &longs;ame
Elevations, that &longs;hall be the greate&longs;t Projection or Amplitude
of the Semiparabola or whole Parabola which followeth at
the Elevation of a ^{*} Semi-Right-Angle; and the re&longs;t, made
according to greater or le&longs;&longs;er Angles, &longs;hall be greater or
le&longs;&longs;er.
vation of 45 de
grees.
SAGR.
The &longs;trength of Nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;trations are full of
plea&longs;ure and wonder; and &longs;uch are only the Mathematical. I un
der&longs;tood before upon tru&longs;t from the Relations of &longs;undry Gunners,
that of all the Ranges of a Cannon, or of a Mortar-piece, the grea
te&longs;t,
the Elevation of a Semi-Right-Angle, which they call, of the Sixth
point of the Square: but the knowledge of the Cau&longs;e whence it
hapneth infinitely &longs;urpa&longs;&longs;eth the bare Notion that I received upon
their atte&longs;tation, and al&longs;o from many repeated Experiments.
SALV.
You &longs;ay very right: and the knowledge of one &longs;ingle
Effect acquired by its Cau&longs;es openeth the Intellect to under&longs;tand
and a&longs;certain our &longs;elves of other effects, without need of repairing
unto Experiments, ju&longs;t as it hapneth in the pre&longs;ent Ca&longs;e; in which
having found by demon&longs;trative Di&longs;cour&longs;e the certainty of this,
That the greate&longs;t of all Ranges is that of the Elevation of a Semi
Right-Angle, the Author demon&longs;trates unto us that which po&longs;&longs;ibly
hath not been ob&longs;erved by Experience: and that is, that of the
other Ranges tho&longs;e are equal to one another who&longs;e Elevations ex
ceed or fall &longs;hort by equal Angles of the Semi-right: &longs;o that the
Balls &longs;hot from the Horizon, one according to the Elevation of &longs;e
ven Points, and the other of 5, &longs;hall light upon the Horizon at
equal Di&longs;tances: and &longs;o the Ranges of 8 and of 4 points, of 9 and
of 3, Now hear the Demon&longs;tration of it.
THEOR. V. PROP. VIII.
The Amplitudes of Parabola's de&longs;cribed by Pro
jects expul&longs;ed with the &longs;ame
to the Elevations by Angles equidi&longs;tant above,
and beneath from the ^{*} Semi-right, are equal to
each other.
45.
rizontal Line B C and the Perpendicular C M be equal; for
&longs;o the Angle M B C &longs;hall be Semi-right; and prolonging C M
to D, let there be con&longs;tituted in B two equal Angles above and below
the Diagonal M B,It is to be demon&longs;trated
that the Amplitudes of the Parabola's de&longs;cribed by the Projects be
ing emitted
according to the Elevations of the Angles E B C and D B C, are equal. For in regard that the extern Angle B M C, is equal to the two intern
M D B and M B D, the Angle M B C &longs;hall al&longs;o be equal to them. And if
we &longs;uppo&longs;e M B E in&longs;tead of the Angle M B D,
the &longs;aid Angle M B C &longs;hall be equal to the two
the common Angle M B E, the remaining An
gle B D C &longs;hall be equal to the remaining An
gle E B C: Therefore the Triangles D C B
and B C E are alike. Let the Right Lines
D C and E C be divided in the mid&longs;t in H and
F; and draw H I and F G parallel to the Ho
rizontal Line C B; and as D H is to H I, &longs;o
let I H be to H L: the Triangle I H L &longs;hall be
like to the Triangle I H D, like to which al&longs;o is E G F. And &longs;eeing
that I H and G F are equal (to wit, halves of the &longs;ame B C:) There
fore F E, that is F C, &longs;hall be equal to H L: And, adding the common
Line F H, C H &longs;hall be equal to F L. If therefore we under&longs;tand the Se
miparabola to be de&longs;cribed along by H and B, who&longs;e Altitude &longs;hall be
H C, and Sublimity H L, its Amplitude &longs;hall be C B, which is double
to HI, that is, the Mean betwixt D H, or C H, and HL: And D B
&longs;hall be a Tangent to it, the Lines C H and H D being equal. And if,
again, we conceive the Parabola to be de&longs;cribed along by F and B from
the Sublimity FL, with the Altitude F C, betwixt which the Mean
proportional is F G, who&longs;e double is the Horizontal Line C B: C B, as
before, &longs;hall be its Amplitude; and E B a Tangent to it, &longs;ince E F and
F C are equal: But the Angles D B C and E B C
tions) &longs;hall be equidi&longs;tant from the Semi-Right Angle: Therefore the
Propo&longs;ition is demon&longs;trated.
THEOR. VI.
The Amplitudes of Parabola's, who&longs;e Altitudes
and Sublimities an&longs;wer to each other
rio,
on to the Altitude C B of the Parabola B D, as the Sublimity B A
hath to the Sublimity F E. I &longs;ay, that the Amplitude H G is equal
to the Amplitude D C. For &longs;ince the fir&longs;t G F hath the &longs;ame propor
tion to the &longs;econd C B, as the third B A hath to the fourth F E; There
fore, the Rectangle
fourth, &longs;hall be equal to
the Rectangle C B A
of the &longs;econd and
third: Therefore the
Squares that are equal
to the&longs;e Rectangles &longs;hall
be equal to one another:
But the Square of half of G H is equal to the Rectangle G F E; and
the Square of half of C D is equal to the Rectangle C B A: There
fore the&longs;e Squares, and their Sides, and the doubles of their Sides &longs;hall
be equal: But the&longs;e are the Amplitudes G H and C D: Therefore the
Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.
LEMMA
If a Right Line be cut according to any proportion, the Squares
of the Mean-proportionals between the whole and the two
parts are equal to the Square of the whole.
I &longs;ay, that the
Squares of the Mean-proportional Lines between the whole A B and
the parts A C and C B, being taken together are equal to the Square of
the whole A B. And this appeareth, a Semi-
B A, and from C a Perpendicular being ere
cted C D, and Lines being drawn from D to
A, and from D to B. For D A is the Mean
proportional betwixt A B and A C; and D B is the Mean-proporti
onal between A B and B C: And the Squares of the Lines D A and
D B taken together are equal to the Square of the whole Line A B,
the Angle A D B in the Semicircle being a Right-Angle: Therefore
the Propo&longs;ition is manifest.
THEOR. VII. PROP. X.
The
equal to the Moment of any Moveable falling
naturally along the Perpendicular to the Ho
rizon that is equal to the Line compounded of
the Sublimity and of the Altitude of the Se
miparabola.
A C, of which the Perpendicular D C is compounded. I &longs;ay, that
the
the Moveable Naturally falling from D to C. Suppo&longs;e D C it &longs;elf to be
the Mea&longs;ure of the Time and of the
portional betwixt C D and D A, to which let
proportional between D C and C A: Now C F
&longs;hall be the Mea&longs;ure of the Time and of the Mo
ment of the Moveable &longs;alling along D A out of
Re&longs;t in D; and C E &longs;hall be the Time and Mo
ment of the Moveable falling along A C, out of
Re&longs;t in A, and the Moment of the Diagonal E F
&longs;hall be that compounded of both the others,And becau&longs;e
D C is cut according to any proportion in A, and becau&longs;e C F and C E
are Mean-Proportionals between C D and the parts D A and A C; the
Squares of them taken together &longs;hall be equal to the Square of the
whole; by the Lemma aforegoing: But the Squares of them are al&longs;o
equal to the Square of E F: Therefore D F is equal al&longs;o to the Line D C:
Whence it is manife&longs;t that the Moments along D C, and along the Se
miparabola A B, are equal in C and B: Which was required.
COROLLARY.
Hence it is manife&longs;t, that of all Parabola's who&longs;e Altitudes and
Sublimities being joyned together are equal, the
al&longs;o equal.
PROBL. IV. PROP. XI.
The
ing given, to find its Altitude, and con&longs;equently
its Sublimity.
rizon A B; and let the Amplitude along the Horizontal Line be
B C. It is required to find the Altitude and Sublimity of the
Parabola who&longs;eIt is manife&longs;t,
from what hath been already demon&longs;trated, that half the Amplitude B C
will be a Mean-proportional betwixt the Altitude and the Sublimity of
the &longs;aid Semiparabola, who&longs;e
the &longs;ame with the
the whole Perpendicular A B: Wherefore B A is &longs;o to be cut that the
Rectangle contained by its parts may be equal to the Square of half of
B C, which let be B D. Hence it appeareth
to be nece&longs;&longs;ary that D B do not exceed the
the parts the greate&longs;t is when the whole
Line is cut into two equal parts. Therefore
let B A be divided into two equal parts in E. And if B D be equal to B E the work is
done; and the Altitude of the Semipara
bola &longs;hall be B E, and its Sublimity E A:
(and &longs;ee here by the way that the Amplitude
of the Parabola of a Semi-right Elevation,
as was demon&longs;trated above, is the greate&longs;t of
all tho&longs;e de&longs;cribed with the &longs;ame
which is &longs;o to be cut that the Rectangle under the parts may be equal to
the Square B D. Upon E A de&longs;cribe a Semicircle, upon which out of A
&longs;et off A F equal to B D, and draw a Line from F to E, to which cut
a part equal E G. Now the Rectangle B G A, together with the Square
E G, &longs;hall be equal to the Square E A; to which the two Squares A F
and F E are al&longs;o equal: Therefore the equal Squares G E and F E be
ing &longs;ub&longs;tracted, there remaineth the Rectangle B G A equal to the
Square A F,
betwixt B G and G A. Whence it appeareth, that of the Semipa
rabola who&longs;e Amplitude is B C, and
B G, and the Sublimity G A. And if we &longs;et off B I below equal to G A,
this &longs;hall be the Altitude, and I A the Sublimity of the Semiparabola
I C. From what hath been already demon&longs;trated we are able,
PROBL. V. PROP. XII.
To collect by Calculation of the Amplitudes of all
Semiparabola's that are de&longs;cribed by Projects
expul&longs;ed with the &longs;ame
Tables thereof.
&longs;cribed by Projects of the &longs;ame
mities together with their Altitudes do make up equal Perpendicu
lars upon the Horizon. The&longs;e Perpendiculars therefore are to be com
prehended between the &longs;ame Horizontal Parallels. Therefore let the
Horizontal Line C B be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the Perpendicular B A, and
draw the Diagonal from A to C. The Angle A C B &longs;hall be Semi
right, or 45 Degrees. And the Perpendicular B A being divided into
two equal parts in D, the Semiparabola D C &longs;hall be that which is de
&longs;cribed from the Sublimity A D together with the Altitude D B: and
its
Re&longs;t in A along the Perpendicular A B is in B. And if A G be drawn
parallel to B C, the united Altitudes and Sublimities of all other re
maining Semiparabola's who&longs;e future
now mentioned mu&longs;t be bounded by the Space between the Parallels
been but now demon&longs;trated, that the Am
plitudes of the Semiparabola's who&longs;e
Tangents are equidi&longs;tant either above or
below from the Semi right Elevation are
equal, the Calculations that we frame
for the greater Elevations will likewi&longs;e
&longs;erve for the le&longs;&longs;er. We choo&longs;e moreover
a number of ten thou&longs;and parts for the
greate&longs;t Amplitude of the Projection of
the Semiparabola made at the Elevation
of 45 degrees: &longs;o much therefore the Line
B A, and the Amplitude of the Semipa
rabola B C, are to be &longs;uppo&longs;ed. And we
make choice of the number 10000, becau&longs;e we in our Calculation u&longs;e
the Table of Tangents, in which this number agreeth with the Tangent
of 45 degrees. Now, to come to the bu&longs;ine&longs;s, let C E be drawn, contain
ing the Angle E C B greater (Acute neverthele&longs;s,) than the Angle
A C B; and let the Semiparabola be de&longs;cribed which is touched by the
Line E C, and who&longs;e Sublimity united with its Altitude is equal to
B A. In the Table of Tangents take the &longs;aid B E for the Tangent at the
Then
find a third Proportional to B F and B C, (or to the half of B C,)
which &longs;hall of nece&longs;&longs;ity be greater than F A; therefore let it be F O:
Of the Semiparabola, therefore, in&longs;cribed in the Triangle E C B, ac
cording to the Tangent C E, who&longs;e Amplitude is C B, the Altitude B F,
and the Sublimity F O is found: But the whole Line B O ri&longs;eth above
the Parallels A G and C B, whereas our work was to bound it between
them: For &longs;o both it and the Semiparabola D C &longs;hall be de&longs;cribed by
the Projects out of C expelled with the &longs;ame
are to &longs;eek another like to this, (for innumerable greater and &longs;maller,
like to one another, may be de&longs;cribed within the Angle B C E) to who&longs;e
united Sublimity and Altitude B A &longs;hall be equal. Therefore as O B is
to B A, &longs;o let the Amplitude B C be to C R: and C R &longs;hall be found,
&longs;cilicet
of the Angle B C E, who&longs;e conjoyned Sublimity and Altitude is equal
to the Space contained between the Parallels G A and C B: Which
was required. The work, therefore, &longs;hall be after this manner.
add the third Proportional of it, and half of B C, which let be F O:
Then as O B is to B A, &longs;o let B C be to another, which let be C R, to wit,
the Amplitude &longs;ought. Let us give an Example.
who&longs;e half, to wit, B F, is 5959, and the half of B C is 5000, the third
proportional of the&longs;e halves is 4195, which added to the &longs;aid B F
maketh 10154: for the &longs;aid B O. Again, as O B is to B A, that is as
10154 is to 10000, &longs;o is B E, that is 10000 (for each of them is the
Tangent of 45 degrees) to another: and that &longs;hall give us the required
Altitude R C 9848, of &longs;uch as B C (the greate&longs;t Amplitude) is
10000. To the&longs;e the Amplitudes of the whole Parabola's are double,
&longs;cilicet
the Parabola according to the Elevation of 40 degrees, &longs;ince it is equal
ly di&longs;tant from 45 degrees.
SAGR.
For the perfect under&longs;tanding of this Demon&longs;tration I
mu&longs;t be informed how true it is, that the Third Proportional to
B F and B I, is (as the Author &longs;aith) nece&longs;&longs;arily greater than
F A.
SALV.
That inference, as I conceive, may be deduced thus.
The Square of the Mean of three proportional Lines is equal to
the Rectangle of the other two: whence the Square of B I, or of
B D equal to it, ought to be equal to the Rectangle of the fir&longs;t F B
multiplied into the third to be found: which third is of nece&longs;&longs;ity to
be greater than F A, becau&longs;e the Rectangle of B F multiplied into
F A is le&longs;s than the Square B D: and the Defect is as much as the
Square of D F, as You mu&longs;t al&longs;o know, that the point F which divi
deth the Tangent E B in the middle, will many other times fall
above the point A, and once al&longs;o in the &longs;aid A: In which ca&longs;es it is
evident of it &longs;elf, that the third proportional to the half of the Tan
gent, and to B I (which giveth the Sublimity) is all above A. But
the Author hath taken a Ca&longs;e in which it was not manife&longs;t that the
&longs;aid third Proportional is alwaies greater than F A: and which
therefore being &longs;et off above the point F pa&longs;&longs;eth beyond the Paral
lel A G. Now let us proceed.
ther, &longs;hewing the Altitudes of the &longs;ame Semiparabola's of Projects of
the &longs;ame
PROBL. VI. PROP. XIII.
From the given Amplitudes of Semiparabola's in
the following Table &longs;et down, keeping the
common
them is de&longs;cribed, to compute the Altitudes of
each &longs;everal Semiparabola.
&longs;uppo&longs;ed to be alwaies the &longs;ame, let the Mea&longs;ure be O B, to wit,
the Aggregate of the Altitude and Sublimity. The &longs;aid Altitude
is required to be found and di&longs;tingui&longs;hed. Which &longs;hall then be done when
B O is &longs;o divided as that the Rectangle contained under its parts is
equal to the Square of half the Amplitude B C. Let that &longs;ame divi
&longs;ion fall in F; and let both O B and B C be cut in the mid&longs;t at D and I.
Rectangle B F O: And the Square D O is
equal to the &longs;ame Rectangle together with the
Square F D. If therefore from the Square
D O we deduct the Square B I, which is equal
to the Rectangle B F O, there &longs;hall remain
the Square F D; to who&longs;e Side D F, B D be
ing added it &longs;hall give the de&longs;ired Altitude
Altitude B F. And it is thus compounded
ex datis.
&longs;ub&longs;tract the Square B I al&longs;o known, of the remainder take the Square
Root, to which add D B known; and you &longs;hall have the Altitude &longs;ought
B F. For example.
The Altitude of the Parabola de&longs;cribed at the
Elevation of 55 degrees is to be found. The Amplitude, by the follow
ing Table is 9396, its half is 4698, the Square of that is 22071204,
the &longs;ame, to wit, 2500000, the remainder is 2928796, who&longs;e Square
Root is 1710 very near, this added to the half of B O, to wit, 5000,
gives 67101, and &longs;o much is the Altitude B F. It will not be unprofi
table, to give the Third Table, containing the Altitudes and Sublimi
ties of Semiparabola's, who&longs;e Amplitude &longs;hall be alwaies the &longs;ame.
SAGR.
This I would very gladly &longs;ee &longs;ince by it I may come to
know the Difference of the
required for carrying the Project to the &longs;ame Di&longs;tance with Ranges
which are called at Random: which Difference I believe is very
great according to the different Elevations [
if, for example, one would at the Elevation of 3 or 4 degrees, or of
87 or 88 make the Ball to fall where it did, being &longs;hot at the Ele
vation of
required) I believe that it would require a very much greater
Force.
SALV.
You are in the right: and you will find that to do the
full execution in all the Elevations it is requi&longs;ite to make great Pro
gre&longs;&longs;ions towards an infinite
ction of the Table.
PROBL. VII. PROP. XIV.
To find the Altitudes and Sublimities of Semipa
rabola's who&longs;e Amplitudes &longs;hall be equal for
each degree of Elevation.
For &longs;uppo&longs;ing the Amplitude of the Semi
par abola to be of 10000 parts, the half of the Tangent of each
degree of Elevation &longs;hews the Altitude. As for example, of the
Semiparabola who&longs;e Elevation is 30 degrees, and Amplitude, as is
&longs;uppo&longs;ed, 10000 parts, the Altitude &longs;hall be 2887, for &longs;o much, very
near, is the half of the Tangent. And having found the Altitude the
Sublimity is to be known in this manner. For a&longs;much as it hath been
demon&longs;trated that the half of the Amplitude of a Semiparabola is the
Mean proportional betwixt the Altitude and Sublimity, and the Alti
tude being already found, and the half of the Amplitude being alwaies
the &longs;ame, to wit, 5000 parts, if we &longs;hall divide the Square thereof by
the Altitude found, the de&longs;ired Sublimity &longs;hall come forth. As in the
Example: The Altitude found was 2887; The Square of the 5000
parts is 25000000; which being divided by 2887, giveth 8659, ve
ry near, for the Sublimity &longs;ought.
SALV.
Now here we &longs;ee, in the &longs;ir&longs;t place, that the Conje
cture is very true which was mentioned afore, that in different
Elevations the farther one goeth from the middlemo&longs;t, whether it
be in the Higher, or in the Lower, &longs;o much greater
lence is required to carry the Project to the &longs;ame Di&longs;tance. For the
zontal, and Perpendicular Naturally-Accelerate, of which
the Aggregate of the Altitude and Sublimity is the Mea&longs;ure, we do
&longs;ee in the propounded Table that that &longs;ame Aggregate is lea&longs;t in
the Elevation of
equal,
&longs;hould look on any greater Elevation, as, for example, of
&longs;hould &longs;ind the Altitude to be 5959, and the Sublimity 4196, which
added together make 10155. And &longs;o much al&longs;o we &longs;hould find the
mote from the middlemo&longs;t. Where we are to note, in the &longs;econd
place, that it is true, That equal
two in the Elevations equidi&longs;tant from the middlemo&longs;t, with this
pretty variation over and above that the Altitudes and the Subli
mities of the ^{*} &longs;uperiour Elevations an&longs;wer alternally to the Sub
limities and Altitudes of the Inferiour: &longs;o that whereas in the
and the Sublimity 4196, in the Elevation of
the contrary that the Altitude is 4196, and the Sublimity 5959:
And the &longs;ame happens in all others without any difference; &longs;ave
only that for the avoyding of tediou&longs;ne&longs;s in Calculations we have
kept no account of &longs;ome fractions, which in &longs;o great &longs;ums are of no
value, but may without any prejudice be omitted.
45 deg.
SAGR.
I am ob&longs;erving that of the two
Perpendicular in Projections, the more Sublime they are, they need
&longs;o much the le&longs;s of the Horizontal, and the more of the Perpendi
cular. Moreover in tho&longs;e of &longs;mall Elevation, great mu&longs;t be the
Force of the Horizontal
little Altitude. But although I comprehend very well that in the
Total Elevation of
to drive the Project one &longs;ingle Inch from the Perpendicular, but
that it mu&longs;t of nece&longs;&longs;ity fall in the &longs;ame place whence it was expel
led; yet dare I not with the like certainty affirm that likewi&longs;e in the
nullity of Elevation, that is in the Horizontal Line, the Project
cannot by any Force le&longs;s than infinite, be driven to any di
&longs;tance: So, as that, for example, a Culverin it &longs;elf &longs;hould not be
able to carry a Ball of Iron Horizontally, or, as they &longs;ay, at Point
blank, that is at no point, which is when it hath no Elevation. I
&longs;ay, in this ca&longs;e I &longs;tand in &longs;ome doubt; and that I do not re&longs;olute
ly deny the thing, the rea&longs;on depends on another Accident which
&longs;eems no le&longs;s &longs;trange, and yet I have a very nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;trati
on for it. And the Accident is this, the Impo&longs;&longs;ibility of di&longs;tending
a Rope, &longs;o, as that it may be &longs;tretched right out, and parallel to the
Horizon, but that it alwaies &longs;wayes and bendeth, nor is there any
Force that can &longs;tretch it otherwi&longs;e.
SALV.
So then,
the Rope becau&longs;e you have the Demon&longs;tration of it. But if we
&longs;hall well con&longs;ider the matter, it may be we &longs;hall find &longs;ome corre
&longs;pondence between the Accident of the Project and this of the
Rope. The Curvity of the Line of the Horizontal Projection &longs;eem
eth to be derived from two Forces, of which one, (which is that of
the Projicient) driveth it Horizontally, and the other, (which
is the Gravity of the Project) draweth it downwards Perpendicu
larly. Now &longs;o in the &longs;tretching of the Rope, there are the Forces
of tho&longs;e that pull it Horizontally, and there is al&longs;o the weight of
the Rope it &longs;elf, which naturally inclineth it downwards. The&longs;e
two effects are very much alike in the generation of them. And if
you allow the weight of the Rope &longs;o much &longs;trength and power as to
be able to oppo&longs;e and overcome any whatever Immen&longs;e Force, that
would di&longs;tend it right out, why will you deny the like to the weight
of the Bullet? But be&longs;ides, I &longs;hall tell you, and at once procure your
or much, doth &longs;hape it &longs;elf into Lines that come very near to Para
bolical, and the re&longs;emblance is &longs;o great, that if you draw a Para
bolical Line upon a plain Superficies that is erect unto the Horizon,
and holding it rever&longs;ed, that is with the Vertex downwards and
with the Ba&longs;e Parallel to the Horizon, you cau&longs;e a Chain to be held
pendent, and &longs;u&longs;tained at the extreams of the Ba&longs;e of the De&longs;cribed
Parabola, you &longs;hall &longs;ee the &longs;aid Chain, as you &longs;laken it more or le&longs;s,
to incurvate and apply it &longs;elf to the &longs;ame Parabola, and this &longs;ame
Application &longs;hall be &longs;o much the more exact, when the de&longs;cribed
Parabola is le&longs;s curved, that is more di&longs;tended: So that in Parabola's
de&longs;cribed with Elevations under
Parabola almo&longs;t to an hair.
SAGR.
It &longs;eems then that with &longs;uch a Chain wrought into &longs;mall
Links one might in an in&longs;tant trace out many Parabolick Lines up
on a plain Superficies.
SALV.
One might, and that al&longs;o with no &longs;mall commodity, as I
&longs;hall tell you anon.
SIMP.
But before you pa&longs;s any farther, I al&longs;o would gladly be
a&longs;certained at lea&longs;t in that Propo&longs;ition of which you &longs;ay there is a
very nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;tration, I mean that of the Impo&longs;&longs;ibility of
di&longs;tending a Rope, by any whatever immen&longs;e Force, right out and
equidi&longs;tant from the Horizon.
SAGR.
I will &longs;ee if I remember the Demon&longs;tration, for under
&longs;tanding of which it is nece&longs;&longs;ary,
true, that which in all Mechanick In&longs;truments is confirmed, not on
ly by Experience, but al&longs;o by Demon&longs;tration: and this it is, That
the Velocity of the Mover, though its Force be very &longs;mall, may
overcome the Re&longs;i&longs;tance, though very great, of a Re&longs;i&longs;ter, which
mu&longs;t be moved &longs;lowly when ever the Velocity of the Mover hath
greater proportion to the Tardity of the Re&longs;i&longs;ter, than the Re&longs;i
&longs;tance of that which is to be moved hath to the Force of the Mo
ver.
SIMP.
This I know very well, and it is demon&longs;trated by
&longs;totle
ver and in the Stiliard, in which the Roman which weigheth not
above 4 pounds, will lift up a weight of 400 in ca&longs;e the di&longs;tance of
the &longs;aid Roman from the Center on which the Beam turneth be
more than an hundred times greater than the di&longs;tance of that point
at which the great weight hangeth from the &longs;ame Center: and this
cometh to pa&longs;s becau&longs;e in the de&longs;cent which the Roman maketh
pa&longs;&longs;eth a Space above an hundred times greater than the Space
which the great weight mounteth in the &longs;ame Time: Which is all
one as to &longs;ay, that the little Roman moveth with a Velocity above
an hundred times greater than the Velocity of the great Weight.
SAGR.
You argue very well, and make no &longs;eruple at all of
granting, that be the Force of the Mover never &longs;o &longs;mall it &longs;hall &longs;u
perate any what ever great Re&longs;i&longs;tance at all times when that &longs;hall
more exceed in Velocity than this doth in Force and Gravity. Now come we to the ca&longs;e of the Rope.
And drawing a &longs;mall
Scheme be plea&longs;ed to under&longs;tand for once that this Line A B, re&longs;t
ing upon the two fixed and &longs;tanding points A and B, to have hang
ing at its ends, as you &longs;ee, two immen&longs;e Weights C and D, which
drawing it with great Force make it to &longs;tand directly di&longs;tended, it
being a &longs;imple Line without any gravity. And here I proceed, and
tell you, that if at the mid&longs;t of that which is the point E, you &longs;hould
hang any never &longs;o little a Weight, as is this H, the Line A B would
yield, and inclining towards the point F, and by con&longs;equence
lengthening, will con&longs;train the two great Weights C and D to
a&longs;cend upwards: which I demon&longs;trate to you in this manner:
About the two points A and B as Centers I de&longs;cribe two Quadrants
E F G, and E L M, and in regard that the two Semidiameters AI
and B L are equal to the two Semidiameters A E and E B, the exce&longs;
&longs;es F I and F L &longs;hall be the quantity of the prolongations of the
parts A F and F B, above A E and E B; and of con&longs;equence &longs;hall
determine the A&longs;cents
of the Weights C and
D, in ca&longs;e that the
Weight H had had a
power to de&longs;cend to F:
which might then be
in ca&longs;e the Line E F,
which is the quantity
of the De&longs;cent of the
&longs;aid Weight H, had
greater proportion to
the Line F I which de
termineth the A&longs;cent of
the two Weights C &
D, than the pondero
&longs;ity of both tho&longs;e Weights hath to the pondero&longs;ity of the Weight
H. But this will nece&longs;&longs;arily happen, be the pondero&longs;ity of the
Weights C and D never &longs;o great, and that of H never &longs;o &longs;mall; for
the exce&longs;s of the Weights C and D above the Weight His not &longs;o
great, but that the exce&longs;s of the Tangent E F above the part of the
Secant F I may bear a greater proportion. Which we will prove
thus: Let there be a Circle who&longs;e Diameter is G A I; and look
what proportion the pondero&longs;ity of the Weights C and D have to
the pondero&longs;ity of H, let the Line B O have the &longs;ame proportion to
another, which let be C, than which let D be le&longs;&longs;er: So that B O Unto O B and D
take a third proportional B E; and as O E is to E B, &longs;o let the Dia
meter G I (prolonging it) be to I F: and from the Term F
draw the Tangent F N. And becau&longs;e it hath been pre&longs;uppo&longs;ed,
that as O E is to E B, &longs;o is G I to I F: therefore, by Compo&longs;ition, as
O B is to B E, &longs;o is G F to F I: But betwixt O B and B E the Mean
proportional is D; and betwixt G F and F I the Mean-proporti
onal is N F: Therefore N F hath the &longs;ame proportion to F I that
O B hath to D: which proportion is greater than that of the
Weights C and D to the Weight H. Therefore, the De&longs;cent or
Velocity of the Weight H having greater proportion to the A&longs;cent
or Velocity of the Weights C and D, than the pondero&longs;ity of the
&longs;aid Weights C and D hath to the pondero&longs;ity of the Weight H:
It is manife&longs;t, that the Weight H &longs;hall de&longs;cend, that is, that the
Line A B &longs;hall depart from Horizontal Rectitude. And that which
befalleth the right Line A B deprived of Gravity in ca&longs;e any &longs;mall
Weight H cometh to be hanged at the &longs;ame in E, happens al&longs;o to
the &longs;aid Rope A B, &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be of ponderous Matter, without
the addition of any other Grave Body; for that the Weight of
the Matter it &longs;elf compounding the &longs;aid Rope AB is &longs;u&longs;pended
thereat.
SIMP.
You have fully &longs;atisfied me; therefore
cording to his promi&longs;e declare unto us, what the Commodity is that
may be drawn from &longs;uch like Chains, and after that relate unto us
tho&longs;e Speculations which have been made by our
touching the Force of Percu&longs;&longs;ion.
We are for this day &longs;ufficiently employed in the Con
templations already delivered, and the Time, which is pretty late,
would not be enough to carry us through the matters you mention;
therefore we &longs;hall defer our Conference till &longs;ome more convenient
time.
SAGR.
I concur with you in opinion, for that by &longs;undry di&longs;
cour&longs;es that I have had with the Friends of our
learnt that this Argument of the Force of Percu&longs;&longs;ion is very ob
&longs;cure, nor hath hitherto any one that hath treated thereof penetra
ted its intricacies, full of darkne&longs;s, and altogether remote from
mans fir&longs;t imaginations: and among&longs;t the Conclu&longs;ions that I have
heard of, one runs in my mind that is very extravagant and odde,
namely, That the Force of Percu&longs;&longs;ion is Interminate, if not Infi
nite. We will therefore attend the lea&longs;ure of
the pre&longs;ent, tell me what things are tho&longs;e which are written at the
end of the Treati&longs;e of Projects?
SALV.
The&longs;e are certain Propo&longs;itions touching the Center of
Gravity of Solids, which our
conceiving that what ^{*} He therefore
thought that with the&longs;e Propo&longs;itions, which here you &longs;ee written,
he might &longs;upply that which is wanting in the Book of
and he applyed him&longs;elf to the &longs;ame at the In&longs;tance of the mo&longs;t
Illu&longs;trious Lord Marque&longs;s
cellent Mathematician of his Time, as his &longs;everal Printed Works
do &longs;peak him; and gave a Copy thereof to that Noble Lord with
thoughts to have pur&longs;ued the &longs;ame Argument in other Solids not
mentioned by
meet with the ^{*} Book of
Geometrician, and &longs;aw that he re&longs;olveth all the&longs;e matters with
out omi&longs;&longs;ion of any thing, he proceeded no farther, although his
Agre&longs;&longs;ions were by methods very different from the&longs;e of
Valerio.
mandinus.
SAGR.
It would be a favour, therefore, if, for this time, which
interpo&longs;eth between this and our next Meeting, you would plea&longs;e
to leave the Book in my hands: for I &longs;hall all the while be read
ing and &longs;tudying the Propo&longs;itions that are con&longs;equently therein
writ.
SALV.
I &longs;hall very willingly obey your Command; and hope
that you will take plea&longs;ure in the&longs;e Propo&longs;itions.
AN
APPENDIX,
In which is contained certain
THE OREMS and their DEMONSTRATIONS:
Formerly written by the &longs;ame Author, touching the
SOLIDS.
POSTVLATVM.
&longs;ed in &longs;ever all Ballances, if the Center of Gra
vity of &longs;ome of tho&longs;e Compounds &longs;hall divide the Ballance
according to &longs;ome proportion, and the Ballance &longs;hall
al&longs;o divide their Center of Gravity according to the
&longs;ame proportion.
LEMMA.
who&longs;e half A C let be divided in E, &longs;o that as B E is to
E A, &longs;o may A E be to E C. I &longs;ay that B E is double
For as B E is to E
A, &longs;o is E A to E C: there
fore by Compo&longs;ition and by Permutation of Proportion, as
B A is to A C, &longs;o is A E to E C: But as A E is to E C,
that is, B A to A C, &longs;o is B E to E A: Wherefore B
E is double to E A.
PROPOSITION.
If certain Magnitudes at any Rate equally exceed
ing one another, and who&longs;e exce&longs;s is equal to
the lea&longs;t of them, be &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed in the Balance,
as that they hang at equal di&longs;tances, to divide
the Center of Gravity of the whole Balance
&longs;o, that the part towards the le&longs;&longs;er Magnitudes
be double to the remainder.
N; of which let the lea&longs;t be N, and let the points of the Su&longs;pen&longs;ions
be A, C, D, E, B, and let the Center of Gravity of all the Magnitudes
&longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed be X. It is to be proved that the part of the Ballance B X
towards the le&longs;&longs;er Magnitudes is double to the remaining part X A.
ther fall in &longs;ome point of the Su&longs;pen&longs;ions, or el&longs;e in the middle point be
tween two of the points of the Su&longs;pen&longs;ions: and let the remaining di
&longs;tances of the Su&longs;pen&longs;ions which fall between A and D, be all divided
into halves by the Points M and I; and let all the Magnitudes be divi-
N: Now the parts of F
&longs;hall be &longs;o many in num
ber, as tho&longs;e Magnitudes
be which are &longs;u&longs;pended
at the Ballance, and the
parts of G one fewer,
and &longs;o of the re&longs;t. Let
the parts of F therefore be N, O, R, S, T, and let tho&longs;e of G be N, O,
R, S, tho&longs;e of H al&longs;o N, O, R, then let tho&longs;e of K be N, O: and all the
Magnitudes in which are N &longs;hall be equal to F; and all the Magnitudes
in which are O &longs;hall be equal to G; and all the Magnitudes in which
are R &longs;hall be equal to H; and tho&longs;e in which S &longs;hall be equal to K; and
the Magnitude T is equal to N. Becau&longs;e therefore all the Magnitudes
in which are N are equal to one another, they &longs;hall equiponderate in
the point D, which divideth the Ballance into two equal parts; and for
the &longs;ame cau&longs;e all the Magnitudes in which are O do equiponderate in
I; and tho&longs;e in which are R in C; and in which are S in M do equi
ponderate; and T is &longs;u&longs;pended in A. Therefore in the Ballance A D at
the equal di&longs;tances D, I, C, M, A, there are Magnitudes &longs;u&longs;pended ex
ceeding one another equally, and who&longs;e exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t: and
the greate&longs;t, which is compounded of all the N N hangeth at D, theAnd again there is another Ballance A B in which other Magnitudes
equal in number and Magnitude to the former are di&longs;po&longs;ed in the &longs;ame
order. Wherefore the Ballances A B and A D are divided by the Cen
ter of all the Magnitudes according to the &longs;ame proportion: But the
Center of Gravity of the afore&longs;aid Magnitudes is X: Wherefore X
divideth the Ballances B A and A D according to the &longs;ame proportion;
&longs;o that as B X is to X A, &longs;o is X A to X D: Wherefore B X is double
to X A, by the Lemma aforegoing: Which was to be proved.
PROPOSITION.
If in a Parabolical Conoid Figure be de&longs;cribed,
and another circum&longs;cribed by Cylinders of
equal Altitude; and the Axis of the &longs;aid Co
noid be divided in &longs;uch proportion that the
part towards the Vertex be double to that to
wards the Ba&longs;e; the Center of Gravity of the
in&longs;cribed Figure of the Ba&longs;e portion &longs;hall be
neare&longs;t to the &longs;aid point of divi&longs;ion; and the
Center of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed from
the Ba&longs;e of the Conoid &longs;hall be more remote:
and the di&longs;tance of either of tho&longs;e Centers
from that &longs;ame point &longs;hall be equal to the Line
that is the &longs;ixth part of the Altitude of one of
the Cylinders of which the Figures are com
po&longs;ed.
been mentioned: let one of them be in&longs;cribed, the other circum
&longs;cribed; and let the Axis of the Conoid, which let be A E, be di
vided in N, in &longs;uch proportion as that A N be double to N E. It is to
be proved that the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Figure is in the
Line N E, but the Center of the circum&longs;cribed in the Line A N. Let
the Plane of the Figures &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed be cut through the Axis, and let
the Section be that of the Parabola B A C: and let the Section of the
cutting Plane, and of the Ba&longs;e of the Conoid be the Line B C; and
let the Sections of the Cylinders be the Rectangular Figures; as ap
peareth in the de&longs;cription. Fir&longs;t, therefore, the Cylinder of the in&longs;cri
bed who&longs;e Axis is D E, hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Cylinder who&longs;e
Axis is D Y, as the Quadrate I D hath to the Quadrate S Y; that is,
as D A hath to A Y: and the Cylinder who&longs;e Axis is D Y is
&longs;ame rea&longs;on, the Cylinder who&longs;e Axis is Z Y is to that who&longs;e Axis is
Z V, as Z A is to A V. The &longs;aid Cylinders, therefore, are to one ano
ther as the Lines D A, A Y; Z A, A V: But the&longs;e are equally exceed
ing to one another, and the exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t, &longs;o that A Z is
double to A V; and A Y is triple theTho&longs;e
Cylinders, therefore, are certain Mag
nitudes in order equally exceeding one
another, who&longs;e exce&longs;s is equal to the
lea&longs;t of them, and is the Line X M,
in which they are &longs;u&longs;pended at equal
di&longs;tances (for that each of the Cy
linders hath its Center of Gravity in
the mia&longs;t of the Axis.) Wherefore,
by what hath been above demon&longs;tra
ted, the Center of Gravity of the Mag
nitude compounded of them all divi
deth the Line X M &longs;o, that the part
towards X is double to the re&longs;t. Divide it, therefore, and, let X
double
gure. Divide A V in two equal parts in
M E: But X
E X; and for that cau&longs;e
&longs;cribed Figure, cometh nearer to the Ba&longs;e of the Conoid than N. And
becau&longs;e that as A E is to E N, &longs;o is the part taken away
taken away E
that is, A
AAnd in the &longs;ame manner the Cylinders of
the circum&longs;cribed Figure may be demon&longs;trated to be equally exceeding
one another, and the exce&longs;s to me equal to the least; and that they have
their Centers of Gravity at equal di&longs;tances in the LineIf therefore
And &longs;ince
that they are equal:) the whole A E &longs;hall be le&longs;s than triple E
fore E
A
remaining part ATherefore
NAnd the&longs;e are the things that were to be
demon&longs;trated.
COROLLARY.
Hence it is manife&longs;t, that a Conoid may be in&longs;cribed in a Para
bolical Figure, and another circum&longs;cribed, &longs;o, as that the
Centers of their Gravities may be di&longs;tant from the point N
le&longs;s than any Line given.
Axis of the Cylinders, of which the Figures are compounded given
le&longs;&longs;er than this a&longs;&longs;umed Line, there &longs;hall fall Lines between the Centers
of Gravities of the&longs;e Figures and the mark N that are le&longs;s than the
Line propo&longs;ed.
The former Propo&longs;ition another way.
O, &longs;o, as that C O be double to O D. It is to be proved that the
Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Figure is in the Line O D;
and the Center of the circum&longs;cribed in C O. Let the Plane of the Fi
gures be cut through the Axis and C, as hath been &longs;aid. Becau&longs;e there
fore the Cylinders S N, T M, V I,
of the Lines S D, T N, V M, X I;
and the&longs;e are to one another as the
Lines N C, C M, C I, C E: but
the&longs;e do exceed one another equally;
and the exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t, to
wit, C E: And the Cylinder T M is
equal to the Cylinder Q N; and the
Cylinder V I equal to P N; and X E
is equal to L N: Therefore the Cylin
ders S N, Q N, P N, and L N do
equally exceed one another, and the
exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t of them,
namely, to the Cylinder L N. But
the exce&longs;s of the Cylinder S N, above
the Cylinder Q N is a Ring who&longs;e
height is Q T; that is, N D; and
its breadth S
Ring, who&longs;e breadth is Q P. And the exce&longs;s of the Cylinder P N above
L N is a Ring, who&longs;e breadth is P L. Wherefore the &longs;aid Rings S Q,
Q P, P L, are equal to another, and to the Cylinder L N. Therefore the
Ring S T equalleth the Cylinder X E: the Ring Q V, which is double
to S T, equalleth the Cylinder V I; which likewi&longs;e is double to the
Cylinder T M; and the Cylinder L E &longs;hall be equal to the Cylinder S N. In the Beam or Ballance, therefore, K F connecting the middle points of
the Right-lines E I and D N, and cut into equal parts in the points H
and G, are certain Magnitudes &longs;u&longs;pended, to wit the Cylinders S N,
T M, V I, X E; and the Center of Gravity of the fir&longs;t Cylinder is K;
and of the &longs;econd H; of the third G; of the fourth F. And we have
another Ballance M K, which is the half of the &longs;aid F K, and a like
number of points di&longs;tributed into equal parts, to wit, M H, H N, N K,
and on it other Magnitudes, equal in number and bigne&longs;s to tho&longs;e which
are on the Beam F K, and having the Centers of Gravity in the points
M, H, N, and K, and di&longs;po&longs;ed in the &longs;ame order. For the Cylinder L E
hath its Center of Gravity in M; and is equal to the Cylinder S N that
hath its Center in K: And the Ring P X hath the Center H; and is
equal to the Cylinder T M, who&longs;e Center is H: And the Ring Q V ha
ving the Center N is equal to the V I who&longs;e Center is G: And la&longs;tly,
the Ring S T having the Center K, is equal to the Cylinder X E who&longs;e
Center is F. Therefore the Center of Gravity of the &longs;aid Magnitudes
divideth the Beam in the &longs;ame proportion: But the Center of them is
one, and therefore &longs;ome point common to both the Beams or Ballance,
which let be Y. Therefore F Y and Y K &longs;hall be as K Y and Y M.
F Y
therefore is double to Y K: and C E being divided into two equal parts
in Z, Z F, &longs;hall be double to K D: and for that cau&longs;e Z D triple to D Y:
But to the Right Line D O C D is triple: Therefore the Right Line
D O is greater than D Y: And for the like cau&longs;e Y the Center of the
in&longs;cribed Figure approacheth nearer the Ba&longs;e than the point O. And
becau&longs;e as C D is to D O, &longs;o is the part taken away Z D to the part ta
ken away D Y; the remaining part C Z &longs;hall be to the remaining part
Y O, as C D is to D O; that is Y O &longs;hall be the third part of C Z;
that is, the &longs;ixth part of C E. Again we will, by the &longs;ame rea&longs;on, de
mon&longs;trate the Cylinders of the circum&longs;cribed Figure to exceed one ano
ther equally, and that the exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t, and that their
Centers of Gravity are con&longs;tituted in equal di&longs;tances upon the Beam
K Z: and likewi&longs;e that the Rings equal to tho&longs;e &longs;ame Cylinders are in
like manner di&longs;po&longs;ed on another Beam K G, the half of the &longs;aid K Z,
and that therefore the Center of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed Figure,
which let be R, &longs;o divideth the Beam, as that Z R is to R K, as K R is to
R G. Therefore Z R &longs;hall be double to R K: But C Z is equal to the
Right Line K D, and not double to it. The whole C D &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;er
than triple to D R: Wherefore the Right Line D R is greater than D O;
that is to &longs;ay, the Center of the circum&longs;cribed Figure recedeth from the
Ba&longs;e more than the point O. And becau&longs;e Z K is triple to K R; and
K D with twice Z C is triple to K D; the whole C D with C Z &longs;hall be
triple to D R: But C D is triple to D O: Wherefore the remaining
part C Z &longs;hall be triple to the remaining part R O; that is, O R
PROPOSITION.
The Center of Gravity of the Parabolick
Conoid doth &longs;o divide the Axis, as that the
part towards the Vertex is double to the re
maining part towards the Ba&longs;e.
N &longs;o as that A N be double to N B. It is to be proved that the Cen
ter of Gravity of the Conoid is the point N. For if it be not N, it
&longs;hall be either above or below it. Fir&longs;t let it be below; and let it be X:
And &longs;et off upon &longs;ome place by it &longs;elf the Line L O equal to N X; and let
L O be divided at plea&longs;ure in S: and look what proportion B X and
O S both together have to O S, and the &longs;ame &longs;hall the Conoid have to
the Solid R. And in the Conoid let Figures be de&longs;cribed by Cylinders
having equal Altitudes, &longs;o, as that that which lyeth between the Center
of Gravity and the point N be le&longs;s than L S: and let the exce&longs;s of the
Conoid above it be le&longs;s than the Solid R: and that this may be done is
clear. Take therefore the in&longs;cribed, who&longs;e Center of Gravity let be I:
now I X &longs;hall be greater than S O: And becau&longs;e that as X B with S O
is to S O, &longs;o is the Conoid to the Solid R: (and R is greater than the
exce&longs;s by which the Conoid exceeds the in&longs;cribed Figure:) the proporti
on of the Conoid to the &longs;aid exce&longs;s &longs;hall be greater than both B X and
O S unto S O: And, by Divi&longs;ion, the in&longs;cribed Figure &longs;hall have grea
ter proportion to the &longs;aid exce&longs;s than B X to S O: But B X hath to
X I a proportion yet le&longs;s than to S O: Therefore the in&longs;cribed Figure
&longs;hall have much greater proportion to the re&longs;t of the proportions than
B X to X I: Therefore what proportion the in&longs;cribed Figure hath to
there&longs;t of the portions, the &longs;ame &longs;hall a certain other Line have to X I:
which &longs;hall nece&longs;&longs;arily be greater than B X: Let it, therefore, be M X. We have therefore the Center of Gravity of the Conoid X: But the
Center of Gravity of the Figure in&longs;cribed in it is I: of the re&longs;t of the
portions by which the Conoid exceeds the in&longs;cribed Figure the Center of
Gravity &longs;hall be in the Line X M, and in it that point in which it &longs;hall
be &longs;o terminated, that look what proportion the in&longs;cribed Figure hath
to the exce&longs;s by which the Conoid exceeds it, the &longs;ame it &longs;hall have to
X I: But it hath been proved, that this proportion is that which M X
hath to X I: Therefore M &longs;hall be the Center of Gravity of tho&longs;e pro
portions by which the Conoid exceeds the in&longs;cribed Figure: Which
certainly cannot be. For if along by M a Plane be drawn equidi&longs;tant to
the Ba&longs;e of the Conoid, all tho&longs;e proportions &longs;hall be towards one andTherefore the Center of Gravity
of the &longs;aid Conoid is not below the point N: Neither is it above. For,
if it may, let it be H: and again, as before, &longs;et the Line L O by it &longs;elf
equalto the &longs;aid H N, and divided at plea&longs;ure in S: and the &longs;ame pro
portion that B N and S O both together have to S L, let the Conoid
have to R: and about the Conoid let a Figure be circum&longs;cribed con&longs;i
&longs;ting of Cylinders, as hath been &longs;aid: by which let it be exceeded a le&longs;s
quantity than that of the Solid R: and let the Line betwixt the Center
of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed Figure and the point N be le&longs;&longs;er than
S O: the remainder V H &longs;hall be greater than S L. And becau&longs;e that as
both B N and O S is to SL, &longs;o is the
than the exce&longs;s by which the circum
&longs;cribed Figure exceeds the Conoid:)
Therefore B N and S O hath le&longs;s pro
portion to S L than the Conoid to the
&longs;aid exce&longs;s. And B V is le&longs;&longs;er than
both B N and S O; and V H is grea
ter than S L: much greater proporti
on, therefore, hath the Conoid to the
&longs;aid proportions, than B V hath to
V H. Therefore whatever proporti
on the Conoid hath to the &longs;aid pro
portions, the &longs;ame &longs;hall a Line greater
than B V have to V H. Let the &longs;ame be M V: And becau&longs;e the Center
of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed Figure is V, and the Center of the
Conoid is H. and &longs;ince that as the Conoid to the re&longs;t of the proportions,
&longs;ois M V to V H, M &longs;hall be the Center of Gravity of the remaining
proportions: which likewi&longs;e is impo&longs;&longs;ible: Therefore the Center of
Gravity of the Conoid is not above the point N: But it hath been de
mon&longs;trated that neither is it beneath: It remains, therefore, that it ne
ce&longs;&longs;arily be in the point N it &longs;elf. And the &longs;ame might be demon&longs;trated
of Conoidal Plane cut upon an Axis not erect. The &longs;ame in other terms,
as appears by what followeth:
PROPOSITION.
The Center of Gravity of the Parabolick Co
noid falleth betwixt the Center of the cir
cum&longs;cribed Figure and the Center of the in
&longs;cribed.
circum&longs;cribed Figure C, and the Center of the in&longs;cribed O. I &longs;ay
the Center of the Conoid is betwixt the points C and O. For if
not, it &longs;hall be either above them, or below them, or in one of them. Let
it be below, as in R. And becau&longs;e R is the Center of Gravity of the
whole Conoid; and the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Figure is O:
Therefore of the remaining proportions by which the Conoid exceeds
the in&longs;cribed Figure the Center of Gravity &longs;hall be in the Line O R ex
tended towards R, and in that point in which it is &longs;o determined, that,
what proportion the &longs;aid proportions have to the in&longs;cribed Figure, the
&longs;ame &longs;hall O R have to the Line falling betwixt R and that falling point. Let this proportion be that of O R to R X.
Therefore X falleth either
without the Conoid or within, or in itsThat it falleth without, or in its
Ba&longs;e it is already manife&longs;t to be an ab&longs;ur
dity. Let it fall within: and becau&longs;e X R
is to R O, as the in&longs;cribed Figure is to
the exce&longs;s by which the Conoid exceeds
it; the &longs;ame proportion that B R hath to
R O, the &longs;ame let the in&longs;cribed Figure
have to the Solid K: Which nece&longs;&longs;arily
&longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;er than the &longs;aid exce&longs;s. And let
another Figure be in&longs;cribed which may be
exceeded by the Conoid a le&longs;s quantity
than is K, who&longs;e Center of Gravity falleth betwixt O and C. Let it
be V. And, becau&longs;e the fir&longs;t Figure is to K as B R to R O, and the &longs;e
cond Figure, who&longs;e Center V is greater than the fir&longs;t, and exceeded
by the Conoid a le&longs;s quantity than is K; what proportion the &longs;econd
Figure hath to the exce&longs;s by which the Conoid exceeds it, the &longs;ame
&longs;hall a Line greater than B R have to R V. But R is the Center of Gra
vity of the Conoid; and the Center of the &longs;econd in&longs;cribed Figure V:
The Center therefore of the remaining proportions &longs;hall be without
the Conoid beneath B: Which is impo&longs;&longs;ible. And by the &longs;ame means
we might demon&longs;trate the Center of Gravity of the &longs;aid Conoid not to
be in the Line C A. And that it is none of the points betwixt C and
O is manife&longs;t. For &longs;ay, that there other Figures de&longs;cribed, greater
&longs;omething than the in&longs;cribed Figure who&longs;e Center is O, and le&longs;s than
that circum&longs;cribed Figure who&longs;e Center is C, the Center of the Conoid
would fall without the Center of the&longs;e Figures: Which but now was
concluded to be impo&longs;&longs;ible: It re&longs;ts therefore that it be betwixt the Cen
ter of the circum&longs;cribed and in&longs;cribed Figure. And if &longs;o, it &longs;hall ne
ce&longs;&longs;arily be in that point which divideth the Axis, &longs;o as that the part
towards the Vertex is double to the remainder; &longs;ince N may circum
&longs;cribe and in&longs;cribe Figures, &longs;o, that tho&longs;e Lines which fall betweenTo expre&longs;s the &longs;ame in other terms, we have reduced it to an impo&longs;&longs;ibi
lity, that the Center of the Conoid &longs;hould not fall betwixt the Centers of
the in&longs;cribed and circum&longs;cribed Figures.
PROPOSITION.
Suppo&longs;ing three proportional Lines, and that
what proportion the lea&longs;t hath to the exce&longs;s
by which the greate&longs;t exceeds the lea&longs;t, the
&longs;ame &longs;hould a Line given have to two thirds of
the exce&longs;s by which the greate&longs;t exceeds the
middlemo&longs;t: and moreover, that what pro
portion that compounded of the greate&longs;t, and
of double the middlemo&longs;t, hath unto that com
pounded of the triple of the greate&longs;t and mid
dlemo&longs;t, the &longs;ame hath another Line given, to
the exce&longs;s by which the greate&longs;t exceeds the
middle one; both the given Lines taken toge
ther &longs;hall be a third part of the greate&longs;t of the
proportional Lines.
proportion B F hath to F A, the &longs;ame let M S have to two thirds
of C A. And what proportion that compounded of A B and the
double of B C hath to that compounded of the triple of both A B and
B C, the &longs;ame let another, to wit S N, have to A C. Becau&longs;e therefore
that A B, B C, and C F,
and C F &longs;hall, for the &longs;ame
rea&longs;on, be likewi&longs;e &longs;o. Therefore, as A B is to
B C, &longs;o is A C to C F:
and as the triple of A B is to the triple of B C, &longs;o is A C to C F:
Therefore, what proportion the triple of A B with the triple of B C
hath to the triple of C B, the &longs;ame &longs;hall A C have to a Line le&longs;s than
C F. Let it be C O.
Wherefore by Compo&longs;ition and by Conver&longs;ion of
proportion, O A &longs;hall have to A C, the &longs;ame proportion, as triple A B
with Sextuple B C, hath to triple A B with triple B C. But A C hath
to S N the &longs;ame proportion, that triple A B with triple B C hath to A B
with double B C: Therefore,
&longs;ame proportion, as triple A B with Sexcuple B C hath to A B with
double B C. Therefore A O is triple to S N.
ple C B: and becau&longs;e as C A is to A F, &longs;o is triple A B to triple B C:
Therefore,
triple A B be to triple A B with treble B C: And, by Conver&longs;ion of
proportion, as O F is to F C, &longs;o is triple B C to triple A B with triple
B C: And as C F is to F B, &longs;o is A C to C B, and triple A C to triple
C B: Therefore,
to F B, &longs;o is triple A C to the triple of both A B and A C together. And becau&longs;e F C and C A are in the &longs;ame proportion as C B and B A;
it &longs;hall be that as F C is to C A, &longs;o &longs;hall B C be to B A. And, by Com
po&longs;ition, as F A is to A C, &longs;o are both B A and B C to B A: and &longs;o the
triple to the triple: Therefore as F A is to A C, &longs;o the compound of tri
ple B A and triple B C is to triple A B. Wherefore, as F A is to two
thirds of A C, &longs;o is the compound of triple B A and triple B C to two
thirds of triple B A; that is, to double B A: But as F A is to two thirds
of A C, &longs;o is F B to M S: Therefore, as F B is to M S, &longs;o is the compound
of triple B A and triple B C to double B A: But as O B is to F B, &longs;o
was Sexcuple A B to triple of both A B and B C: Therefore,
li,
double B A. Wherefore M S &longs;hall be the third part of O B: And it
hath been demon&longs;trated, that S N is the third part of A O: It is mani
fe&longs;t therefore, that MN is a third part likewi&longs;e of A B: And this is
that which was to be demon&longs;trated.
PROPOSITION.
Of any
bolick Conoid the Center of Gravity is in the
Right Line that is Axis of the
being divided into three equal parts the Cen
ter of Gravity is in the middlemo&longs;t and &longs;o di
vides it, as that the part towards the le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;e
hath to the part towards the greater Ba&longs;e, the
&longs;ame proportion that the greater Ba&longs;e hath to
the le&longs;&longs;er.
who&longs;e Axis is B E; and let the cutting Plane be equidi&longs;taut to
the Ba&longs;e: and let it be cut in another Plane along the Axis erect
upon the Ba&longs;e, and let it be the Section of the Parabola V R C: R B
&longs;hall be the Diameter of the proportion, or the equidi&longs;tant DiameterDivide therefore E B in
to three equal parts, of which let the middlemo&longs;t be Q Y: and divide
this &longs;o in the point I that Q I may have the &longs;ame proportion to I Y, as
the Ba&longs;e who&longs;e Diameter is V C hath to the Ba&longs;e who&longs;e Diameter is
L M; that is, that the Square V C hath to Square L M. It is to be de
mon&longs;trated that I is the Center of Gravity of the Fru&longs;trum L M C. Draw the Line N S, by the by, equall to B R: and let S X be equal to
E R: and unto N S and S X a&longs;&longs;ume a third proportional S G: and as
N G is to G S, &longs;o let B Q be to I O. And it nothing matters whether
the point O fall above or below L M. And becau&longs;e in the Section V R C
the Lines L M and V C are ordinately
V C is to the Square L M, &longs;o is the Line
B R to R E: And as the Square V C is
to the Square L M, &longs;o is Q I to I Y: and
as B R is to R E, &longs;o is N S to S X: There
fore Q I is to I Y, as R S is to S X. Where
fore as G Y is to Y I, &longs;o &longs;hall both N S and
S X be to S X: and as E B is to Y I, &longs;o
&longs;hall the compound of triple N S and tri
ple S X be to S X: But as E B is to B Y,
&longs;o is the compound of triple N S and S X
both together to the compound of N S and S X: Therefore, as E B is to
B I, &longs;o is the compound of triple N S and triple S X to the compound of
N S and double S X. Therefore N S, S X, and S G are three proporti
onal Lines: And as S G is to G N, &longs;o is the a&longs;&longs;umed O I to two thirds
of E B; that is, to N X: And as the compound of N S and double
S X is to the compound of triple N S and triple S X, &longs;o is another a&longs;&longs;u
med Line I B to B E; that is, to N X. By what therefore hath been
above demon&longs;trated, tho&longs;e Lines taken together are a third part of N S;
that is, of R B: Therefore R B is triple to B O: Wherefore O &longs;hall
be the Center of Gravity of the Conoid v R C. And let it be the Cen
ter of Gravity of the
Center of Gravity of V L M C is in the Line O B, and in that point
which &longs;o terminates it, that as V L M C of the
proportion L R M, &longs;o is the Line A O to that which intervenes betwixt
O and the &longs;aid point. And becau&longs;e R O is two thirds of R B; and
R A two thirds of R E; the remaining part A O &longs;hall be two thirds
of the remaining part E B. And becau&longs;e that as the
is to the proportion L R M, &longs;o is N G to G S: and as N G to G S, &longs;o is
two thirds of E B to O I: and two thirds of E B is equal to the Line
A O: it &longs;hall be that as the
L R M, &longs;o is A O to O I. It is manife&longs;t therefore that of the
[as?] that the part towards the le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;e is to the part towards the grea-
double of the le&longs;&longs;er together with the greater. Which is the Propo&longs;ition
more elegantly expre&longs;&longs;ed.
PROPOSITION.
If any number of Magnitudes &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed to one
another, as that the &longs;econd addeth unto the fir&longs;t
the double of the fir&longs;t, the third addeth unto
the &longs;econd the triple of the fir&longs;t, the fourth
addeth unto the third the quadruple of the
fir&longs;t, and &longs;o every one of the following ones
addeth unto the next unto it the magnitude of
the fir&longs;t multiplyed according to the number
which it &longs;hall hold in order; if, I &longs;ay, the&longs;e
Magnitudes be &longs;u&longs;pended ordinarily on the
Ballance at equal di&longs;tances; the Center of the
tudes &longs;hall &longs;o divide the Beam, as that the part
towards the le&longs;&longs;er Magnitudes is triple to the
remainder.
hang upon it; and let them be A, F, G, H, K; of which A is in
the fir&longs;t place &longs;u&longs;pended at T. I &longs;ay, that the Center of the
librium
re&longs;t. Let T L be triple to L I; and S L triple to L P: and Q L to L N,
P N, N O, and O L
&longs;hall be equal. And
in F let a Magnitude
be placed double to A;
in G another trebble to
the &longs;ame; in H ano
ther Quadruple; and
&longs;o of the re&longs;t: and let
tho&longs;e Magnitudes be
taken in which there
is A; and let the &longs;ame
be done in the Magni
tudes F, G, H, K. And
becau&longs;e in F the remaining Magnitude, to wit B, is equal to A; take itand let tho&longs;e Magnitudes be taken in
which there is B: and in the &longs;ame manner let tho&longs;e be taken in which is
C, D, and E: now all tho&longs;e in which there is A &longs;hall be equal to K: and
the compound of all the B B &longs;hall equal H; and the compound of C C
&longs;hall equal G; and the compound of all the D D &longs;hall equal F; and
E &longs;hall equal A. And becau&longs;e T I is double to I L, I &longs;hall be the point
of the
likewi&longs;e &longs;ince S P is double to P L, P &longs;hall be the point of the
um
of the
of D D: and L that of E. Therefore T L is a Beam on which at
equal di&longs;tances certain Magnitudes K, H, G, F, A do hang. And again
L I is another Ballance, on which, at di&longs;tances in like manner equal, do
hang &longs;uch a number of Magnitudes, and in the &longs;ame order equal to the
former. For the compound of all the A A, which hang on I, is equal to
K hanging at L; and the compo&longs;t of all B B, which is &longs;u&longs;pended at P, is
equal to H hanging at P; and likewi&longs;e the compound of C C, which
hangeth at N do equal G; and the compo&longs;t of D, which hang on O,
are equal to F; and E, hanging on L, is equal to A. Wherefore the
Ballances are divided in the &longs;ame proportion by the Center of the com
pounds of the Magnitudes And the Center of the compound of, the &longs;aid
Magnitudes is one. Therefore the common point of the Right Line T L,
and of the Right Line L I &longs;hall be the Center, which let be X. Therefore
as T X is to X L, &longs;o &longs;hall L X be to X I; and the whole T L to the whole
L I. But T L is triple to L I: Wherefore T X &longs;hall al&longs;o be triple to X L.
PROPOSITION.
If any number of Magnitudes be &longs;o taken, that the
&longs;econd addeth unto the fir&longs;t the triple of the
fir&longs;t, and the third addeth unto the &longs;econd the
quintuple of the fir&longs;t, and the fourth addeth
unto the third the &longs;eptuple of the fir&longs;t, and &longs;o
the re&longs;t, every one encrea&longs;ing above the next to
it, and proceedeth &longs;till to a new multiplex of
the fir&longs;t Magnitude according to the con&longs;e
quent odd numbers, like as the Squares of
Lines equally exceeding one another do pro
ceed, whereof the exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t,
and if they be &longs;u&longs;pended on a Ballance at equal
Di&longs;tances, the Center of
compound Magnitudes &longs;o divideth the Beam
more than triple the remaining part; and al&longs;o
one may take a di&longs;tance that is to the &longs;ame le&longs;s
than triple.
from which let there be other Magnitudes taken away that were to
one another as they were di&longs;po&longs;ed in the precedent, and let it be of
the compound of all
the A A: the re&longs;t
&longs;hall be di&longs;tributed
in the &longs;ame order,
but the greate&longs;t de
ficient. Let E D be
triple to D B; and
G F triple to F B. D &longs;hall be the Center
of the
&longs;i&longs;ting of all the A A;
and F that of the
compound of all the
C C. Wherefore the
Center of the com
pound of both A A
and C C falleth be
tween D and F. Let
it be O. It is there
fore manife&longs;t that
E O is more than triple to O B; but G O le&longs;s thantriple to the
&longs;ame O B: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.
PROPOSITION.
If to any Cone or portion of a Cone a Eigure con
&longs;i&longs;ting of Cylinders of equal heights be in&longs;cri
bed and another circum&longs;cribed; and if its Axis
be &longs;o divided as that the part which lyeth be
twixt the point of divi&longs;ion and the Vertex be
triple to the re&longs;t; the Center of Gravity of
the in&longs;cribed Figure &longs;hall be nearer to the Ba&longs;e
of the Cone than that point of divi&longs;ion: and
the Center of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed
&longs;hall be nearer to the Vertex than that &longs;ame
point.
Let it be divided
in S &longs;o, as that N S be triple to the remainder S M. I &longs;ay, that
the Center of Gravity of any Figure in&longs;cribed, as was &longs;aid, in
a Cone doth con&longs;i&longs;t in the Axis N M, and approacheth nearer to the Ba&longs;e
of the Cone than the point S: and that the Center of Gravity of the
Circum&longs;cribed is likewi&longs;e in the Axis N M, and nearer to the Vertex
than is S. Let a Figure therefore be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be in&longs;cribed by the Cy
linders who&longs;e Axis M C, C B, B E, E A are equal. Fir&longs;t therefore
the Cylinder who&longs;e Axis is M C hath
&longs;ame proportion as its Ba&longs;e hath to
the Ba&longs;e of the other (for their Alti
tudes are equal.) But this propor
tion is the &longs;ame with that which the
Square C N hath to the Square N B. And &longs;o we might prove, that the Cy
linder who&longs;e Axis is C B hath to the
Cylinder who&longs;e Axis is B E the &longs;ame
proportion, as the Square B N hath to
the Square N E: and the Cylinder
who&longs;e Axis is B E hath to the Cylin
der who&longs;e Axis is E A the &longs;ame pro
portion that the Square E N hath to
the Square N A. But the Lines N C,
N B, E N, and N A equally exceed one
another, and their exce&longs;s equalleth the
lea&longs;t, that is N A. Therefore they are certain Magnitudes, to wit, in
&longs;cribed Cylinders having con&longs;equently to one another the &longs;ame proporti
on as the Squares of Lines that equally exceed one another, and the ex-
T I that their &longs;everal Centers of Gravity con&longs;i&longs;t in it, and that at equal
di&longs;tances. Therefore by the things above demon&longs;trated it appeareth that
the Center of Gravity of all &longs;o compo&longs;ed Magnitudes do &longs;o divide the
Balance T I, that the part to wards T is more than triple to the remain
der. Let this Center be O.
T O therefore is more than triple to O I.
But T N is triple to I M.
Therefore the whole M O will be le&longs;s than a
fourth part of the whole M N, who&longs;e fourth part was &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be
M S. It is manife&longs;t, therefore, that the point O doth nearer approach
the Ba&longs;e of the Cone than S. And let the circum&longs;cribed Figure be com
po&longs;ed of the Cylinders who&longs;e Axis M C, C B, B E, E A and A N are
equal to each other, and, like as in tho&longs;e in&longs;cribed, let them be to one
another as the Squares of the Lines M N, N C, B N, N E, A N,
which equally exceed one another, and the exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t
A N. Wherefore, by the premi&longs;es, the Center of Gravity of all the Cy
linders &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed, which let be V, doth &longs;o divide the Beam R I, that the
part towards R, to wit R V, is more than triple to the remaining part
V I: but T V &longs;hall be le&longs;s than triple to the &longs;ame. But N T is triple to
all I M: Therefore all V M is more than the fourth part of all M N,
who&longs;e fourth part was &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be M S. Therefore the point V is
nearer to the Vertex than the Point S. Which was to be demon&longs;tra
ted.
PROPOSITION.
About a given Cone a Figure may be circum&longs;cri
bed and another in&longs;cribed con&longs;i&longs;ting of Cylin
ders of equal height, &longs;o, as that the Line which
lyeth betwixt the Center of Gravity of the
circum&longs;cribed, and the Center of Gravity of
the in&longs;cribed, may be le&longs;&longs;er than any Line
given.
given be K. I &longs;ay; Let there be placed by the Cylinder L
equal to that in&longs;cribed in the Cone, having for its Altitude half
of the Axis A B: and let A B be divided in C, &longs;o as that A C be tri
ple to C B: And as A C is to K, &longs;o let the Cylinder L be to the Solid X. And about the Cone let there be a Figure circum&longs;cribed of Cylin
ders that have equal Altitude, and let another be in&longs;cribed, &longs;o as that
the circum&longs;cribed exceed the in&longs;cribed a le&longs;s quantity than the Solid X. And let the Center of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed be E; which falls
above C: and let the Center of the in&longs;cribed be S, falling beneath C.For if not, then let C A
be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to E O. Becau&longs;e therefore O E hath to K the &longs;ame
proportion that L hath to X; and the in&longs;cribed Figure is not le&longs;s than
the Cylinder L; and the exce&longs;s with which the &longs;aid Figure is exceeded
by the circum&longs;cribed is le&longs;s than the Solid X: therefore the in&longs;cribed
Figure &longs;hall have to the &longs;aid exce&longs;s
K: But the proportion of O E to K is
not le&longs;s than that which O E hath to
E S with E S. Let it not be le&longs;s than
K. Therefore the in&longs;cribed Figure
hath to the exce&longs;s of the circum&longs;cri
bed Figure above it greater propor
tion than O E hath to E S. Therefore
as the in&longs;cribed is to the &longs;aid exce&longs;s,
&longs;o &longs;hall it be to the Line E S. Let E R
be a Line greater than E O; and the
Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed
Figure is S; and the Center of the cir
cum&longs;cribed is E. It is manife&longs;t there
fore, that the Center of Gravity of
the remaining proportions by which
the circum&longs;cribed exceedeth the in
&longs;cribed is in the Line R E, and in that point by which it is &longs;o termina
ted, that as the in&longs;cribed Figure is to the &longs;aid proportions, &longs;o is the Line
included betwixt E and that point to the Line E S. And this propor
tion hath R E to E S. Therefore the Center of Gravity of the remain
ing proportions with which the circum&longs;cribed Figure exceeds the in
&longs;cribed &longs;hall be R, which is impo&longs;&longs;ible. For the Plane drawn thorow
R equidi&longs;tant to the Ba&longs;e of the Cone doth not cut tho&longs;e proportions. It
is therefore fal&longs;e that the Line E S is not le&longs;&longs;er than K. It &longs;hall therefore
be le&longs;s. The &longs;ame al&longs;o may be done in a manner not unlike this in Pyra
mides, as ne could demon&longs;trate.
COROLLARY.
Hence it is manife&longs;t, that a given Cone may circum&longs;cribe one
Figure and in&longs;cribe another con&longs;i&longs;ting of Cylinders of equal
Altitudes &longs;o, as that the Lines which are intercepted betwixt
their Centers of Gravity and the point which &longs;o divides the
Axis of the Cone, as that the part towards the Vertex is tri
ple to the le&longs;t, are le&longs;s than any given Line.
Axis, as was &longs;aid, is alwaies found betwixt the Centers of Gravity
there be a Line in the middle betwixt tho&longs;e Centers that is le&longs;s than any
Line a&longs;&longs;igned; it followeth that the &longs;ame given Line be much le&longs;s that
lyeth betwixt one of the &longs;aid Centers and the &longs;aid point that divides
the Axis.
PROPOSITION.
The Center of Gravity divideth the Axis of any
Cone or Pyramid &longs;o, that the part next the
Vertex is triple to the remainder.
And in C let it be divided,
&longs;o that A C be triple to the remaining part C B. It is to be proved,
that C is the Center of Gravity of the Cone. For if it be not, the
Cone's Center &longs;hall be either above or below the point C. Let it be fir&longs;t
beneath, and let it be E. And draw the Line L P, by it &longs;elf, equal to
C E; which divided at plea&longs;ure in N. And as both B E and P N to
gether are to P N, &longs;o let the Cone be to the Solid X: and in&longs;cribe in the
Cone a Solid Figure of Cylinders that have equal Ba&longs;es, who&longs;e Center
of Gravity is le&longs;s di&longs;tant from the point C than is the Line L N, and
the exce&longs;s of the Cone above it le&longs;s than the Solid X. And that this
may be done is manife&longs;t from what hath been already demon&longs;trated. Now let the in&longs;cribed Figure be &longs;uch as
let be I. The Line I E therefore &longs;hall be
greater than N P together with L P. Let
C E and I C le&longs;s L N be equal: And be
cau&longs;e both together B E and N P is to N P
as the Cone to X: and the exce&longs;s by which
the Cone exceeds the in&longs;cribed Figure is
le&longs;s than the Solid X: Therefore the Cone
&longs;hall have greater proportion to the &longs;aid
X S than both B E and N P to N P: and, by
Divi&longs;ion, the in&longs;cribed Figure &longs;hall have
greater proportion to the exce&longs;s by which
the Cone exceeds it, than B E to N P: But B E hath le&longs;s proportion to
E I than to N P with I E. Let N P be greater.
Then the in&longs;cribed Fi
gure hath to the exce&longs;s of the Cone above it much greater proportion
than B E to E I. Therefore as the in&longs;cribed Figure is to the &longs;aid exce&longs;s,
&longs;o &longs;hall a Line bigger than B E be to E I. Let that Line be M E. Becau&longs;e,
therefore, M E is to E I as the in&longs;cribed Figure is to the exce&longs;s of the
Cone above the &longs;aid Figure, and D is the Center of Gravity of the
Cone, and I the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Figure: Therefore
the Cone exceeds the in&longs;cribed Figure. Which is impo&longs;&longs;ible.
Therefore
the Center of Gravity of the Cone is not below the point C. Nor is it
above it. For if it may be, let it be R.
And again a&longs;&longs;ume L P cut at
plea&longs;ure in N: And as both B C and N P together are to N L, &longs;o let the
Cone be to X. And let a Figure be, in like manner, circum&longs;cribed about
the Cone, which exceeds the &longs;aid Cone a le&longs;s quantity than the Solid X. And let the Line which intercepts bet wixt its Center of Gravity and C,
be le&longs;&longs;er than N P. Now take the circum&longs;cribed Figure, who&longs;e Center
let be O; the remainder O R &longs;hall be greater than the &longs;aid N L. And
becau&longs;e, as both together B C and P N is to N L, &longs;o is the Cone to X:
And the exce&longs;s by which the circum&longs;cribed exceeds the Cone is le&longs;&longs;er
than X: And B O is le&longs;&longs;er than B C and P N together: And O R grea
ter than L N: The Cone therefore &longs;hall have much greater proportion to
the remaining proportions by which it was exceeded by the circum&longs;cribed
Figure, than B O to O R. Let it be as M O is to O R.
M O &longs;hall
be greater than B C; and M &longs;hall be the Center of Gravity of the pro
portions by which the Cone is exceeded by the circum&longs;cribed Figure. Which is inconvenient.
Therefore the Center of Gravity of the Cone is
not above the point C. But neither is it below it; as hath been proved.
Therefore it &longs;hall be C it &longs;elf.
And &longs;o in like manner may it be demon
&longs;trated in any Pyramid.
PROPOSITION.
If there were four Lines continual proportionals;
and as the lea&longs;t of them were to the exce&longs;s by
which the greate&longs;t exceeds the lea&longs;t, &longs;o a Line
taken at plea&longs;ure &longs;hould be to 3/4 the exce&longs;s by
which the greate&longs;t exceeds the &longs;econd; and as
the Line equal to the&longs;e (
double of the &longs;econd, and triple of the third)
is to the Line equal to the quadruple of the
fourth, the quadruple of the &longs;econd, and the
quadruple of the third, &longs;o &longs;hould another Line
taken be to the exce&longs;s of the greate&longs;t above the
&longs;econd: the&longs;e two Lines taken together &longs;hall
be a fourth part of the greate&longs;t of the propor
tionals.
And
as B E is to E A, &longs;o let F G be to 3/4 of A C. And as the Line equal
to A B and to double B C and to triple B D is to the Line equal
to the quadruples of A B, B C, and B D, &longs;o let H G be to A C. It is
to be proved, that H F is a fourth part of A B. Fora&longs;much therefore
as A B, B C, B D, and B E
C D, and D E &longs;hall be in
the &longs;ame proportion: And
as the quadruple of the &longs;aid
A B, B C, and B D is to
A B with the double of B C and triple of B D, &longs;o is the quadruple of
A C, C D, and D E; that is, the quadruple of A E; to A C with the
double of C D, and triple of D E. And &longs;o is A C to H G.
Therefore
as the triple of A E is to A C, with the double of C D and triple of
D E, &longs;o is 3/4 of A C to H G. And as the triple of A E is to the triple of
E B, &longs;o is 3/4 A C to G F: Therefore, by the Conver&longs;e of the twenty
fourth of the fifth, As triple A E is to A C with double C D and tri
ple D B, &longs;o is 3/4 of A C to H F: And as the quadruple of A E is to A C
with the double of C D and triple of D B; that is, to A B with C B and
B D, &longs;o is A C to H F. And, by Permutation, as the quadruple of A E
is to A C, &longs;o is A B with C B and B D to H F. And as A C is to A E, &longs;o
is A B to A B with C B and B D. Therefore,
proportion, as quadruple A E is to A E, &longs;o is A B to H F. Wherefore it
is manife&longs;t that H F is the fourth part of A B.
PROPOSITION.
The Center of Gravity of the
ramid or Cone, cut equidi&longs;tant to the Plane
of the Ba&longs;e, is in the Axis, and doth &longs;o divide
the &longs;ame, that the part towards the le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;e
is to the remainder, as the triple of the greater
Ba&longs;e, with the double of the mean Space be
twixt the greater and le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;e, together
with the le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;e is to the triple of the le&longs;&longs;er
Ba&longs;e, together with the &longs;ame double of the
mean Space, as al&longs;o of the greater Ba&longs;e.
the Plane of the Ba&longs;e, let aAnd as the triple of the greate&longs;t Ba&longs;e with the double of the
mean and lea&longs;t is to the triple of the lea&longs;t and double of the mean and
greate&longs;t, &longs;o is \ O to O D. It is to be proved that the Center of Gra
vity of theLet V M be the fourth part of V D.
Set the Line H X by the by, equal to A D: and let K X be equal to A V:
and unto H X K let X L be a third proportional, and X S a fourth. And as H S is to S X, &longs;o let M D be to the Line taken from O towards
A: which let be O N. And becau&longs;e the greater Ba&longs;e is in proportion
to that which is mean betwixt the
greater and le&longs;&longs;er as D A to A V; that
mean is to the lea&longs;t as K X to X L;
the greater, mean, and le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;es
&longs;hall be in the &longs;ame proportion as
H X, X K, and X L. Wherefore as
triple the greater Ba&longs;e, with double
the mean and le&longs;&longs;er, is to triple the
lea&longs;t with double the mean and grea
te&longs;t; that is, as V O is to O D; &longs;o is
triple H X with double X K and X L
to triple X L, with double X K and
X H: And by Compo&longs;ition and Converting the proportion, O D &longs;hall
be to V D, as H X, with double X K and triple X L, to quadruple H X,
X K, and X L. There are, therefore, four proportional Lines, H X,
X K, X L, and X S: And as X S is to S H, &longs;o is the Line taken N O
to 3/4 of D V, to wit, to D M; that is, to 3/4 of H K: And as H X
with double X K and triple X L is to quadruple H X, X K and X L;
&longs;o is another Line taken O D to D V; that is, to H K. Therefore, by
the things demon&longs;trated, D N &longs;hall be the fourth part of H X; that
is, of A D. Wherefore the point N &longs;hall be the Center of Gravity
of the Cone or Pyramid who&longs;e Axis is A D. Let the Center of Gra
vity of the Pyramid or Cone who&longs;e Axis is A V be I. It is therefore
manife&longs;t that the Center of Gravity of the
I N inclining towards the part N, and in that point of it which with
the point N include a Line to which I M hath the &longs;ame proportion that
theIt remaineth therefore to prove that I N hath the &longs;ame proportion
to N O, that theBut
as the Cone who&longs;e Axis is D A is to the Cone who&longs;e Axis is A V, &longs;o
is the Cube D A to the Cube D V; that is, the Cube H X to the
Cube X K: But this is the &longs;ame proportion that H X hath to X S.
Wherefore, by Divi&longs;ion, as H S is to S X, &longs;o &longs;hall theAnd as
H S is to S X, &longs;o al&longs;o is M D to O N. Wherefore the
Pyramid who&longs;e Axis is A V, as M D to N O. And becau&longs;e A N
is 3/4 of A D; and A I is 3/4 of A V; the remainder I N &longs;hall be 3/4 of the
remainder V D. Wherefore I N &longs;hall be equal to M D.
And it hath been demon&longs;trated that M D is to N O,
as theIt is mani
fe&longs;t, therefore, that I N hath likewi&longs;e
the &longs;ame proportion to N O:
Wherefore the Propo
&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.